Detroit DD13 DD15 DD16

DDC-SVC-MAN-0081
<<<<Open Bookmarks to view list of manuals
DD Platform
Workshop Manual
To do a word search hold down (Shift+Ctrl+F)
TSM
EPA07/10
Engine
TSM
EPA07/10 DD PLATFORM WORKSHOP MANUAL - ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 ROCKER COVER
1.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ROCKER COVER AND RELATED
PARTS ...................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 REMOVAL OF THE ROCKER COVER .................................................... 1-4
1.3 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF THE ROCKER COVER ................... 1-6
1.4 INSTALLATION OF THE ROCKER COVER ............................................ 1-7
2 CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE ASSEMBLY
2.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER
SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE ASSEMBLY AND RELATED PARTS ............... 2-3
2.2 REMOVAL OF CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE
ASSEMBLY .............................................................................................. 2-7
2.3 INSPECTION OF THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE
TSM
BRAKE ASSEMBLY ................................................................................. 2-15
2.4 INSTALLATION OF THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE
BRAKE ASSEMBLY ................................................................................. 2-16
2.5 DD13 EGR COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE TO REMOVE EXCESS
FUEL FROM COOLER AFTER ENGINE BRAKE SOLENOID FAILURE 2-26
3 CAMSHAFT HOUSING
3.1 REMOVAL OF THE CAMSHAFT HOUSING ........................................... 3-3
3.2 INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT HOUSING ............................................... 3-8
3.3 INSTALLATION OF THE CAMSHAFT HOUSING ................................... 3-9
4 CAMSHAFT TIMING
4.1 CAMSHAFT TIMING VERIFICATION ...................................................... 4-3
4.2 TIMING THE CAMSHAFTS WITH THE GEAR TRAIN INSTALLED ........ 4-6
5 GEAR TRAIN AND ENGINE TIMING
5.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF GEAR TRAIN AND RELATED
PARTS ...................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 ENGINE GEAR TRAIN INSTALLATION AND TIMING ............................ 5-8
5.3 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING GEAR LASH WITH CAMSHAFT
HOUSING REMOVED ............................................................................. 5-16
6 WATER MANIFOLD
6.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF DD15 & DD16 WATER
MANIFOLD AND RELATED COMPONENTS .......................................... 6-3
6.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD ......................... 6-5
6.3 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF THE DD15 & DD16 WATER
MANIFOLD ............................................................................................... 6-7
6.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD ................. 6-8
All information subject to change without notice.

DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION i
6.5 DD13 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION COOLER WATER MANIFOLD

ASSEMBLY .............................................................................................. 6-10
7 COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE)
7.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE
AIR PIPE) AND RELATED COMPONENTS ............................................ 7-3
7.2 REMOVAL OF THE COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE) ............. 7-4
7.3 INSPECTION OF COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE) ................ 7-5
7.4 INSTALLATION OF THE COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE) .... 7-6
8 AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
8.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD AND
RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 REMOVAL OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD .................................................. 8-6
8.3 CLEANING OF THE AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD ........................................ 8-7
8.4 INSPECTION OF THE AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD ..................................... 8-8
8.5 INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD .......................................... 8-9
9 DD13 TURBOCHARGER
TSM
9.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER
AND RELATED PARTS ............................................................................ 9-3
9.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER ........................................ 9-5
9.3 INSPECTION OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER ................................... 9-9
9.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER ................................ 9-10
9.5 EGR COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE TO REMOVE EXCESS FUEL
FROM COOLER AFTER DD13 TURBOCHARGER FAILURE ................ 9-12
10 DD13 WASTEGATE SOLENOID
10.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE DD13 WASTEGATE
SOLENOID ............................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD13 WASTEGATE SOLENOID ............................. 10-4
10.3 INSTALLATION OF THE DD13 WASTEGATE SOLENOID ..................... 10-6
11 DD15 TURBOCHARGER
11.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF TURBOCHARGER AND
RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 REMOVAL OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER ................................................ 11-5
11.3 INSPECTION OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER ........................................... 11-7
11.4 INSTALLATION OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER ........................................ 11-8
11.5 EGR COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE TO REMOVE EXCESS OIL
FROM EGR COOLER AFTER DD15 TURBOCHARGER FAILURE ....... 11-10
12 DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE
12.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE
12.2 REMOVAL OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE ..................................... 12-5
12.3 INSPECTION OF THE DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE ........................ 12-6
12.4 INSTALLATION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE ............................. 12-7

ii DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION
13 DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX

GEAR BOX AND RELATED PARTS ........................................................ 13-3
13.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX ......... 13-5
13.3 INSPECTION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX ............. 13-6
13.4 INSTALLATION OF THE AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX ............ 13-7
14 CYLINDER HEAD
14.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CYLINDER HEAD AND RELATED
PARTS ...................................................................................................... 14-3
14.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD13 CYLINDER HEAD ......................................... 14-10
14.3 INSTALLATION OF THE DD13 CYLINDER HEAD .................................. 14-12
14.5 CLEANING OF THE CYLINDER HEAD .................................................. 14-17
14.6 ASSEMBLY OF CYLINDER HEAD .......................................................... 14-18
14.8 REMOVAL OF VALVE SPRING (CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLED) .......... 14-22
TSM
14.9 REMOVAL OF THE VALVE SPRING (CYLINDER HEAD REMOVED) ... 14-24
14.10 REMOVAL OF INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVES ................................... 14-25
14.11 CLEANING OF VALVES AND RELATED PARTS .................................... 14-26
14.12 INSPECTION OF VALVE SPRINGS ........................................................ 14-27
14.13 INSPECTION OF VALVE ......................................................................... 14-28
14.14 INSTALLATION OF VALVE, SPRING, SEAL AND VALVE CAP .............. 14-29
14.15 VALVE LASH ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................ 14-31
14.16 SETTING THE ENGINE BRAKE LASH ................................................... 14-33
15 PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
15.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING
ROD AND RELATED PARTS ................................................................... 15-3
15.2 REMOVAL OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ............. 15-5
15.3 DISASSEMBLY OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ..... 15-7
15.4 INSPECTION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ........ 15-8
15.5 ASSEMBLY OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ........... 15-9
15.6 INSTALLATION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ..... 15-11
16 CYLINDER LINER
16.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CYLINDER LINER AND
RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 16-3
16.2 REMOVAL OF CYLINDER LINER ........................................................... 16-4
16.3 INSPECTION OF CYLINDER LINER ...................................................... 16-5
16.4 CLEANING OF THE CYLINDER LINER .................................................. 16-7
16.5 INSTALLATION OF THE CYLINDER LINER ........................................... 16-8
17 CRANKSHAFT
17.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CRANKSHAFT AND RELATED
PARTS ...................................................................................................... 17-3
17.2 REMOVAL OF CRANKSHAFT ................................................................. 17-6
17.3 INSPECTION OF THE CRANKSHAFT AND RELATED PARTS ............. 17-9
17.4 INSTALLATION OF CRANKSHAFT ......................................................... 17-10

DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION iii
17.5 REMOVAL OF CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL ..................................... 17-14

17.6 INSTALLATION OF THE REAR OIL SEAL .............................................. 17-15
17.7 REMOVAL OF THE CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL .......................... 17-17
17.8 INSTALLATION OF THE CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL .................. 17-18
18 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
18.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
AND RELATED COMPONENTS .............................................................. 18-3
19 OIL PAN
19.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF OIL PAN AND RELATED
COMPONENTS ....................................................................................... 19-3
19.2 REMOVAL OF OIL PAN ........................................................................... 19-4
19.3 CLEANING OF OIL PAN .......................................................................... 19-5
19.4 INSPECTION OF OIL PAN ...................................................................... 19-6
19.5 REMOVAL OF THREADED INSERT — PLASTIC OIL PAN ONLY ......... 19-7
19.6 INSTALLATION OF THREADED INSERT — PLASTIC OIL PAN ONLY . 19-8
19.7 INSTALLATION OF OIL PAN ................................................................... 19-9
TSM
20 OIL DIPSTICK TUBE
20.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF OIL DIPSTICK TUBE AND
RELATED COMPONENTS ...................................................................... 20-3
20.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL DIPSTICK TUBE ............................................... 20-4
20.3 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL DIPSTICK TUBE ....................................... 20-5
21 OIL PUMP
21.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF OIL PUMP AND RELATED
COMPONENTS ....................................................................................... 21-3
21.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL PUMP, OIL SUCTION MANIFOLD, AND OIL
LINES ....................................................................................................... 21-4
21.3 INSPECTION OF THE OIL PUMP, OIL SUCTION MANIFOLD, AND OIL
LINES ....................................................................................................... 21-5
21.4 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL PUMP, OIL SUCTION MANIFOLD, AND
OIL LINES ................................................................................................ 21-6
22 CRANKCASE BREATHER
22.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CRANKCASE BREATHER ........ 22-3
22.2 REMOVAL OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER ...................................... 22-5
22.3 INSPECTION OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER ................................. 22-6
22.4 INSTALLATION OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER .............................. 22-7
23 OIL FILTER
23.1 REPLACEMENT OF THE OIL FILTER .................................................... 23-3
24 OIL SAMPLE VALVE
24.1 REPLACING OIL PLUG WITH OIL SAMPLE VALVE .............................. 24-3
24.2 REMOVAL OF OIL SAMPLE VALVE ....................................................... 24-4
24.3 INSTALLATION OF OIL SAMPLE VALVE ................................................ 24-5
25 OIL FILLER NECK
25.1 REMOVAL OF THE OIL FILLER NECK ................................................... 25-3

iv DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION
25.2 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL FILLER NECK ........................................... 25-4

26 OIL COOLANT MODULE
26.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE .. 26-3
26.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE ........................................ 26-5
26.3 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE ................................ 26-7
26.4 REMOVAL OF THE OIL THERMOSTAT .................................................. 26-9
26.5 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL THERMOSTAT .......................................... 26-11
27 PRIMING THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
27.1 PRIMING THE ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM .................................. 27-3
28 COOLING SYSTEM
28.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COOLING SYSTEM AND
29 ENGINE WATER PUMP
29.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ENGINE WATER PUMP ............ 29-3
29.2 REMOVAL OF THE WATER PUMP ......................................................... 29-4
TSM
29.3 INSPECTION OF THE WATER PUMP .................................................... 29-5
29.4 INSTALLATION OF THE WATER PUMP ................................................. 29-6
30 COOLANT THERMOSTAT
30.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT ........ 30-3
30.2 REMOVAL OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL ........................... 30-5
30.3 INSPECTION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL ....................... 30-6
30.4 INSTALLATION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL .................... 30-7
31 COOLANT FILTER
31.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COOLANT FILTER ..................... 31-3
31.2 REMOVAL OF THE COOLANT FILTER .................................................. 31-4
31.3 INSTALLATION OF THE COOLANT FILTER .......................................... 31-5
32 COOLANT FILTER SERVICE MODULE
32.1 REMOVAL OF COOLANT FILTER SERVICE MODULE ......................... 32-3
32.2 INSTALLATION OF COOLANT FILTER SERVICE MODULE .................. 32-4
33 COOLANT INLET ELBOW
33.1 REMOVAL OF THE COOLANT INLET ELBOW ...................................... 33-3
33.2 INSTALLATION OF THE COOLANT INLET ELBOW .............................. 33-4
34 FLYWHEEL AND FLYWHEEL HOUSING
34.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF FLYWHEEL, FLYWHEEL
HOUSING AND RELATED PARTS .......................................................... 34-3
34.2 REMOVAL OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING .................................................... 34-6
34.3 INSTALLATION OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING ............................................ 34-7
34.4 REMOVAL OF THE FLYWHEEL .............................................................. 34-9
34.5 INSPECTION OF FLYWHEEL ................................................................. 34-10
34.6 INSTALLATION OF FLYWHEEL .............................................................. 34-11
34.7 INSPECTION OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING AND REAR OIL SEAL AREA
OF CRANKSHAFT ................................................................................... 34-12
34.8 REMOVAL OF RING GEAR ..................................................................... 34-13

DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION v
34.9 INSTALLATION OF RING GEAR ............................................................. 34-14

35 FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT
35.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF FRONT ENGINE
MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT AND RELATED PARTS ........................ 35-3
35.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT .. 35-4
35.3 INSPECTION OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR
SUPPORT ................................................................................................ 35-5
35.4 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR
SUPPORT ................................................................................................ 35-6
36 VIBRATION DAMPER
36.1 REMOVAL OF THE VIBRATION DAMPER ............................................. 36-3
36.2 INSTALLATION OF THE VIBRATION DAMPER ..................................... 36-4
37 FRONT ENGINE COVER
37.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER .. 37-3
37.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER ........................................ 37-4
37.3 INSPECTION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER ................................... 37-5
TSM
37.4 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER ................................ 37-6
38 ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS
38.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS
38.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE LIFTER BRACKET WITHOUT
FRONT ENGINE POWER TAKE-OFF ..................................................... 38-8
38.3 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE LIFTER BRACKET WITH FRONT
ENGINE POWER TAKE-OFF .................................................................. 38-9
38.4 REMOVAL OF THE REAR ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS ...................... 38-10
38.5 INSPECTION OF THE ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS ............................ 38-11
38.6 INSTALLATION OF THE REAR ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS .............. 38-12
38.7 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE LIFTER BRACKET WITHOUT
38.8 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE LIFTER BRACKET WITH
39 BELT DRIVE TENSIONER SYSTEM
39.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF BELT DRIVE TENSIONER AND
RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 39-3
39.2 REMOVAL OF THE BELT TENSIONER .................................................. 39-5
39.3 INSTALLATION OF THE BELT TENSIONER .......................................... 39-6
39.4 REMOVAL OF THE IDLER PULLEY AND IDLER PULLEY BRACKET .. 39-7
39.5 INSTALLATION OF THE IDLER PULLEY AND IDLER PULLEY
BRACKET ................................................................................................ 39-8
39.6 REMOVAL OF NON-BRACKETED IDLER PULLEY .............................. 39-9
39.7 INSTALLATION OF NON-BRACKETED IDLER PULLEY ........................ 39-10
39.8 REMOVAL OF THE ACCESSORY MOUNTING BRACKET .................... 39-11
39.9 INSTALLATION OF THE ACCESSORY MOUNTING BRACKET ............ 39-12

vi DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION
40 POLY-V-BELTS
40.1 REMOVAL OF THE POLY-V-BELTS ....................................................... 40-3
40.2 INSPECTION OF THE POLY-V-BELTS ................................................... 40-6
40.3 INSTALLATION OF THE POLY-V-BELTS ................................................ 40-9
41 AIR COMPRESSOR
41.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR .......... 41-3
41.2 REMOVAL OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR ................................................ 41-5
41.3 INSPECTION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR ........................................... 41-6
41.4 INSTALLATION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR ........................................ 41-8
42 CYLINDER BLOCK
42.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CYLINDER BLOCK AND
RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 42-3
42.2 REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF ENGINE FROM THE VEHICLE .... 42-9
42.3 CLEANING THE CYLINDER BLOCK ...................................................... 42-12
42.4 REASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER BLOCK ................ 42-16
TSM

DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION vii
TSM

viii DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION
1 ROCKER COVER
Section Page

PARTS ...................................................................................................... 1-3
TSM
1.2 REMOVAL OF THE ROCKER COVER .................................................... 1-4
1.3 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF THE ROCKER COVER ................... 1-6
1.4 INSTALLATION OF THE ROCKER COVER ............................................ 1-7
TSM

1-2 DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION

PARTS
The rocker cover (2) is made of an aluminum or plastic material and uses an elastomer seal (1)
which completely encloses the valve operating mechanism including the overhead camshafts,
brake assemblies and the injector harness.
TSM
1. Gasket 4. Air Cleaner Bracket
2. Rocker Cover 5. Stud (Bolt)
3. Bolt
Figure 1-1 Rocker Cover

DDC-SVC-MAN-0081 2010 Copyright © 2010 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION 1-3
1.2 REMOVAL OF THE ROCKER COVER
1.2 REMOVAL OF THE ROCKER COVER
Remove as follows:
1. Steam clean the engine.
2. Remove bolts (1) or nuts (if equipped) from the two air filter housing brackets (2) and
remove housings from the rocker cover.
TSM

3. Loosen the bolts (1) or stud bolts (2) (if equipped) and isolators (3); remove rocker cover.
TSM
NOTE:
Mark the location of the stud bolts. The stud bolts must be replaced in their original
location during installation.
4. Remove rocker cover gasket from the rocker cover.

1.3 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF THE ROCKER COVER
1.3 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF THE ROCKER COVER
Clean as follows:
1. Clean cover in clean solvent or fuel.
EYE INJURY
To avoid injury from flying debris when using compressed
air, wear adequate eye protection (face shield or safety
goggles) and do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) air pressure.
2. Blow dry with compressed air.

3. Check the rocker cover, breather passage and seal for damage. Replace as necessary.
4. Inspect the bolts. Replace if damaged.
TSM

1.4 INSTALLATION OF THE ROCKER COVER
Install as follows:
1. Install rocker cover gasket into groove in rocker cover.
TSM
2. Install bolts (1) or stud bolts (2) (if removed) and isolators (3) into rocker cover.
3. Install rocker cover onto camshaft housing.

4. Finger tighten all bolts (1) and stud bolts; then torque to 20 N·m (14 lb·ft).

1.4 INSTALLATION OF THE ROCKER COVER
5. Install the two air filter brackets (2) (if equipped), onto the rocker cover and torque the
eight nuts to 20 N·m (14 lb·ft).
TSM ENGINE EXHAUST

To avoid injury from inhaling engine exhaust, always
operate the engine in a well-ventilated area.
exhaust is toxic.
6. Start the engine and check for leaks.

Engine

2 CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE
ASSEMBLY
Section Page
TSM
SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE ASSEMBLY AND RELATED PARTS ............... 2-3
ASSEMBLY .............................................................................................. 2-7
BRAKE ASSEMBLY ................................................................................. 2-15
BRAKE ASSEMBLY ................................................................................. 2-16
TSM


SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE ASSEMBLY AND RELATED PARTS
The engine uses a dual overhead camshaft and rocker shaft design. The intake and exhaust
camshafts are timed to each other, through a geartrain, to the crankshaft. The camshaft housing
houses the camshafts and valve train. It has internal oil passages to supply oil from the block to the
camshaft and rocker bearings along with pressurized oil to the engine brake rockers via the engine
brake solenoids through the exhaust shaft. The camshaft housing is made of aluminium material.
TSM
1. Camshaft Bearing Cap 6. Intake Rocker Arm 11. Gasket
2. Bolt 120 mm 7. Exhaust Rocker Arm 12. Exhaust Camshaft Lobes
3. Bolt 108 mm 8. Exhaust Camshaft and Gear 13. Exhaust Camshaft Brake Cam
Lobe
4. Bolt 63 mm 9. Intake Camshaft and Gear 14. Intake Camshaft Lobes
5. Engine Brake Solenoid 10. Camshaft Housing 15. Intake Camshaft Tone Wheel
Figure 2-1 Camshaft Housing and Related Parts

2.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE ASSEMBLY
AND RELATED PARTS
2.1.1 Engine Braking
The engine uses an integral engine brake. Engine braking is controlled electronically by the
engine control system with an electric solenoid. When activated, the solenoid allows oil pressure
to activate a piston on the exhaust rocker arm. Engine braking is accomplished with a single
exhaust valve in each cylinder. The exhaust camshaft uses a separate engine brake-only lobe that
allows for double valve activation for high efficiency braking. The exhaust valve is first operated
toward the completion of the intake stroke, closed during the compression stroke and opened a
second time when the compression stroke is completed. The engine brake system is enabled using
the following components:
For EPA07 engines:
□ Engine brake solenoid valve in front of engine applies low engine braking.
□ Engine brake solenoid valve in rear of engine applies medium engine braking.
□ For high, both front and rear solenoids are activated.
□ Six exhaust rocker arms with actuator pistons.
□ Six brake rocker arms which are actuated by the brake cam lobes.
TSM
□ Exhaust camshaft has one brake cam lobe per cylinder.

For EPA07 engines, the exhaust rocker arm shaft lubricating oil passages direct pressurized oil to
the rocker arms. The exhaust rocker arm has two additional oil passages to operate the engine
brakes. Oil for cylinders 1 and 2 is supplied by the Front Engine Brake Solenoid Valve. Oil for
cylinders 3 to 6 are supplied by the Rear Engine Brake Solenoid Valve.
1. Exhaust Rocker Arm
TSM
2. Exhaust Rocker Arm with Actuator Piston
3. Brake Rocker Arm
4. Oil Passage for Cylinders 1 and 2
5. Oil Passage for Cylinders 3, 4, 5 and 6
6. Exhaust Rocker Arm Shaft
Figure 2-2 EPA07 Engine Brake

7. Exhaust Camshaft
8. Actuator Piston
9. Exhaust Valve
10. Brake Cam Lobe
11. Engine Brake Solenoid Valve, Front
12. Engine Brake Solenoid Valve, Rear
For EPA10 engines:

□ Engine brake solenoid valve in front of engine applies low engine braking.
□ For medium engine braking, both front and rear solenoids are activated.
□ For high, both front and rear solenoids are activated, along with EGR.
□ Six exhaust rocker arms with actuator pistons.
□ Six brake rocker arms which are actuated by the brake cam lobes.
□ Exhaust camshaft has one brake cam lobe per cylinder.

2.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE ASSEMBLY
AND RELATED PARTS
For EPA10 engines, the exhaust rocker arm shaft lubricating oil passages direct pressurized oil to
the rocker arms. The exhaust rocker arm has two additional oil passages to operate the engine
brakes. Oil for cylinders 1 through 3 is supplied by the Front Engine Brake Solenoid Valve. Oil
for cylinders 4 through 6 are supplied by the Rear Engine Brake Solenoid Valve.
TSM
1. Exhaust Rocker Arm
2. Exhaust Rocker Arm with Actuator Piston
3. Brake Rocker Arm
4. Oil Passage for Cylinders 1, 2 and 3
5. Oil Passage for Cylinders 4, 5 and 6
6. Exhaust Rocker Arm Shaft
Figure 2-3 EPA10 Engine Brake

7. Exhaust Camshaft
8. Actuator Piston
9. Exhaust Valve
10. Brake Cam Lobe
11. Engine Brake Solenoid Valve, Front
12. Engine Brake Solenoid Valve, Rear


ASSEMBLY
Remove as follows:
1. Turn engine OFF, (key OFF, engine OFF).
3. Disconnect the battery power to the engine. Refer to OEM procedures.
4. Remove the air cleaner and the turbocharger inlet pipe and hose. Refer to OEM procedures.
5. Remove air cleaner housing. Refer to OEM procedures.
6. Remove the rocker cover. Refer to section 1.2.
7. Remove the two 14-pin fuel injector harness connectors (1) from the camshaft housing
housing (2).
TSM
NOTE:
Top Dead Center (TDC) can be confirmed by installing camshaft timing tool. For
the DD13 use Camshaft Timing Tool (W470589034000). For the EPA07 DD15 use
Camshaft Timing Tool (W470589054000). For the EPA10 DD15 use Camshaft Timing
Tool (W470589104000).
8. Using Engine Barring tool (J-46392), rotate the crankshaft to TDC on cylinder No. 1.

2.2 REMOVAL OF CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE ASSEMBLY
9. Remove the Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP) (1) from the rear of the flywheel housing.
Refer to section .
TSM
10. To accurately locate TDC, install the flywheel housing crankshaft TDC Locating Pin
(W470589001500) into the CKP sensor hole located in the rear of the flywheel housing.
The plastic tip will protrude into the cutout in the tone wheel. TDC can be verified by the
proper installation of the camshaft timing tool.

11. When the TDC dot (3) between two teeth on the flywheel aligns with the edge of pointer
(2), the engine is at TDC firing stroke.
TSM
12. For EPA07 DD13:
[a] Disconnect both 14-pin injector harness connectors (8).
[b] Disconnect the 24 electrical terminals at the fuel injectors (7).
[c] Disconnect two wiring terminals at each engine brake solenoid (6).

[d] Loosen the Allen screws holding the intermediate frame (5) to the camshaft housing
(1). Remove the intermediate frame .
[a]
TSM
13. For EPA10 engines:
Remove the fuel injector electrical harness clips (2) from the 14-pin electrical
connectors.

[b] Remove the bolts securing the two-piece fuel injector electrical harness (1 and 3) and
remove the harness from the camshaft housing housing.
TSM
14. Remove the engine brake solenoids from the camshaft housing.
NOTICE:
Ensure when loosening the rocker shaft bolts that the bolts are
loosened from the inside bolts outward in 1/2 turn increments.
The increment procedure needs to be followed to prevent the
rocker shaft from breaking.
15. Completely loosen all of the adjusting screws on all of the rocker arms.
16. Loosen the seven bolts securing the intake rocker shaft to the camshaft bearing caps.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the camshaft housing housing is not damaged
during removal of the intake/exhaust rocker shaft assemblies.

17. Using Rocker Arm Lifter / Spacer tool (W470589044000) for the DD13, or Rocker Arm
Lifter / Spacer Intake tool (W470589004000) for the DD15, remove the intake rocker
shaft assembly.
NOTICE:
Ensure when loosening the rocker shaft bolts that the bolts are
loosened from the inside bolts outward in 1/2 turn increments.
The increment procedure needs to be followed to prevent the
rocker shaft from breaking.
18. Loosen the seven bolts securing the exhaust rocker shaft to the camshaft caps.
19. Using Rocker Arm Lifter / Spacer Exhaust (W470589074000) for the DD13 or Rocker
Arm Lifter / Spacer Exhaust (W470589004000) for the DD15, remove the exhaust rocker
shaft assembly. When removing the EPA10 exhaust rocker shaft, ensure the rockers are
in the up position.
TSM
NOTE:
The engine brake solenoids do not have to be removed unless damaged.
NOTE:
Mark cap position for proper reassembly.

20. Remove the remaining bolts (1) from the camshaft bearing caps (2).
TSM
21. Using tool Cam Bearing Cap Puller (J-48883) and Injector Unit Pump Puller (J-46375),
remove the camshaft bearing caps (1) from the camshaft housing.

22. Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft assemblies (1 & 2) from the camshaft housing
(3). Use care not to damage intake cam tone wheel when handling.
TSM


BRAKE ASSEMBLY
Inspect the camshaft and rocker shaft assemblies as follows:

1. Inspect the camshafts for lobe damage; replace if necessary.
2. Inspect the camshaft gears for damage; replace if necessary.
3. Inspect the rocker shaft for scoring or scuffing; replace if necessary.
4. Inspect rocker arms for roller and bushing damage; replace if necessary.
5. Inspect adjusting screws and buttons; replace if necessary.
6. Inspect cam caps and cam journals in camshaft housing for damage; replace if necessary.
7. Inspect the tone wheel on the intake camshaft for cracks, bending or any damage. If
damage is found, replace the intake camshaft.
TSM

2.4 INSTALLATION OF THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE ASSEMBLY

BRAKE ASSEMBLY
Install as follows:
1. Verify that the crankshaft is at top dead center (TDC) on cylinder number one using
TDC Locating Pin (W470589001500) installed in crankshaft position sensor (CKP) hole
located in the flywheel housing.
TSM
2. Install Camshaft Timing Tool (W470589054000) (1) for EPA07 DD15, (W470589104000)
for EPA10 DD15, and (W470589034000) for EPA10 DD13 to the rear of the camshaft
housing. Tighten the two bolts.

3. Locate the etched triangle on the camshaft gear teeth and mark the teeth with a paint pen.
4. Lubricate the lower camshaft bearing surfaces and camshaft journals before installing the
camshafts. Install the exhaust and intake camshaft gear assemblies into the camshaft
housing.
5. Align the marked gear teeth with the marks on the timing tool.
with a bolt.
[a]
TSM
6. Install Camshaft Timing Tool (W470589054000) (1) for EPA07 DD15, (W470589104000)
for EPA10 DD15, and (W470589034000) for EPA10 DD13 to the front of the camshaft
housing and into the grooves cut into the camshafts. Secure timing tool to the camshaft
At this point the front timing tool should slide into the camshaft grooves easily with
no drag.

[b] If there is excessive drag when installing the tool, the camshafts are out of time. If so,
repeat this procedure at Step 3.
TSM
7. Verify that the marks on the gear teeth match the marks on the timing tool.
NOTICE
The camshaft caps are numbered and need to be installed
correctly.
8. Install the seven camshaft caps onto intake and exhaust camshafts.
9. The first and seventh camshaft caps hold the engine brake solenoid to camshaft cap.
Replace the O-rings on the solenoid prior to reinstallation. Install the engine brake
solenoid.
NOTE:
There are 30 bolts retaining the DD13 camshaft assemblies (shown); 14 120 mm (M10)
bolts, seven 108 mm (M10) bolts and nine 63 mm (M8) bolts. The DD15 uses 28 bolts,
with two external bolts at the rear of the camshaft housing.

10. Install the 30 bolts to camshaft caps; finger tighten the bolts. Refer to figure for proper
bolt placement.
TSM
11. Using the torque sequence shown below torque the M10 camshaft cap bolts to the
following:
□ 20 N·m (15 lb·ft)
□ Then torque to 50-55 N·m (37-40 lb·ft).

12. Using the torque sequence shown below, torque the nine 63 mm M8 bolts to 30 N·m
(22 lb·ft).
TSM
13. Remove TDC Locating Pin (W470589001500) from CKP sensor hole in the flywheel
housing.
14. Install crankshaft position sensor. Refer to section .
15. Install a dial indicator onto gear case and zero out the dial indicator.
16. Position the stem of dial indicator to rest between the teeth on the camshaft gear.
17. Hold the number five idler gear with a screwdriver. Check the lash between the camshaft
gear and idler gear number five.

18. The dial indicator should read 0.051 - 0.257 mm (0.002 - 0.010 in). If the gear lash is
excessive between either camshaft gear and the number five idler gear, inspect the number
five idler gear spindle, camshaft gear and camshaft housing. Repair as necessary.
NOTICE:
The camshaft journal area is lubricated by oil that has to travel
through the rocker shaft. If the rocker shaft is installed incorrectly,
oil passages do not line up. This results in insufficient lubrication
and damage to the camshaft journals. Incorrect shaft installation
may also result in the engine brakes not functioning and cause
damage to the rocker arm bushings.
TSM

NOTICE:
The markings on the front of the rockers shafts must face the
front of the engine for proper rocker arm lubrication and engine
brake operation.
NOTICE:
Ensure when tightening the rocker shaft bolts that the bolts are
drawn down from the inside bolts outward in 1/2 turn increments,
before final torque. If the rocker shaft bolt is fully torqued without
using the increment procedure the rocker shaft can break.
NOTE:
On EPA10 engines the intake and exhaust rocker shafts are marked "TOP FRONT" and
“TOP REAR.” Top front must face towards the front of the engine.
TSM
19. Remove timing tools.

20. Using Rocker Arm Lifter / Spacer Intake (W470589044000) (1) for the DD13 or Rocker
Arm Lifter / Spacer Intake (W470589004000) for the DD15, install the intake rocker shaft
assembly to the camshaft cap and secure with seven clamping blocks and bolts.
TSM
21. Using the torque sequence shown below, torque the bolts to 50-55 N·m (36-41 lb·ft) +90°.

22. Using Rocker Arm Lifter / Spacer (W4705589074000) for the DD13 or Rocker Arm Lifter
/ Spacer Intake (W470589004000) for the DD15, install the exhaust rocker shaft assembly
to the camshaft cap and secure with seven clamping blocks and bolts.
TSM
23. Using the torque sequence shown below, torque the bolts to 50-55 N·m (36-41 lb·ft) +90°.
24. Remove timing tools.

25. Install the fuel injectors, if removed. Refer to section .
26. Lash the valves and engine brakes. Refer to section 14.15.
27. Install the fuel injector wiring harness. Refer to section .
28. Install the rocker cover. Refer to section 1.4.
29. Reconnect the battery power to the engine. Refer to OEM procedures.

30. Install air cleaner housing. Refer to OEM procedures.

31. Install the turbocharger inlet pipe and hose, and air cleaner. Refer to OEM procedures.
32. Prime lubrication system. Refer to section 27.1.
TSM

2.5 DD13 EGR COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE TO REMOVE EXCESS FUEL FROM COOLER AFTER
ENGINE BRAKE SOLENOID FAILURE

FUEL FROM COOLER AFTER ENGINE BRAKE SOLENOID FAILURE
Inspect as follows:
1. Clamp
2. Hose
TSM
3. Coolant Crossover Pipe
10. Banjo Union
11. Banjo Bolt
12. Bolt
19. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube
20. Gasket
21. Bolt
4. Bolt 13. Bolt 22. Venturi
5. Support 14. Outlet Nipple 23. Mixer Pipe
6. Coolant Connecting Tube 15. Seal 24. Seal Ring

7. Exhaust Gas Connecting Tube 16. Exhaust Gas Recirculation 25. Bolt
Cooler Water Manifold Assembly
8. Gasket 17. Clamps 26. Lifting Bracket Mounting Bolt
9. Seal Ring 18. Hot Pipe 27. Front Lifting Bracket
Figure 2-4 EPA10 DD13 EGR Cooler Water Manifold and Related Parts

1. Clamp
2. Hose TSM
4. Bolt
5. Support
10. Banjo Union
11. Banjo Bolt

12. Bolt
13. Bolt
14. Outlet Nipple

19. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube /
Lifting Eye
20. Gasket
21. Bolt
22. Venturi
23. Mixer Pipe

8. Gasket 17. Clamps 26. Bolt
9. Seal Ring 18. Hot Pipe

Check as follows:
NOTICE:
This procedure must be followed after replacing an engine
brake solenoid due to any failure that could cause high DOC
temperature codes, excessive fuel, oil, or coolant to enter the
exhaust system. Failure to perform this procedure could cause
severe engine damage.
1. Remove the marmon clamps (2) and EGR hot pipe (3) and inspect for any signs of liquid
or moisture. The EGR hot pipe (exhaust pipe) and EGR cooler inlet (1) should have
a black dry soot residue inside.
[a] If liquid or moisture is present in the pipe, go to the next step.
[b] If there is no sign of liquid or moisture in the pipe or EGR cooler (1), install the
hot pipe. No further action is required.
TSM

2. Remove the mixer pipe (1) from the cold boost pipe (2).
TSM
3. Remove the exhaust gas crossover tube / lifting eye (2) and venturi (6).
4. Place a towel over the outlet of the EGR cooler and retain it with a zip tie.


goggles) and do not exceed 40 psi (276 kPa) air pressure.
5. Using a rubber tipped blow gun, blow compressed shop air into the individual tubes in
the EGR cooler to clear any excess fuel, soot, and carbon.
6. After performing the cleaning procedure, refer to section to install the:
[a] mixer pipe.
[b] exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye (EPA07 engines) and exhaust gas crossover
tube (EPA10 engines).
[c] venturi.
7. If the cooler has an excessive amount of buildup that cannot be removed, replace the
TSM
EGR cooler. Refer to section .


FUEL FROM COOLER AFTER ENGINE BRAKE SOLENOID FAILURE
Inspect as follows:
TSM
1. Venturi 9. Connecting Tube 17. Metal Seal
2. Bolt 10.Seal Ring 18. Hot Pipe
3. Gasket 11. Banjo Union 19. Water Manifold
4. Bolt 12. Banjo Bolt 20. Support
5. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube 13. Exhaust Gas Cooler 21. Clamp
6. Bolt 14. Strap 22. Hose
7. Lifting Bracket 15. Shim 23. Mixer Pipe

8. Connecting Tube 16. Clamp 24. Coolant Delivery Pipe
25. Seal Ring
Figure 2-6 EPA10 DD15 EGR Cooler and Related Parts

1. Venturi
TSM 9. Banjo Union 17. Water Manifold
3. Gasket 11. Exhaust Gas Cooler 19. Clamp
5. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube/Lifting 13. Shim 21. Mixer Pipe
Eye
7. Connecting Tube 15. Metal Seal 23. Seal Ring

Check as follows:
NOTICE:
This procedure must be followed after replacing an engine
brake solenoid due to any failure that could cause high DOC
temperature codes, excessive fuel, oil, or coolant to enter the
exhaust system. Failure to perform this procedure could cause
severe engine damage.
1. Remove the clamps (2), exhaust pipe (4) and gaskets (3) from the EGR cooler (1) and
inspect and inspect for any signs of liquid or moisture. The EGR hot pipe and EGR cooler
inlet should have a black dry soot residue inside.
[b] If there is no sign of liquid or moisture in the pipe, install the EGR cooler hot pipe.
No further action is required. Refer to section .
TSM

2. Remove the mixer pipe (4) from the cold boost pipe (1). Refer to section .
TSM
3. Remove the exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye (2) and venturi (3).

5. Using a rubber tipped blow gun blow compressed shop air into the individual tubes in
[a] mixer pipe.
[c] venturi.

3 CAMSHAFT HOUSING
Section Page
3.1 REMOVAL OF THE CAMSHAFT HOUSING ........................................... 3-3

3.2 INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT HOUSING ............................................... 3-8
TSM
3.3 INSTALLATION OF THE CAMSHAFT HOUSING ................................... 3-9
TSM

3.1 REMOVAL OF THE CAMSHAFT HOUSING
The camshaft housing houses the camshafts and valve train. It has internal oil passages to supply
oil from the block to the camshaft and rocker bearings along with pressurized oil to the engine
brake rockers via the engine brake solenoids through the exhaust shaft. The camshaft housing is
made of aluminium material.
Remove as follows:
3. Disconnect the fuel injector harness (1) from the camshaft housing (2).
TSM
4. Remove the following high pressure fuel line components:
PERSONAL INJURY
To prevent the escape of high pressure fuel that can
penetrate skin, ensure the engine has been shut down for
a minimum of 10 minutes before servicing any component
within the high pressure circuit. Residual high fuel
pressure may be present within the circuit.
[a] High pressure fuel line bracket (1) and high pressure fuel lines from the fuel rail to
the high pressure fuel pump (2). Refer to section .
[b] High pressure fuel lines from the fuel rail to the fuel injectors (3). Refer to section .

[c] Pressure Limiting Valve (PLV) return line from the fuel rail to the fuel filter module
(4). Refer to section .
TSM
5. Remove the rocker shaft/engine brake and camshaft assemblies. Refer to section 2.2.
6. Disconnect the intake manifold temperature sensor (2).

7. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure sensor (1).
TSM
8. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (1) from the camshaft housing (2).
9. Unclip all of the electrical wiring harness attaching points from the camshaft housing.

10. Remove the bolt (2) securing the doser coolant line (1) and the P-clip to the camshaft
housing (3).
TSM
11. Remove the remaining two bolts (29 and 30) securing the camshaft housing to the cylinder
head.
12. Attach a lifting device to the camshaft housing and lift the camshaft housing off of the
cylinder head.

PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury when removing or installing a heavy engine
component, ensure the component is properly supported
and securely attached to an adequate lifting device to
prevent the component from falling.
TSM

3.2 INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT HOUSING
3.2 INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT HOUSING
Inspect the camshaft housing as follows:

1. Inspect the camshaft journals for scoring or scratches, replace if damaged.
2. Inspect the camshaft caps for cracks, replace if damaged.
3. Inspect the camshaft housing for cracks and damage to the bolt hole threads in the
housing, replace if damaged.
4. Inspect the camshaft housing sealing surfaces for damage. Inspect the following sealing
surfaces for damage:
[a] The camshaft housing to rocker cover.
[b] The camshaft housing to cylinder head.
[c] The O-ring seal on the injector harness.
[d] The O-ring seal on the engine brake solenoids.
TSM
5. Inspect the rocker shaft installation surface located inside the camshaft housing for
scoring or scratches.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF THE CAMSHAFT HOUSING
Install as follows:
1. Install a new seal into the camshaft housing.
2. Using an appropriate lifting device install camshaft housing onto the cylinder head.
PERSONAL INJURY
3. Ensuring that no oil gets into the bearing cap dowel pin hole, lubricate the camshaft
housing camshaft journals.
TSM
4. Install the camshaft assemblies into the camshaft housing. Refer to section 2.4.
5. Install the following high pressure fuel line components:
[a] High pressure fuel line bracket (1), and high pressure fuel lines from fuel rail to high
pressure fuel pump (2); refer to section .
[b] High pressure fuel lines from fuel rail to fuel injectors (3); refer to section .
[c] Fuel line from fuel rail to fuel filter module (4); refer to section .

7. Prime the fuel system. Refer to section .

3.3 INSTALLATION OF THE CAMSHAFT HOUSING
TSM

4 CAMSHAFT TIMING
Section Page
4.1 CAMSHAFT TIMING VERIFICATION ...................................................... 4-3

4.2 TIMING THE CAMSHAFTS WITH THE GEAR TRAIN INSTALLED ........ 4-6
TSM
TSM

4.1 CAMSHAFT TIMING VERIFICATION
Verify the camshaft timing as follows:

2. Bar the engine to top dead center (TDC) with Engine Barring Tool (J-46392) (3) on
cylinder No.1 with the No. 6 valve in overlap. The dot (2) that is located inside the
flywheel tone ring is aligned with the edge of the pointer (1).
TSM
3. Locate the mark on the camshaft and mark the top of the corresponding gear tooth with a
light colored paint pen.
4. Remove the Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP) from the flywheel housing. Refer to section
.

4.1 CAMSHAFT TIMING VERIFICATION
5. Install the flywheel TDC Locating Pin (W470589001500), through the crankshaft position
sensor hole in the flywheel housing and engage into the flywheel notch.
TSM
6. Install the rear Camshaft Timing Tool (W470589054000) for EPA07 DD15,
(W470589104000) for EPA10 DD15, and (W470589034000) for DD13 (1) onto the
camshaft housing.

(W470589104000) for EPA10 DD15, and (W470589034000) for DD13 (1) into the
grooves cut into the cams and pin it into the camshaft housing with a bolt.
TSM
8. Verify that the marks on the gear teeth match the marks on the timing tool. If the marks do
not match, research the root cause of incorrect camshaft timing.

4.2 TIMING THE CAMSHAFTS WITH THE GEAR TRAIN INSTALLED
Time as follows:
1. Bar the crankshaft over to TDC cylinder No. 1 and lock with W470589001500 through
the crankshaft position sensor hole.
(W470589104000) for EPA10 DD15, and (W470589034000) for DD13 (1) onto the rear
of the camshaft housing.
TSM
3. Locate the mark on the camshafts and mark the top of the corresponding gear tooth with
a light colored paint pin.
4. Lubricate the camshafts and camshaft housing journals with clean engine oil.
NOTE:
The intake camshaft has the tone wheel and must be installed on the intake side of
the engine.
5. Install the camshafts into the camshaft housing in their respective locations lining up the
marked cam gear teeth with the mark on the timing plate.
(W470589104000) for EPA10 DD15, and (W470589034000) for DD13 (1) into the
grooves cut into the camshafts to verify correct cam timing. Any resistance felt while

installing or removing could indicate the camshafts being out of time. Install a bolt into
the tool to hold it into place.
TSM

TSM

5 GEAR TRAIN AND ENGINE TIMING
Section Page

PARTS ...................................................................................................... 5-3
TSM
5.2 ENGINE GEAR TRAIN INSTALLATION AND TIMING ............................ 5-8
5.3 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING GEAR LASH WITH CAMSHAFT
HOUSING REMOVED ............................................................................. 5-16
TSM


PARTS
The gear train is located at the rear of the engine. The gear train consists of intake and exhaust
camshaft gears, idler gears No. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, crankshaft gear, oil pump gear, fuel pump gear,
air compressor gear, and Axial Power Turbine (APT) gear.
TSM

5.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF GEAR TRAIN AND RELATED PARTS
1. Idler Gear No. 1

2. Idler Gear No. 2
3. Idler Gear No. 3
TSM 9. Crankshaft Gear
10. Oil Pump Gear
11. Camshaft Gear Exhaust
4. Idler Gear No. 4 12. Camshaft Gear Intake
5. Idler Gear No. 5 A. Level A
6. Air Compressor Gear B. Level B

7. Fuel Pump Gear C. Level C
8. Axial Power Turbine Gear x. To Front of Engine
Figure 5-1 DD15 Engine Gear Train

The gear train on the DD Platform engines is located at the rear of the engine and has three levels.
Level A consists of the outermost gears (closest to the flywheel), Level B consists of the middle
gears, and Level C consists of the innermost gears (closest to the block). The gears in the gear
train are both directly and indirectly driven by the crankshaft gear.
□ Level A: The outermost gears include the crankshaft gear which drives the outer idler gear
number one and the oil pump gear. Idler gear number four is on the crankshaft gear and
the axial power turbine drives the idler gear number four when the Axial Power Turbine
(APT) is creating power. The APT can add additional torque to the crankshaft through
idler gear number four up to 260 N·m (192 lb·ft). These gears are all helical cut.
NOTE:
On the DD13, there is no Axial Power Turbine (APT) and no Idler gear number four. The
position of the idler gear number four is covered by a plate, and sealed with an O-ring.
□ Level B: The middle gears include idler gear number one, which drives the air compressor
gear and the idler gear number two. Idler gear number two drives the high pressure fuel
pump and idler gear number three. These gears are all straight cut.
TSM
□ Level C: The innermost gears include inner idler gear number three which drives idler gear
number five. Idler gear number five drives both intake and exhaust camshafts. These
gears are all straight cut.
Gear train noise is an indication of excessive gear lash, chipped or burred gear teeth. A rattling
noise usually indicates excessive gear lash. A whining noise indicates too little gear lash.
Therefore, when noise develops in a gear train, the gear train needs to be inspected.

5.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF GEAR TRAIN AND RELATED PARTS
1. Idler Gear No. 1

2. Idler Gear No. 2
3. Idler Gear No. 3
TSM 9. Crankshaft Gear
10. Oil Pump Gear
4. Idler Gear No. 4 12. Camshaft Gear Intake
6. Air Compressor Gear B. Level B

7. Fuel Pump Gear C. Level C
8. Axial Power Turbine Gear x. To Front of Engine
Figure 5-2 DD15 Engine Gear Train

Multiply Crankshaft Speed by Effective Ratio to Attain Individual Component Speed

Component Effective Ratio Speed
Crankshaft ________ RPM
Camshafts 0.50 ________ RPM
Idler #1 0.79 ________ RPM
Idler #2 0.86 ________ RPM
Idler #3 0.75 ________ RPM
Idler #4 1.33 ________ RPM
Idler #5 0.45 ________ RPM
Water Pump 2.22 ________ RPM
Air Compressor 1.41 ________ RPM

Fuel Pump 1.50 ________ RPM
Oil Pump 1.33 ________ RPM
APT Gearbox Drive 4.00 ________ RPM
TSM
APT Turbine Shaft 26.64 ________ RPM
Table 5-1 HDEP Geartrain Ratios
The power steering pump can be mounted in two places. If the engine is equipped with a
single-cylinder air compressor, it will be mounted to the front of the air compressor. If the engine
is equipped with a two cylinder air compressor, then the power steering pump will be mounted on
the back of the gear case to the fuel pump.

5.2 ENGINE GEAR TRAIN INSTALLATION AND TIMING
Install and time the gear train as follows:
NOTE:
Coat the inside of the gears, bushings and gear train with clean oil before installation.
1. Install the crankshaft gear on the crankshaft.

2. Rotate the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC) on cylinder number one. Install and lock
Crankshaft TDC Locating Tool (J-48630) into place with bolt.
TSM
3. Install spindle into idler gear number five.
4. Install idler gear number five onto the cylinder head using Shoulder Bolt (J-47486).
5. Install two bolts into idler gear number five and hand tighten. Remove (J-47486). Torque
to 60-65 N·m (44-48 lb·ft).
6. Install the spindle into idler gear number three.

7. Install Installation Cantilever tool (J-47487) onto idler gear number three.
TSM
8. Install two bolts into the spindle and idler gear No. 3; snug the bolts.
NOTE:
When idler gear No. 3 and timing tool J–47487 are installed to the gear case, timing tool
J–47487 should come off of the gear with ease. If the timing tool is not easily removed,
that is a indication that the gears are not timed.
9. Check the gear lash between idler gear No. 3 and idler gear No. 5.
10. Install a dial indicator onto gear case and position the stem to rest between the teeth on
large gear of idler gear No. 3; zero out the dial indicator.
11. Hold idler gear No. 5 with a screw driver to check gear lash.
12. The lash reading on the dial indicator should be 0.079 - 0.305 mm (0.003-0.012 in.).
13. When correct gear lash is established, torque idler gear No. 3 to 60–65 N·m (44-48 lb·ft).
14. Install the spindle and gear plate onto the idler gear number two.
15. Install the spindle, idler gear number two, and the gear plate onto the cylinder block.
Torque to 100 N·m (73 lb·ft).
16. Remove the air compressor to the cylinder block (if installed). Refer to section 41.2.
17. Install the thrust washers and spindle onto the idler gear number one.

NOTE:
For ease of installation on idler gear number one, roll the gear into idler gear number two.
18. Install the spindle, thrust washers, idler gear number one, and gear plate onto the cylinder
block by engaging the teeth of idler gear number one into the crankshaft gear teeth first,
then roll upward into idler gear number two. Torque to 100 N·m (73 lb·ft).
19. Install the air compressor. Refer to section 41.4.
NOTE:
When installing idler gear number four, verify that the part number on the gear is facing
the block.
20. On the DD15, with the cone of the idler gear number four facing outward, install the thrust
washer onto the spindle then install the spindle onto the idler gear number four.
21. On the DD15, install the assembled thrust washer, spindle and idler gear number four onto
the cylinder block. Torque to 100 N·m (73 lb·ft).
TSM
NOTE:
Tool J-47487 should remove with ease. If not, check gears for proper installation.
22. Remove the idler gear number three tool (J-47487).

23. Check that the idler gear number one is flush with the rear side of the crankshaft gear and
that the idler gear number four on the DD15 is flush with the front side of the crankshaft
gear.
24. Install the camshaft housing. Refer to section 3.3.
25. Lubricate the camshaft journals and install the camshafts into the camshaft housing.
26. Mark the camshafts TDC indicator triangle located on the inside of the camshaft gear with
a suitable marker.

27. Install Camshaft Timing Tool (1) (W470589054000) for EPA07 DD15 - shown,
(W470589104000) for EPA10 DDl5, and (W470589034000) for DD13 into the holes at
the rear of the camshaft housing and secure to the camshaft housing with two bolts.
TSM
28. Install both of the intake and exhaust camshafts into the camshaft housing. Refer to section
2.4.
29. Rotate the camshafts until the mark on the inside of the gear aligns with the mark on
Camshaft Timing Tool (W470589054000) for EPA07 DD15, (W470589104000) for
EPA10 DDl5, and (W470589034000) for DD13.

30. Install Camshaft Timing Tool (1) (W470589054000) for EPA07 DD15 - shown,
(W470589104000) for EPA10 DDl5, and (W470589034000) for DD13 into the holes at the
slot in the front of the camshaft housing and secure to the camshaft housing with one bolt.
TSM
31. Ensure timing marks on the camshaft gears are at TDC and aligned to the marks on the tool.
32. Install the seven camshaft caps onto intake and exhaust camshafts.
NOTE:
The first and seventh camshaft caps hold the engine brake solenoid to camshaft cap.

33. Prior to engine brake solenoid installation, replace the O-rings on the engine brake
solenoids.
NOTE:
There are 30 bolts retaining the camshaft assemblies; fourteen 120 mm (M10) bolts,
seven 108 mm (M10) bolts and nine 63 mm (M8) bolts.
34. Install the thirty bolts to camshaft caps; finger tighten the bolts. Refer to figure for proper
bolt placement.
TSM

35. Using torque sequence shown below, torque the 120 mm and 108 mm (M10) camshaft
cap bolts to the following:
□ 20 N·m (15 lb·ft)
□ Then torque to 50-55 N·m (37-40 lb·ft)
TSM
1. Using the torque sequence, torque the nine 63 mm (M8) bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).

2. Verify correct camshaft timing by checking that the marks on the camshaft gears still
align with the timing tool.
TSM
3. Remove timing tools from gears and camshaft housing.
4. Install the closing cover and two bolts to the rear of the cylinder head. Torque the closing
cover bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).

5.3 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING GEAR LASH WITH CAMSHAFT HOUSING REMOVED
5.3 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING GEAR LASH WITH CAMSHAFT HOUSING

REMOVED
This is performed with camshaft housing removed. Check and adjust as follows:
1. Remove the camshaft housing if not already removed. Refer to section 3.1.
2. Install a magnetic base-dial indicator gauge on engine block.
3. Set the dial indicator on the idler gear number five gear tooth.
TSM
4. Turn idler gear number five counterclockwise (viewed from front of engine) until “0” lash
is present, then zero the gauge on the dial indicator.
5. Check the gear lash by turning the idler gear number five stop-to-stop, verify that the lash
reading on the dial indicator is 0.043 - 0.165 mm (0.0016 - 0.0065 in.).
6. If gear lash is incorrect, continue with the following steps to adjust.
7. Remove access cover to the idler gear number three bolts.
8. Loosen the two number three idler gear bolts and then snug by hand.

9. Turning idler gear number five by hand will change gear lash from zero lash to maximum
lash.
NOTE:
Rotating idler gear number five counterclockwise (viewed from front of engine) will result
in zero lash. Rotating idler gear number five clockwise (viewed from front of engine) will
result in maximum lash.
TSM
10. Install a magnetic base-dial indicator gauge on engine block.
11. Set the dial indicator on the number five gear tooth.

5.3 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING GEAR LASH WITH CAMSHAFT HOUSING REMOVED
12. Turn idler gear number five counterclockwise (viewed from front of engine) until “0” lash
is present, then zero the gauge on the dial indicator.
13. Push idler gear number five clockwise (viewed from front of engine) till desired gear
lash is present.
14. Tighten the two bolts on the number three gear.
15. Check gear lash by turning idler gear number five stop-to-stop; verify the lash reading on
the dial indicator should be 0.043 - 0.165 mm (0.0016 - 0.0065 in.).
16. If gear lash is OK, then final torque idler gear number three bolts to 60–65 N·m (44-48
lb·ft).
17. Install access cover and tighten.
18. Install the camshaft housing as needed. Refer to section 3.3.
TSM

6 WATER MANIFOLD
Section Page
6.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF DD15 & DD16 WATER

MANIFOLD AND RELATED COMPONENTS .......................................... 6-3
TSM
6.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD ......................... 6-5
MANIFOLD ............................................................................................... 6-7
6.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD ................. 6-8
ASSEMBLY .............................................................................................. 6-10
TSM

6.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD

AND RELATED COMPONENTS
Coolant flows from the cylinder head through an opening next to each exhaust port and into the
water manifold in the DD15 engine. The water manifold is attached to the cylinder head by a
total of nineteen bolts, including two that are shared with the coolant outlet elbow. Two 3-port
gaskets are used between the water manifold and the cylinder head.
TSM
1. Connecting Pipe 7. Bolt
2. Water Manifold 8.Plug
3. Bolt 9. Bolt
4. Bolt 10. Bolt
5. Coolant Outlet Elbow 11. Gasket
6. Gasket
Figure 6-1 DD15 & DD16 Water Manifold and Related Parts

6.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD AND RELATED COMPONENTS
TSM
1. Bolt M8 x 40 (6 qty.) 4. Cylinder Head
2. Bolt M8 x 80 (5 qty.) 5. Connecting Pipe
3. Bolt M8 x 100 (6 qty.) 6. Water Manifold
Figure 6-2 DD15 & DD16 Water Manifold and Related Parts

6.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD
Remove as follows:
1. Disconnect the batteries.
2. Drain the engine coolant.
3. Remove the air cleaner.
4. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shields.
5. Remove the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) hot pipe. Refer to section .
NOTE:
Hold water manifold doser coolant line fitting with a separate wrench while removing the
coolant lines.
6. Disconnect and remove doser coolant lines and remove retaining clips.
7. Disconnect EGR cooler vent line.
TSM
8. Disconnect the outlet coolant temperature sensor electrical harness connector.
9. Remove EGR actuator coolant outlet line.
10. Remove upper radiator hose.
11. Remove four coolant outlet elbow bolts (1) and remove the coolant outlet elbow (2).
Remove and discard the gasket (4).
12. Remove EGR cooler. Refer to section .

6.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD
NOTE:
Note bolt length differences for installation.
13. Remove eleven upper water manifold bolts.

14. Loosen six lower water manifold bolts.
15. Remove two bolts from the retaining strap for the water manifold outlet to the coolant
crossover pipe.
16. Remove water manifold.
17. Remove and discard water manifold gaskets.
TSM


MANIFOLD
Clean and inspect as follows:

1. Clean the water manifold.
2. Inspect the water manifold for damage or cracks; replace if necessary.
3. Replace the gaskets.
TSM

6.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD
6.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DD15 & DD16 WATER MANIFOLD
Install as follows:
NOTICE:
Ensure when installing the connecting pipe, that the pipe is
lubricated with clean oil. see Figure 6-1 If it is not lubricated, the
connecting pipe cannot be fully installed and the rubber can be
cut.
NOTICE:
Do not use sealant when installing water manifold to the cylinder
head.
1. Install water manifold gaskets and connecting pipe onto the water manifold.
2. Install six lower water manifold bolts and start by a few threads.
TSM
3. Install water manifold onto cylinder head.
4. Install eleven upper water manifold bolts.
5. Torque the water manifolds bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft), using the torque sequence illustrated
below.
6. Install EGR cooler to water manifold and torque to 20 N·m (15 lb·ft).

7. Install coolant outlet elbow (2) with four bolts (1) and torque to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
TSM
8. Install upper radiator hose.
9. Install EGR actuator coolant outlet line. Torque outlet line to 35 N·m (26 lb·ft).
10. Connect the outlet coolant temperature sensor.
11. Connect the EGR cooler vent line.
12. Connect doser coolant lines. Torque to 15 N·m (11 lb·ft).
13. Install the EGR hot pipe. Refer to section .
14. Install the exhaust manifold heat shields. Refer to section .
15. Install the air cleaner. Refer to OEM procedures.
16. Fill engine with coolant to the correct level.
ENGINE EXHAUST
operate the engine in a well-ventilated area. Engine
exhaust is toxic.

6.5 DD13 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION COOLER WATER MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY
Refer to the following:

□ Description and Operation of DD13 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler Water Manifold
Assembly, refer to section .
□ Removal of DD13 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler Water Manifold Assembly,
refer to section .
□ Inspection of the DD13 EGR Cooler Water Manifold Assembly, refer to section .
□ Testing and Inspection of the DD13 EGR Cooler Water Manifold Assembly, refer to section
.
□ Installation of the DD13 EGR Cooler Water Manifold Assembly, refer to section .
TSM

7 COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE)
Section Page
7.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE

AIR PIPE) AND RELATED COMPONENTS ............................................ 7-3
TSM
7.2 REMOVAL OF THE COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE) ............. 7-4
7.3 INSPECTION OF COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE) ................ 7-5
7.4 INSTALLATION OF THE COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE) .... 7-6
TSM

7.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR

PIPE) AND RELATED COMPONENTS
The cold boost pipe (Charge Air Pipe) is installed onto the intake manifold and is a component
of the EGR System.
1. Bolt
2. Bracket
TSM 8. Cold Boost Pipe
9. Spacer
3. Bolt 10. Isolators
4. Adaptor 11. Washer
5. Gasket 12. Bracket to Oil Coolant Module
6. Intake Throttle Valve 13. Bolt
7. Gasket 14. Bolt
Figure 7-1 Cold Boost Pipe and Related Parts

7.2 REMOVAL OF THE COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE)
7.2 REMOVAL OF THE COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE)
Remove the cold boost pipe (charge air pipe) as follows:

1. Remove mixer pipe.
2. Disconnect sensor harness.
3. Remove Charge Air Cooler (CAC) hose clamp at the CAC.
4. Remove the four bolts securing the cold boost pipe to the intake manifold.
5. Remove two bolts at cold boost pipe bracket on oil module.
6. Remove the cold boost pipe.
7. If the Intake Throttle Valve is required to be removed from the Cold Boost Pipe,
refer to section .
TSM

7.3 INSPECTION OF COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE)
Inspect the cold boost pipe for cracks, flange damage, blockage and leaks; replace if necessary.
NOTICE:
If the cold boost pipe is damaged on the interior the pipe needs
to be replaced.
TSM

7.4 INSTALLATION OF THE COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE)
7.4 INSTALLATION OF THE COLD BOOST PIPE (CHARGE AIR PIPE)
Install the cold boost pipe as follows:

1. If the Intake Throttle Valve was removed refer to section .
2. Install seal onto intake manifold.
3. Secure cold boost pipe to intake manifold with four bolts. Torque bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
4. Attach support bracket to oil module with two bolts.
5. Install EGR mixer pipe.
6. If removed install seal, intake throttle valve and adaptor onto cold boost pipe. Torque four
bolts to 30-38 N·m (22-28 lb·ft).
7. Connect the sensor harness.
TSM

8 AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
Section Page

RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 8-3
TSM
8.2 REMOVAL OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD .................................................. 8-6
8.3 CLEANING OF THE AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD ........................................ 8-7
8.4 INSPECTION OF THE AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD ..................................... 8-8
8.5 INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD .......................................... 8-9
TSM


RELATED PARTS
On diesel engines, the intake charge air is routed to an intake manifold that is bolted to the
cylinder head with thirteen bolts. Air is then routed through the manifold and into the cylinders.
The mating surfaces of the manifold and the cylinder head are machined. The intake manifold is
sealed to the cylinder head with six rubber and steel gaskets. If the manifold is removed, new
gaskets must be installed to maintain seal under higher boost pressure. An intake manifold air
temperature sensor is installed to the intake manifold. The Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
mixer, intake throttle valve and adaptor installed to the air inlet of the intake manifold. CAC
ducting is installed on the intake throttle valve adaptor. For EPA07 engines, there is a pressure
combination sensor in the cold boost pipe, and a temperature sensor in the intake throttle adaptor.
For EPA10 engines, these sensors are combined. The combination sensor is located in the Cold
Boost Pipe, and is used to measure air pressure and air temperature.
TSM

8.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD AND RELATED PARTS
TSM
1. Hex Head Bolt 12. Clamp, Outlet Pipe
2. Bracket 13. O-ring, Elbow Turbo Outlet
3. Intake Pipe Bracket 14. Turbocharger Outlet Pipe
4. Air Temperature Sensor (EPA10 Engine - Plug Only) 15. Gasket, Intake Manifold
5. Gasket 16. Seal Ring
6. EGR Throttle Valve 17. Intake Manifold Temperature Sensor
7. Cold Boost Pipe 18. Gasket, Cold Boost Pipe
8. Flanged Screw, Intake Manifold to Cylinder Head 19. Bolt, Cold Boost Pipe to Intake Manifold
9. Flanged Screw, Intake Manifold to Cylinder Head 20. Bolt
10. Isolator Gasket 21. Shield
11. Intake Manifold 22. Bracket to Oil Coolant Module

23. Charge Air Pressure Sensor (EPA10 Combination
Sensor)
Figure 8-1 DD13 Air Intake Manifold and Related Parts

1. Bolt
TSM 9. Flanged Screw, Intake Manifold 17. Bolt, Cold Boost Pipe to Intake
to Cylinder Head Manifold
2. Adaptor 10. Seal Ring, Charge Air Sensor 18. Cold Boost Pipe
3. Gasket 11. Clamp, turbocharger outlet pipe 19. Bolt, Combination Temperature
and Pressure Sensor
4. EGR Throttle Valve 12. Turbocharger Outlet Pipe 20. Charge Air Pressure Sensor
5. Air Temperature Sensor Guard 13.Intake Manifold Air Temperature 21. Bracket to Oil Coolant Module
Sensor
6. Bolt 14. Intake Manifold 22. Shield

7. Bolt, Intake Manifold to Cylinder 15. Gasket, Intake Manifold 23. Air Temperature Sensor
Head (I-Cooler Out)
8. Isolator Gasket 16. Gasket, Cold Boost Pipe
Figure 8-2 DD15 Air Intake Manifold and Related Parts

8.2 REMOVAL OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
8.2 REMOVAL OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
Remove as follows:
1. Drain the cooling system.
2. Drain the fuel filter module. Refer to section .
3. Remove the poly-V-belts. Refer to section 40.1.
4. Remove the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) mixer pipe and delivery pipe,
refer to section .
5. Remove cold boost pipe. Refer to section 7.2.
6. Remove the fuel filter module. Refer to section .
7. Remove the oil coolant module. Refer to section 26.2
8. Disconnect the high pressure fuel lines connected to the common rail and output side of
the high pressure fuel pump. Refer to section .
TSM
9. Disconnect and remove the fuel line connected to the common rail and base of the fuel
filter housing.
10. Disconnect and remove the air intake pressure sensor electrical harness connectors from
the two air intake sensors.
11. Identify the bolt locations prior to removal of bolts.
12. Remove the thirteen flanged screws and isolator gaskets securing the air intake manifold
to cylinder head.
13. Remove the air intake manifold and six gaskets from the cylinder head. Discard gaskets.

8.3 CLEANING OF THE AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
Clean as follows:
1. Remove loose gasket material from the cylinder head and intake manifold mating surfaces.
2. Wash all of the parts in clean fuel oil.
EYE INJURY
3. Blow dry with compressed air.
TSM

8.4 INSPECTION OF THE AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
8.4 INSPECTION OF THE AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
Inspect as follows:
1. Visually inspect the manifold for any cracks, dents or other damage. Pay particular
attention to the bolt areas.
[a] If a crack is found, replace the intake manifold.
[b] If no cracks are found, reuse the intake manifold.
2. Inspect the manifold mating surface for imperfections that could affect its sealing to
the cylinder head.
[a] If the manifold mating surface has imperfections, replace the intake manifold.
[b] If the manifold mating surface is not damaged, reuse part.
3. Laying a 0.5 cm (20 in) long by 6 mm (1/4 in) wide straight edge across the intake
manifold, check the mating ports surfaces for warping.
[a] If all port flange area measurements are less than 0.127 mm (0.005 in), the manifold
TSM
is reusable and can be reinstalled with new gaskets.
[b] If the manifold does not meet this requirement, the manifold must be replaced.

8.5 INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
Install as follows:
1. Install six gaskets to the air intake manifold.
2. Install thirteen flanged screws and isolator gaskets to the air intake manifold. Secure air
intake manifold to cylinder head. Torque the bolts to 25 N·m (18 lb·ft).
3. Re-install electrical harness connectors to appropriate sensors.
4. Install oil coolant module. Refer to section 26.3.
5. Install fuel module. Refer to section .
6. Install cold boost pipe. Refer to section 7.4.
7. Install exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) mixer pipe and delivery pipe. Refer to section .
8. Install the poly-V-belts. Refer to section 40.3.
9. Prime fuel system. Refer to section .
TSM
10. Fill the cooling system. Refer to OEM specifications.

8.5 INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
TSM

9 DD13 TURBOCHARGER
Section Page

TSM
9.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER ........................................ 9-5
9.3 INSPECTION OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER ................................... 9-9
9.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER ................................ 9-10
FROM COOLER AFTER DD13 TURBOCHARGER FAILURE ................ 9-12
TSM


AND RELATED PARTS
Compression of air in the turbocharger causes an air mass to flow into the combustion chamber.
The turbocharger consists of a turbine and a compressor which are attached to a shaft. The
exhaust gas flows to the turbine wheel and causes it to turn. This turning motion is transmitted
to the shaft and the compressor impeller. The intake air from the air filter is compressed by the
compressor impeller and flows over a charge air pipe to the charge air cooler. The compressed air
is cooled in the charge air cooler, permitting a more dense charge of air to be delivered to the
engine, and therefore, engine output is increased. The charge air then passes from charge air
cooler into the intake manifold. The turbocharger is mounted on the exhaust outlet flange of the
engine exhaust manifold.
The turbocharger is mounted on the exhaust outlet flange of the engine exhaust manifold.
The advantages are as follows:
□ Increases the engine performance and torque
□ Reduction of the fuel consumption compared to a similarly powered naturally aspirated
TSM
engine
□ Reduction of emissions.

9.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER AND RELATED PARTS
1. Bolt
2. Washer
4. Bracket
5. Stud (6 qty.)
6. Bolt
Figure 9-1
TSM
3. Turbocharger Bracket
7. Heat Shield
8. Nut
9. Stud
10. Gasket
11. Turbocharger
12. Turbo Inlet Pipe
EPA10 DD13 Turbocharger and Related Parts

13. Clamp
14. Seal
15. Turbo Outlet Elbow Pipe

16. Heat Shield
17. Air Hose
18. Electronic Proportioning Valve

9.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER
Cleaning the turbocharger is necessary before removal.
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from hot surfaces, wear protective gloves,
or allow engine to cool before removing any component.
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from contact with rotating parts when an
engine is operating with the air inlet piping removed, install
an air inlet screen shield over the turbocharger air inlet. The
TSM
shield prevents contact with rotating parts.
Prior to removal, visually check for:

□ Missing or loose nuts and bolts
□ Loose or damaged intake and exhaust ducting
□ Damaged oil drain lines
□ Cracked or deteriorating turbocharger housing
□ External oil leakage or exhaust leaks
Replace damaged parts with new parts.
To remove the turbocharger, perform the following:
NOTICE:
Do not attempt to remove carbon or dirt buildup on the
compressor or turbine wheels without removing the turbocharger
from the engine. If chunks of carbon are left on the blades, an
unbalanced condition will exist and subsequent failure of the
bearings will result if the turbocharger is operated. However, it
is not necessary to disassemble the turbocharger to remove dirt
or dust buildup.
1. Remove the turbocharger heat shields.

2. Disconnect the turbocharger ducting.

3. Disconnect and remove the CAC ducting at the compressor housing. Remove the
compressor outlet elbow and inlet elbow.
TSM
4. Remove the turbocharger oil supply and drain lines from the engine block and from the
turbocharger. Remove the O-ring from the cylinder block.
5. Remove the fuel inlet line and coolant inlet and outlet lines from the doser injection valve.
6. To prevent coolant from spilling without draining the coolant system, cap the banjo bolt
inlet and outlet coolant lines with a nut.
7. Disconnect the electrical wiring harness from the turbocharger speed sensor.

8. For EPA10 DD13 engines, remove the clamp (2) from the Electronic Proportioning Valve
(EPV) air hose to the turbocharger and remove the hose (1) from the EPV.
NOTE:
Leave the air hose (1) connected to the turbocharger.
TSM
9. Remove the right side radiator support mount from the engine block.
10. Remove flange exhaust manifold from turbocharger housing.
11. Remove the four nuts from the studs attaching turbocharger to the exhaust manifold
center section.
PERSONAL INJURY
12. Attach a chain hoist and a suitable lifting sling to the turbocharger assembly.
13. Remove the two bolts from the turbocharger support bracket to the cylinder block.
14. Lower the turbocharger assembly away from the exhaust manifold and place it on a bench.
15. Discard the turbocharger gasket.
16. Cover the end of the oil supply line, the oil drain line, the air inlet and the exhaust outlet
openings on the engine and turbocharger to prevent entry of foreign material.

PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from improper use of chemicals, follow the
chemical manufacturer’s usage, handling, and disposal
instructions. Observe all manufacturer’s cautions.
17. Clean the exterior of the turbocharger with a non-caustic cleaning solvent.
TSM

9.3 INSPECTION OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER
Check as follows:
1. Remove the exhaust pipe from the turbine outlet and remove the air intake pipe from
the compressor inlet.
2. Visually inspect the turbine and compressor wheels for missing blades or blade damage.
3. Inspect the turbine and compressor wheels for heavy deposits of dirt, coke or carbon.
4. Using a flashlight, check the wheels and housings for signs of rubbing.
5. Rotate the turbine wheel to check for freedom of movement.
6. Replace the turbocharger if there is any visible damage. For DD13: refer to section 9.2.
[a] Remove defective turbocharger from the engine.
[b] Tag removed turbocharger for remanufacture.
[c] Install a new turbocharger to the engine.
TSM
ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.
7. Start the engine.

8. Run the engine speed to full load.
9. Visually inspect the exhaust for excessive smoke.
[a] If the engine exhaust emission appears normal, no further troubleshooting is required.
Shut down the engine.
[b] If the engine exhaust emission is excessive, shut down the engine. Call Detroit Diesel
Customer Support Center (313-592-5800).

9.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER
9.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DD13 TURBOCHARGER
Install as follows:
PERSONAL INJURY
2. Remove any covers that were placed over the openings of the air inlet and exhaust outlet
openings on the engine and turbocharger when the turbocharger was removed.
3. Remove any covers on the oil and coolant inlet lines, oil and coolant outlet lines, and
TSM
drain openings on the turbocharger.
4. Place a new gasket, face up, with the tab towards outside on the exhaust manifold
turbocharger flange.
5. Place the turbocharger assembly into position on the exhaust manifold flange studs.
Tighten the nuts just enough to hold the turbocharger in place.
6. Torque the turbocharger exhaust manifold nuts to 50 N·m (37 lb·ft).
7. Install a new gasket and O-ring between the opening in the bottom side of the turbocharger
center housing and the drain line that runs to the cylinder block. Torque the bolts to
30-38 N·m (22-28 lb·ft).
8. Install the turbocharger oil drain line.
9. Install the turbocharger oil supply line. Torque line to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).

PERSONAL INJURY
10. For EPA10 DD13 engines, connect the air line supply (1) to the EPV (2).
TSM
11. Connect the turbocharger speed sensor connector to the engine wiring harness.
12. Reconnect the flange to the exhaust manifold.
13. Install the coolant inlet and outlet lines to the doser injector housing. Torque to 15 N·m
(11 lb·ft).
14. Install the fuel line to the doser injection valve. Torque to 23-25 N·m (17-18 lb·ft).
15. Install the turbocharger heat shields.
16. Install the two bolts to the turbocharger support bracket and turbocharger. Torque the
bolts to 25 N·m (18 lb·ft).
17. Install the compressor elbow and the Charge Air Compressor (CAC) plumbing. Torque
the clamps to 6 N·m (4 lb·ft).
18. Connect the compressor inlet hose.

9.5 EGR COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE TO REMOVE EXCESS FUEL FROM COOLER AFTER DD13
TURBOCHARGER FAILURE

FROM COOLER AFTER DD13 TURBOCHARGER FAILURE
Inspect as follows:
1. Clamp
2. Hose
TSM
3. Coolant Delivery Pipe
10. Banjo Union
11. Banjo Bolt
12. Bolt
19. EGR Crossover Tube
20. Gasket
21. Bolt
4. Bolt 13. Bolt 22. Venturi
5. Support 14. Coolant Outlet Elbow 23. Mixer Pipe
6. Connecting Tube 15. Gasket 24. O-ring
7. Connecting Tube 16. EGR Cooler Water Manifold 25. Bolt

Assembly
9. Seal Ring 18. EGR Hot Pipe 27. Front Lifting Eye

1. Clamp
2. Hose TSM
4. Bolt
5. Support
10. Banjo Union
11. Banjo Bolt

12. Bolt
13. Bolt
14. Outlet Nipple

19. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube /
Lifting Eye
20. Gasket
21. Bolt
22. Venturi
23. Mixer Pipe


Check as follows:
NOTICE:
This cleaning procedure must be followed after replacing a DD13
turbocharger so that any failure will not cause excessive fuel, oil,
or coolant to enter the exhaust system. Failure to perform this
procedure could cause severe engine damage.
1. Shut off the engine, apply the parking brake, chock the wheels, and perform any other
applicable safety steps.
2. Remove the clamps (2) and the EGR hot pipe (3) from the EGR cooler and inspect for
any signs of liquid or moisture. The hot pipe and EGR cooler inlet should have a black
dry soot residue inside. Refer to section .
[b] If there is no sign of liquid or moisture in the pipe, install the EGR cooler hot pipe.
No further action is required. Refer to section .
TSM

3. Remove the EGR Mixer Pipe (2) from the cold boost pipe (1). Refer to section .
TSM
4. Remove the Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube (2), gasket (4), venturi (6), lifting eye (8) and
connecting tube (1) from the EGR cooler.

EYE INJURY
[a] mixer pipe.
TSM
[c] venturi.

10 DD13 WASTEGATE SOLENOID
Section Page

SOLENOID ............................................................................................... 10-3
TSM
10.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD13 WASTEGATE SOLENOID ............................. 10-4
10.3 INSTALLATION OF THE DD13 WASTEGATE SOLENOID ..................... 10-6
TSM


SOLENOID
For EPA10, the DD13 uses an wastegate solenoid to control the turbocharger wastegate. The
MCM uses a PWM signal to activate the wastegate solenoid to control the available air pressure
to the wastegate on the turbocharger. There are many operating conditions that require use of the
wastegate solenoid.
TSM

10.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD13 WASTEGATE SOLENOID
10.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD13 WASTEGATE SOLENOID
Remove as follows:
1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (1) from the wastegate solenoid.
TSM
2. Remove the hose clamp (2) and remove the air line (1) from the wastegate solenoid.

3. Remove the vehicle air supply (1) to the wastegate solenoid.
TSM
4. Remove the bolt (3) and the nut (2) from the stud (1) and remove the wastegate solenoid
from the cylinder block.

10.3 INSTALLATION OF THE DD13 WASTEGATE SOLENOID
Install as follows:
1. If removed, install the stud to the cylinder block boss. Torque the stud to 10 N·m (7.4 lb·ft).
2. Install the wastegate solenoid on the cylinder block.
3. Install the bolt (3) and the nut (2). Torque each to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
TSM
4. Install the vehicle air supply (1) to the wastegate solenoid. Torque to 25 N·m (18 lb·ft).

5. Install the air line to the wastegate solenoid and tighten hose clamp.
TSM
6. Connect the wastegate solenoid connector.

TSM

11 DD15 TURBOCHARGER
Section Page
11.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF TURBOCHARGER AND

RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 11-3
TSM
11.2 REMOVAL OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER ................................................ 11-5
11.3 INSPECTION OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER ........................................... 11-7
11.4 INSTALLATION OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER ........................................ 11-8
FROM EGR COOLER AFTER DD15 TURBOCHARGER FAILURE ....... 11-10
TSM

11.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF TURBOCHARGER AND RELATED

PARTS
The turbocharger consists of a turbine and a compressor which are attached to a shaft. The exhaust
gas flows to the turbine wheel and causes it to turn. This turning motion is transmitted to the shaft
and the compressor impeller. The intake air from the air filter is compressed by the compressor
impeller and flows over a charge air pipe to the charge air cooler. The compressed air is cooled in
the charge air cooler, permitting a more dense charge of air to be delivered to the engine, and
therefore, engine output is increased. The charge air then passes from charge air cooler into the
intake manifold. The turbocharger is mounted on the exhaust outlet flange of the engine exhaust
manifold.The turbocharger is mounted on the exhaust outlet flange of the engine exhaust manifold.
□ Reduces fuel consumption compared to a similarly powered naturally aspirated engine
□ Reduces emissions.
TSM

11.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF TURBOCHARGER AND RELATED PARTS
TSM
1. Bolt (M10 x 120 mm)
2. Bolt (M10 x 35 mm)
9. Locking Dowel
10. Bolt (M10 x 20 mm)
17. P-clip
18. Interstage Duct
25. Bracket
26. Bolts (6 qty.)
3. Bolt 11. Bracket 19. Clamp 27. O-ring

4. Bolt (M10 x 90 mm) 12. Bolt (M10 x 20 mm) 20. Bolt 28. Turbo Speed Sensor
5. Gear Box 13. Axial Power Turbine 21. Gasket 29. Clamp
6. Bolt (M10 x 65 mm) 14. Clamp 22. Turbocharger 30. Turbo Outlet Elbow
7. Gasket Seal 15. Bolts 23. Clamp 31. Heat Shield
8. O-ring 16. Air Line 24. Turbo Inlet Elbow 32. Heat Shield Mounting
Bolt
Figure 11-1 EPA07 and EPA10 DD15 Turbocharger and Related Parts

11.2 REMOVAL OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER
Cleaning the turbocharger is necessary before removal.
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from hot surfaces, wear protective gloves,
or allow engine to cool before removing any component.
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from contact with rotating parts when an
engine is operating with the air inlet piping removed, install
an air inlet screen shield over the turbocharger air inlet. The
TSM
shield prevents contact with rotating parts.
Prior to removal, visually check for:

□ Missing or loose nuts and bolts.
□ Loose or damaged intake and exhaust ducting.
□ Damaged oil drain lines.
□ Cracked or deteriorating turbocharger housings.
□ External oil leakage or exhaust leaks.
Replace damaged parts with new parts.
To remove the turbocharger, perform the following:
NOTICE:
Do not attempt to remove carbon or dirt buildup on the
compressor or turbine wheels without removing the turbocharger
from the engine. If chunks of carbon are left on the blades, an
unbalanced condition will exist and subsequent failure of the
bearings will result if the turbocharger is operated. However, it
is not necessary to disassemble the turbocharger to remove dirt
or dust buildup.
1. Remove the turbocharger heat shield.

2. Disconnect and remove the CAC ducting at the compressor housing. Remove the
compressor outlet elbow and inlet elbow.
NOTE:
APT air feed line removal applies only to engines without an APT solenoid.

11.2 REMOVAL OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER
3. Remove APT air feed line from the compressor housing.

4. Remove the turbocharger oil supply and drain line from the center housing.
5. Remove and discard O-ring from the cylinder block and gasket from center section.
6. Remove large marmon clamp connecting APT to the interstage duct.
7. Loosen the bolts attaching the turbocharger support bracket to the cylinder block.
8. Remove four bolts attaching the turbocharger to the exhaust manifold center section.
9. Remove the two bolts from turbocharger bracket to turbine housing.
PERSONAL INJURY
TSM
NOTICE:
Turbocharger must be supported when removing the mounting
bolts to avoid damage to the turbocharger.
11. Lift the turbocharger assembly away from the engine and place it on a bench.
12. Cover turbocharger to avoid any foreign material from entering oil, air, or exhaust
passages.
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from improper use of chemicals, follow the
chemical manufacturer’s usage, handling, and disposal
instructions. Observe all manufacturer’s cautions.
13. Clean the exterior of the turbocharger with a non-caustic cleaning solvent.

11.3 INSPECTION OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER
Check as follows:
1. Remove the exhaust pipe from the turbine outlet and remove the air intake pipe from
the compressor inlet.
2. Visually inspect the turbine and compressor wheels for missing blades or blade damage.
3. Inspect the turbine and compressor wheels for heavy deposits of dirt, coke or carbon.
4. Using a flashlight, check the wheels and housings for signs of rubbing.
5. Rotate the turbine wheel to check for freedom of movement.
6. Replace the turbocharger if there is any visible damage. Refer to section 11.2.
[a] Remove defective turbocharger from the engine.
[b] Tag removed turbocharger for remanufacture.
[c] Install a new turbocharger to the engine.
TSM
ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.
7. Start the engine.

8. Run the engine speed to full load.
9. Visually inspect the exhaust for excessive smoke.
[a] If the engine exhaust emission appears normal, no further troubleshooting is required.
Shut down the engine.
[b] If the engine exhaust emission is excessive, shut down the engine. Call Detroit Diesel

11.4 INSTALLATION OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER
11.4 INSTALLATION OF DD15 TURBOCHARGER
Install as follows:
1. If removed, install the gear box. Refer to section 13.4.
2. If removed, install the axial power turbine. Refer to section 12.4.
3. If removed, loosely install the install turbocharger support bracket to the cylinder block
4. Install interstage duct onto turbocharger.
PERSONAL INJURY
TSM
6. Remove any covers that were placed over the openings of the air inlet and exhaust outlet
openings on the engine and turbocharger when the turbocharger was removed.
7. Remove any covers on the oil and coolant inlet and drain lines, and the oil and coolant
inlet and drain openings on the turbocharger.
8. Install new turbocharger flange gasket with the tab facing the rear of the engine.
NOTICE:
The turbocharger must be supported after it has been installed to
the exhaust manifold flange to avoid damage to the turbocharger.
9. Secure the turbocharger to the exhaust flange. Hand tighten bolts.
NOTE:
Do not use any type of lubricant on the inside of any air inlet hose or on the hose contact
surfaces of the turbocharger compressor housing, CAC ducting or the intake manifold.
NOTE:
When installing the turbocharger, use care when moving the turbocharger into position
onto the interstage duct.
10. Install turbocharger to turbocharger support bracket and hand tighten bolts.
11. Torque the turbocharger-to-exhaust manifold bolts to 50 N·m (37 lb·ft).
12. Tighten the interstage duct clamp to 12 N·m (9 lb·ft).
13. Torque turbine housing bracket bolts to 25 N·m (18 lb·ft).

14. Install the turbocharger oil drain line, using a new gasket and O-ring between the opening
in the bottom side of the turbocharger center housing and the drain line that runs to the
cylinder block. Torque the bolts to 30-38 N·m (22-28 lb·ft).
15. Install turbocharger oil supply line. Torque line to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
16. Install heat shields.
17. Install compressor elbow and charge air compressor plumbing. Torque clamps to 6 N·m
(4 lb·ft).
TSM

11.5 EGR COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE TO REMOVE EXCESS OIL FROM EGR COOLER AFTER
DD15 TURBOCHARGER FAILURE

FROM EGR COOLER AFTER DD15 TURBOCHARGER FAILURE
Observe the following:
TSM
1. Venturi 10. Seal Ring 19. Water Manifold
2. Bolt 11. Banjo Union 20. Support
3. Gasket 12. Banjo Bolt 21. Clamp
4. Bolt 13. Exhaust Gas Cooler 22. Hose
5. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube 14. Strap 23. Mixer Pipe
6. Bolt 15. Shim 24. Coolant Crossover Pipe
7. Lifting Eye 16. Clamp 25. Seal Ring
8. Coolant Connecting Tube 17. Seal Washer
9. Connecting Tube 18. EGR Hot Pipe

1. Venturi
TSM 9. Banjo Union 17. Water Manifold
3. Gasket 11. Exhaust Gas Cooler 19. Clamp
5. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube/Lifting 13. Shim 21. Mixer Pipe
Eye
7. Connecting Tube 15. Metal Seal 23. Seal Ring

Check as follows:
NOTICE:
This cleaning procedure must be followed after replacing a DD15
turbocharger so that any failure will not cause excessive fuel, oil,
or coolant to enter the exhaust system. Failure to perform this
procedure could cause severe engine damage.
2. Remove the EGR hot pipe (4) and gaskets (3) and inspect for any signs of liquid or
moisture. The hot pipe and EGR cooler inlet should have a black dry soot residue inside.
[b] If there is no sign of liquid or moisture in the pipe or EGR cooler, install the hot pipe.
No further action is required.
TSM
3. Remove the mixer pipe (4) from the cold boost pipe (1). Refer to section .

4. Remove the exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye (2) Refer to section and venturi (3).
Refer to section .
TSM
EYE INJURY
[a] mixer pipe.
[c] venturi.

TSM

12 DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE
Section Page

TSM
12.2 REMOVAL OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE ..................................... 12-5
12.3 INSPECTION OF THE DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE ........................ 12-6
12.4 INSTALLATION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE ............................. 12-7
TSM


AND RELATED PARTS
The Axial Power Turbine (APT) increases the efficiency and the economy of the engine by
converting the thermal energy in the exhaust flow from the turbocharger into mechanical energy,
delivering the resulting torque to the crankshaft. The rated speed of the turbine wheel of the APT
device is about 50,000 rpm. The turbine wheel generates a torque in this range of about 10 N·m (7
lb·ft), which is increased through various gear ratios up to 260 N·m (192 lb·ft). The exhaust gas
flows to the turbine wheel of the APT and drives the wheel. The rotational movement created is
transmitted to the shaft of the small output gear, and from there, to the large output gear of the
hydrodynamic clutch. The rotational speed is reduced because of the gear ratio between the
output gear and drive gear; this gear ratio also multiplies torque output. The hydrodynamic clutch
impeller is a part of the hydrodynamic clutch housing. The vanes on the impeller generate an
oil flow in the hydrodynamic clutch which sets the turbine wheel of the hydrodynamic clutch
into rotation and the output gear is driven over a shaft. The generated torque is transferred
through the idler gear number four to the crankshaft gear. It is also possible to ensure, via the
hydrodynamic clutch, that matching rotational speed takes place between the crankshaft and the
TSM
axial power turbine-drive.
The APT is connected to the engine oil circuit. The gears and the bearing are lubricated and
cooled by the engine oil. The hydrodynamic clutch is supplied with engine oil by the hollow
bearing shaft. One special aspect is the seal between the shaft and the exhaust turbine housing.
The seal between these two components is formed by using two metal sealing rings which are
pressed into their seat by compressed air. The pressure is regulated either by an air sealed pressure
regulator or from the turbo charger compressor.

12.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE AND RELATED PARTS
TSM
1. Bolt (M10 x 120 mm)
2. Bolt (M10 x 35 mm)
9. Locking Dowel
10. Bolt (M10 x 20 mm)
17. P-clip
18. Interstage Duct
25. Bracket
26. Bolts (6 qty.)

Bolt
Figure 12-1 Axial Power Turbine and Related Parts

12.2 REMOVAL OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE
Remove as follows:
NOTICE:
Ensure turbocharger and axial power turbine are supported prior
to removal.
2. Drain coolant.
3. Remove the turbocharger and APT heat shields.
4. Disconnect the doser injector housing lines and remove the exhaust S-pipe from APT
outlet by removing the marmon clamp.
5. Remove the EGR hot pipe. Refer to section .
TSM
6. Remove the turbocharger and interstage duct. Refer to section 11.2.
7. Remove the air line from the air seal pressure regulator valve or from the compressor
housing of the turbocharger.
8. Remove four bolts securing the gear box to the axial power turbine.
9. Remove four bolts from the APT support bracket.
10. Separate the turbine housing from the gear box.
11. Remove the gasket, graphite seal, oil passage tube and O-ring.

12.3 INSPECTION OF THE DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE
12.3 INSPECTION OF THE DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE
Inspect as follows:
1. Inspect axial power turbine for damage to the turbine and housing; replace if necessary.
2. Inspect the gear box for damage; replace if necessary.
TSM

12.4 INSTALLATION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE
Install as follows:
2. If removed, install the gear box to cylinder block with four bolts. Torque bolts to 55–60
N·m (41–45 lb·ft).
3. Install axial power turbine gasket, graphite seal, and O-ring. If removed, install the oil
passage tube. DO NOT press into Gear Box, then install into APT.
4. Lubricate collar and O-ring with clean engine oil (the guide tube must be pressed into the
turbine housing with the taper facing toward the gear box).
5. Install axial power turbine to gear box and bracket (the APT must be installed as straight
to the gearbox as possible; uneven installation could cause an oil leak).
NOTICE:
TSM
When installing axial power turbine to gear box, ensure gears are
aligned by viewing through exhaust port and rotating impeller.
Damage to gear box and axial power turbine will occur if not
installed correctly.
6. Install the front bolt through the APT into the gear box, and hand-tighten the bolt.
7. Install two bolts through the bracket into the axial power turbine; then install two bolts
through the bracket into the cylinder block. Install the remaining three bolts into axial
power turbine; hand-tighten.
8. Torque the bolts to 55-60 N·m (41-45 lb·ft).
9. Install air line to axial power turbine from air seal pressure regulator valve or from the
turbocharger compressor housing. Torque the banjo bolt to 10 N·m (7 lb·ft).
10. Install the oil feed line from the block to the gear box (if removed) torque to 20 N·m
(15 lb·ft).
11. Install the turbocharger and interstage duct. Refer to section 11.4.
12. Install the axial power turbine heat shields.
13. Fill the engine with coolant.

12.4 INSTALLATION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE
TSM

13 DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX
Section Page

GEAR BOX AND RELATED PARTS ........................................................ 13-3
TSM
13.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX ......... 13-5
13.3 INSPECTION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX ............. 13-6
13.4 INSTALLATION OF THE AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX ............ 13-7
TSM


GEAR BOX AND RELATED PARTS
The gear box is located on the right side of the engine between the axial power turbine and
cylinder block.
TSM

13.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX AND RELATED
PARTS
TSM
1. Bolt (M10 x 120 mm)
2. Bolt (M10 x 35 mm)
9. Locking Dowel
10. Bolt (M10 x 20 mm)
17. P-clip
18. Interstage Duct
25. Bracket
26. Bolts (6 qty.)

Bolt
Figure 13-1 Gear Box and Related Parts

13.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX
Remove as follows:
1. Remove the turbocharger. Refer to section 11.2.
2. Remove the Axial Power Turbine (APT). Refer to section 12.2.
3. Remove the oil line from cylinder block to gear box.
4. Remove four bolts from the axial power turbine gear box to the cylinder block and remove
the axial power turbine gear box.
TSM

13.3 INSPECTION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX
13.3 INSPECTION OF DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX
Inspect the gear box for damage; replace if necessary.
TSM

13.4 INSTALLATION OF THE AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX
Install as follows:
NOTICE:
Ensure the gear box gear and idler gear located in the gear case
housing are meshed. Failure to mesh gears correctly will cause
damage.
1. Install the gear box to cylinder block; ensuring the gears are meshed together when
installed.
NOTICE:
Ensure the correct bolt length is used when the gear box is
installed. If an incorrect bolt length (too long) is used, the cup
plugs installed in the cylinder block can be pushed out into the
TSM
gear train causing severe damage to the gear train. The correct
bolt length for the bolt installed in the upper location near the
cylinder block is 35 mm (1.37 in). The correct length for the bolt
located in the lower position of the gear box is 120 mm (4.72 in).
2. Install four bolts into gear box and cylinder block and hand tighten.
3. Torque the four bolts to 55-60 N·m (41-44 ft·lb).
4. Install oil line to gear box and engine block. Torque to 35 N·m (26 lb·ft).

13.4 INSTALLATION OF THE AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX
TSM

14 CYLINDER HEAD
Section Page

PARTS ...................................................................................................... 14-3
TSM
14.5 CLEANING OF THE CYLINDER HEAD .................................................. 14-17
14.6 ASSEMBLY OF CYLINDER HEAD .......................................................... 14-18
14.8 REMOVAL OF VALVE SPRING (CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLED) .......... 14-22
14.9 REMOVAL OF THE VALVE SPRING (CYLINDER HEAD REMOVED) ... 14-24
14.10 REMOVAL OF INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVES ................................... 14-25
14.11 CLEANING OF VALVES AND RELATED PARTS .................................... 14-26
14.12 INSPECTION OF VALVE SPRINGS ........................................................ 14-27
14.13 INSPECTION OF VALVE ......................................................................... 14-28
14.14 INSTALLATION OF VALVE, SPRING, SEAL AND VALVE CAP .............. 14-29
14.15 VALVE LASH ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................ 14-31
14.16 SETTING THE ENGINE BRAKE LASH ................................................... 14-33
TSM


PARTS
This section explains the description(s) and operation(s) of the following systems within the
cylinder head:
□ Cylinder Head
□ Valve Springs and related components
□ Intake and Exhaust Valves
14.1.1 Cylinder Head
The cylinder head has been designed with a compacted graphic iron material. There are two
intake and two exhaust valves per cylinder. To ensure the correct bolts are used when installing
the cylinder head, the bolt thread size 16 is stamped on the head of the bolt. All bolts must
be tightened in the correct sequence. The valve train assembly needs to be removed in order
to access the cylinder head bolts.
TSM
The cylinder head has a split coolant jacket; the coolant flows around the cylinder to the inlet
side of the head and then to the exhaust side. The coolant flows in the lower level of the cylinder
head around the injectors and the valve seat rings. The coolant then flows around in the upper
level of the cylinder head and cools the valve guides. The advantage of this design is a very even
and highly effective cooling system.
1. Oil Return Openings or Oil Return Holes From 2. Oil Transfer Holes from Cylinder Block to Cylinder
Cylinder Head to Cylinder Block Head
Figure 14-1 Oil Hole Location on Fire Deck of Cylinder Head

14.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CYLINDER HEAD AND RELATED PARTS
TSM
1. Water Transfer Holes from Cylinder Block to Cylinder 2. Water Return Openings from Cylinder Head to
Head Cylinder Block
Figure 14-2 Water Hole Location on Fire Deck of Cylinder Head
1. Upper Cooling Level 2. Lower Cooling Level
Figure 14-3 Cooling Levels

TSM
1. Holes for Installing the Intake Manifold 2. Inlet Ducts
Figure 14-4 Cylinder Head Inlet Duct Location
14.1.2 Intake and Exhaust Valves
There are four valves per cylinder; two intake valves and two exhaust valves.
Valves are made of heat-treated alloys, with precision-ground heads and stems. Stem ends are
hardened to minimize wear in contact with the valve rocker buttons.
All valves are retained by valve spring caps and two-piece tapered valve locks.
Valve stem oil seals are installed on both intake and exhaust valves to provide controlled valve
stem lubrication while limiting oil consumption.

The exhaust valves use a nickel-based alloy and are identified by a smaller dimple on the
combustion face. The intake valves are an iron based alloy and are identified from the exhaust
valve by a larger dimple on the combustion face.
TSM
1. Exhaust Rocker Arm 8. Valve Spring
2. Exhaust Rocker Arm with Actuator 9. Intake Rocker Arm
3. Brake Rocker Arm 10. Intake Rocker Arm Shaft
4. Exhaust Rocker Arm Shaft 11. Drive Gear for Intake Camshaft
5. Drive Gear for Exhaust Camshaft 12. Intake Camshaft
6. Exhaust Camshaft 13. Intake Valve
7. Exhaust Valve 14. Camshaft Housing
Figure 14-5 Valves Rocker Arms and Related Parts

TSM
1. Cylinder Head Gasket 10. Valve Keeper
2. Exhaust Valve Seat Ring 11. Exhaust Valve Spring
3. Intake Valve Seat Ring 12. Spring Retainer
4. Exhaust Valve 13. Intake Valve Spring
5. Intake Valve 14. Water Jacket Cover Plug
6. Cylinder Head 15. Water Jacket Seal Ring Plug
7. Washer 16.Water Protection Sleeve Seal Ring
8. Valve Guide 17.Injector Cup
9. Valve Stem Seal 18. Cylinder Head-to-Cylinder Block Bolt
Figure 14-6 Valves and Related Parts

TSM
1. Exhaust Valve 4. Valve Clearance Adjusting Element
2. Valve Springs 5. Exhaust Rocker Arm with Actuator
3. Exhaust Rocker Arm 6. Exhaust Rocker Arm
Figure 14-7 Exhaust Valve Assembly
1. Intake Valves 3. Drive Gear and Timing Wheel for Intake Camshaft
2. Valve Springs
Figure 14-8 Intake Valve Assembly

TSM
1.Inlet Valves 2. Exhaust Valves
Figure 14-9 Intake and Exhaust Valve Location

14.2 REMOVAL OF THE DD13 CYLINDER HEAD
Because optional and accessory equipment varies with the engine application, these procedures
covers only the basic engine. If the engine is equipped with accessories that affect cylinder head
removal, note the mounting details of each accessory to assure correct installation at reassembly.
Remove the cylinder head as follows:
2. Disconnect the batteries. Refer to OEM procedure.
3. Drain the fuel system. Refer to section .
4. Drain the oil. Refer to OEM procedure.
5. Drain the coolant. Refer to OEM procedure.
6. Remove the turbocharger inlet pipe. Refer to OEM procedure.
TSM
8. Disconnect the following electrical harness connections:
[a] Coolant Outlet Temperature sensor harness from the water manifold
[b] Delta-p sensor
[c] Intake Manifold Air Temperature sensor
[d] Throttle Valve
[e] Intake Air Temperature sensor
9. Remove the removal of high pressure fuel injector lines. Refer to section .
10. Remove high pressure fuel lines from fuel rail to high pressure fuel pump. Refer to section
.
11. Remove amplifier return line, needle return line and pressure limiting valve (PLV) lines.
Refer to section .
12. Disconnect fuel injector harness from the fuel injectors and engine brake solenoids.
[a] EPA07 Engines: For Removal of One-Piece Fuel Injector Wiring Harness
refer to section .
[b] EPA10 Engines: For Removal of Two-Piece Fuel Injector Wiring Harness
refer to section .
13. Remove the rocker arm shafts. Refer to section 2.2.
14. Remove coolant lines from the water manifold to the fuel doser injector housing.
Refer to section .
15. Remove the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) vent (deaeration) line.
16. Remove the intake and exhaust camshafts. Refer to section 2.2.
17. Remove the camshaft housing. Refer to section 3.1.

18. Remove the EGR crossover tube. Refer to section .

19. Remove the two bolts attaching the cold boost pipe to the support bracket.
20. Using Flywheel and Main Pulley Socket tool (J-45390), remove the 40 bolts securing the
cylinder head to the cylinder block.
21. If the dipstick hose is attached to the intake throttle valve bracket, remove the clip
attaching it.
PERSONAL INJURY
TSM
22. Using Cylinder Head/Engine Lifting Bar tool (W470589006200), remove the cylinder
head from the cylinder block.
23. Remove and discard the metallic gasket from the cylinder block.

14.3 INSTALLATION OF THE DD13 CYLINDER HEAD
Install the cylinder head as follows:

1. Inspect the head bolt holes in both block and head for the presence of oil, water, dirt, or
damaged threads; clean or re-tap as necessary. Ensure piston domes, cylinder head, and
cylinder block fire deck surfaces are clean and free of foreign matter.
2. Verify that the cylinder liner protrusion heights are within specification prior to installing
the cylinder head. Refer to section 16.5for cylinder liner protrusion specifications.
3. Install cylinder head guide studs (W471589016100).
4. Position a new cylinder head gasket onto the cylinder block.
TSM
1. Engine Oil Feed Hole 4. Coolant Return Opening
2. Engine Oil Return Opening 5. Opening for Blow-by Duct to Crankcase Vent
3. Coolant Feed Hole
PERSONAL INJURY
5. Install four lift hooks onto the cylinder head.

6. Lift the cylinder head into position using Cylinder Head/Engine Lifting Bar tool
(W470589006200). Lower cylinder head into place over the guide studs and dowel pins
until it is seated on the engine block.
7. Remove the guide studs.
8. Remove the lifting hooks from the cylinder head.
9. Coat the threads and underside of bolt heads with clean engine oil before installation.
10. Install the 40 cylinder head bolts into the cylinder head. Torque bolts (1 through 38)
in three steps as follows:
[a] 200 N·m (147 lb·ft)
[b] 90° torque turn.
[c] 90° torque turn.
11. Torque the small bolts (39 and 40) to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
TSM
12. Check and adjust the gear lash, as needed. Refer to section 5.2.
13. Install the turbocharger flange bolts.
14. Install the EGR crossover tube. Refer to section .
15. Install the EGR actuator harness connector, linkage and the heat shield.
16. Install the coolant lines to EGR actuator.
17. Install the camshaft housing. Refer to section 3.2.
18. Install the intake and exhaust camshafts. Refer to section 2.4.
19. Install the rocker arm/engine brake assemblies. Refer to section 2.4.
20. Install the intake elbow.

21. Install the mixer pipe. Refer to section .

22. Install the venturi. Refer to section .
23. Install the fuel injectors. Refer to section .
24. Install the engine brake solenoids and injector harness.
25. Install the amplification needle and pressure limiting valve (PLV). Refer to section .
26. Install the high pressure feed lines from high pressure pump to common fuel rail.
Refer to section .
27. Install the injector feed lines from fuel rail. Refer to section .
28. Connect the coolant temperature sensor harness.
29. Install the turbocharger inlet pipe.
30. Install any components that were removed and fill with required fluids as recommended.
Refer to OEM guidelines.
31. Set the valve lash and engine brake. Refer to section 14.15.
TSM
ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.

33. Fill the cooling system.
34. Prime engine lubrication system. Refer to section 27.1.
35. Start the engine and check for fuel, coolant or oil leaks.
36. Shut down the engine.

Because optional and accessory equipment varies with the engine application, this procedure
covers only the basic engine. If the engine is equipped with accessories that affect cylinder head
removal, note the mounting details of each to assure correct installation at reassembly.
Remove the cylinder head as follows:
NOTICE:
If the cylinder head is to be replaced, the new head must be
thoroughly cleaned before installation to remove all rust and
preventive compound, especially from the fuel and oil galleries.
This can be done by immersion in a bath of fuel oil or mineral
spirits-based solvent and scrubbing out all openings with a soft
bristle brush. When clean, blow the head dry with compressed
air.
TSM
2. Disconnect the batteries. Refer to OEM procedure.
4. Drain the oil. Refer to OEM procedure.
5. Drain the coolant. Refer to OEM procedure.
6. Remove the turbocharger inlet pipe. Refer to OEM procedure.
8. Disconnect the following electrical harness connections:
[a] Coolant Outlet Temperature sensor harness from the water manifold
[b] Delta-p sensor
[c] Intake Manifold Air Temperature sensor
[d] Throttle Valve
[e] Intake Air Temperature sensor
9. Remove fuel injector feed lines. Refer to section .
10. Remove high pressure fuel lines from fuel rail to high pressure fuel pump. Refer to section
.
11. Remove amplifier return line, needle return line and pressure limiting valve (PLV) lines.
Refer to section .
12. Disconnect fuel injector harness from the fuel injectors and engine brake solenoids.
[a] For Euro 6 DD Platform engines, remove One Piece Fuel Injector Wiring Harness.
Refer to section .

[b] For NAFTA DD Platform engines, remove Two Piece Fuel Injector Wiring Harness.
Refer to section .
13. Remove the rocker arm shafts. Refer to section 2.2.
14. Remove coolant lines from the water manifold to the fuel doser injector housing.
15. Remove the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) vent (de-aeration) line.
17. Remove the camshaft housing. Refer to section .
18. Remove the EGR actuator coolant line from the cylinder block.
19. Disconnect the EGR actuator connector and remove the heat shield. Refer to section .
20. Remove the turbocharger flange bolts.
21. Remove the EGR crossover tube. Refer to section .
22. Remove the two bolts attaching the cold boost pipe to the support bracket.
23. Using the Flywheel and Main Pulley Socket tool (J-45390), remove the 40 bolts securing
TSM
the cylinder head to the cylinder block.
PERSONAL INJURY
24. Using Cylinder Head/Engine Lifting Bar tool (W470589006200), remove the cylinder
head from the cylinder block.
25. Remove and discard the metallic gasket from the cylinder block.

14.5 CLEANING OF THE CYLINDER HEAD
Clean the cylinder head as follows:

1. Keep parts segregated according to original position to assure proper reassembly, if parts
are to be reused.
2. Remove all plugs.
3. Steam clean the cylinder head once it has been stripped.
4. Clean the head in a de-scaling bath.
EYE INJURY
TSM
5. Clean the valves, springs, and rocker shafts in fuel oil and blow dry with compressed air.
6. Clean the rocker arm assemblies.

14.6 ASSEMBLY OF CYLINDER HEAD
14.6 ASSEMBLY OF CYLINDER HEAD
Assembly the cylinder head as follows:

1. Install all of the required cup plugs using a good grade of non-hardening sealant, such as
Loctite® 620 or equivalent, on the cup plugs. Use Cup Plug Installation Set (J–35653).
2. Ensure that all cup plugs on the front face of the cylinder head are flush or below the
surface.
3. Install valves, valve stem seals, valve springs and keepers.
TSM

Install the cylinder head as follows:

1. Inspect the head bolt holes in both block and head for the presence of oil, water, dirt, or
damaged threads, clean or re-tap as necessary. Ensure piston domes and the cylinder head
and cylinder block deck surfaces are clean and free of foreign matter.
2. Verify that the cylinder liner protrusion heights are all the same prior to installing the
cylinder head.
3. Install Cylinder Head Guide Studs tool (J-35784).
4. Position a new cylinder head gasket onto engine block.
TSM
1. Engine Oil Feed Hole
2. Engine Oil Return Opening
4. Coolant Return Opening
5. Opening for Blow-by Duct to Crankcase Vent
3. Coolant Feed Hole
PERSONAL INJURY
5. Install four lift hooks onto cylinder head.

6. Lift the cylinder head into position using Cylinder Head/Engine Lifting Bar tool
(W470589006200). Lower into place over the guide studs and dowel pins until it is seated
on the engine block.
8. Remove the lifting hooks from the cylinder head.
9. Coat the threads and underside of bolt heads with clean engine oil before installation.
10. Install the 40 cylinder head bolts into the cylinder head.
11. Torque the 38 large bolts in four steps to:
[a] 50 N·m (37 lb·ft)
[b] 250 N·m (184 lb·ft)
[c] 90° torque turn
[d] 90° torque turn
12. Torque the small bolts (39 and 40) to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
TSM
13. Install camshaft housing. Refer to section 3.3.
14. Install camshaft assemblies. Refer to section 2.4.
15. Time camshaft assembly. Refer to section 4.2.
16. Install rocker shaft assembly. Refer to section 2.4.
17. Set the valve lash and engine brake. Refer to section 14.15.
18. Install any components that were removed and fill with required fluids as recommended.
Refer to OEM guidelines.
19. Fill the cooling system.

ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.

21. Start the engine and check for fuel, coolant or oil leaks.
22. Shut down the engine.
TSM

14.8 REMOVAL OF VALVE SPRING (CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLED)
14.8 REMOVAL OF VALVE SPRING (CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLED)
Remove and clean as follows:

4. Remove the rocker arm assemblies. Refer to section 2.2.
6. Remove the camshaft housing. Refer to section 3.1.
NOTE:
All valve spring or seal removal and replacement must be completed for each cylinder
being serviced while the piston is at Top Dead Center (TDC). After servicing a cylinder,
turn the crankshaft to TDC for the next cylinder being serviced.
TSM
7. Remove the fuel injector from the appropriate cylinder. Refer to section .
8. Using Engine Barring Tool (J-46392), bar the engine over until the cylinder is at Top
Dead Center (TDC).
EYE INJURY
9. Install the adaptor (J-47411) into the cylinder and torque to 20 N·m (14 lb·ft) plus 90
degrees with the injector hold-down clamp and bolt, connect shop air to compression
adaptor.

10. Position the spring compressor cage portion of the valve spring compressor(J–47406)
directly over the valve spring to be compressed. Engage the dowel of the cage in the
closest slot of the valve spring compressor handle.
TSM
NOTICE:
Do not contact the valve with the compressor tool.
11. Compress the valve spring and remove the valve locks using a small magnet to prevent the
locks from falling into the cylinder head oil return galleries.
12. Release the spring and remove the valve cap and valve spring. If the valve stem oil seal is
to be replaced, remove the seal and discard it.

14.9 REMOVAL OF THE VALVE SPRING (CYLINDER HEAD REMOVED)
14.9 REMOVAL OF THE VALVE SPRING (CYLINDER HEAD REMOVED)
With the cylinder head assembly removed from the engine, remove the valve springs as follows:
1. Remove the valve locks using valve spring compressor(J–47406), compressing each
valve spring.
TSM
2. Release the spring and remove the valve, valve cap and valve spring.
3. Remove the valve stem oil seal and discard the seal.
4. Remove the valve spring seat.
5. As parts are removed, mark or segregate them according to their original position for
possible reuse.
6. Mark the location of each intake and exhaust valve in accordance to its cylinder number
and whether it is an intake or an exhaust valve.
7. Flip the cylinder head over and carefully remove the valves from the cylinder head.

14.10 REMOVAL OF INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVES
Remove as follows:
1. Remove the cylinder head.
[a] For the DD13 ONLY: Refer to section 14.2.
[b] For the DD15 ONLY: Refer to section 14.4.
2. Remove the valve spring(s). Refer to section 14.9.
TSM

14.11 CLEANING OF VALVES AND RELATED PARTS
14.11 CLEANING OF VALVES AND RELATED PARTS
Clean the valves and parts as follows:
EYE INJURY
1. Using proper eye protection, clean all of the disassembled parts with fuel oil and dry
with compressed air.
2. Clean the carbon from the valve stems and wash the valves with fuel oil.
3. Clean the valve guide bore to remove all gum and carbon deposits use bore brush (J–5437
or equivalent) for this procedure.
TSM
NOTICE:
If a valve is removed through a stem seal, the stem seal must be
replaced.

14.12 INSPECTION OF VALVE SPRINGS
Inspect the valve springs and replace any that are pitted or cracked. The entire spring should be
inspected. When a broken spring is replaced, the spring retainer and valve locks for that valve
and spring should also be replaced.
NOTE:
If a valve is removed through a stem seal, the stem seal must be replaced.
TSM

14.13 INSPECTION OF VALVE
14.13 INSPECTION OF VALVE
The valve stems must be free from scratches or scuff marks, and the valve faces must be free from
ridges or cracks. Some pitting of the valve face is normal, and is acceptable as long as no leak
paths are evident. If leak paths exist, re-face the valves or install new valves. If the valve heads
are warped or the valve stem is bent, replace the valves. See Figures 14-10 and 14-11.
Figure 14-10
TSM
Exhaust Valve
Figure 14-11 Intake Valve

14.14 INSTALLATION OF VALVE, SPRING, SEAL AND VALVE CAP
Install as follows:
1. Position the cylinder head on a work bench for valve installation, if removed. Lubricate
the valve stems with clean engine lubricating oil and slide them into their respective valve
guides and against the valve seats. If reusing valves, install them to their original positions.
NOTE:
Clean valve guide of old seal material and oil before installing the new seal.
NOTICE:
Ensure all valve spring seats have been installed before the
valve stem oil seal is installed.
2. Install the valve spring seat over the valve guide.

3. With the valve installed into the cylinder head, clean the valve guide and valve stem
TSM
with brake cleaner.
4. Install the protective cap over the valve stem.
NOTE:
Do not coat valve stem or seal with oil prior to installation.
5. Install the valve stem seal over the protective cap.

6. Push the seal down on the valve stem using the seal installer (J–47490). When the installer
tool contacts the cylinder head, the seal is correctly positioned. Be sure the installer is
square against the cylinder head. Remove the seal installer and protector cap.
7. Install the valve spring and retainer. If reusing parts, install them to their original positions.
NOTE:
Always install new valve stem locks when installing valves.
8. Using the valve spring compressor tool (J–47406), compress the valve spring only as
much as required to install the valve locks. After installing the valve locks, rap the end of
the valve stem sharply with a plastic mallet to seat the valve locks.
NOTICE:
Be sure the valve retainer is properly centered and aligned to
avoid scoring the valve stem. Do not compress the spring any
more than necessary to install the locks, to avoid damaging the
oil seal.
9. Remove Compression test adaptor J-47411.

10. On the other three valves it may be necessary to repeat these steps for cylinders being
worked on.

14.14 INSTALLATION OF VALVE, SPRING, SEAL AND VALVE CAP
11. If the cylinder head is removed from engine, install cylinder head.
[a] For the DD13 ONLY: refer to section 14.3.
[b] For the DD15 ONLY: refer to section 14.7.
12. Prime fuel system. Refer to section .
13. Close any drain cocks that were opened and fill the cooling system. Purge the air from the
system using the vent in the thermostat housing. Complete filling of the cooling system
is essential for proper engine operation.
ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.
TSM

14.15 VALVE LASH ADJUSTMENTS
Accurate adjustment of clearance between intake and exhaust valves is important if maximum
performance and economy are to be obtained.
NOTE:
Every time the valve lash is adjusted the engine brake lash will also need to be set.
NOTE:
Adjust the valve lash before setting the engine brake lash.
NOTICE:
Failure to measure valve clearances at the required initial
period and make necessary adjustments may result in gradual
degrading of engine performance and reduced fuel combustion
efficiency.
TSM
Adjust the valves as follows:
1. Turn engine OFF, (key OFF, engine OFF).
3. Disconnect the starting power for the engine. Refer to OEM procedures.
4. Remove the air cleaner and the turbocharger inlet pipe and hose.
5. Remove air cleaner housing.
7. Bar the engine over until cylinder number one is at Top Dead Center (TDC) compression
stroke. (J-46392).
8. Using a feeler gauge (1), lash intake valves one, two and four to 0.4 mm (0.016 in.).

9. Using a feeler gauge (1), lash exhaust valves one, three and five to 0.6 mm (0.024 in.).
TSM
10. Bar the engine over 360° until cylinder number six is at TDC compression stroke.
(J-46392)
11. Lash intake valves three, five, and six to 0.4 mm (0.016 in.).
12. Lash exhaust valves two, four and six to 0.6 mm (0.024 in.).
13. Torque the locknut valve adjusting screw to 50 N·m (37 lb·ft).
14. Remove any tools used for this procedure.
15. Set the engine brake lash. Refer to section 14.16.

14.16 SETTING THE ENGINE BRAKE LASH
Set the brake lash as follows:

1. Set the lash on all the exhaust adjusting screws first (all the adjusting screws in direct
contact with the exhaust valves).
2. Rotate the engine until a given cylinder is at maximum intake lift. When this is reached,
the brake lash can be set on this cylinder.
3. Lash the engine brakes in the following firing order; one, five, three, six, two, then four.
4. When the engine brake rocker arm is in contact with the exhaust valve, set the lash
between the engine brake rocker arm adjusting screw and the actuator piston stem. Using
Engine Brake Adjustment tool (W470589022300), set the lash to 4.1 mm (0.1614 in.).
5. Lash the engine brakes in the following firing order; 1, 5, 3, 6, 2, and 4.
TSM
8. Reconnect the battery power to the engine. Refer to OEM procedures.

14.16 SETTING THE ENGINE BRAKE LASH
TSM

15 PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
Section Page
15.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING

ROD AND RELATED PARTS ................................................................... 15-3
TSM
15.2 REMOVAL OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ............. 15-5
15.3 DISASSEMBLY OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ..... 15-7
15.4 INSPECTION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ........ 15-8
15.5 ASSEMBLY OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ........... 15-9
15.6 INSTALLATION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY ..... 15-11
TSM

15.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD

AND RELATED PARTS
The connecting rods are forged from a high strength steel. A connecting rod bushing is pressed
into the small end of the connecting rod.
TSM
1. Connecting Rod Bolt (2 qty.)
2. Connecting Rod Bushing
6. Oil Control Ring
7. Compression Ring
3. Retaining Ring (2 qty.) 8. Fire Ring
4. Piston Pin 9. Connecting Rod
5. Piston
Figure 15-1 Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly

15.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD AND RELATED PARTS
Each piston has an oil control ring (6), a middle compression ring (7), and a fire ring (8).
TSM
1. Piston Skirt 8. Fire Ring
2. Cover Plate (EPA07 pistons only) 9. Cooling Galley
3. Piston Pin 10. Combustion Bowl
4. Retaining Clip 11. Piston Dome
5. Piston Boss 12. Top Land
6. Oil Control Ring 13. Second Land
7. Compression Ring
Figure 15-2 Piston

15.2 REMOVAL OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
Remove the piston and connecting rod assembly as follows:

1. Drain the engine cooling system.
2. Drain the engine oil.
3. Remove the oil pan. Refer to section 19.2
4. Remove the camshaft housing and associated parts. Refer to section 3.1
5. Remove the cylinder head and gasket.
[a] For DD13 ONLY: refer to section 14.2
[b] For DD15 ONLY: refer to section 14.4
6. Use Scotch-Brite® pads to remove any carbon deposits from the upper inner surface
of the cylinder liner.
TSM
1. Carbon Deposits in Cylinder Liners

15.2 REMOVAL OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
7. Remove the piston cooling nozzles (1) from the base of the cylinder bores and discard
the nozzles.
TSM
8. Position the crankshaft for each piston and connecting rod assembly to be removed at
bottom dead center.
9. Remove the connecting rod bearing cap with lower bearing shell from the connecting rod.
NOTICE
The connecting rod assembly is a cracked rod design. Ensure
when the bearing cap is removed that it is placed on its side.
Damage to the bearing cap will occur if it is placed on end; the
connecting rod assembly will need to be replaced if the cap is
damaged.
10. Remove the piston and connecting rod assembly through the top of the cylinder liner.
11. Assemble the connecting rod bearing cap and lower bearing shell to the connecting rod
after removal. If not already marked, match-mark the rod and cap (on the tang side) with
the cylinder number from where they were removed.
NOTE:
When removed, the bearing cap and the bearing shell must be assembled to its original
connecting rod before another connecting rod bearing cap is removed.

15.3 DISASSEMBLY OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
Piston assembly components should be segregated by cylinder and match-marked during

disassembly to ensure they are assembled in the same position and orientation.
NOTICE:
Stamping cylinder numbers on the piston assembly will damage
the components.
Disassemble piston and connecting rod assembly as follows:

1. Place the piston, dome down, on the table.
2. Using appropriate flat-nosed pliers, remove the retaining rings from the piston boss.
3. Slide out the piston wrist pin and remove the connecting rod from piston.
TSM

15.4 INSPECTION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
15.4 INSPECTION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
Inspect as follows:
1. Inspect the connecting rod and bearing cap for damage; replace as necessary.
2. Inspect the piston, wrist pin and piston rings for damage; replace as necessary.
TSM

15.5 ASSEMBLY OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
Assemble as follows:
1. Using appropriate flat-nosed pliers, install one of the retaining rings into a retaining ring
recess in the piston. Orient the retaining ring gap (1) to either the 12 o'clock or 6 o'clock
position.
TSM
2. Liberally lubricate the piston pin bore, the piston pin, and the connecting rod bushing in
the small end of the connecting rod with 80/90w oil (or equivalent).

15.5 ASSEMBLY OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
3. Position the long end of the connecting rod (2) on the same side as the valve relief (1)
in the top of the piston.
TSM
4. Install piston pin into the pin bore, through the rod, until it rests against the previously
installed retaining ring.
5. Using the appropriate flat-nosed pliers, install the other retaining ring into the retaining
ring recess in the piston boss to lock the pin in place. Orient the retaining ring gap to
either the 12 o'clock or 6 o'clock position.

15.6 INSTALLATION OF PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
Install as follows:
1. If the rings have been removed, install them into the grooves of the piston and rotate
120° apart as follows:
[a] Install the oil ring expander in the lowest groove in the piston.
[b] Install the oil ring (top label up) in the lowest groove around the oil expander ring.
[c] Install the compression ring (top label up) in the middle groove.
[d] Install the fire ring (top label up) in the top groove.
TSM
2. Allowable new ring end gaps for (A), (B), and (C) are shown below.
Ring Ring End Gap

Fire Ring (A) 0.35 - 0.75 mm (0.024 - 0.030 in.)
Compression Ring (B) 0.7 - 0.9 mm (0.027 - 0.035 in.)
Oil Control Ring (C) 0.4 - 0.6 mm (0.016 - 0.024 in.)
Table 15-1 Allowable Ring End Gaps
3. Add clean engine oil to a clean pan at least 305 mm (12 in) in diameter, until the level
reaches approximately 76 mm (3 in).
4. Place the piston and connecting rod assembly into the pan, with the combustion dome of
the piston on the bottom of the pan.
5. Coat the upper connecting rod bearing shell with clean engine oil.

6. Coat the piston skirt liberally with the engine oil, saturating the piston rings and ring lands.
7. Coat the inside diameter of the piston ring compression tool with clean engine oil.
[a] For the DD13, use Piston Ring Compressor tool (W470589005900).
[b]
TSM
For the DD15, use Piston Ring Compressor tool (J-47386).

[c] For the DD15, Piston Ring Compressor tool (W470589015900) may also be used.
TSM
8. Place piston on a bench with dome side down, install piston ring compressor tool.
9. Once the ring compressor is clamped, ensure the piston can rotate freely. If rotation is
hindered, remove the compressor and reposition the dome and rings, or inspect for ring
damage.
10. Lubricate the inside of the cylinder liner with clean engine oil.
11. Position the throw of the crankshaft to bottom dead center for the cylinder being installed
with the piston and connecting rod assembly.
NOTICE:
Failure to orient the piston and connecting rod assembly properly
during piston installation may result in the bearing end of the rod
striking the nozzle, causing damage to the nozzle or loosening
it from the block. A damaged, bent, or loosened nozzle may
cause a loss of main gallery pressure. In these cases piston
overheating or lack of adequate lubrication may result in severe
engine damage.
12. Ensure the valve relief located on the top of the piston is orientated towards the exhaust
side of the engine during installation. The piston also has an arrow that should face the

front of the engine. The connecting rod has a serial number printing that must also face
towards the exhaust side of the engine.
TSM
13. Align the ring compressor guide pins (if equipped) over the two bolt holes on the top of
the cylinder block.
NOTICE:
DO NOT force the piston into the liner. Considerable force
on the piston could scratch or otherwise damage the inside of
the cylinder liner. Therefore, care must be taken during the
installation of the piston to prevent damage.
14. With care and moderate pressure, press the piston into the liner.
15. Remove the ring compressor.
16. Push or tap the piston and connecting rod within the liner until the upper rod bearing is
firmly seated on the appropriate crankshaft journal.
17. Lubricate the lower bearing shell with clean engine oil.
18. With the number on the cap and rod on the same side and the arrow facing forward,
install the bearing cap.

19. Torque the connecting rod bolts alternately to the following:
Connecting Rod Bolt Torque

DD13 DD15 DD16
190 N·m (140 lb·ft) + 90° torque turn 115 N·m (85 lb·ft) + 180° torque turn 115 N·m (85 lb·ft) + 180° torque turn
Bearing Cap to Rod Bolt Cap Bolt Maximum Length

DD13 DD15 DD16
79 mm (3.11 in.) 82.3 mm (3.240 in.) 82.3 mm (3.240 in.)
TSM

20. Check connecting rod axial clearance by moving the rod from side to side on the crank
journal. If there is no clearance, check for proper bearing cap installation.
Connecting Rod Axial Clearance

DD13 0.12 mm (0.0047 in.) 0.29 mm (0.0114 in.)
DD15 0.12 mm (0.0047 in.) 0.29 mm (0.0114 in.)
DD16 0.12 mm (0.0047 in.) 0.29 mm (0.0114 in.)
Table 15-2
21. Install the remaining piston and rod assemblies in the same manner.
NOTICE:
Ensure when installing the piston spray nozzles that damage to
the nozzle does not occur. Damaged oil spray nozzles could
result in a loss of oil pressure to cool the pistons, which may
TSM
cause engine damage.
22. Install new piston spray nozzles (1) at the base of the cylinder bores. Torque each piston
spray nozzle bolt to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
23. Using a dial gauge and holder, measure the piston protrusion relative to cylinder block
top dead center at all the pistons.

24. Allowable piston protrusion (A) is in the table below:
TSM
1. Piston 2. Cylinder Liner A. Allowable Piston Protrusion
Engine Minimum Maximum

DD13 -0.201 mm (-0.0079 in) 0.2215 mm (0.0087 in.)
DD15 -0.213 mm (-0.0090 in.) 0.2075 mm (0.0081 in.)
DD16 -0.213 mm (-0.0090 in.) 0.2075 mm (0.0081 in.)
Table 15-3 Allowable Piston Protrusion
25. If piston protrusion is not between minimum and maximum specifications, check the
following:
[a] Inspect piston, piston pin boss, and piston pin for wear or damage. If damaged,
repair as necessary.
[b] Inspect connecting rod, checking for bent rod, piston pin bore wear or damage. If
damaged, repair as necessary.
[c] Inspect connecting rod bearings for wear or damage. If damage is found replace
rod bearings.
[d] Inspect crankshaft for damage to rod journal or evidence of spun bearing. If
damaged, repair as necessary.
26. Install a new cylinder head gasket.
□ For DD13, refer to section 14.3.

27. Install the cylinder head.

28. Install the lubricating oil pump inlet pipe and screen assembly, and the lubricating oil
pump. Refer to section 21.4.
NOTE:
Debris from a failed bearing can damage the internal components of the oil pump. If
debris is found in the oil pan, replace the oil pump as necessary.
29. Install the oil pan. Refer to section 19.7.

30. Complete any other engine assembly as necessary.
31. After the engine has been completely assembled, refill the oil pan to the proper oil level
on the dipstick.
TSM
33. Close the drain cocks and fill the engine with the recommended coolant.
NOTE:
Coolant system maintenance is very important. Bleed off all the air from the system
and top off.
34. Verify repairs made to the piston and connecting rod assembly. If new parts such as
pistons, rings, cylinder liners or bearings were installed, operate the engine on the run-in
schedule.

16 CYLINDER LINER
Section Page
16.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CYLINDER LINER AND

RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 16-3
TSM
16.2 REMOVAL OF CYLINDER LINER ........................................................... 16-4
16.3 INSPECTION OF CYLINDER LINER ...................................................... 16-5
16.4 CLEANING OF THE CYLINDER LINER .................................................. 16-7
16.5 INSTALLATION OF THE CYLINDER LINER ........................................... 16-8
TSM

16.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CYLINDER LINER AND RELATED

PARTS
The cylinder liners feature a “bottom stop” design, which means that the cylinder liners are
installed with a lower collar in the cylinder block. This design allows for a shorter distance
between cylinders and a more compact design for the cylinder block. Each cylinder liner has 2
sealing rings: the upper sealing ring, sealed by the upper coolant jacket to the cylinder block bore,
and the lower sealing ring, sealed by the lower coolant jacket to the cylinder block bore.
1. Cylinder Liner
3. Upper Sealing Ring

TSM
2. Compression Seal Surface
4. Upper Coolant Jacket
Figure 16-1 Cylinder Liner

5. Lower Coolant Jacket
6. Lower Collar
7. Lower Sealing Ring
8. Bottom Stop Balcony

16.2 REMOVAL OF CYLINDER LINER
16.2 REMOVAL OF CYLINDER LINER
Remove as follows:
NOTICE:
The proper method must be followed when removing the cylinder
liner. Damage to the liners and cylinder block may occur if the
proper tools and procedures are not used.
1. Remove the piston and connecting rod. Refer to section 15.2.

2. Install cylinder liner removal tool (J-45876) into the cylinder liner.
TSM
3. Remove cylinder liner (2).
NOTICE:
After removing the liners from the engine and prior to installation,
always store them in an upright position until ready for use.
Liners left on their side for any length of time can become
egg-shaped and distorted, making installation in cylinder bores
difficult or impossible. If the cylinder liners are to be reused, they
should be marked for cylinder location and engine orientation,
a paint mark can be used to indicate the front of the engine so
they may be installed to the same cylinder from which they were
removed.
4. Remove the two seal rings (1, 3) from the cylinder liner (2) and discard them.

16.3 INSPECTION OF CYLINDER LINER
Inspect as follows:
1. Inspect the cylinder liner.
[a] Check the cylinder liner for cracks or scoring. If cracks or scoring are present,
replace the liner.
NOTICE:
Cavitation is due to poor cooling system maintenance. If
uncorrected, it will eventually make holes through the liner. This
can result in combustion gases blowing water out of the radiator,
oil in the coolant, or when the engine is stopped will allow water
to flow into the cylinder and result in major engine damage due
to water in the oil or hydraulic lockup.
[b] Check the cylinder liner for cavitation. If indication of cavitation is present, replace
TSM
the liner.
[c] Check for bore polishing; if detected, replace the cylinder liner.
2. Inspect the outside diameter of the liner.
[a] Check the liner for fretting.
[b] If any fretting is found, remove it from the surface of the liner with a course, flat stone.
3. Inspect the liner flange in two steps:
[a] Inspect the top surface of compression seal for cracks, smoothness and flatness.
[b] Inspect the balcony (bottom stop).

16.3 INSPECTION OF CYLINDER LINER
4. Inspect the block bore and cylinder liner.

[a] Measure the block bore and the outside diameter of the liner.
TSM
Location DD13 DD15 DD16
A 158.98 to 159 mm 166.98 to 167 mm 166.98 to 167 mm
(6.2590 to 6.2598 in.) (6.5740 to 6.5748 in.) (6.5740 to 6.5748 in.)
B 141.97 to 141.95 mm 148.95 to 148.97 mm 148.95 to 148.97 mm
(5.589 to 5.588 in.) (5.864 to 5.865 in.) (5.864 to 5.865 in.)
Table 16-1 Acceptable Cylinder Liner Diameters
[b] If the liner does not meet specification, replace with a new part.
5. Inspect the cylinder liner.
[a] Check the two seal ring grooves for burrs or sharp edges.
[b] If any are detected, smooth with a Scotch-Brite® pad.

16.4 CLEANING OF THE CYLINDER LINER
Clean as follows:
NOTE:
If using de-greasing solution to clean cylinder liner when finished, an application of clean
engine oil will need to be applied to protect the cylinder liner from corrosion.
1. If cleaning a new or used liner, use a clean cloth and clean engine oil.

2. Dry the liner with compressed air.
TSM
NOTICE:
If the liners are not to be installed at this time, oil them lightly with
clean engine lubricating oil and store them upright in a clean, dry
area. Do not let the liners rest on their sides and do not store
anything on top of the liners.
3. Coat the bore of the liner with clean engine lubricating oil.
4. Allow the liner to sit for 10 minutes (to allow the oil to work into the surface finish).
5. Wipe the inside of the liner with white paper towels.
6. If a dark residue appears on the towels, repeat the oiling and wiping procedure until
residue no longer appears.

16.5 INSTALLATION OF THE CYLINDER LINER
Install as follows:
1. Wipe the inside and outside of the liner clean.
NOTE:
Thoroughly clean the cylinder block, liner, and counter bores to remove any foreign
material. Foreign material in the cylinder liner counter bores can cause the liner to
seat improperly. Clean with a wire brush.
2. Install the two new seal rings (1, 3) onto the cylinder liner (2).
NOTE:
Ensure when installed, the seal rings are properly seated in the proper grooves (locations
1 and 3).
TSM
3. Lubricate the seal rings with clean engine oil.
4. Install the cylinder liner in cylinder block bore using cylinder liner installation tool
J-45876.

5. Seat the liner into the block using cylinder liner installation tool J-47407 for the DD15,
for the and tool J-47407-128 for the DD13.
TSM
6. Install the cylinder liner protrusion tool J-47415 onto the cylinder block. Thread four
cylinder head bolts through the tool and into a head bolt hole and alternately torque the
four bolts to 10 N·m (7 lb·ft).

7. Install a dial indicator.

8. Measure the distance from the top of the liner flange to the top of the block. Allowable
liner protrusion is 0.18-0.27 mm (0.007-0.010 in).
[a] If the liner protrusion exceeds the maximum allowable, remove the piston and
connecting rod assembly (if installed) and then remove the liner to check for debris
under the liner flange.
[b] If the liner protrusion is below the minimum specification, contact Detroit Diesel
TSM

17 CRANKSHAFT
Section Page

PARTS ...................................................................................................... 17-3
TSM
17.2 REMOVAL OF CRANKSHAFT ................................................................. 17-6
17.3 INSPECTION OF THE CRANKSHAFT AND RELATED PARTS ............. 17-9
17.4 INSTALLATION OF CRANKSHAFT ......................................................... 17-10
17.5 REMOVAL OF CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL ..................................... 17-14
17.6 INSTALLATION OF THE REAR OIL SEAL .............................................. 17-15
17.7 REMOVAL OF THE CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL .......................... 17-17
17.8 INSTALLATION OF THE CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL .................. 17-18
TSM


PARTS
The crankshaft is made out of induction-hardened steel. The crankshaft bearing journals and
connecting rod journals are hardened in the boundary layer and then are ground. In order to avoid
vibrations, counterweights are cast onto the guide-ways. The crankshaft is mounted with seven
crankshaft bearing journals in the crankcase. There are oil holes located at the crankshaft bearing
journal and the connecting rod journal through which the crankshaft bearing and connecting
rod bearing are lubricated.
NOTE:
The DD13 engine has four counterweights, the DD15 and DD16 each have eight
counterweights.
NOTE:
The crankshaft throws on the DD16 are longer than on the DD15 crankshaft.
TSM
1. Crankshaft Bearing Journals 3 Counterweights (number varies by engine model)
2. Connecting Rod Bearing Journals Arrows show oil passage locations
Figure 17-1 Crankshaft

17.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CRANKSHAFT AND RELATED PARTS
TSM
1. Bolt 6. Thrust Washer
2. Vibration Damper 7. Bolt
3. Cover Plate 8. Flywheel
4. Crankshaft Bearings 9. Ring Gear
5. Connecting Rod Bearings 10. Crankshaft
Figure 17-2 DD15 & DD16 Crankshaft and Related Parts

TSM
1. Bolt 7. Vibration Damper
2. Main Bearing Caps 8. Upper Crankshaft Bearing Shells
3. Lower Crankshaft Bearing Shells 9. Thrust Washer
4. Lower Connecting Rod Bearing Shells 10. Crankshaft
5. Upper Connecting Rod Bearing Shells 11. Thrust Washer
6. Cylinder Block
Figure 17-3 DD13 Crankshaft and Related Parts

17.2 REMOVAL OF CRANKSHAFT
When removal of the crankshaft becomes necessary, first remove the transmission, then proceed
as follows:
2. Drain the cooling system. Refer to OEM procedures.
3. Drain the lubricating oil. Refer to OEM procedures.
PERSONAL INJURY
TSM
4. Attach Cylinder Head/Engine Lifting Bar tool (W470589006200) with hooks to the three
engine lifter brackets (one at the front and two at the rear). Remove all engine-to-base
attaching bolts and remove the engine from its chassis.
FALLING ENGINE
To avoid injury from a falling engine, ensure the engine
is securely attached to the engine overhaul stand before
releasing the lifting sling.

5. Remove and inspect all of the accessories and assemblies with their attaching parts, as
necessary, to permit the engine block adaptor to be bolted to the intake (left) side of
the cylinder block. Mount the engine to the overhaul stand (J–29109) with adaptor
(J–35635–A).
TSM
6. Remove the oil pan. Refer to section 19.2.
7. Remove the oil pump. Refer to section 21.2.
8. Remove the flywheel. Refer to section 34.4.
9. Remove flywheel housing. Refer to section 34.2.
NOTICE:
Use care when removing the crankshaft pulley and vibration
assembly. If the damper is allowed to fall, damage to the internal
components of the damper may result.
10. Loosen and remove two of the crankshaft pulley retaining bolts and hardened washers 180
degrees apart and install Flywheel Guide Studs tool (J–36235) in their place. Then loosen
and remove the remaining six pulley retaining bolts and hardened washers.
11. Remove the vibration damper assembly. Refer to section 36.1.
12. Remove front cover. Refer to section 37.2.
13. Remove connecting rod caps, and/or piston assemblies (if necessary). Refer to section
15.2.
14. Rotate the engine so the crankshaft is facing up.

15. Loosen and remove the main bearing cap bolts. Using Main Bearing Cap Puller tool
(J–48884), remove the main bearing caps for inspection.
NOTE:
Paint-mark the main bearing caps so that they can be installed to their respective,
original positions. The main bearing caps must be kept in sequence, so that they are
installed to their original positions.
16. Remove the thrust washers from each side of the No. 6 main bearing cap.
17. Remove the crankshaft.
TSM

17.3 INSPECTION OF THE CRANKSHAFT AND RELATED PARTS
Inspect as follows:
EYE INJURY
1. Inspect the crankshaft for cracks.

2. If the crankshaft shows evidence of excessive overheating, replace the crankshaft since the
heat treatment has probably been destroyed.
3. Clean out the oil passages thoroughly with a stiff wire brush. Clean the crankshaft with
fuel oil and dry it with compressed air.
TSM
4. Check the crankshaft journal surfaces for score marks and other imperfections. If
excessively scored, replace the crankshaft.
5. Carefully inspect the front end of the crankshaft in the area of the oil seal contact surface
for evidence of a rough or grooved condition. Any imperfections of the oil seal contact
surfaces will result in oil leakage at these points. If excessively scored, replace the
crankshaft.
6. Check the crankshaft thrust surfaces for excessive wear or grooving. If excessively worn,
replace the crankshaft.
7. Inspect the crankshaft gear for damage. Replace if necessary.
8. Check the crankshaft journal run-out.
□ Set journals number 1 and number 7 on a pair of V-blocks
□ Rotate crankshaft and measure journals with a dial indicator
Journal 1 Journal 2 Journal 3 Journal 4 Journal 5 Journal 6 Journal 7

On V-Block 0.040 mm 0.060 mm 0.090 mm 0.060 mm 0.040 mm On V-Block
(0.0015 in.) (0.0024 in.) (0.0035 in.) (0.0024 in.) (0.0015 in.)
Table 17-1 Maximum Crankshaft Journal Runout
9. Check journals for damage.

10. Check main and rod bearings for wear or scoring. Replace as necessary.
11. Inspect the thrust washers for wear or scoring. Replace as necessary.
12. Inspect the main cap bolt length. If the length exceeds 200.5 mm (7.89 in), replace the bolt.
13. Inspect the cylinder block journals. Refer to section 42.3.2.

17.4 INSTALLATION OF CRANKSHAFT
Install the crankshaft using the following procedure:
EYE INJURY
1. Steam clean the crankshaft to remove the rust preventive and blow out the oil passages
2. Install the upper main bearing shells in the block. If the old bearing shells are to be used
again, install them in the same locations from which they were removed.
TSM
NOTE:
When a new crankshaft is installed, ALL new main and connecting rod (upper and lower)
bearing shells and new thrust washers must also be installed.
3. Install the thrust washer upper halves in the counterbores on either side of the No. 6
bearing saddle. Coat the backs of the thrust washers (without oil grooves) with petroleum
jelly and install with the oil-grooved sides facing away from the saddle.
4. Apply clean engine oil 360 degrees around all crankshaft bearing journals and install
the crankshaft.
5. Install the lower main bearing shells in the main bearing caps as follows:
[a] Align the tang on the lower main bearing shell with the groove in the main bearing
cap. Install the bearing shell to the main bearing cap.
NOTE:
The main bearing caps are bored in position and stamped with position number. They
must be installed in their original positions, with the marked (numbered) side of each cap
toward the cooler side of the cylinder block.
[b] If the old bearing shells are to be used again, install them in the same bearing caps
from which they were removed.
6. Check main bearing cap bolt length.
DD13 175.5 mm (6.909 in.)

DD15 200.5 mm (7.894 in.)
Table 17-2 Maximum Main Bearing Cap Bolt Length
7. Install the main bearing caps together with lower bearing shells in place.

8. Apply a small quantity of clean engine oil to the bolt threads and underside of the bolt
heads. Install the main bearing cap bolts and draw them up snug.
9. Torque main bearing cap bolt torque to 50 N·m (36 lb·ft).
10. Check the crankshaft end play as follows:
[a] Move the crankshaft toward the gauge with a small 304 mm (less than 12 in.) pry bar.
Keep a constant pressure on the pry bar and zero the pointer on the dial indicator.
[b] Remove and insert the pry bar on the other side of the bearing cap. Force the
crankshaft in the opposite direction and note the amount of end play on the dial.
[c] The end play should be 0.099-0.419 mm (0.0039 -0.0165 in). Insufficient end play
can be the result of a misaligned No. 6 main bearing, a misaligned upper thrust
washer or a burr or dirt on the inner face of one or more of the thrust washers.
11. For the DD13, torque all of the main bearing cap bolts, in three steps, using the sequence
shown below. Torque the main bearing cap bolts to:
[a] 150 N·m (110 lb·ft)
TSM
[b] 300 N·m (221 lb·ft)
[c] 90° torque turn

12. For the DD15, torque all of the main bearing cap bolts, in four steps, using the sequence
shown below. Torque the main bearing cap bolts to:
[a] 150 N·m (110 lb·ft)
[b] 250 N·m (184 lb·ft)
[c] 1st 90° torque turn
[d] 2nd 90° torque turn
NOTE:
TSM
If the bearings have been installed properly, the crankshaft will turn freely with all of the
main bearing cap bolts drawn to the specified torque.
13. Install the piston and connecting rod assemblies. Refer to section 15.6.
14. If removed, install the cylinder head.
[a] For DD13 ONLY:Refer to section 14.3.
[b] For DD15 ONLY: refer to section 14.7.
15. If removed, install the camshaft housing. Refer to section 3.3.
16. If removed, install the gear train. Refer to section 5.2.
17. Install the flywheel housing. Refer to section 34.3.
18. Replace the rear crankshaft seal with new seal. Refer to section 17.6.
19. Install the flywheel. Refer to section 34.6
20. Install the oil pump, inlet and outlet pipes. Refer to section 21.4.
21. Replace the front crankshaft oil seal with new seal. Refer to section 17.8.
22. Install the crankshaft pulley and vibration damper assembly. Refer to section 36.2.

PERSONAL INJURY
24. Use a Cylinder Head/Engine Lifting Bar tool (W470589006200) with hooks attached to the
lifting brackets at each end of the engine and remove the engine from the overhaul stand.
25. Remove the overhaul stand adaptor plate from the engine block.
26. Install any accessories that were removed.
27. Install the engine to the equipment from which it was removed.
TSM
30. After replacing the main or connecting rod bearings or installing a new crankshaft, operate
the engine as outlined in the "Run-In Schedule." See DDC-SCV-MAN-0075.

17.5 REMOVAL OF CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL
17.5 REMOVAL OF CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL
Remove as follows:
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury before starting and running the engine,
ensure the vehicle is parked on a level surface, parking
brake is set, and the wheels are blocked.
1. Remove the flywheel from the flywheel housing (1).
NOTICE:
When drilling pilot holes in the seal, ensure that the drill is straight
and perpendicular to the seal. Failure to drill the holes straight
TSM
could result in damage to the seal bore, resulting in replacement
of the flywheel housing.
NOTE:
When drilling the holes for screws, make sure to coat the drill bit with grease to catch
the shavings.
2. Drill 3.174 mm (0.125 in) pilot holes in the seal (2); use the sheet metal screws and the
Rear Crankshaft Seal Installer & Remover tool (W470589004300); remove the seal (2)
and discard the seal.

17.6 INSTALLATION OF THE REAR OIL SEAL
Install as follows:
NOTE:
The standard size rear oil seal has an inside diameter of 138 mm (5.433 in.).
1. Inspect the contact area of the flywheel for damage and wear. If it is scored or worn,
replace it.
2. Install the new rear seal (2) onto the Rear Crankshaft Seal Installer & Remover tool
(W470589004300).
NOTE:
For ease of installation into the flywheel housing, apply a light coating of a soapy water
solution to the outer diameter (2) of the seal.
TSM
3. Position the seal into the flywheel housing (1).

17.6 INSTALLATION OF THE REAR OIL SEAL
4. Install the seal by turning the forcing screw until the tool bottoms out on the end of the
crankshaft.
TSM
5. Remove tool W470589004300 and visually check the seal and sealing lip for correct
installation.
6. Install the flywheel into the flywheel housing (1). Refer to section 34.6.

17.7 REMOVAL OF THE CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL
To remove the front crankshaft oil seal, use Front Crankshaft Seal Installer/Remover tool
(W541589023300).
Remove as follows:
1. Remove the poly-V-belts. Refer to section 40.1.
2. Remove the vibration damper pulley. Refer to section 36.1.
3. Install Front Crankshaft Seal Installer / Remover tool W541589023300.
NOTICE:
When drilling pilot holes for the removal of seal, ensure that the
drill is straight and perpendicular to the seal. Failure to drill the
hole straight could result in damage to the seal bore, resulting in
the replacement of the front cover.
TSM
NOTE:
When drilling the holes for screws, make sure to coat the drill bit with grease to catch
the shavings.
NOTE:
Handle the new seal with care. Do not bend the seal lip; bending the lip will damage the
seal and cause it to leak.
4. Drill 3.174 mm (0.125 in.) pilot holes in the seal, use the sheet metal screws and tool
W541589023300; remove the seal and discard the seal.

17.8 INSTALLATION OF THE CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL
Install as follows:
NOTE:
The standard size front seal has an inside diameter of 100 mm (3.937 in.).
NOTE:
Handle the new seal with care. Do not bend the seal lip; bending the lip will damage the
seal and cause it to leak.
EYE INJURY
TSM
1. Use air to clean the sealing surfaces on the cover and crankshaft.
NOTE:
Seal lip should face outward for proper installation.
NOTE:
For ease of installation into the front cover, apply a light coating of a soapy water solution
to the outer diameter (1) of the seal.
2. Install a new seal onto plastic seal installation tool.
NOTE:
The plastic seal installation tool is a one time use item; discard after using.

3. Install seal (1) and plastic installation tool (2) into the front cover (3) and crankshaft;
remove plastic seal installation tool (2) and discard.
TSM
4. Install Front Crankshaft Seal Installer/Remover tool (W541589023300) to the crankshaft.
5. Install the seal by turning the forcing screw until the tool bottoms out on the end of the
crankshaft.
6. Remove the tool and visually check the seal and sealing lip for correct installation. The
seal lip should face outward when installed correctly.

7. Install the vibration damper pulley and torque the eight bolts to 200 N·m (147.5 lb·ft).
Refer to section 36.2.
8. Install the poly-V belts. Refer to section 40.3.
TSM

Section Page
18.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

AND RELATED COMPONENTS .............................................................. 18-3
TSM
TSM

18.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM AND

RELATED COMPONENTS
A schematic of the lubrication system in the following illustration shows the oil flow to the engine
components. For the DD13 engine, see Figure18-1. For the DD15 engine, see Figure 18-2.
1. Engine Brake
2. Turbocharger
TSM 6. Backflow Valve
7. Suction Pipe
11. Oil Refill
12. Intake Rocker Arm Supply
Spindle
3. Crankcase Breather 8. Oil Spray Nozzle 13. Engine Brake Supply
4. Oil Pump 9. Oil Cooler and Housing 14. Exhaust Rocker Arm Supply
Spindle
5. Pressure Valve 10. Oil Filter 15. Gear Train Oil Supply
16. Main Bearing Supply
Figure 18-1 DD13 Oil Flow Schematic

18.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED COMPONENTS
1. Engine Brake
TSM 10. Oil Cooler and Housing
2. Turbocharger 11. Oil Filter
3. Axial Power Turbine 12. Oil Refill
4. Crankcase Breather 13. Intake Rocker Arm Spindle Supply
5. Oil Pump 14. Engine Brake Supply
6. Pressure Valve 15. Exhaust Rocker Arm Spindle Supply
7. Backflow Valve 16. Gear Train Oil Supply
8. Suction Pipe 17. Main Bearing Supply
9. Oil Spray Nozzle
Figure 18-2 DD15 Oil Flow Schematic

19 OIL PAN
Section Page

COMPONENTS ....................................................................................... 19-3
TSM
19.2 REMOVAL OF OIL PAN ........................................................................... 19-4
19.3 CLEANING OF OIL PAN .......................................................................... 19-5
19.4 INSPECTION OF OIL PAN ...................................................................... 19-6
19.5 REMOVAL OF THREADED INSERT — PLASTIC OIL PAN ONLY ......... 19-7
19.6 INSTALLATION OF THREADED INSERT — PLASTIC OIL PAN ONLY . 19-8
19.7 INSTALLATION OF OIL PAN ................................................................... 19-9
TSM


COMPONENTS
Depending on manufacturer, the oil pan is either glass fiber reinforced plastic or aluminum.
Sealing of the oil pan takes place using a metal elastomer pre-formed gasket for the aluminum
pan or an elastomer gasket for the plastic pan. The oil pan seal has high sealing reliability and
noise reduction. In order to determine the engine oil level, there is a conventional oil dipstick.
TSM
1. Bolt & Isolator 5. Bolt 9. Bolt 13. Dipstick & Tube 17. Threaded Insert
2. Oil Pan 6. Nut 10. Bolt 14. Clamp 18. Seal Ring
3. Gasket 7. Bracket 11. Bracket 15. Adapter 19. Connecting Nut
4. Bolt 8. Clamp 12. Bracket 16. Seal 20. Seal Ring
21. Drain Plug
Figure 19-1 Oil Pan and Related Parts

19.2 REMOVAL OF OIL PAN
19.2 REMOVAL OF OIL PAN
Remove as follows:
1. Open the oil filter and cap.
2. Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil.
3. Remove the dipstick.
4. Loosen the dipstick tube on the oil pan. Refer to section 20.2.
5. Remove bolt at harness P-clamp on front center of oil pan.
6. Loosen the eighteen oil pan bolts. Bolts will remain installed to the pan.
7. Remove the oil pan, taking care not to damage the oil pump inlet pipe and screen.
8. Remove the oil pan seal and check for damage.
TSM

19.3 CLEANING OF OIL PAN
Clean as follows:
1. Clean the oil pan and attaching hardware with clean fuel oil or solvent.

2. Dry with compressed air.
NOTICE:
Do not use solvents to clean gaskets. Damage to the gasket will
result.
TSM
3. Clean the surfaces the cylinder block, all four T-joints, front cover, oil pan, and flywheel
housing where they mate.

19.4 INSPECTION OF OIL PAN
19.4 INSPECTION OF OIL PAN
Inspect as follows:
1. Check bolts and isolator assemblies for dryness, tears, or damage. Replace as necessary.
2. Check oil pan for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as necessary.
3. Inspect threaded inserts for cracks or damage. Replace as necessary.
4. Clean seals and lubricate seal grooves (if applicable) with clean fuel oil and inspect for
cracks or tears. If damage is found, replace oil pan.
TSM

19.5 REMOVAL OF THREADED INSERT — PLASTIC OIL PAN ONLY
Remove as follows:
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to section 19.2.
2. Remove threaded insert using Snap-On® tool GLD139, or equivalent. Discard O-ring.
TSM

19.6 INSTALLATION OF THREADED INSERT — PLASTIC OIL PAN ONLY
19.6 INSTALLATION OF THREADED INSERT — PLASTIC OIL PAN ONLY
Install as follows:
1. Install new O-ring on threaded insert.
2. Install threaded insert into oil pan.
3. Install threaded insert connecting nut and torque to 100 N·m (73 lb·ft).
TSM

19.7 INSTALLATION OF OIL PAN
Install as follows:
1. When a plastic pan is used, insert the raised lip portion of the seal into the groove in the
oil pan. Press down on the isolator seal and insert it completely around the oil pan. Be
careful not to stretch or bunch the seal. For best results, install the seal at each corner,
then at points half way between the corners. Continue in this manner, halving the distance
and seating the seal.
2. For the aluminum pan, place the gasket on the top of the pan.
3. Reapply Loctite® 5970 or equivalent to the four corner squares in gasket.
TSM
4. Install the eighteen oil pan bolts and sleeve assemblies through the pan rail into the holes
in the gasket.
5. Ensure the joint surfaces of the gear case, the cylinder block, and front cover are cleaned
and there is no damage that could prevent sealing.
6. Install the oil pan assembly in position on the cylinder block.

7. Ensure that the seal has not been disturbed. Torque the eighteen oil pan bolt assemblies to
20 N·m (15 lb·ft) using the proper sequence.
TSM
8. Install the oil pan drain plug and torque the plug to 45 N·m (33 lb·ft).
9. Install bolt at harness P-clamp on front center of oil pan.
10. Install dipstick tube fitting if removed from pan and torque to specification listed in Table
19-1.
Fitting Thread Size Torque Spec

Fitting to pan M20x1.5 60 N·m (44 lb·ft)
Table 19-1 Torque Specs for Pan Fittings
11. Install dipstick tube on fitting and tighten clamp. Refer to section 20.3.
12. Install dipstick.
13. Install oil filter and cap. Torque to 55 N·m (40 lb·ft).
14. If oil pump was removed, follow section 21.4.
15. Prime the lubrication system. Refer to section 27.1.
16. Refill the oil pan with lubricating oil. (refer to specs for oil quantities).

ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.
17. Start the engine and inspect for leaks.
TSM

TSM

20 OIL DIPSTICK TUBE
Section Page

TSM
20.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL DIPSTICK TUBE ............................................... 20-4
20.3 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL DIPSTICK TUBE ....................................... 20-5
TSM


RELATED COMPONENTS
DD Platform engines share a similar oil dipstick tube design. The dipstick inserts into the oil pan
through the dipstick guide tube and oil pan adaptor. A lower dipstick bracket and hose clamp
secure the assembly to the cylinder block. The oil dipstick tube and oil pan adaptor allow the
dipstick to extend into the oil. The oil level is observed by removing the dipstick and reading
the oil level.
TSM
1. Upper Dipstick Stabilizing Bracket (DD15 only) 4. Oil Dipstick Tube
2. Dipstick 5. Hose Clamp
3. Lower Dipstick Bracket 6. Oil Pan Adaptor

20.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL DIPSTICK TUBE
20.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL DIPSTICK TUBE
Remove as follows:
1. Loosen the hose clamp (6) attaching oil dipstick tube (2) to the oil pan adaptor.
2. Remove all P-clips (4) attaching oil dipstick tube to bracket (1) and upper bracket on the
DD15 and DD16.
3. Remove oil dipstick tube from engine.
TSM

20.3 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL DIPSTICK TUBE
1. Install oil dipstick tube (2) onto the oil pan adaptor.
2. Attach all P-clips (4) to the bracket (1) and upper bracket on DD15 and DD16.
3. Tighten the hose clamp (6) attaching the oil dipstick tube to the adaptor.
TSM

20.3 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL DIPSTICK TUBE
TSM

21 OIL PUMP
Section Page

COMPONENTS ....................................................................................... 21-3
TSM
LINES ....................................................................................................... 21-4
LINES ....................................................................................................... 21-5
OIL LINES ................................................................................................ 21-6
TSM


COMPONENTS
The oil pump supplies all of the engine oil circuits with engine oil. The oil pump ensures that
engine oil is available under all operating conditions, in adequate quantities, at the required
pressure, and to the respective locations.
A crankshaft drive gear drives the oil pump drive gear. The oil pump drive gear drives the two
impellers within the oil pump housing. The rotational movement of the impellers and the design
of the pump chamber suctions the engine oil from the oil pan, through oil strainer to the oil pump
inlet. The engine oil is delivered under pressure to the oil pump outlet, to the oil pump pressure
line and then through the return flow check valve to the main oil duct, into the engine oil circuit.
The pressure regulator valve regulates engine oil pressure. The pressure regulator valve has the
oil pressure applied to it from the engine oil in the main oil duct. Excess engine oil is fed by the
pressure regulator valve to the suction side according to the oil pressure in the main oil duct. This
regulates the engine oil pressure and reduces the operating energy input of the oil pump. High
pressures in the oil circuit are avoided using the safety valve. High pressure can occur in the cold
start phase of the engine if the engine oil is not yet of sufficient viscosity. The safety valve opens
TSM
at a pressure >10 bar and directs part of the engine oil back into oil pan.

21.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL PUMP, OIL SUCTION MANIFOLD, AND OIL LINES
LINES
Remove as follows:
1. Remove oil drain plug from the oil pan and drain the oil.
3. Remove the four bolts (2) securing the oil suction manifold (1) to the engine block (3).
4. Remove the oil suction manifold (1), oil lines (6 and 11) and O-rings (5 and 10). Discard
the O-rings.
5. Remove the three bolts (7) securing the oil pump (9) to the engine block (3) and remove
the oil pump assembly (8 and 9) from the engine block.
TSM

LINES
Inspect as follows:

1. Wash all parts in clean fuel oil and dry them with compressed air.
2. Clean the suction and pressure pipe and screen in clean fuel oil and blow dry with
compressed air.
TSM

21.4 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL PUMP, OIL SUCTION MANIFOLD, AND OIL LINES

OIL LINES
Install as follows:
1. Check the oil pump part number to be sure it is correct for this application.
2. Position the oil pump on the cylinder block so that the drive gear of the oil pump meshes
with the crankshaft gear.
3. Install oil pump with three bolts. Torque the bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
4. Install oil lines with new O-rings on each end.
5. Install four bolts and secure the oil intake manifold to the cylinder block. Torque the
bolts to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
TSM

22 CRANKCASE BREATHER
Section Page
22.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CRANKCASE BREATHER ........ 22-3

22.2 REMOVAL OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER ...................................... 22-5
TSM
22.3 INSPECTION OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER ................................. 22-6
22.4 INSTALLATION OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER .............................. 22-7
TSM

22.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CRANKCASE BREATHER
The crankcase breather is located below the turbocharger on DD Platform engines, next to the
starter on the right hand side of the cylinder block. The crankcase breather has the primary task of
regulating the pressure in the crankcase as well as cleaning discharged blow-by gases. The gases
from the crankcase contain engine oil that can lead to adverse effects on engine emission levels.
The blow-by gas produced by the engine passes into the blow-by gas inlet in the crankcase
breather housing. In the housing, the blow-by gas flows to the centrifuge. The centrifuge drive
gear is driven by pressurized engine oil, causing the centrifuge to turn. The centrifugal force
that is created causes the blow-by gas to be pushed against the inside wall of the housing. The
engine oil contained in the blow-by gas runs along the inside wall downwards and flows to the
outlet for the engine oil that has been separated back into the oil pan. The cleaned blow-by gas
flows to the outlet for blow-by gas to the atmosphere. The crankcase breather is maintenance
free for the working life of the component.
TSM
1. Bolt 7. Inlet Tube
2. Gasket 8. Bolt
3. Outlet Tube 9. Bolt
4. Bolt 10. Seal
5. Gasket 11. Crankcase Breather
6. Gasket
Figure 22-1 EPA07 Crankcase Breather and Related Parts

22.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CRANKCASE BREATHER
TSM
1. Bolt 7. Bracket
2. Crankcase Breather Housing 8. O-ring
3. Gasket 9. Screw
4. Threaded Fitting 10. Speed Sensor
5. Breather Pipe 11. O-ring
6. Screw
Figure 22-2 EPA10 Crankcase Breather and Related Parts

22.2 REMOVAL OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER
Remove as follows:
1. Disconnect speed sensor electrical harness connection, on EPA10 engines, from the
crankcase breather and unclip the electrical harness from the crankcase breather assembly.
NOTE:
Note orientation of bracket located on top bolt.
2. On EPA07 engines, remove the two bolts and gasket from the breather pipe. Discard
gasket.
3. On EPA10 engines, disconnect the quick-connect fitting at the cylinder block.
4. Remove the four bolts and gasket from the crankcase breather and remove crankcase
breather from the cylinder block. Discard the gasket.
TSM

22.3 INSPECTION OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER
22.3 INSPECTION OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER
Inspect as follows:
1. Clean the gasket surface of the engine block prior to installation of crankcase breather.
2. Inspect the tubes, clamps and hoses for wear or damage; replace if necessary.
3. Inspect the crankcase breather for cracks or damage; replace if necessary.
4. Inspect the sensor and replace, if necessary.
TSM

22.4 INSTALLATION OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER
Install as follows:
1. Install the crankcase breather to the engine block with a new gasket and four bolts. Torque
the bolts to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
NOTE:
Bracket is installed on top bolt.
2. On EPA07 engines, install the breather pipe and new gasket to the engine block. Torque
the two bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
3. On EPA10 engines, snap the breather pipe to the fitting on the cylinder block.
ENGINE EXHAUST
TSM
exhaust is toxic.
PERSONAL INJURY
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth
defects, and other reproductive harm.
□ Always start and operate an engine in a well ventilated
area.
□ If operating an engine in an enclosed area, vent the
exhaust to the outside.
□ Do not modify or tamper with the exhaust system or
emission control system.
4. Connect electrical harness, if equipped.


22.4 INSTALLATION OF THE CRANKCASE BREATHER
TSM

23 OIL FILTER
Section Page
23.1 REPLACEMENT OF THE OIL FILTER .................................................... 23-3
TSM
TSM

23.1 REPLACEMENT OF THE OIL FILTER
“Oil Filter Removal Video”

Remove as follows:
1. Using a 36-mm socket, unscrew the oil filter cap (1) and filter (3), and allow the oil to drain
into the housing. After draining is complete, remove the assembly from the housing (4).
NOTE:
TSM
For EVO Bus, when removing the filter, separate the cap from the filter before pulling
out of the module. Remove as two separate components.
NOTE:
Use care to prevent foreign objects from entering the filter housing.
2. Remove the filter element by pressing and twisting the side and detaching it from the
cap. Discard the filter element.
3. Remove the oil filter O-ring and discard. Lightly coat a new O-ring with clean engine
oil and install it on the filter cap.
4. Check the filter housing for any debris and remove if necessary.
5. Insert a new filter element into the oil filter cap.
6. Insert the filter element and cap assembly into the housing. Torque the cap to 40-50
N·m (30-37 lb·ft).

23.1 REPLACEMENT OF THE OIL FILTER
TSM

24 OIL SAMPLE VALVE
Section Page
24.1 REPLACING OIL PLUG WITH OIL SAMPLE VALVE .............................. 24-3
24.2 REMOVAL OF OIL SAMPLE VALVE ....................................................... 24-4
TSM
24.3 INSTALLATION OF OIL SAMPLE VALVE ................................................ 24-5
TSM

24.1 REPLACING OIL PLUG WITH OIL SAMPLE VALVE
Replace oil plug with oil sample valve as follows:

1. Using a 17 mm Allen tool remove the Allen head plug from the oil priming port on the
oil coolant module.
TSM
2. Install the oil sample valve onto the oil coolant module. Torque to 80 N·m (59 lb·ft).

24.2 REMOVAL OF OIL SAMPLE VALVE
24.2 REMOVAL OF OIL SAMPLE VALVE
Remove as follows:
Remove the oil sample valve and washer from the oil coolant module.
TSM

24.3 INSTALLATION OF OIL SAMPLE VALVE
Install as follows:
Install the oil sample valve and washer onto the oil coolant module and torque to 80 N·m (59 lb·ft).
TSM

24.3 INSTALLATION OF OIL SAMPLE VALVE
TSM

25 OIL FILLER NECK
Section Page
25.1 REMOVAL OF THE OIL FILLER NECK ................................................... 25-3

25.2 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL FILLER NECK ........................................... 25-4
TSM
TSM

25.1 REMOVAL OF THE OIL FILLER NECK
1. Remove three bolts (5) from the oil filler neck (2).
2. Remove oil filler neck (2) from the oil coolant module (6).
3. Discard O-ring (1).
TSM

25.2 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL FILLER NECK
25.2 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL FILLER NECK
1. Install new O-ring (1).

2. Install oil filler neck (2) on the oil coolant module (6).
3. Install three bolts (5) and torque to 27-31 N·m (20-22 lb·ft).
TSM

26 OIL COOLANT MODULE
Section Page
26.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE .. 26-3

26.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE ........................................ 26-5
TSM
26.3 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE ................................ 26-7
26.4 REMOVAL OF THE OIL THERMOSTAT .................................................. 26-9
26.5 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL THERMOSTAT .......................................... 26-11
TSM

26.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE
The oil filter unit is an integral part of the oil coolant module. The oil coolant module is located
on the left side of the engine. The oil filter unit ensures engine oil filtering.
Engine oil flows through the oil water heat exchanger and then to the main oil stream feed into the
oil filter unit. Oil flows into the oil filter unit from outside of the oil coolant module through the
oil filter element to the support dome where it is cleaned. The cleaned engine oil flows to the
support dome and main oil flow drain back into the oil circuit.
TSM
1. Coolant Pump 4. Oil Filter Unit
2. Oil Coolant Module 5. Oil Fill
3. Oil Water Heat Exchanger
Figure 26-1 Oil Coolant Module Location

26.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE
1. Bolt
2. Pulley
3. Bolt
4. Water Pump
Figure 26-2
TSM 5. Water Pump Seal
6. Oil Cooler Module
7. Thermostat Seal
8. Thermostat
9. Bolt
Oil Coolant Module and Related Parts

26.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE
Remove as follows:
1. Drain coolant from the radiator. Refer to OEM procedures.
2. Open the drain plug (1) on the cylinder block located next to the oil coolant module and t.
TSM
3. Remove engine harness connectors from the coolant temperature sensor, Intake Air
Temperature Sensor, and Throttle Valve. Unclip the harness from the oil coolant module.
4. Remove the coolant delivery pipe, mixer pipe, cold boost pipe and throttle valve assembly.
5. Remove the heater, coolant recovery, and EGR coolant supply hoses from oil coolant
module. Inspect the coolant coupler hose for damage. Discard if damage is found.
6. Disconnect the coolant line from the fuel module to the oil coolant module.
7. Remove the poly-V-belt from the water pump pulley. Refer to section 40.1.
8. Remove the radiator hose from the thermostat housing.
NOTE:
Ensure any remaining coolant is drained from the oil coolant module and from the
cylinder block to prevent coolant from contaminating the engine oil.
9. Remove the radiator support rod and bracket.

10. Remove the oil dipstick tube by removing the two bolts and bracket attaching it to the
cylinder block.
11. Remove eleven bolts securing oil coolant module to engine block and remove oil coolant
module.

26.2 REMOVAL OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE
12. Remove and discard the gasket.
TSM

26.3 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE
Install as follows:
1. Install thermostat to oil coolant module with four bolts. Torque to 20-25 N·m (15-19 lb·ft).
2. Install Exhaust Manifold Guide Studs tool (J–36107) into the cylinder block to assist in
guiding the oil coolant module onto the cylinder block.
3. Install new gasket.
4. Install the oil coolant module onto the guide studs and cylinder block.
5. Install eleven bolts and torque to the following:
□ 10 N·m (7 lb·ft)
□ Final torque the bolts to 60-65 N·m (44-47 lb·ft)
TSM
6. Remove tool (J–36107). Install the remaining two bolts into the oil cooler module. Torque
the bolts to the following:
□ 10 N·m (7 lb·ft)
□ Final torque the bolts to 60-65 N·m (44-47 lb·ft)
7. Install the dipstick tube and two bolts and torque to 15 N·m (11 lb·ft).
8. Install the radiator support strut bracket. Torque to 100 N·m (74 lb·ft).
9. Install water pump if removed. Refer to section 29.4.
10. Install poly-V-belt to water pump pulley. Refer to section 40.3.
11. Install electrical engine harness to the sensor.
12. Connect coolant line to fuel module and oil coolant module.
13. Install heater hose to oil coolant module.

26.3 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL COOLANT MODULE
14. If open, close the drain plug on the cylinder block located next to the oil coolant module.
NOTE:
Before installing coolant crossover pipe, check the coupler hose for damage. Replace
as necessary.
15. Install EGR coolant delivery pipe and hose to oil coolant module and tighten the two
hose clamps.
16. Install the two EGR coolant delivery pipe bolts to the oil coolant module and torque to
30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
17. Install cold boost pipe and four bolts to intake manifold. Torque bolts to 12 N·m (9 lb·ft).
18. If removed, install mixer tube to cold boost pipe with three bolts. Torque 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
19. If removed, install the intake throttle valve to cold boost pipe. Torque bolts to 30 N·m
(22 lb·ft).
20. Fill the coolant system.
TSM

26.4 REMOVAL OF THE OIL THERMOSTAT
Remove as follows:
1. Place a suitable oil capturing device under the oil coolant module.
2. Unclip electrical harness from the oil thermostat cover.
3. Remove four bolts (2) attaching the oil thermostat cover (1) to the oil coolant module (3).
TSM
4. Using tool W470589030900, remove the thermostat from the oil coolant module housing.

26.4 REMOVAL OF THE OIL THERMOSTAT
5. Discard the seal (3) and the O-ring (4).
TSM

26.5 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL THERMOSTAT
Install as follows:
1. Install a new O-ring (4) on the oil thermostat (5).
TSM
2. Using tool W470589030900, install the thermostat to the oil coolant module housing.
Torque to 50 N·m (37 lb·ft).

26.5 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL THERMOSTAT
3. Install new seal, install the oil thermostat cover (1) to the oil coolant module (3) using four
bolts (2). Torque the bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
TSM
4. Connect the electrical harness to the sensor.
5. Clip electrical harness to the oil thermostat cover.

27 PRIMING THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Section Page
27.1 PRIMING THE ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM .................................. 27-3
TSM
TSM

27.1 PRIMING THE ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Prime the oil system as follows:

1. Using a 17 mm Allen tool, remove the Allen head plug from the oil priming port on
the oil coolant module.
NOTE:
Tool J–49181 is used to adapt the J–45299 priming pump.
TSM
2. If equipped with an oil sample valve, remove the valve and washer.

3. Install Oil System Priming Adaptor tool (J–49181) into the oil priming port (1) in the
oil coolant module.
TSM
4. Install Engine Preluber Kit (J–45299) to the fitting adaptor (1).
5. Fill the canister with eight quarts of oil.

6. Open the valve on the primer and start pumping until the container is empty.
7. Fill the container with an additional eight quarts of oil and pump until the canister is empty.
8. The oil system is now primed with sixteen quarts of oil. Pour the remaining oil into the oil
filler until the correct full level is obtained.

9. Close the valve and loosen the fitting; do not completely remove it from the adaptor.
10. Remove the priming adaptor (1) from the oil coolant module (2) with the line attached to
keep the oil from flowing out of the module.
11. Install the allen head plug or oil sample valve to the module and torque to 70-80 N·m
(51-59 lb·ft).
TSM ENGINE EXHAUST

operate the engine in a well-ventilated area.
exhaust is toxic.
Engine
12. Start the engine and monitor the oil pressure.

13. After the engine oil pressure stabilizes, shut the engine down and check the oil per the
oil check guidelines.

TSM

28 COOLING SYSTEM
Section Page

TSM
TSM


RELATED COMPONENTS
A schematic of the cooling system in the following illustration shows the coolant flow to the
engine components.
TSM
1. Coolant Pump 10. Fan 19. Heat Exchanger M. Engine
2. Oil Cooler 11. Radiator 20. Doser R. Auto Trans Cooler Flow
3. Crankcase 12. Reservoir A97. EGR Actuator V. Coolant Feed
4. Cylinder Head 13. Coolant Filter B65. 1 Inlet Temp Sensor VA.Clt EGR to Clr Actuator
5. Water Manifold 14. Heat Exchanger B65. 2 Outlet Temp Sensor VH. Clt Heat Exchanger
6. Compressor 15. Filling Valve B. Coolant Fill Line VM. Clt to Doser
7. EGR Cooler 16. Pressure Control Valve E. De-aeration
8. Fuel Cooler 17. Oil/Coolant Module KK. Radiator Circuit
9. Thermostat 18. Trans Cooler KS. Bypass Line
Figure 28-1 Cooling System

28.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COOLING SYSTEM AND RELATED COMPONENTS
1. Water Pump
2. Coolant Filter
3. Short Circuit Line
4. Coolant Return Flow
TSM
5. Coolant Outlet to Cooler Circuit
8. Water Manifold
9. Cylinder Head
10. Cylinder Block
11. Air Compressor
12. Fuel Cooler
6. Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler 13. Oil/Water Heat Exchanger
7. Coolant Return Flow 14. Thermostat
Figure 28-2 Cooling System Components

29 ENGINE WATER PUMP
Section Page
29.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ENGINE WATER PUMP ............ 29-3

29.2 REMOVAL OF THE WATER PUMP ......................................................... 29-4
TSM
29.3 INSPECTION OF THE WATER PUMP .................................................... 29-5
29.4 INSTALLATION OF THE WATER PUMP ................................................. 29-6
TSM

29.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ENGINE WATER PUMP
The water pump is located on the left side of the engine, mounted on the front of the oil coolant
module. The water pump circulates the coolant in the cooling circuit.
The water pump pulley is mounted to the water pump with five bolts. The water pump is driven
by the poly-V-belt that is installed onto the water pump pulley. The rotary motion of the pulley
is transmitted by the hub to the shaft. The shaft drives the impeller which causes the coolant
to circulate in the coolant circuit.
1. Bolt
2. Water Pump Pulley
3. Bolt
TSM 4. Water Pump
5. Water Pump Seal
6. Oil Coolant Module
Figure 29-1 Water Pump and Related Parts

29.2 REMOVAL OF THE WATER PUMP
29.2 REMOVAL OF THE WATER PUMP
Remove as follows:
1. Drain the coolant from radiator. Refer to OEM procedures.
3. Loosen the five bolts securing the water pump pulley to the water pump.
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury to hands and fingers from the spring-loaded
auto belt tensioner violently snapping back, do not cut the
belt to remove it.
4. Remove the accessory drive belt. Refer to section 40.1.
TSM
5. Remove the five bolts (1) securing the coolant pulley (2) to the water pump (4); and
remove pulley from water pump.
6. Remove nine bolts (3) from the water pump and remove from the oil coolant module (6).

29.3 INSPECTION OF THE WATER PUMP
Slight weeping from the weep hole in the bottom of water pump is normal. The water pump
should only be replaced if there is a heavy leak from the weep hole. The water pump should only
be replaced after all of the following inspections have been performed.
Inspect as follows:
NOTICE:
Before replacing the water pump for a belt noise there are some
basic checks that need to be done. Refer to the “Belt Noise”
section in the Troubleshooting Manual to correctly determine the
cause of the belt noise.
1. Clean the water pump and surrounding area.

TSM
3. Remove the water pump.
4. Inspect the inside of the water pump (1) for cavitations or corrosion, replace pump if
damaged.
5. Inspect the blades (3) on the water pump for cracks or damage; replace the pump if
damaged.
6. Inspect the bearings in the pump for slop, tight, or a choppy feeling; replace the pump if
damaged.
7. Inspect the water pump seal (2) for damage. Replace the seal if damaged.

29.4 INSTALLATION OF THE WATER PUMP
29.4 INSTALLATION OF THE WATER PUMP
Install as follows:
1. Install the water pump seal (5) to the water pump (4).
2. Install the water pump (4) to the oil coolant module (6) with nine bolts (3) and torque to
30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
3. Install the water pump pulley (2) to the water pump with five bolts (1) and finger tighten
and install belt.
TSM
4. Install the poly-V-belt. Refer to section 40.3.
5. Torque the water pump pulley bolts to 25 N·m (18 lb·ft).
6. Fill the coolant system.
7. Reconnect the batteries.
ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.
8. Start the engine and inspect for leaks.

30 COOLANT THERMOSTAT
Section Page
30.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT ........ 30-3

30.2 REMOVAL OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL ........................... 30-5
TSM
30.3 INSPECTION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL ....................... 30-6
30.4 INSTALLATION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL .................... 30-7
TSM

30.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT
The coolant thermostat is located on the left side of the engine on the oil coolant module. The
coolant thermostat regulates the coolant inlet temperature in a range from 87°C (188° F) to
95°C (203°F).
1. Oil Coolant Module

2. Seal
Figure 30-1
TSM 3. Thermostat
Thermostat and Related Parts
The coolant thermostat regulates coolant flow from the engine to the radiator. The thermostat
regulates coolant flow to control the temperature of the coolant within the coolant circuit.
The following benefits result from regulating the coolant at the inlet temperature of the engine:
□ Reduced thermal cycling of the engine
□ Operating temperature is reached faster
□ Emissions are reduced
□ Improved vehicle heating

30.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT
Thermostat Operating Modes

The coolant from the radiator and the radiator bypass mix in the thermostat housing. The
thermostat regulates the temperature of this mixed flow circuit.
Three different operating conditions occur due to the coolant mixed flow temperature:
□ Bypass mode: When the coolant mixed flow temperature is below 87°C (188°F), the
circulating thermostat is closed. The coolant circulates through the radiator bypass to the
coolant thermostat. None of the flow passes through the radiator.
□ Mixed mode: For a coolant mixed flow temperature above 87°C (188°F) to and less than
95°C (203°F), the circulating thermostat opens partially and the coolant flows at the same
time through the engine radiator and the radiator bypass to the coolant thermostat .
□ Radiator operation: When the coolant inlet temperature is above 95°C (203°F) the
circulating thermostat is completely open. The coolant flows through the radiator to the
coolant thermostat. None of the flow passes through the radiator bypass.
Other minor coolant loops exist in addition to those described above. The flow through these
loops are unaffected by the position of the coolant thermostat. These loops include the flow
through the vehicle cab heater, vehicle bunk heater, the EGR actuator, and the doser.
TSM

30.2 REMOVAL OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL
Remove as follows:
HOT COOLANT
To avoid scalding from the expulsion of hot coolant, never
remove the cooling system pressure cap while the engine
is at operating temperature. Wear adequate protective
clothing (face shield, rubber gloves, apron, and boots).
Remove the cap slowly to relieve pressure.

2. Remove the plug on the cylinder block below the oil coolant module to drain the
remaining coolant.
TSM
3. Loosen hose clamp at the thermostat.
4. Remove the four thermostat housing-to-oil cooler module attaching bolts.
5. Remove the thermostat housing assembly from the oil coolant module and hose.
6. Remove the thermostat housing seal.

30.3 INSPECTION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL
30.3 INSPECTION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL
Inspect thermostat as follows:

1. Visually inspect all parts for wear or damage.
[a] If wear or damage is found, replace parts.
[b] If wear or damage is not found, reuse parts.
2. Visually inspect thermostat body seal for damage, cracks or nicks.
[a] If any damage is noted, replace seal.
[b] If no damage is found, reuse parts.
3. Visually inspect the tip of the thermostat for wear or damage.
[a] If wear or damage is found, replace parts.
[b] If wear or damage is not found, reuse parts.
TSM

30.4 INSTALLATION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL
Install as follows:
1. Install seal (2) onto thermostat housing (3).
2. Install thermostat into hose and onto oil cooler module (1).
3. Torque four bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
4. Tighten clamp at the hose.
TSM
5. Fill engine with coolant to the correct level.
ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.

30.4 INSTALLATION OF COOLANT THERMOSTAT AND SEAL
TSM

31 COOLANT FILTER
Section Page
31.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COOLANT FILTER ..................... 31-3

31.2 REMOVAL OF THE COOLANT FILTER .................................................. 31-4
TSM
31.3 INSTALLATION OF THE COOLANT FILTER .......................................... 31-5
TSM

31.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF COOLANT FILTER
DD Platform engine cooling systems are protected by a coolant filter element that may contain
supplemental corrosion inhibitors.
TSM

31.2 REMOVAL OF THE COOLANT FILTER
31.2 REMOVAL OF THE COOLANT FILTER
Remove as follows:
1. Using a 36 mm wrench, remove the cap (1) from the oil coolant module (4).
2. Pull the coolant filter (3) out of the oil coolant module.
3. Discard the O-ring (2) in the cap.
TSM

31.3 INSTALLATION OF THE COOLANT FILTER
Install as follows:
1. Install a new O-ring (2) onto the cap.
2. Install a new coolant filter (3) into the cap (1).
3. Install coolant filter and cap into the oil coolant module (4). Torque cap to 55-60 N·m
(41-44 lb·ft).
TSM

31.3 INSTALLATION OF THE COOLANT FILTER
TSM

32 COOLANT FILTER SERVICE MODULE
Section Page
32.1 REMOVAL OF COOLANT FILTER SERVICE MODULE ......................... 32-3

32.2 INSTALLATION OF COOLANT FILTER SERVICE MODULE .................. 32-4
TSM
TSM

32.1 REMOVAL OF COOLANT FILTER SERVICE MODULE
Remove as follows:
1. Drain coolant.
2. Remove hose clamps and remove hoses.
3. Remove ten bolts from the Coolant Filter Service Module and remove service module
from engine.
4. Discard the O-rings (3 and 4) and the seals (5).
TSM

32.2 INSTALLATION OF COOLANT FILTER SERVICE MODULE
32.2 INSTALLATION OF COOLANT FILTER SERVICE MODULE
Install as follows:
1. Install new O-rings and seals. Lubricate with clean coolant.
2. Install Coolant Filter Service Module on the oil cooler module.
3. Install the ten bolts and torque to 37 N·m (27 lb·ft).
TSM
4. Install hoses and hose clamps.
5. Fill coolant to appropriate level.
ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.
6. Start engine and check for leaks.

33 COOLANT INLET ELBOW
Section Page
33.1 REMOVAL OF THE COOLANT INLET ELBOW ...................................... 33-3

33.2 INSTALLATION OF THE COOLANT INLET ELBOW .............................. 33-4
TSM
TSM

33.1 REMOVAL OF THE COOLANT INLET ELBOW
Remove as follows:
1. Drain coolant.
2. Remove two bolts from the coolant inlet elbow.
3. Remove the coolant inlet elbow from the coolant service filter module.
4. Remove and discard the O-ring.
TSM

33.2 INSTALLATION OF THE COOLANT INLET ELBOW
33.2 INSTALLATION OF THE COOLANT INLET ELBOW
Install as follows:
1. Install new O-ring.
2. Install the coolant inlet elbow to the coolant filter service module with two bolts.
3. Torque bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
TSM
4. Fill coolant to appropriate level.
ENGINE EXHAUST
exhaust is toxic.
5. Start engine and check for leaks.

34 FLYWHEEL AND FLYWHEEL HOUSING
Section Page

HOUSING AND RELATED PARTS .......................................................... 34-3
TSM
34.2 REMOVAL OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING .................................................... 34-6
34.3 INSTALLATION OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING ............................................ 34-7
34.4 REMOVAL OF THE FLYWHEEL .............................................................. 34-9
34.5 INSPECTION OF FLYWHEEL ................................................................. 34-10
34.6 INSTALLATION OF FLYWHEEL .............................................................. 34-11
OF CRANKSHAFT ................................................................................... 34-12
34.8 REMOVAL OF RING GEAR ..................................................................... 34-13
34.9 INSTALLATION OF RING GEAR ............................................................. 34-14
TSM


HOUSING AND RELATED PARTS
This section explains the description(s) and operation(s) of the following components:
□ Flywheel
□ Ring Gear
□ Flywheel Housing
34.1.1 Flywheel
The flywheel is attached to the rear end of the crankshaft with twelve bolts. The bolt holes in the
crankshaft and flywheel are equally spaced.
34.1.2 Ring Gear
The steel ring gear and flywheel is a two-piece assembly. Prior to assembly, the ring gear is heated
TSM
to expand its diameter. It is then installed onto the flywheel and allowed to cool. After the ring
gear cools, it contracts onto the flywheel, locking it in place.
1. Steel Ring Gear 2. Flywheel

34.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF FLYWHEEL, FLYWHEEL HOUSING AND RELATED PARTS
34.1.3 Flywheel Housing
The flywheel housing is a one-piece aluminum casting mounted against the rear of the engine. It
provides a cover for the gear drive and houses the flywheel. The crankshaft rear oil seal, which is
pressed into the housing, may be removed or installed without removing the housing.
The power steering pump on some applications may be mounted on the flywheel housing. An
engine barring or locking device can be attached at the opening on the bottom of the flywheel
housing. This allows the engine to be barred or locked for maintenance or repair work.
TSM
1. Gasket 6. Nut
2. Seal 7. Flywheel Housing
3. Stud 8. Cover
4. Stud 9. Bolt (2)
5. Access Hole Cover
Figure 34-1 Rear of Flywheel Housing and Related Parts

TSM
1. Bolt M10 x 90 (3 qty.)
2. Bolt M14 x 1.5 x 70 (1 qty.)
3. Bolt M14 x 1.5 x 90 (6 qty.)
4. Bolt M10 x 45 (6 qty.)
5. Gasket (1 qty.)
6. Cover (1 qty.)
7. Bolt M8 x 30 (2 qty.)
9. Bolt M8 x 45 (2 qty.)
10. Flywheel Housing
11. Gasket
12. Stud (1 qty.)
13. Nut M12-10 (1 qty.)
14. Cover
15. Bolt (2 qty.)
8. Bolt M14 x 1.5 x 180 (1 qty.)
Figure 34-2 Front of Flywheel Housing and Related Parts

34.2 REMOVAL OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING
34.2 REMOVAL OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING
Remove as follows:
1. If the engine is removed from the vehicle, mount the engine on an overhaul stand.
2. Drain engine oil and remove the oil pan.
3. Remove the doser injector feed line.
4. Remove the Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP). Refer to section .
5. Remove the flywheel. Refer to section 34.4.
6. Remove two bolts securing exhaust pipe bracket to flywheel housing.
7. For the DD15; remove the clamp from the exhaust pipe and the axial power turbine
and then remove exhaust pipe.
8. Thread eye bolts into the tapped holes in the side of the flywheel housing and attach a
suitable lifting sling to the eye bolts.
TSM
9. Thread two guide stud tools (J-43431) for the 14 mm bolts, into the cylinder block.
10. Remove the remainder of the bolts that secure the flywheel housing to the cylinder block.
BODILY INJURY
To avoid injury from a falling component, ensure a proper
lifting device is used. Never stand beneath a suspended
load.
11. Strike the front face of the housing alternately on each side with a soft hammer to loosen
and work it off the dowel pins.
12. Remove and discard the flywheel housing gasket.
13. Remove all sealing material from the flywheel housing.

34.3 INSTALLATION OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING
Install as follows:
1. Thread two guide studs (J–43431) for 14 mm bolts, into the cylinder block to guide the
housing in place.
2. Install a new gasket.
BODILY INJURY
load.
3. Using a lifting sling support the flywheel housing and position it onto the cylinder block.
TSM
4. Install all of the housing bolts in their proper location; finger-tighten them.

34.3 INSTALLATION OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING
TSM
1. Bolt, M8 x 16 (2 qty.) 30 N·m (22 lb·ft) 6. Bolt, M8 x 45 (2 qty.) 30 N·m (22 lb·ft)
2. Bolt, M14 x 1.5 x 90 (6 qty.) 120 N·m (88 lb·ft) 7. Bolt, M8 x 30 (2 qty.) 30 N·m (22 lb·ft)
3. Bolt, M10 x 45 (6 qty.) 60 N·m (44 lb·ft) 8. Bolt, M14 x 1.5 x 70 (1 qty.) 120 N·m (88 lb·ft)
4. Bolt, M10 x 90 (3 qty.) 60 N·m (44 lb·ft) 9. Stud, (1 qty.)
5. Bolt, M14 x 1.5 x 180 (1 qty.) 120 N·m (88 lb·ft) 10. Nut, M12-10 (1 qty.) 100 N·m (74 lb·ft)

6. Torque the flywheel housing bolts using the sequence and torque shown.
7. Inspect the crankshaft rear main oil seal. If any damage is found, replace as necessary.
8. Install the flywheel. Refer to section 34.6.
9. For the DD15; install the exhaust pipe and bracket to the flywheel housing and axial
power turbine. Install two bolts into the bracket and flywheel housing. Install a clamp
onto the exhaust pipe and axial power turbine. Refer to section 12.4.
10. Install the crankshaft position sensor. Refer to section .
11. Install the oil pan and fill the engine with new oil.
12. Prime the lubrication system. Refer to section 27.1

34.4 REMOVAL OF THE FLYWHEEL
Pre-cleaning is not necessary.

Remove as follows:
1. Remove the crankshaft position sensor (CKP). Refer to section .
2. Remove eleven of the twelve flywheel attaching bolts, leaving one bolt at the 12 o'clock
position.
3. Install two flywheel guide studs (J–41672) through the flywheel and into the crankshaft
at the 3 and 9 o'clock positions.
4. Attach the flywheel lifting tool (J–25026) or some other suitable lifting device, to the
flywheel.
5. Attach a chain hoist to the lifting tool.
6. Loosen, but do not remove the last flywheel attaching bolt.
TSM
FALLING FLYWHEEL
To avoid injury from a falling flywheel when removing the
last bolt, hold the flywheel against the crankshaft by hand
to prevent it from slipping off the crankshaft. The flywheel
is not doweled to the crankshaft.
7. Lift lightly on flywheel using lifting device and remove last bolt.
BODILY INJURY
load.
8. Remove flywheel.

34.5 INSPECTION OF FLYWHEEL
34.5 INSPECTION OF FLYWHEEL
Inspect as follows:
1. Inspect the clutch contact base of the flywheel.
[a] Check clutch contact base for scoring, wear, or cracks.
[b] The flywheel may be re-faced if the clutch contact face is scored or worn.
[c] The flywheel must be replaced if the clutch contact face shows cracks.
2. Inspect the ring gear.
[a] Check ring gear for excessively worn or damaged gear teeth.
[b] If damaged gear teeth are detected, replace the ring gear.
3. Inspect crankshaft and flywheel contact surface.
[a] Check the butt end of the crankshaft and flywheel contact surface for damage.
[b] Lightly stone the contact surface to remove any fretting, brinelling, or burrs.
TSM

34.6 INSTALLATION OF FLYWHEEL
Install as follows:
1. Install two flywheel guide studs (J–36235) into two of the tapped holes in the crankshaft
at the 3 and 9 o'clock position.
NOTICE:
Maximum flywheel bolt length for reuse is 88mm, if bolt length
exceeds this, replace the used bolts with new bolts.
2. Properly attach the flywheel lifting tool to the flywheel and, using a chain hoist, position
the flywheel in the flywheel housing.
□ Align the flywheel bolt holes with the crankshaft bolt holes.
□ Be sure to line up the locating pin hole with the pin on the crankshaft.
3. Remove the flywheel lifting tool and guide studs.
TSM
4. Apply clean engine oil to the threads and to the bolt head contact area (underside) of the
remaining bolts. Any excess must be wiped off.
NOTE:
Clean engine oil must never be used between two surfaces where maximum friction is
desired, as between the crankshaft and the flywheel.
5. Install the flywheel lock J-46392 or W470589046300.

6. Install the bolts and torque them to 200-220 N·m (147-162 lb·ft) and then an additional
90° to 100° torque turn.

34.7 INSPECTION OF FLYWHEEL HOUSING AND REAR OIL SEAL AREA OF CRANKSHAFT

OF CRANKSHAFT
Inspect as follows:
1. Inspect flywheel housing for cracks and any other damage.
[a] Check sealing surface for damage.
[b] Check flywheel housing for cracks.
[c] If damaged or cracked, repair is not possible; replace the part.
2. Inspect the flywheel where the rear oil seal makes contact. Check for groove in flywheel;
if grooved, replace flywheel.
TSM

34.8 REMOVAL OF RING GEAR
Remove the ring gear as follows:

2. Remove the transmission.
3. Remove the flywheel.
4. Using an acetylene torch, cut the ring gear 1/2 to 3/4 of the way through, without allowing
the flame to touch the flywheel.
5. The uncut portion will now yield. Tap the ring gear to remove it from the flywheel.
TSM

34.9 INSTALLATION OF RING GEAR
34.9 INSTALLATION OF RING GEAR
Install the ring gear as follows:

1. Support the flywheel, ring gear side up, on a solid flat surface.
BURNS
To avoid injury from burning, use lifting tools and
heat-resistant gloves when handling heated components.
NOTICE:
Do not, under any circumstances, heat the gear over 204°C
(399°F). Excessive heat may destroy the original heat treatment.
Heat treating “crayons” which are placed on the ring gear and
melt at a predetermined temperature, may be obtained from
TSM
most tool vendors. Use of these “crayons” will ensure against
overheating the gear.
2. Rest the gear on a flat metal surface. Heat the gear uniformly with an acetylene torch,
keeping the torch moving around the gear to avoid hot spots.
3. Use a pair of tongs to place the gear on the flywheel with the chamfer, if any, facing the
same direction as on the gear just removed.
4. Tap the gear in place against the shoulder of the flywheel. If the gear cannot be tapped into
place readily so that it is seated all the way around, remove it, and apply additional heat.
5. Once the ring gear is installed, install the flywheel.
6. Install the transmission.

35 FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT
Section Page

MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT AND RELATED PARTS ........................ 35-3
TSM
35.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT .. 35-4
35.3 INSPECTION OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR
SUPPORT ................................................................................................ 35-5
35.4 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR
SUPPORT ................................................................................................ 35-6
TSM


MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT AND RELATED PARTS
The front engine mount/radiator support is mounted to the cylinder block with four bolts.
TSM
1. Front Engine Mount/Radiator Support 3. Engine Block
2. Bolts
Figure 35-1 Front Engine Mount/Radiator Support and Related Parts

35.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT
35.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT
Remove as follows.
2. Remove the charge air cooler (CAC) hoses.
3. Remove the air cooling components. Refer to OEM guidelines.
4. Remove the four bolts securing the front engine mount/radiator support and remove front
engine mount/radiator support.
TSM

35.3 INSPECTION OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT
Inspect the front engine mount/radiator support for damage; replace as necessary.
TSM

35.4 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT
35.4 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE MOUNT/RADIATOR SUPPORT
Install as follows:
1. Install the front engine mount/radiator support to the cylinder block with four bolts.
Torque bolts to 250 N·m (184 lb·ft).
2. Install CAC hoses.
3. Install air cooling components refer to OEM guidelines.
4. Fill with coolant to the appropriate levels.
TSM

36 VIBRATION DAMPER
Section Page
36.1 REMOVAL OF THE VIBRATION DAMPER ............................................. 36-3

36.2 INSTALLATION OF THE VIBRATION DAMPER ..................................... 36-4
TSM
TSM

36.1 REMOVAL OF THE VIBRATION DAMPER
Remove as follows:
1. Remove the poly-V-belt. Refer to section 40.1.
2. Remove the eight bolts (1) attaching the vibration damper (2) to the crankshaft (4).
3. Using guide studs tool J-43431, remove the vibration damper.
4. Remove the splash ring (3).
TSM

36.2 INSTALLATION OF THE VIBRATION DAMPER
36.2 INSTALLATION OF THE VIBRATION DAMPER
Install as follows:
1. Install the splash ring (1) with cup-side (2) toward end of crankshaft.
TSM
2. Using guide studs tool (J-43431), install the vibration damper onto the crankshaft.
3. Install the eight bolts attaching the vibration damper to the crankshaft. Torque to 200
N·m (147.5 lb·ft). Refer to section 36.2.

37 FRONT ENGINE COVER
Section Page
37.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER .. 37-3

37.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER ........................................ 37-4
TSM
37.3 INSPECTION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER ................................... 37-5
37.4 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER ................................ 37-6
TSM

37.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER
The front cover housing seals the cylinder block to the oil pan, while also holding the front radial
seal to the machined surface of the crankshaft nose. The front radial seal prevents oil leaks at
the crankshaft.
TSM
1. Front Mounting Bracket Bolt (4 qty.)
2. Front Mounting Bracket
7. Front Cover Mounting Bolts (10 qty.)
8. Front Cover
3. Vibration Damper Mounting Bolts (8 qty.) 9. Front Cover Gasket
4. Vibration Damper 10. Oil Pan Gasket
5. Splash Ring 11. Oil Pan
6. Front Radial Seal 12. Oil Pan Mounting Bolts (18 qty.)
Figure 37-1 Front Engine Cover and Related Components

37.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER
37.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER
Remove as follows:
1. Shut off engine, apply the parking brake, chock the wheels, and perform any other
2. Remove the poly-V-belt. Refer to section 40.1.
3. Remove the eight bolts attaching the vibration damper to the crankshaft. Refer to section
36.1.
4. Remove the splash ring.
NOTE:
The oil pan must be completely removed to clean the gasket and groove to prevent
potential oil leaks.
TSM
6. Remove the ten mounting bolts attaching the front engine cover to the cylinder block and
remove the front engine cover.

37.3 INSPECTION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER
Inspect as follows:
1. Inspect the front cover housing for leaks, cracks or any other signs of damage. Replace
as necessary.
2. Clean the front engine cover with clean engine oil.
TSM

37.4 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER
37.4 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE COVER
Install as follows:
1. Install a new front cover housing gasket on the cylinder block.
2. Install the front cover housing to the cylinder block. Torque the front cover mounting bolts
to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft) in the sequence shown.
TSM
3. Install the oil pan to cylinder block. Refer to section 19.7.
4. Install the splash ring on the front of the crankshaft.
5. If the front crankshaft seal is damaged and requires replacement, replace as necessary.
6. Install the vibration damper and pulley to the crankshaft. Refer to section 36.2.

38 ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS
Section Page
38.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS

TSM
ENGINE POWER TAKE-OFF .................................................................. 38-9
38.4 REMOVAL OF THE REAR ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS ...................... 38-10
38.5 INSPECTION OF THE ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS ............................ 38-11
38.6 INSTALLATION OF THE REAR ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS .............. 38-12
TSM

38.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS AND

RELATED PARTS
The engine lifter brackets on the DD Platform engines are utilized when removing or replacing
an engine. All DD Platform engines have two lifting brackets that are located on the rear of the
engine, bolted to the cylinder head. A third engine lifter bracket is located on the front which is
part of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system crossover tube.
TSM
1. Venturi 7. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube/Lifting Eye 13. Cylinder Head
2. Bolt 8. Exhaust Gas Connecting Tube 14. Bolt
3. Gasket 9. Bolt 15. Rear Lifting Bracket — Left Side
4. Mounting Bolt 10. Plate 16. Rear Lifting Bracket — Right Side
5. Bolt (6 qty.) 11. EGR Cooler / Water Manifold Assembly 17. Mixer Pipe
6. Bolt 12. Coolant Crossover Tube 18. Clamp

19. Connector Hose
Figure 38-1 DD13 EPA07 Lifting Bracket Locations

38.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS AND RELATED PARTS
1. Venturi
2. Bolt
3. Gasket
4. Mounting Bolt
5. Bolt
TSM 11. EGR Cooler / Water Manifold Assembly
12. Coolant Crossover Tube
13. Cylinder Head
14. Bolt
15. Rear Lifting Bracket — Left Side
6. Bolt (6 qty.) 16. Rear Lifting Bracket — Right Side

7. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube 17. Mixer Pipe
8. Exhaust Gas Connecting Tube 18. Clamp
9. Bolt 19. Connector Hose
10. Plate 20. Lifting Bracket
Figure 38-2 DD13 EPA10 Lifting Bracket Locations

1. Venturi
2. Bolt
3. Gasket
4. Bolt
5. Bolt (6 qty.)
6. Bolt
TSM 11. Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler
12. Water Manifold
14. Cylinder Head
15. Bolt
16. Rear Lifter Bracket — Left Side
7. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube/Lifting Eye 17. Rear Lifter Bracket — Right Side
8. Exhaust Gas Connector Tube 18. Mixer Pipe
9. Bolt 19. Clamp
10. Plate 20. Connector Hose
Figure 38-3 DD15 EPA07 Lifting Bracket Location

38.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS AND RELATED PARTS
1. Venturi
2. Bolt
3. Gasket
4. Bolt
5. Bolt
6. Bolt (6 qty.)
TSM 12. Water Manifold
14. Cylinder Head
15. Bolt
16. Rear Lifter Bracket — Left Side
17. Rear Lifter Bracket — Right Side
7. Exhaust Gas Crossover Tube 18. Mixer Pipe
8. Exhaust Gas Connector Tube 19. Clamp
9. Bolt 20. Connector Hose
10. Plate 21. Lifter Bracket
11. Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler
Figure 38-4 DD15 EPA10 Lifting Bracket Location

To avoid injury from a falling engine, do not use a damaged

lifter bracket when lifting the engine.

TSM

38.2 REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ENGINE LIFTER BRACKET WITHOUT FRONT ENGINE POWER TAKE-OFF

FRONT ENGINE POWER TAKE-OFF
For EPA10 engines, remove as follows:

1. Remove the two bolts (1) from the front engine lifter bracket.
TSM
2. Remove the front engine lifter bracket.


ENGINE POWER TAKE-OFF
For EPA07 engines, remove as follows:

1. Loosen the two hose clamps on the venturi to mixer pipe hose.
2. Slide the connector hose fully on the mixer pipe. If hose is cut, torn, or cracked, then
remove and discard it.
3. Remove the two bolts attaching the venturi to the exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye.
4. Remove the six bolts attaching the exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye to the cylinder
head.
5. Remove the bolt attaching the exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye to the coolant
crossover tube.
6. Remove the bolt attaching the coolant crossover tube to the exhaust gas crossover
tube/lifting eye.
TSM
7. Slide the exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye off the exhaust gas connector tube and
remove from engine.
8. Remove the exhaust gas connector tube from the EGR cooler.
□ Inspect the exhaust gas connector tube for cuts, tears, or cracks or other signs of
damage.
□ If damage is found, replace connector tube.

38.4 REMOVAL OF THE REAR ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS
38.4 REMOVAL OF THE REAR ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS
Remove as follows:
1. Remove the bolts securing the lifter brackets to the engine.
2. Remove lifter bracket.
TSM

38.5 INSPECTION OF THE ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS
Inspect the lifter brackets for cracks, bending, or other damage. Replace the bracket if any of
these conditions exist.
TSM

38.6 INSTALLATION OF THE REAR ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS
38.6 INSTALLATION OF THE REAR ENGINE LIFTER BRACKETS
Install the rear lifter brackets as follows:

1. Install the two rear lifter brackets with four bolts to the cylinder head.
2. Torque the bolts to 180 N·m (132 lb·ft).
TSM


For EPA10 engines, install as follows:

1. Install the front engine lifter bracket to the engine.
2. Install the two bolts. Torque to 160 N·m (110 lb·ft).
TSM

38.8 INSTALLATION OF THE FRONT ENGINE LIFTER BRACKET WITH FRONT ENGINE POWER
TAKE-OFF

For EPA07 engines, install as follows:

1. Install a new EGR connector tube, if needed, onto EGR cooler and install EGR exhaust
gas crossover tube/lifting eye to cylinder head.
2. Loosely install six bolts to exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye.
3. Install bolt attaching the exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye to the coolant crossover
tube. Torque to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
4. Install bolt attaching the coolant crossover tube to the exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting
eye. Torque to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
5. Tighten six exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye bolts to cylinder head. Torque to 60
N·m (44 lb·ft).
6. Slide mixer pipe onto hose with soap and water for ease of installation.
TSM
7. Install venturi to exhaust gas crossover tube/lifting eye with a new gasket and two bolts;
torque bolts to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
8. Slide hose onto venturi using soap and water for ease of installation.
9. Install two clamps onto hose and tighten.

39 BELT DRIVE TENSIONER SYSTEM
Section Page

RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 39-3
TSM
39.2 REMOVAL OF THE BELT TENSIONER .................................................. 39-5
39.3 INSTALLATION OF THE BELT TENSIONER .......................................... 39-6
39.4 REMOVAL OF THE IDLER PULLEY AND IDLER PULLEY BRACKET .. 39-7
39.5 INSTALLATION OF THE IDLER PULLEY AND IDLER PULLEY
BRACKET ................................................................................................ 39-8
39.6 REMOVAL OF NON-BRACKETED IDLER PULLEY .............................. 39-9
39.7 INSTALLATION OF NON-BRACKETED IDLER PULLEY ........................ 39-10
39.8 REMOVAL OF THE ACCESSORY MOUNTING BRACKET .................... 39-11
39.9 INSTALLATION OF THE ACCESSORY MOUNTING BRACKET ............ 39-12
TSM


RELATED PARTS
The engine uses two poly-V-belts. Since this type of belt is very flexible, a number of major
assemblies can be driven by one poly-V-belt. The alternator, refrigerant compressor, and coolant
pump are driven by one eight-ribbed poly-V-belt. The fan clutch and the engine fan are driven by
one ten-ribbed poly-V-belt.
The belt tensioners are firmly bolted onto the accessory bracket. The tensioning arms with
tensioner pulleys are turned counterclockwise by the force of the springs to provide the required
tension in the belts.
TSM

39.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF BELT DRIVE TENSIONER AND RELATED PARTS
There is a square hole in each tensioning arm to install a 1/2 in socket tool for removal and
installation of the poly-V-belts. The outer poly-V-belt must be removed before removing the
inner poly-V-belt.
TSM
1. Crankcase Damper 8. Accessory Mounting Bracket
2. Poly-V-Belt for the Fan 9. Belt Tensioner
3. Alternator 10. Fan Clutch

4. Pulley 11. Pulley and Spacer
5. Poly-V-Belt for Alternator, Refrigerant Compressor and Coolant Pump 12. Water Pump
6. Tensioner Pulley 13. Idler Pulley Bracket
7. Refrigerant Compressor 14. Idler Pulley

39.2 REMOVAL OF THE BELT TENSIONER
Remove as follows:
1. Remove the two poly-V-belts. Refer to section 40.1.
2. Remove the three bolts from the tensioner.
3. Remove the tensioner from the bracket.
TSM

39.3 INSTALLATION OF THE BELT TENSIONER
39.3 INSTALLATION OF THE BELT TENSIONER
Install as follows:
1. Install the tensioner to the bracket.
2. Install the three bolts attaching the tensioner to the bracket. Torque to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
3. Install the two poly-V-belts. Refer to section 40.3.
TSM

39.4 REMOVAL OF THE IDLER PULLEY AND IDLER PULLEY BRACKET
Remove as follows:
2. Remove the idler pulley from the idler pulley bracket.
3. Remove the two bolts from the idler pulley bracket and remove the idler pulley bracket
from the engine.
TSM

39.5 INSTALLATION OF THE IDLER PULLEY AND IDLER PULLEY BRACKET
39.5 INSTALLATION OF THE IDLER PULLEY AND IDLER PULLEY BRACKET
Install as follows:
1. Install the idler pulley bracket to the engine.
2. Install the two bolts to the idler pulley bracket. Torque to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
3. Install the idler pulley to the idler pulley bracket. Torque to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
TSM

39.6 REMOVAL OF NON-BRACKETED IDLER PULLEY
Remove as follows:
2. Remove the bolt from the idler pulley. Remove the idler pulley and spacer from the
engine block.
TSM

39.7 INSTALLATION OF NON-BRACKETED IDLER PULLEY
39.7 INSTALLATION OF NON-BRACKETED IDLER PULLEY
Install as follows:
1. Insert bolt through idler pulley and spacer.
2. Install bolt to engine block. Torque to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
TSM

39.8 REMOVAL OF THE ACCESSORY MOUNTING BRACKET
Remove as follows:
2. Remove the three bolts from the belt tensioner.
3. Remove the belt tensioner from the accessory mounting bracket.
4. Remove the air conditioner compressor. Refer to OEM procedures.
5. Remove the alternator. Refer to OEM procedures.
6. Remove the six bolts attaching the accessory mounting bracket to the engine.
7. Remove the accessory mounting bracket.
TSM

39.9 INSTALLATION OF THE ACCESSORY MOUNTING BRACKET
39.9 INSTALLATION OF THE ACCESSORY MOUNTING BRACKET
Install as follows:
1. Install the accessory mounting bracket to the engine.
2. Install the six bolts attaching the accessory mounting bracket to the engine. Torque to
60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
3. Install the alternator. Refer to OEM procedures.
4. Install the air conditioner compressor. Refer to OEM procedures.
5. Install the accessory mounting to the belt tensioner bracket.
6. Install the three bolts to the belt tensioner. Torque to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
TSM

40 POLY-V-BELTS
Section Page
40.1 REMOVAL OF THE POLY-V-BELTS ....................................................... 40-3

40.2 INSPECTION OF THE POLY-V-BELTS ................................................... 40-6
TSM
40.3 INSTALLATION OF THE POLY-V-BELTS ................................................ 40-9
TSM

40.1 REMOVAL OF THE POLY-V-BELTS
Remove as follows:
NOTICE:
Use a half-inch socket tool (with extension) is used. Do not
use more than a 6 inch extension on the socket tool to reduce
the danger of cracking the tensioner. Apply smooth pressure to
tensioner. Jerking or sudden pressure could cause damage to
tensioner.
NOTE:
Never pre-tension the non-grooved pulley idler arm before the grooved idler pulley arm is
pre-tensioned.
NOTE:
Never turn the pulley idler arms clockwise.
TSM
NOTE:
When removing the poly-V-belts always remove the belt driving the fan first and then
remove the belt driving the alternator, refrigerant compressor and coolant pump.
NOTE:
Do not use any type of cleaning solvent to the rubber parts on the tensioner.
1. Install a half-inch extension tool into the square hole (2) on the grooved pulley idler
arm (1).

40.1 REMOVAL OF THE POLY-V-BELTS
2. Turn the grooved pulley idler arm counterclockwise. Maximum allowable torque is
90-100 N·m (66-73 lb·ft).
3. Insert an M10x80 bolt (or equivalent pin), into the bracket hole (2) in the idler arm.
position.
TSM
4. Release the idler arm. The grooved pulley idler arm is now locked in a pre-tensioned
5. Remove the belt.

6. Install a half-inch extension into the square hole (V) on the non-grooved pulley idler
arm (1).
7. Turn the non-grooved pulley idler arm counterclockwise. Maximum allowable torque is
90-100 N·m (66-73 lb·ft).

8. Insert an M10x80 bolt (or equivalent pin), into the bracket hole in the non-grooved pulley
idler arm (2).
position.
TSM
9. Release the idler arm. The non-grooved pulley idler arm is now locked in a pre-tensioned
10. Remove the belt from the pulleys, then remove the alternator and refrigerant compressor.

40.2 INSPECTION OF THE POLY-V-BELTS
Inspect as follows:
1. Inspect the belt contact surfaces for chips, flaking, cracks and discoloration.
ABRASION CHUNK-OUT
TSM
IMPROPER INSTALL CRACKING
PILLING UNEVEN RIB WEAR

MISALIGNMENT GRAVEL PENETRATION
2. Inspect the bearings in the idler pulleys and accessories by rotating the pulleys to look for
bearing slop or choppy feeling bearings.
TSM
NOTE:
Inspect the area for oil leaking at the spring area. Change the assembly if oil is present.
3. Inspect the springs on the tensioner. If the rubber is damaged or if the spring is damaged,
change the assembly.
4. Inspect the pulleys for damage and excessive wear. If pulleys or the belts are damaged,
change the damaged pulley and the belt.

5. Check wear pattern on all idler pulleys.

[a] If wear pattern location is incorrect (A), change the pulley and bracket.
[b] If wear pattern location is correct (B), idler and bracket can be reused.
TSM

40.3 INSTALLATION OF THE POLY-V-BELTS
Install as follows:
NOTE:
If tensioners are pre-tensioned, start at step 9.
1. Install a half-inch extension into the square hole on the grooved pulley idler arm.
2. Turn the grooved pulley idler arm counterclockwise. Maximum allowable torque is
90-100 N·m (66-73 lb·ft).
3. Insert an M10x80 bolt (or equivalent pin), into the bracket hole in the grooved pulley
idler arm.
4. Release the idler arm. The grooved pulley idler arm is now locked in a pre-tensioned
position.
5. Install a half-inch extension into the square hole in the non-grooved pulley idler arm
bracket.
TSM
6. Turn the non-grooved pulley idler arm counterclockwise. Maximum allowable torque is
90-100 N·m (66-73 lb·ft).
7. Insert an M10x80 bolt (or equivalent pin), into the bracket hole on the non-grooved pulley
idler arm.
8. Release the idler arm. The non-grooved pulley idler arm is now locked in a pre-tensioned
position.
9. Install the poly-V-belts onto the pulleys.
10. Ensure the belts are properly installed on the pulleys.
11. Install a half-inch extension into the square hole (V) on the non-grooved idler arm.
12. Turn the non-grooved pulley idler arm counterclockwise until the pin holding the idler
arm can be removed. Remove the pin.
13. Install a half-inch extension into the square hole in the grooved pulley idler arm.
14. Turn the grooved pulley idler arm counterclockwise until the pin holding the grooved
pulley idler arm can be removed. Remove the pin.

40.3 INSTALLATION OF THE POLY-V-BELTS
TSM

41 AIR COMPRESSOR
Section Page
41.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR .......... 41-3

41.2 REMOVAL OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR ................................................ 41-5
TSM
41.3 INSPECTION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR ........................................... 41-6
41.4 INSTALLATION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR ........................................ 41-8
TSM

41.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR
The air compressor is mounted to the rear of the cylinder block on the left side of the engine.
The engine provides a continuous supply of oil to the compressor. Oil is routed from the oil
passage in the gear case to the compressor oil inlet. The air compressor is designed to permit
direct installation of the compressor onto the gear case.
Detroit Diesel offers two sizes of air compressors. The single cylinder has a displacement 360
cm3 and the twin cylinder has a displacement 650 cm3. Both compressors are installed with
an Energy Saving System (ESS) to save fuel.
1. Bolt
2. Cover
3. O-ring
TSM
4. Coolant Return Line Assembly
8. Gear
9. Nut
10. Clamp (OEM provided)
11. Bolt (OEM provided)
5. Coolant Inlet Line Assembly 12. Intake Line (OEM provided)
6. Single Cylinder Air Compressor 13. Bolt
7. O-ring
Figure 41-1 Single Cylinder Air Compressor and Related Parts

41.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR
TSM
1. Bolt 9. Two Cylinder Air Compressor
2. Bolt 10. O-ring
3. Bracket 11. Gear
4. Bolt 12. Nut
5. Cover 13. Clamp (OEM provided)
6. O-ring 14. Bolt (OEM provided)
7. Coolant Return Line Assembly 15. Intake Line (OEM provided)
8. Coolant Inlet Line Assembly 16. Bolt
Figure 41-2 Two Cylinder Air Compressor and Related Parts

41.2 REMOVAL OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR

NOTICE:
Ensure the air pressure has been released from the air lines
before removing the lines from the air compressor.
3. Relieve air pressure from tanks.

4. Disconnect the air lines to and from the compressor.
5. Disconnect and drain the coolant supply and return lines at the air compressor.
6. Remove the four bolts that secure the air compressor to the cylinder block.
NOTICE:
TSM
Do not contact the drive gear to the engine block during removal;
damage to the seal surface will cause oil leaks.
7. Slide the air compressor forward and remove from engine.

8. Discard air compressor gasket.

41.3 INSPECTION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR
41.3 INSPECTION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR
Troubleshooting information for the Bendix® air compressor can be found on the Bendix web site
at http:\\www.bendix.com or call the Bendix Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-AIR-BRAKE,
(1-800-247-2725).
Check as follows:
1. Check for oil present in the air dryer or air tanks.
[a] If no oil is present, check for a worn or damaged valve guide/seal or cylinder kit.
[b] If oil is present, go to step 2.
2. Perform a crankcase pressure test and record the test results using the following test
procedure, refer to section .
Crankcase pressure — Full load, maximum KPa (in. H2O) operating limits @ Rated speed = 1.25 KPa (5.0 in.
H2O column)
TSM
3. Disconnect the air outlet line (2) from the air compressor.
4. Repeat the first step and record the test results.

5. Compare the results of test one with test two.
[a] If the engine crankcase pressure remained the same, check for a defective
turbocharger. Refer to section .
[b] If the engine crankcase pressure decreased, replace the air compressor.

6. Remove the air compressor from the engine. Refer to section 41.2.
To avoid injury before starting and running the engine,

ensure the vehicle is parked on a level surface, parking
brake is set, and the wheels are blocked.
7. Start and run the engine.

8. Perform a crankcase pressure test. Refer to section .
[a] If the engine crankcase pressure exceeds 1.25 kPa (5 in. H2O), check for a defective
turbocharger. Refer to section . Shut down the engine.
[b] If the engine crankcase pressure is less than 1.25 kPa (5 in. H2O), shut down the
engine; no further troubleshooting is required.
TSM

41.4 INSTALLATION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR
41.4 INSTALLATION OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR
1. Clean all foreign material from the mating surfaces of the air compressor and the cylinder
block.
2. Install a new O-ring on the air compressor hub and a new O-ring on the oil supply and then
install the air compressor on the cylinder block. Torque the four bolts to 60 N·m (44 lb·ft).
NOTICE:
Ensure the correct bolt length is used when the air compressor
is installed. If an incorrect bolt length (too long) is used, the cup
plugs installed in the cylinder block can be pushed out into the
gear train causing severe damage to the gear train. The correct
bolt length is 35 mm (1.37 in).
NOTICE:
Ensure when the air compressor coolant lines are installed that
TSM
there is an O-ring and an O-ring retainer installed on both ends
of the coolant lines. Ensure that the air compressor retainer is
installed on the coolant line and is pushed down to lock the lines
onto the inlet and outlet ports to the cylinder block, fuel filter
module and air compressor. A leak will occur if the lines are
incorrectly installed and the coolant line retainer is not engaged
in the locked position. If the O-ring or the coolant line retainers
are missing, or removed, replace the coolant line.
3. Install the coolant supply and return lines to the air compressor.
4. Install the air lines to and from the air compressor. Refer to OEM specifications.

42 CYLINDER BLOCK
Section Page

RELATED PARTS .................................................................................... 42-3
TSM
42.2 REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF ENGINE FROM THE VEHICLE .... 42-9
42.3 CLEANING THE CYLINDER BLOCK ...................................................... 42-12
42.4 REASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER BLOCK ................ 42-16
TSM


RELATED PARTS
The cylinder block is the basic engine structure, establishing and maintaining the alignment
of all engine working parts. The cylinder block is made from an iron material. High strength
and low noise are features of the cylinder block, and is a result of the vertical and horizontal
reinforcements and the design of the oil return ducts.
The cylinder block lower collar design allows for a shorter distance between cylinders and a more
compact design for the cylinder block. Each cylinder bore is sealed to a cylinder liner with two
sealing rings: the upper sealing ring seals the upper coolant jacket to the cylinder block bore, and
the lower sealing ring seals the lower coolant jacket to the cylinder block bore.
1. Cylinder Liner
TSM
2. Top of Cylinder Liner
3. Upper Sealing Ring
5. Lower Coolant Jacket
6. Lower Collar
7. Lower Sealing Ring
4. Upper Coolant Jacket 8. Bottom of Cylinder Liner
Figure 42-1 Cylinder Liner

42.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CYLINDER BLOCK AND RELATED PARTS
The cylinder liners are designed as "bottom stop" cylinder liners which means that the cylinder
liners are installed with a lower collar in the cylinder block. This design allows for a shorter
distance between cylinders and a more compact design for the cylinder block. Each cylinder liner
has two sealing rings: the upper sealing ring seals the upper coolant jacket to the cylinder block
bore; the lower sealing ring seals the lower coolant jacket to the cylinder block bore.
TSM
1. Bolt, Front Cover to Cylinder Block
2. Front Crankshaft Seal
3. Front Cover
4. Gasket, Front Cover to Cylinder Block
5. Expansion Plug, Front Oil Duct Intake
6. Expansion Plug, Front Oil Duct Outlet
7. Expansion Plug, Connector Front Oil Duct Outlet
8. Bottom Cylinder Liner Seal Ring
13.Dowel Pin
14. Expansion Plug, Cooling Water Duct
15. Pin
16. Expansion Plug
17. Coolant Drain Plug
18. Dowel Pin
19. Dowel Pin, Crankshaft Bearing Cap
20. Piston Oil Spray Nozzle
9. Cylinder Liner 21. Bolt, Oil Spray Nozzle
10. Top Cylinder Liner Seal Ring 22. Main Bearing Cap
11. Expansion Plug, Connector Crankcase Ventilation 23. Bolt, Crankshaft Bearing Cap to Cylinder Block.
12. Plug
Figure 42-2 Cylinder Block, Cylinder Liners and Related Parts
The cylinder block has 1.5 mm counterbores machined on top for the cylinder head to cylinder
block sealing surface. The lubrication and coolant holes in the cylinder block supply the cylinder
head with oil and coolant. This allows for a superior sealing pressure between the gasket,
cylinder head and cylinder block.
The cylinder block uses replaceable, wet-type cylinder liners.

TSM
1. Coolant Return for Cylinder Head Coolant Manifold
2. Coolant Feed for Oil Water Heat Exchanger
3. Coolant Connection for Fuel Heat Exchanger
4. Coolant Connection for Air Compressor
Figure 42-3 Cylinder Block

5. Coolant Connection for EGR Cooler
6. Coolant Transfer Hole to Cylinder Head
7. Coolant Return from Cylinder Head

1. Oil Holes
TSM
2. Connection for Oil Pressure Sensor
3. Connection for Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
4. Oil Return for Oil Filter Change
5. Oil Return Connection from Oil Water Heat Exchanger
6. Oil Feed Connection to Oil Water Heat Exchanger
8. Holes for Feed Gear Drive
9. Connection for Oil Feed to Axial Power Turbine
10. Oil Feed Connection for Cylinder Block Ventilation
11. Oil Feed Connection Turbocharger
12. Oil Hole
13. Oil Transfer Holes to the Cylinder Head
7.Oil Hole 14. Oil Return from Cylinder Head
Figure 42-4 Cylinder Block

Figure 42-5
TSM
1. Oil Return to Oil Pan 2. Oil Feed Bore
Bottom of Cylinder Block Oil Hole Location

Rod Bearing
Figure 42-6
TSM
1. Oil Feed Hole for Main Bearing and Connecting 2. Oil Feed Hole for Oil Spray Nozzles
Bottom of Cylinder Block Oil Hole Location

42.2 REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF ENGINE FROM THE VEHICLE
Before mounting an engine on an overhaul stand, it must be disconnected from the transmission.
Details for removing an engine will vary from one application to another. However, the following
steps will be necessary, regardless of application:
2. Disconnect the battery cable(s) from the battery(s).
3. Drain the cooling system. Refer to OEM procedures.
4. Drain the lubricating oil.
5. Disconnect the lines on the fuel filter module from the fuel tank.
6. Remove the air cleaner ducting as necessary for engine removal. Refer to OEM guidelines.
7. Remove the charge air cooler ducting from the turbocharger and intake manifold.
8. Disconnect the exhaust piping from the engine.
TSM
9. Remove the 21-pin connector from the MCM.
10. Disconnect wiring from the cranking motor and remove cranking motor.
11. Disconnect the alternator and other electrical equipment, as necessary.
12. Disconnect the air compressor air lines, as necessary.
13. Disconnect and remove the coolant hoses.
14. Remove the charge air cooler, radiator, fan guard and other cooling system related parts as
necessary to remove the engine.
15. Connect Cylinder Head/Engine Lifting Bar tool (W470589006200) to the engine using all
three lifting brackets (two at the rear and one at the front).
16. Remove the engine mounting bolts.
FALLING ENGINE
To avoid injury from a falling engine, an adequate lifting
device with a spreader bar and sling should be used to lift
the engine. The sling and spreader bar should be adjusted
so the lifting hooks are vertical to prevent bending the lifter
brackets. To ensure proper weight distribution, all provided
lifter brackets must be used.
17. Lift the engine from its mounts using W470589006200.

42.2 REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF ENGINE FROM THE VEHICLE
FALLING ENGINE
18. Separate the engine from the transmission.

19. Remove the fuel filter module. Refer to section .
20. Remove high pressure pump. Refer to section .
21. Use engine overhaul stand (J–29109) for support when stripping an engine cylinder block.
22. Rotate engine in either direction and lock it into position.
23. Remove the inlet and outlet fuel lines connected to the Motor Control Module (MCM), if
equipped.
TSM
24. Remove any electrical components, accessories, connectors or wiring looms from the
engine.

25. With the engine mounted on the overhaul stand, remove all of any remaining
subassemblies and parts from the cylinder block.
[a] Remove the rocker cover. Refer to section 1.2.
[b] Remove the engine lifter brackets. Refer to section 38.2.
[c] Remove the vibration damper. Refer to section 36.1.
[d] Remove the flywheel. Refer to section 34.4.
[e] Remove flywheel housing. Refer to section 34.2.
[f] Remove idler gears. Refer to section 5.2.
[g] Remove camshaft housing. Refer to section 3.1.
[h] Remove the cylinder head. For DD13, refer to section 14.2. For DD15,
refer to section 14.4.
[i] Remove the oil pan. Refer to section 19.2.
[j] Remove the piston and connecting rod assembly. Refer to section 15.2.
TSM
[k] Remove cylinder liners. Refer to section 16.2.
[l] Remove the crankshaft. Refer to section 17.2.
NOTICE:
Before removing main bearing caps, be sure each is stamped
or punch-marked in numerical order, beginning with No. 1 at
the front, to ensure installation in their original position. Mark
all caps on the oil cooler side (left side) of the engine to prevent
reversal at assembly. Failure to mark numerical order may result
in the caps being put back in incorrect order, improper crankshaft
support and severe crankshaft or bearing damage or both.
[m] Remove the crankshaft main bearings.

42.3 CLEANING THE CYLINDER BLOCK
Before removing cylinder liners for block cleaning, the liner bores should be gauged to determine
whether liner replacement is necessary. Refer to section 42.3.1.
Remove cylinder liners with the cylinder liner removal tool (J–45876) before putting the block in
cleaning or de-scaling baths, to avoid trapping cleaning agents in block liner seating bores.
Clean the cylinder block as follows:
1. Remove all oil and water gallery plugs to allow the cleaning solution to enter the inside of
the oil and water passages. Remove piston oil spray nozzles at the base of each cylinder
bore.
2. Immerse and agitate the block in a hot bath of a commercial, heavy-duty alkaline solution.
3. Wash the block in hot water or steam clean it to remove the alkaline solution.
4. If the water jackets are heavily scaled, proceed as follows:
[a] Immerse and agitate the block in a bath of inhibited phosphoric acid.
TSM
[b] Allow the block to remain in the acid bath until the bubbling action stops
(approximately 30 minutes).
[c] Lift the block, drain it and immerse it again in the same acid solution for 10 more
minutes. Repeat until all scale is removed from the water jacket area.
[d] Rinse the block in clear, hot water to remove the acid solution.
[e] Neutralize the acid that may cling to the casting by immersing the block in an
alkaline bath.
[f] Wash the block in clean water and dry it.
EYE INJURY
5. Dry the cylinder block with compressed air. Blow out all of the bolt holes and passages
NOTE:
The above cleaning procedure may be used on all ordinary cast iron and steel parts for
the engine. Aluminum parts, such as flywheel housing, air intake manifold, oil filter
adaptor and the camshaft gear access cover should NOT be cleaned in this manner.
Mention will be made of special procedures when necessary.

6. Be certain that all water passages and oil galleries have been thoroughly cleaned and
dried. Install new cup plugs using a coating of good grade non-hardening sealant such
as Loctite® 620 or equivalent."
42.3.1 Inspection of the Cylinder Block
Perform the following for cylinder block inspection:

1. Remove the cylinder liners and check to determine whether liner replacement is necessary.
2. Measure the bore of each cylinder with cylinder bore gauge (J–5347–B) which has a dial
indicator calibrated in 0.0001 in increments.
3. Measure cylinder block bore, at the positions on axis 90 degrees apart. If the diameter
does not exceed the dimensions, the block may be reused.
TSM
NOTE:
The above measurements are average gauge readings at each position. Also, the
out-of-round must not exceed 0.0254 mm (0.001 in).
Location DD13 DD15 DD16

A 159 mm to 159.04 mm 167 to 167.04 mm (6.5748 167 to 167.04 mm (6.5748
(6.259 to 6.261 in.) to 6.5763 in.) to 6.5763 in.)
B 142 to 142.02 mm 58 149 to 149.04 mm (5.866 149 to 149.04 mm (5.866
(5.590 5.591 in.) to 5.8677 in.) to 5.8677 in.)
Table 42-1 Acceptable Cylinder Bore Diameters

42.3.2 Inspection of Main Bearing Bores
Perform the following steps for main bearing bore inspection:

1. Install the main bearing caps in their original positions. Lubricate the cap bolt threads and
head contact surfaces with a small quantity of clean engine oil
Figure 42-7
Bolt Length
TSM
Main Bearing Cap Bolt
Table 42-2
Main Bearing Cap Torque Sequence
DD13
175.5 mm (6.909 in.)
Main Bearing Cap Bolt Length

DD15
200.5 mm (7.894 in.)
2. Install the main cap bolts and torque bolts to 50 N·m (37 lb·ft).
DD16
200.5 mm (7.894 in.)
3. Torque the main cap bolts again to 150 N·m (103 lb·ft).
4. For the DD13, final torque the main cap bolts to 300 N·m (221 lb·ft). Then, torque turn
the bolts an additional 90°.
5. For the DD15, final torque the main cap bolts to 250 N·m
(184 lb·ft). Then, torque turn the bolts an additional 90°
and again torque turn the bolts an additional 90°.
6. Measure the main bearing bores using dial bore gauge which has a dial indicator calibrated
in 0.0001 in increments. Set the cylinder bore gauge on zero in master setting fixture.
NOTE:
Dial bore master setting fixture should be used to zero the cylinder bore gauge.

42.3.3 General Inspection
Check all machined surfaces for nicks or burrs that could affect the fit of mating parts. Clean
up as necessary by stoning. Also inspect all tapped holes for thread damage and re-tap or install
helical thread inserts as necessary. Replace any loose or damaged dowel pins.
42.3.4 Rust Prevention
After inspection, if the cylinder block is not to be used immediately, spray the machined surfaces
with engine oil.
NOTICE:
Castings free of grease or oil will rust when exposed to the
atmosphere. Rust on machined surfaces may result in leakage.
If the block is to be stored for an extended period of time, spray or dip it in a polar-type rust
preventive such as "Tectyl® 502-C" from Valvoline Oil Company (or equivalent).
TSM
Tectyl® is a registered trademark of Ashland Oil, Inc.

42.4 REASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER BLOCK
After the cylinder block has been cleaned and inspected, assemble the engine as follows:
EYE INJURY
1. Before a reconditioned or new service replacement cylinder block is used, steam clean it
to remove the rust preventive and blow out the oil galleries with compressed air.
2. If a new service replacement block is used, stamp the engine serial number and model
number on the pad provided on the front left side of the block.
3. Also stamp the position numbers on the main bearing caps and the position of the No. 1
TSM
bearing on the cooler side of the oil pan mounting flange of the block.

4. Install the main bearing caps in their original positions.
NOTICE:
Always check to make sure cooling nozzles are open and
aligned after piston installation. An obstructed, misaligned,
bent, or damaged nozzle may not provide proper piston cooling.
A loosened nozzle may cause a loss of main gallery oil pressure.
In either case, piston overheating or lack of adequate lubrication
may result in severe engine damage.
NOTICE
When installed, ensure the spray nozzles are aligned.
TSM
5. Install all of the required cup plugs. Use a good grade of non-hardening sealant such as
Loctite® 620 (or equivalent). Apply a thin coat of sealant just inside the chamfer where
the plug is to be installed and install using cup plug installation tool set (J–35653).
6. With the engine mounted on the overhaul stand, install all of any remaining subassemblies
and parts on the cylinder block.
[a] Install the crankshaft main bearings. Refer to section 17.4.
[b] Install the crankshaft. Refer to section 17.4.
[c] Install the cylinder liner. Refer to section 16.5.
[d] Install the piston and connecting rod assembly. Refer to section 15.6.
[e] Install the gear train. Refer to section 5.2.
[f] Install the flywheel housing. Refer to section 34.3.
[g] Install the oil pan. Refer to section 19.7.

[h] Install the flywheel. Refer to section 34.6.

[i] Install the cylinder head. For DD13, refer to section 14.3. For DD15, refer to section
14.7.
[j] Install camshaft housing. Refer to section 3.3.
[k] Install the vibration damper. Refer to section 36.2.
[l] Install the crankshaft pulley.
[m] Install the engine lifter brackets. Refer to section 38.7.
[n] Install the rocker cover. Refer to section 1.4.
[o] Install any electrical components, accessories, connectors or wiring looms that were
removed during disassembly.
[p] Install the Motor Control Module (MCM).
[q] Install Cylinder Head/Engine Lifting Bar tool (W470589006200) to the engine.
TSM
FALLING ENGINE
To avoid injury from a falling engine, an adequate lifting
device with a spreader bar and sling should be used to lift
the engine. The sling and spreader bar should be adjusted
so the lifting hooks are vertical to prevent bending the lifter
brackets. To ensure proper weight distribution, all provided
lifter brackets must be used.
[r] Remove the engine from the overhaul stand.

[s] Prime engine lubrication system. Refer to section 27.1.
7. Transfer the engine to a suitable engine dynamometer test stand. Operate the engine on a
dynamometer following the Run-in procedure.
8. Install the engine in the equipment from which it was removed.

DDC-SVC-MAN-0073
DD13 ™ / DD15™
Application and Installation
TSM
TSM
ATTENTION
This document is a guideline for qualified personnel. It is intended to be used by equipment
TSM
manufacturers and contains Detroit Diesel Corporation's recommendations for the ancillary
systems supporting the Detroit Diesel engines covered by this document. The equipment
manufacturer is responsible for developing, designing, manufacturing and installing these
systems, including component qualification. The equipment manufacturer is also responsible for
furnishing equipment users complete service and safety information for these systems. Detroit
Diesel Corporation makes no representations or warranties regarding the information contained in
installation of these ancillary systems, or the preparation or distribution to equipment users of
preliminary and incomplete and is subject to change without notice.
TRADEMARK INFORMATION
DD Platform, DDEC®, Ether Start®, Diagnostic Link® are registered trademarks of
Detroit Diesel Corporation. Fuel Pro® and Pro-Chek® are registered trademarks of Davco
Manufacturing, L.L.C. Viton® is a registered trademark of DuPont Dow Elastomers L.L.C.
Loctite® is a registered trademark of Loctite Corporation. Delco Remy® is a registered trademark
of Delco Remy America, Inc. Leece-Neville® is a registered trademark of Leece-Neville
Company.
TSM
DD PLATFORM APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION MANUAL
DD PLATFORM APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

MANUAL
ABSTRACT
This manual discusses the proper application and installation of the Detroit Diesel DD Platform
engine. The intention of this manual is to provide information in general terms so that it may be
applicable for all applications unless specifically noted or identified.
This manual contains the following information:
□ General information on safety precautions and on accessing installation drawings
TSM
□ Specific component and accessory information on various production models
□ Information on the air inlet, exhaust, cooling, fuel, lubrication, electrical, mounting, and
starting aid systems.
□ Information on the data can be found on the www.detroitdiesel.com, a website that provides
information such as technical data and installation drawings.
All information subject to change without notice. i

DDC-SVC-MAN-0073 Copyright © 2009 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION
ABSTRACT
TSM
ii All information subject to change without notice.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 1- 1
2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................... 2- 1

2.1 SAFETY MEASURES ..................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.2 STANDS .......................................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.3 GLASSES ....................................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.4 WELDING ....................................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.5 WORK PLACE ............................................................................................................... 2- 4
2.6 CLOTHING ...................................................................................................................... 2- 5
2.7 ELECTRIC TOOLS ......................................................................................................... 2- 5
2.8 AIR .................................................................................................................................. 2- 5
2.9 FLUIDS AND PRESSURE .............................................................................................. 2- 5
2.10 BATTERIES .................................................................................................................... 2- 6
2.11 FIRE ................................................................................................................................ 2- 7
TSM
2.12 FLUOROELASTOMER ................................................................................................... 2- 7
3 ENGINE AND ACCESSORY IDENTIFICATION ................................................................. 3- 1

3.1 ENGINE AND ACCESSORY IDENTIFICATION DESCRIPTION ................................... 3- 2
3.2 MAJOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS .............................................................................. 3- 4
3.3 ENGINE IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................. 3- 5
4 AIR INLET SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 4- 1

4.1 AIR INLET SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................................................. 4- 2
4.1.1 DD PLATFORM ON-HIGHWAY ENGINES ................................................................. 4- 2
4.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 4- 4
4.2.1 DRY PAPER ELEMENT AIR CLEANERS .................................................................. 4- 5
4.2.1.1 LIGHT-DUTY AIR CLEANER ............................................................................... 4- 5
4.2.1.2 MEDIUM-DUTY USE AIR CLEANER ................................................................... 4- 6
4.2.1.3 HEAVY-DUTY USE AIR CLEANER ..................................................................... 4- 7
4.2.1.4 EXTRA HEAVY-DUTY USE ................................................................................. 4- 9
4.2.1.5 FOAM TYPE AIR CLEANERS .............................................................................. 4-10
4.2.1.6 OIL-BATH AIR CLEANERS .................................................................................. 4-10
4.2.1.7 AUXILIARY PRECLEANERS ............................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1.8 INLET SCREENS ................................................................................................. 4-11
4.2.1.9 RAIN CAPS AND INLET HOODS ........................................................................ 4-11
4.2.1.10 WATER DRAINS ................................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.1.11 INLET SILENCERS .............................................................................................. 4-12
4.2.1.12 AIR CLEANER SELECTION ................................................................................ 4-12
4.2.2 RESTRICTION INDICATOR ....................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.3 PIPEWORK ................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.2.3.1 PIPEWORK MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................... 4-15
4.2.3.2 DIFFUSERS ......................................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.4 HOSE CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................. 4-16
4.3 DESIGN GUIDELINES .................................................................................................... 4-17
All information subject to change without notice. iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.3.1 MAXIMUM AIR INLET FLOW .................................................................................... 4-17

4.3.2 AIR INLET SYSTEM RESTRICTION ......................................................................... 4-17
4.3.3 INLET LOCATION ...................................................................................................... 4-18
4.3.4 AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE AIR COOLER ........................................................................ 4-18
4.3.4.1 RESTRICTION AND TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS ................................... 4-20
4.3.4.2 CLEANLINESS ..................................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.4.3 LEAKAGE ............................................................................................................. 4-21
4.3.4.4 SIZE ...................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.3.4.5 COOLING AIR FLOW RESTRICTION ................................................................. 4-21
4.3.4.6 MATERIAL ............................................................................................................ 4-21
4.3.4.7 HEADER TANKS .................................................................................................. 4-22
4.3.4.8 LOCATION ............................................................................................................ 4-22
4.3.4.9 FAN SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................... 4-22
4.3.4.10 SHUTTERS .......................................................................................................... 4-22
4.3.4.11 WINTERFRONTS ................................................................................................. 4-23
4.4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................... 4-23
4.4.1 TESTING LOCATION ................................................................................................. 4-23
TSM
4.4.2 INLET SYSTEM RESTRICTION ................................................................................ 4-24
4.4.3 AIR-TO-AIR SYSTEM EVALUATION TESTS ............................................................. 4-24
4.4.3.1 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE RISE--AMBIENT TO INTAKE MANIFOLD ............. 4-24
4.4.3.2 CHARGE AIR COOLER SYSTEM RESTRICTION .............................................. 4-25
4.5 TEST ............................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.5.1 MOBILE AIR-TO-AIR .................................................................................................. 4-25
5 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM ................................................................... 5- 1

5.1 EGR SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 5- 2
5.2 INSTALLATION AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 5- 3
5.2.1 COOLING SYSTEM ................................................................................................... 5- 3
5.2.2 AUXILIARY COOLERS .............................................................................................. 5- 3
5.3 TESTING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................... 5- 3
6 EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................................................. 6- 2
6.1.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM ................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.1.2 TURBOCHARGER ..................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.1.3 AXIAL POWER TURBINE .......................................................................................... 6- 4
6.2.1 BACK PRESSURE ..................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.2.2 NOISE ......................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.2.3 FLEXIBLE FITTINGS .................................................................................................. 6- 6
6.2.4 EXHAUST CONNECTION POINTS ........................................................................... 6- 6
6.2.5 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PIPEWORK ...................................................... 6- 8
6.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 6- 8
6.3.1 TEMPERATURE DROP FROM TURBOCHARGER OUTLET TO
AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE .................................................................................... 6- 8
6.3.2 DISTANCE FROM HYDROCARBON DOSER TO ATD INLET .................................. 6- 8
6.3.3 OUTLET LOCATION .................................................................................................. 6- 8
6.3.4 DRAINAGE ................................................................................................................. 6- 9
iv All information subject to change without notice.

6.3.5 SYSTEM INSULATION ............................................................................................... 6- 9

6.3.6 BENDING MOMENT CALCULATIONS ...................................................................... 6- 9
6.4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................... 6- 9
6.4.1 MEASUREMENT OF EXHAUST BACK PRESSURE ................................................ 6-10
6.4.2 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE DROP FROM TURBOCHARGER TO ATD
INLET .......................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.4.3 MEASUREMENT OF EXHAUST LEAKAGE BETWEEN TURBOCHARGER AND
ATD INLET .................................................................................................................. 6-12
7 AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 7- 1

7.1 AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................. 7- 2
7.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION / OPERATION ........................................................................ 7- 4
7.2.1 AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE ................................................................................... 7- 6
7.2.2 INTAKE THROTTLE ................................................................................................... 7- 7
7.2.3 HYDROCARBON (HC) DOSER ................................................................................. 7- 8
7.3 AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE DESIGN FEATURES ...................................................... 7-10
7.3.1 FEET / HOOKS ........................................................................................................... 7-10
TSM
7.3.2 LOCATING DEVICE ................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.3 SENSOR BOX DISCUSSION ..................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.4 V-BAND CLAMPS ...................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.5 SENSOR AND HARNESS .......................................................................................... 7-11
7.4 AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE VARIATIONS .................................................................. 7-11
7.5 NOISE ATTENUATION ................................................................................................... 7-12
7.6 MASS OF THE AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE ............................................................... 7-12
7.7 MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 7-12
7.7.1 MOUNTING ZONES ................................................................................................... 7-13
7.7.2 BENDING MOMENT FOR INLETS AND OUTLETS .................................................. 7-13
7.7.3 DRAINAGE ................................................................................................................. 7-13
8 COOLING SYSTEM, AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE COOLING .................................................... 8- 1

8.1 COOLING SYSTEM, AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE COOLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ....... 8- 2
8.2 JACKET WATER COOLING SYSTEM ........................................................................... 8- 2
8.3 THERMOSTAT ................................................................................................................ 8- 4
8.3.1 VENTING ................................................................................................................... 8- 6
8.4 WATER PUMP ............................................................................................................... 8- 7
8.5 TYPES OF COOLING SYSTEMS ................................................................................... 8- 8
8.5.1 RAPID WARM-UP COOLING SYSTEM RECOMMENDED DESIGN ........................ 8- 8
8.5.2 AUXILIARY AIR-COOLED COOLER CORES ............................................................ 8-10
8.5.3 COOLANT HEATERS ................................................................................................. 8-10
8.6 AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE COOLING ................................................................................... 8-10
8.6.1 CHARGE AIR COOLER ............................................................................................. 8-12
8.7 COOLING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................. 8-13
8.7.1 SYSTEM FILL ............................................................................................................. 8-13
8.7.2 SYSTEM DRAIN ......................................................................................................... 8-13
8.7.3 DEAERATION ............................................................................................................. 8-13
8.7.4 SYSTEM COOLANT CAPACITY ................................................................................ 8-14
8.7.5 DRAWDOWN CAPACITY ........................................................................................... 8-16
8.7.6 CORE CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................... 8-16
All information subject to change without notice. v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.7.7 WATER PUMP INLET PRESSURE/MAXIMUM STATIC HEAD ................................. 8-16

8.7.8 COOLANT FLOW RATE/EXTERNAL PRESSURE DROP ........................................ 8-16
8.7.9 MINIMUM COOLANT TEMPERATURE ..................................................................... 8-17
8.7.10 SYSTEM PRESSURIZATION ..................................................................................... 8-17
8.7.11 COOLANTS ................................................................................................................ 8-17
8.8 CHARGE AIR COOLING REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 8-17
8.8.1 COOLING CAPABILITY .............................................................................................. 8-17
8.8.2 MAXIMUM PRESSURE LOSS ................................................................................... 8-17
8.8.3 CLEANLINESS ........................................................................................................... 8-18
8.8.4 LEAKAGE ................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.9 VEHICLE SIGN-OFF ....................................................................................................... 8-18
8.10 COOLING SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................ 8-18
8.10.1 COOLING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... 8-18
8.10.1.1 ENGINE OPERATING TEMPERATURE .............................................................. 8-18
8.10.1.2 INTAKE MANIFOLD TEMPERATURE ................................................................. 8-19
8.10.2 ENGINE PERFORMANCE ......................................................................................... 8-19
8.10.2.1 ENGINE HEAT REJECTION ................................................................................ 8-19
TSM
8.10.2.2 COOLANT FLOW ................................................................................................. 8-19
8.10.2.3 HEAT TRANSFER CAPABILITIES ....................................................................... 8-19
8.10.3 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OPERATING CONDITIONS ............................................... 8-20
8.10.3.1 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE .................................................................................. 8-20
8.10.3.2 ALTITUDE ............................................................................................................. 8-21
8.10.3.3 SPACE CONSTRAINTS ....................................................................................... 8-21
8.10.3.4 NOISE LIMITS ...................................................................................................... 8-21
8.10.3.5 TILT OPERATIONS OR INSTALLATIONS ........................................................... 8-21
8.10.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS .......................................................................................... 8-21
8.10.4.1 ADDITIONAL HEAT LOADS TO COOLANT ........................................................ 8-21
8.10.4.2 ADDITIONAL HEAT LOADS TO AIR .................................................................... 8-22
8.10.4.3 COOLANT TYPE .................................................................................................. 8-22
8.10.4.4 PLUMBING .......................................................................................................... 8-22
8.10.4.5 AUXILIARY COOLANT FLOW PATH CIRCUITRY ............................................... 8-24
8.10.4.6 WATER COOLED EXHAUST SYSTEMS ............................................................. 8-24
8.10.4.7 WATER PUMPS ................................................................................................... 8-24
8.11 CHARGE AIR COOLING DESIGN GUIDELINES ........................................................... 8-25
8.11.1 SIZE ............................................................................................................................ 8-25
8.11.2 COOLING AIR FLOW RESTRICTION ....................................................................... 8-26
8.11.3 MATERIAL .................................................................................................................. 8-26
8.11.4 HEADER TANKS ........................................................................................................ 8-26
8.11.5 LOCATION .................................................................................................................. 8-26
8.11.6 PIPEWORK ................................................................................................................ 8-26
8.12 HEAT EXCHANGER SELECTION .................................................................................. 8-27
8.12.1 SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS ................................................................. 8-27
8.13 FAN SYSTEM RECOMMENDATIONS AND FAN SELECTION ..................................... 8-28
8.13.1 BLOWER VS. SUCTION FANS .................................................................................. 8-29
8.13.1.1 FAN PERFORMANCE .......................................................................................... 8-30
8.13.1.2 FAN POSITION ..................................................................................................... 8-33
8.13.1.3 FAN SHROUDS .................................................................................................... 8-34
vi All information subject to change without notice.

8.13.1.4 FAN SYSTEM ASSEMBLIES ............................................................................... 8-35

8.13.1.5 FAN DRIVES ........................................................................................................ 8-35
8.13.1.6 BAFFLES TO PREVENT AIR RECIRCULATION ................................................. 8-35
8.13.1.7 SHUTTERS .......................................................................................................... 8-35
8.13.1.8 WINTERFRONTS ................................................................................................. 8-35
8.14 RADIATOR COMPONENT DESIGN ............................................................................... 8-36
8.14.1 DOWN FLOW AND CROSS FLOW RADIATORS ...................................................... 8-36
8.14.1.1 HORIZONTAL RADIATOR .................................................................................... 8-36
8.14.1.2 RAPID WARM-UP DEAERATION TANK — DOWN FLOW RADIATOR .............. 8-36
8.14.1.3 REMOTE MOUNTED RADIATORS/HEAT EXCHANGER ................................... 8-37
8.14.1.4 INTEGRAL TOP TANK ......................................................................................... 8-37
8.14.1.5 REMOTE TANK .................................................................................................... 8-40
8.14.1.6 RADIATOR BOTTOM TANK ................................................................................. 8-42
8.14.1.7 COOLANT PRESSURE CONTROL CAPS AND RELIEF VALVES ...................... 8-44
8.14.1.8 THERMOSTAT ..................................................................................................... 8-46
8.14.1.9 COOLANT SENSOR DEVICES ........................................................................... 8-47
8.14.1.10 COOLANT RECOVERY SYSTEM ....................................................................... 8-48
TSM
8.14.2 COLD WEATHER OPERATING OPTIMIZATION ....................................................... 8-54
8.14.2.1 ENGINE ................................................................................................................ 8-54
8.14.2.2 VEHICLE .............................................................................................................. 8-54
8.14.2.3 COOLING SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 8-54
8.14.2.4 HEATER CIRCUIT ................................................................................................ 8-54
8.14.3 COOLANT HEATERS ................................................................................................. 8-55
8.14.4 MULTI-DUTY CYCLE ................................................................................................. 8-55
8.14.5 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS ...................................................................................... 8-55
8.15 COOLING SYSTEM EVALUATION TESTS .................................................................... 8-55
8.15.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 8-56
8.15.2 INSTRUMENTATION .................................................................................................. 8-56
8.15.2.1 THERMOCOUPLES AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE ....................................... 8-56
8.15.2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE ................................... 8-57
8.15.2.3 THERMOSTAT ..................................................................................................... 8-57
8.15.2.4 SIGHT GLASS AND TRANSPARENT TUBING ................................................... 8-58
8.15.2.5 GRADUATED CONTAINER ................................................................................. 8-59
8.15.2.6 PRESSURE CAP .................................................................................................. 8-59
8.15.2.7 STOP WATCH ...................................................................................................... 8-59
8.15.2.8 LIGHT .................................................................................................................. 8-59
8.15.2.9 WATER SUPPLY AND HOSE ............................................................................. 8-59
8.15.2.10 ENGINE LOADING METHOD .............................................................................. 8-59
8.15.2.11 TAPE MEASURE .................................................................................................. 8-59
8.15.2.12 FLOWMETERS AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE .............................................. 8-60
8.15.3 TEST PREPARATIONS .............................................................................................. 8-60
8.15.4 TYPES OF TESTS ..................................................................................................... 8-61
8.15.4.1 CONTINUOUS FILL ............................................................................................. 8-61
8.15.4.2 INTERRUPTED FILL ............................................................................................ 8-62
8.15.4.3 BUCKET FILL ....................................................................................................... 8-62
8.15.4.4 TOTAL SYSTEM CAPACITY ................................................................................ 8-63
8.15.4.5 DRAINING CAPABILITY ....................................................................................... 8-63
All information subject to change without notice. vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.15.4.6 WATER PUMP BINDING TEST ............................................................................ 8-63

8.15.4.7 DEAERATION TEST ............................................................................................ 8-63
8.15.4.8 DRAWDOWN TEST ............................................................................................. 8-64
8.15.4.9 WATER FLOW AND PRESSURE TEST .............................................................. 8-66
8.15.4.10 COOLING INDEX TEST ....................................................................................... 8-66
8.15.5 CHARGE AIR COOLING EVALUATION TEST .......................................................... 8-70
8.15.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 8-71
8.15.7 INSTRUMENTATION .................................................................................................. 8-72
8.15.7.1 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT ...................................................................... 8-72
8.15.7.2 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT ............................................................................. 8-72
8.15.8 LOCATION .................................................................................................................. 8-74
8.15.9 INLET SYSTEM RESTRICTION ................................................................................ 8-75
8.15.9.1 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE RISE — AMBIENT TO TURBOCHARGER INLET . 8-75
8.15.9.2 AIR-TO-AIR SYSTEM EVALUATION TESTS ....................................................... 8-75
8.15.9.3 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE RISE — AMBIENT TO INTAKE MANIFOLD .......... 8-75
8.15.9.4 CHARGE AIR COOLER SYSTEM RESTRICTION .............................................. 8-75
8.15.10 TEST ........................................................................................................................... 8-76
TSM
8.15.11 TEST ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................ 8-76
8.16 COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE .................... 8-76
8.16.1 ENGINE OVERHEAT ................................................................................................. 8-77
8.16.1.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ENGINE OVERHEAT .............................................. 8-77
8.16.2 COLD RUNNING ENGINE (OVERCOOLING) ........................................................... 8-79
8.16.3 POOR CAB HEATER PERFORMANCE .................................................................... 8-79
8.16.3.1 THERMOSTAT LEAKAGE TEST ......................................................................... 8-80
8.16.3.2 CAC AIR LEAKAGE TEST ................................................................................... 8-82
8.17 MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................. 8-83
9 FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 9- 1

9.1 FUEL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 9- 2
9.2 FUEL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT/INSTALLATION GUIDELINES ........................................ 9- 5
9.2.1 FUEL TANK ................................................................................................................ 9- 5
9.2.1.1 MATERIAL ............................................................................................................ 9- 5
9.2.1.2 DESIGN ................................................................................................................ 9- 5
9.2.1.3 CAPACITY ............................................................................................................ 9- 6
9.2.1.4 POSITION ............................................................................................................. 9- 6
9.2.2 FUEL FILTERS/FUEL FILTER MODULE ................................................................... 9- 7
9.2.3 FUEL FILTER CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 9- 7
9.2.4 FUEL LINES ............................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.2.4.1 DESIGN ................................................................................................................ 9- 8
9.2.4.2 MATERIAL ............................................................................................................ 9- 8
9.2.4.3 SIZE ...................................................................................................................... 9- 8
9.3 FUEL SELECTION .......................................................................................................... 9- 9
10 LUBRICATION SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 10- 1

10.1 LUBRICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...................................................................... 10- 2
10.2 LUBRICATION OIL SELECTION .................................................................................... 10- 4
10.3 LUBRICATION FILTER ................................................................................................... 10- 4
10.3.1 SUPPLEMENTAL FILTRATION SYSTEMS ................................................................ 10- 4
viii All information subject to change without notice.

10.4 ENGINE COMPONENT OIL SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS .............................................. 10- 4

10.4.1 TURBOCHARGER LUBRICATION ............................................................................ 10- 5
10.4.2 AIR COMPRESSOR LUBRICATION .......................................................................... 10- 5
10.4.3 CRANKCASE BREATHER LUBRICATION ................................................................ 10- 5
10.5 COMPONENT OPTIONS & INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .................................... 10- 5
10.5.1 OIL SAMPLING VALVE ............................................................................................. 10- 5
10.5.2 OIL CHECKS AND FILLS ........................................................................................... 10- 5
10.5.3 OIL SUMPS ................................................................................................................ 10- 6
10.5.4 ENVIRONMENTALLY SAFE OIL CHANGE (ESOC) FITTINGS ................................ 10- 6
10.5.5 OIL IMMERSION HEATERS ...................................................................................... 10- 6
10.5.6 OIL LEVEL SENSORS ............................................................................................... 10- 6
10.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................................... 10- 7
10.6.1 FIRST TIME START ................................................................................................... 10- 7
10.6.2 OIL LEVEL MEASUREMENTS .................................................................................. 10- 7
10.6.3 USED OIL ANALYSIS ................................................................................................. 10- 7
10.6.4 OIL DRAIN INTERVALS ............................................................................................. 10- 7
TSM
11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ......................................................................... 11- 2
11.2 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES ........................................................................................ 11- 3
11.2.1 BATTERY ................................................................................................................... 11- 3
11.2.1.1 FILLER CAP BATTERIES .................................................................................... 11- 3
11.2.1.2 SEMI-MAINTENANCE FREE BATTERIES .......................................................... 11- 3
11.2.1.3 MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERIES .................................................................... 11- 3
11.2.1.4 DEEP CYCLE BATTERIES .................................................................................. 11- 4
11.2.1.5 GEL-CELL AND NICKEL CADMIUM BATTERIES ............................................... 11- 4
11.2.1.6 BATTERY CAPACITY ........................................................................................... 11- 4
11.2.1.7 BATTERY MOUNTING AND LOCATION ............................................................. 11- 4
11.2.2 CRANKING MOTOR .................................................................................................. 11- 5
11.2.3 ALTERNATORS .......................................................................................................... 11- 9
11.2.3.1 ALTERNATOR MOUNTING .................................................................................. 11-10
11.2.4 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 11-11
11.2.5 WIRING ...................................................................................................................... 11-11
11.2.5.1 GUIDELINES FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING .......................................................... 11-11
11.2.5.2 CABLE LOSS TEST PROCEDURE ..................................................................... 11-12
11.2.5.3 MEASURING CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ................................................................. 11-12
11.2.5.4 CALCULATING CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ............................................................. 11-13
12 MOUNTING SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 12- 1

12.1 MOUNTING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................... 12- 2
12.1.1 THREE-POINT MOUNTING ....................................................................................... 12- 2
12.2 SOLID MOUNTING SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 12- 3
12.3 FLEXIBLE MOUNTING SYSTEMS ................................................................................. 12- 4
12.3.1 FLEXIBLE MOUNT SELECTION ............................................................................... 12- 4
12.3.1.1 METHOD A ........................................................................................................... 12- 5
12.3.1.2 METHOD B ........................................................................................................... 12- 6
12.4 INSTALLATION CHECK LIST ......................................................................................... 12- 6
12.5 ENGINE SUPPORT ........................................................................................................ 12- 7
All information subject to change without notice. ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS
13 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS .................................................................................................... 13- 1

13.1 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 13- 2
13.2 MASS ELASTIC DATA .................................................................................................... 13- 2
13.3 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS REQUEST FORM ................................................................... 13- 6
14 ENGINE ELECTRONIC CONTROLS ................................................................................ 14- 1

14.1 ENGINE ELECTRONIC CONTROLS DESCRIPTION .................................................... 14- 2
14.2 ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .......... 14- 2
14.3 MOTOR CONTROL MODULE ........................................................................................ 14- 3
14.4 COMMON POWERTRAIN CONTROLLER .................................................................... 14- 3
14.5 ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTOR .................................................................................... 14- 4
14.6 WIRING HARNESSES .................................................................................................... 14- 5
14.6.1 INJECTOR HARNESSES ........................................................................................... 14- 6
14.6.2 VEHICLE INTERFACE HARNESS ............................................................................. 14- 6
14.6.3 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS ........................................ 14- 8
14.6.4 ENGINE SENSOR HARNESS ................................................................................... 14- 8
14.6.5 DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER HARNESS .............................................................. 14- 8
TSM
14.7 SYSTEM SENSORS ....................................................................................................... 14- 8
14.8 WELDING ....................................................................................................................... 14-11
15 AUXILIARY AIR SYSTEMS ................................................................................................ 15- 1

15.1 AIR START ...................................................................................................................... 15- 2
15.1.1 SYSTEM RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................................... 15- 2
15.1.1.1 AIR TANKS ........................................................................................................... 15- 2
15.1.1.2 AIR CONTROL SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 15- 2
15.1.1.3 AIR STARTERS REQUIRING LUBRICATORS .................................................... 15- 3
15.2 AIR COMPRESSOR ....................................................................................................... 15- 3
15.2.1 16 CFM AND 32 CFM COMPRESSORS ................................................................... 15- 4
16 COLD WEATHER STARTING AND STARTING AID SYSTEMS ....................................... 16- 1

16.1 COLD WEATHER STARTING AND STARTING AID SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION .......... 16- 2
16.2 PREPARATION ............................................................................................................... 16- 3
16.2.1 LUBRICATING OIL ..................................................................................................... 16- 3
16.2.2 DIESEL FUEL ............................................................................................................. 16- 4
16.2.3 COOLANT .................................................................................................................. 16- 4
16.2.4 BATTERY ................................................................................................................... 16- 6
16.2.5 STARTER MOTOR ..................................................................................................... 16- 7
16.2.5.1 ELECTRIC STARTER MOTOR ............................................................................ 16- 7
16.3 COLD WEATHER STARTING ......................................................................................... 16- 8
16.3.1 STARTING SYSTEMS ................................................................................................ 16- 8
16.3.1.1 INTAKE AIR HEATER ........................................................................................... 16- 8
16.3.1.2 COOLANT TANK TYPE HEATERS ...................................................................... 16- 8
16.3.1.3 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER ................................................................................... 16-11
16.3.1.4 OIL PAN HEATER ................................................................................................ 16-11
16.3.1.5 FUEL ..................................................................................................................... 16-11
16.3.1.6 FUEL HEATERS ................................................................................................... 16-11
16.3.1.7 BATTERY HEATER TYPES ................................................................................. 16-11
16.3.1.8 HEATING ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................................................. 16-12
x All information subject to change without notice.

16.3.2 STARTING PROCEDURES ........................................................................................ 16-12

16.3.3 ENGINE STARTING REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 16-13
16.4 COLD WEATHER OPERATION ...................................................................................... 16-13
16.4.1 ETHER INJECTION .................................................................................................... 16-13
16.4.2 IDLING AND LIGHT LOAD ......................................................................................... 16-13
16.4.3 MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................... 16-13
16.4.4 WIND PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 16-14
16.4.5 BATTERY AND CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................................................... 16-14
16.4.6 AIR CLEANER MAINTENANCE ................................................................................. 16-14
16.4.7 SUPPLEMENTAL HEATING DEVICE ........................................................................ 16-14
16.4.8 DDC COLD START RECOMMENDATIONS .............................................................. 16-14
17 ACCESSORY DRIVE SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 17- 1

17.1 ACCESSORY DRIVES ................................................................................................... 17- 2
17.2 GEARTRAIN ................................................................................................................... 17- 2
17.2.1 GEARTRAIN GEAR DRIVE RATIOS .......................................................................... 17- 3
17.3 DRIVETRAIN .................................................................................................................. 17- 4
TSM
17.4 BENDING MOMENT ....................................................................................................... 17- 5
18 AUXILIARY POWER UNITS (APU) .................................................................................... 18- 1

18.1 AUXILIARY POWER UNITS (APU) ................................................................................ 18- 2
18.2 APU DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 18- 2
18.3.1 APU FUEL SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 18- 4
18.3.2 APU COOLANT SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 18- 6
18.3.3 APU EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 18- 9
18.3.4 APU ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 18- 9
18.4 APU ENGINE START-UP PROCEDURE ....................................................................... 18-11
18.4.1 BLEEDING THE COOLANT SYSTEM ....................................................................... 18-11
18.4.2 BLEEDING THE FUEL LINES .................................................................................... 18-12
18.4.3 VERIFYING ENGINE OPERATION ............................................................................ 18-12
18.5 EXAMPLE INSTALLATION PHOTOS ............................................................................. 18-13
19 EFFECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .............................................................. 19- 1

19.1 EFFECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS DESCRIPTION ................................. 19- 2
19.2 AIR INLET TEMPERATURE ........................................................................................... 19- 2
19.3 EXHAUST BACK PRESSURE ........................................................................................ 19- 2
19.4 FUEL TEMPERATURE ................................................................................................... 19- 3
19.5 ALTITUDE ....................................................................................................................... 19- 3
APPENDIX A: ABBREVIATIONS / ACRONYMS ......................................................................... A- 1
APPENDIX B: VENDORS ............................................................................................................. B- 1
GLOSSARY ..................................................................................................................................... G- 1
All information subject to change without notice. xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TSM
xii All information subject to change without notice.

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1 DD Platform On-Highway Engine ...................................................................... 3- 2

Figure 3-2 Exhaust and Intake Valves ................................................................................ 3- 3
Figure 3-3 Cylinder Designation and Firing Order, DD Platform ........................................ 3- 3
Figure 3-4 Right Side Engine View ..................................................................................... 3- 4
Figure 3-5 Left Side Engine View ....................................................................................... 3- 5
Figure 3-6 The Engine Serial Numbers Stamp and Model Number, DD Platform .............. 3- 6
Figure 3-7 Rocker Cover with Option Label ....................................................................... 3- 6
Figure 4-1 Air Intake System Schematic – On-Highway .................................................... 4- 3
Figure 4-2 Intake Manifold and Related Parts .................................................................... 4- 4
Figure 4-3 Light-Duty Air Cleaner, Single Stage Cartridge Type ........................................ 4- 6
Figure 4-4 Medium-Duty Air Cleaner .................................................................................. 4- 7
Figure 4-5 Heavy-Duty Air Cleaner .................................................................................... 4- 8
Figure 4-6 Extra Heavy-Duty Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 4- 9
TSM
Figure 4-7 Precleaner Centrifugal Action ........................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-8 Rain Cap and Inlet Hood ................................................................................... 4-12
Figure 4-9 Altitude vs. Inlet Restriction .............................................................................. 4-14
Figure 4-10 Acceptable Diffuser Configurations ................................................................... 4-16
Figure 4-11 Air Inlet System Calculation .............................................................................. 4-18
Figure 4-12 Typical Radiator-mounted Charge Air Cooling System Right Side View .......... 4-19
Figure 4-13 Typical Radiator-Mounted Charge Air Cooling System Left Side View ............. 4-19
Figure 4-14 Typical Instrumentation Location ....................................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-15 Air Inlet Data Sheet for Turbocharged and Air-to-Air Charge Cooled Engine ... 4-26
Figure 4-16 Air Inlet System Data Sheet for Turbocharged Engines ................................... 4-27
Figure 5-1 EGR System ..................................................................................................... 5- 2
Figure 6-1 Turbocharger and Related Parts ....................................................................... 6- 3
Figure 6-2 Turbine Outlet Connection Points for DD15™ .................................................. 6- 7
Figure 6-3 Turbine Outlet Connection Points for DD13™ .................................................. 6- 7
Figure 6-4 Piezometer Ring ................................................................................................ 6-10
Figure 6-5 Static Pressure Tap ........................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 7-1 Components of Aftertreatment System ............................................................. 7- 3
Figure 7-2 DD Platform Aftertreatment System Schematic ................................................ 7- 4
Figure 7-3 Aftertreatment System Components ................................................................. 7- 5
Figure 7-4 Aftertreatment Device Components .................................................................. 7- 6
Figure 7-5 Operation of the Diesel Particulate Filter .......................................................... 7- 7
Figure 7-6 Location of the Intake Throttle ........................................................................... 7- 8
Figure 7-7 Hydrocarbon (HC) Doser Location .................................................................... 7- 9
Figure 7-8 Hydrocarbon (HC) Doser Location .................................................................... 7- 9
Figure 7-9 Typical Mounting Views of an Aftertreatment Device ........................................ 7-10
Figure 7-10 Aftertreatment Device Orientation Variations .................................................... 7-12
Figure 8-1 Engine Jacket Water Cooling System — Thermostats Closed ......................... 8- 3
Figure 8-2 Engine Jacket Water Cooling System — Thermostats Fully Open ................... 8- 3
Figure 8-3 Thermostat and Related Parts .......................................................................... 8- 4
Figure 8-4 Cooling System Operation ................................................................................ 8- 5
All information subject to change without notice. xiii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Figure 8-5 Cooling System Operation ................................................................................ 8- 6

Figure 8-6 Vent Location .................................................................................................... 8- 7
Figure 8-7 Water Pump Mounting ...................................................................................... 8- 8
Figure 8-8 Rapid Warm-up Cooling System — Remote Tank, Cross Flow and Down Flow
Radiators .......................................................................................................... 8- 9
Figure 8-9 Typical Charge Air Cooling System Right Side ................................................. 8-10
Figure 8-10 Typical Charge Air Cooling System Left Side ................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-11 Air-to-Air Charge Air Cooler System ................................................................. 8-11
Figure 8-12 Typical Charge Air Cooler ................................................................................. 8-12
Figure 8-13 Charge Air Cooler Cross-Section ...................................................................... 8-12
Figure 8-14 Percent Increases in Volume for Water and Antifreeze Solution ...................... 8-15
Figure 8-15 Hose Clamp 180° Indexed Position .................................................................. 8-23
Figure 8-16 Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers ..................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8-17 Blower vs. Suction Fans ................................................................................... 8-30
Figure 8-18 Typical Fan Performance Curve ........................................................................ 8-32
Figure 8-19 Fan Shroud Types ............................................................................................. 8-34
Figure 8-20 Down Flow Radiator and Cross Flow Radiator ................................................. 8-36
TSM
Figure 8-21 Rapid Warm-up Down Flow Radiator Top Tank ................................................ 8-38
Figure 8-22 Remote Surge Tank Design for Rapid Warm-up Cooling System ..................... 8-41
Figure 8-23 Down Flow Radiator Inlet Tank Deaeration Line Boss Position ........................ 8-42
Figure 8-24 Coolant Inlet/Outlet Locations ........................................................................... 8-43
Figure 8-25 Radiator Outlet Contour .................................................................................... 8-43
Figure 8-26 Pressure Control Cap — Pressure Valve Open ................................................ 8-45
Figure 8-27 Pressure Control Cap — Vacuum Valve Open ................................................. 8-45
Figure 8-28 Effect of Altitude and Pressure Caps ................................................................ 8-46
Figure 8-29 Nominal Settings For Coolant Temperature Control Devices — 190° ............... 8-48
Figure 8-30 Cooling System Design (Warm-up — Closed Thermostat) ............................... 8-49
Figure 8-31 Cooling System Design (Stabilized Temperature — Open Thermostat) ........... 8-50
Figure 8-32 Cooling System Design (Cool-down — Closed Thermostat) ............................ 8-51
Figure 8-33 Acceptable Top Tank Design ............................................................................. 8-53
Figure 8-34 Unacceptable Top Tank Design ......................................................................... 8-53
Figure 8-35 Thermostat ........................................................................................................ 8-58
Figure 8-36 Sample Static Cooling Test Sheet ..................................................................... 8-65
Figure 8-37 Sample Cooling Index Test Sheets ................................................................... 8-68
Figure 8-38 Cooling Index Calculation Sheet ....................................................................... 8-69
Figure 8-39 Sample CAC Cooling Index Test Sheets ........................................................... 8-71
Figure 8-40 Piezometer Ring ................................................................................................ 8-72
Figure 8-41 Static Pressure Tap ........................................................................................... 8-73
Figure 8-42 Pressure Tap on a Bend .................................................................................... 8-74
Figure 8-43 Typical Instrumentation Location ....................................................................... 8-74
Figure 8-44 Thermostat Leakage Areas ............................................................................... 8-81
Figure 8-45 Thermostat Leakage Check .............................................................................. 8-82
Figure 9-1 Figure 1-2 Schematic Diagram of the DD Platform Fuel System ...................... 9- 4
Figure 9-2 Properly Designed Fuel Tank ............................................................................ 9- 6
Figure 10-1 DD Platform Lubrication System ....................................................................... 10- 3
Figure 11-1 Engine Electrical System .................................................................................. 11- 2
Figure 11-2 Battery Retainers .............................................................................................. 11- 5
xiv All information subject to change without notice.

Figure 11-3 Cranking Motor Mounting .................................................................................. 11- 6

Figure 11-4 Acceptable Cranking Index with DD Platform ................................................... 11- 7
Figure 11-5 Cranking Motor Indexing ................................................................................... 11- 8
Figure 11-6 Typical Cranking Motor Cross-section .............................................................. 11- 9
Figure 11-7 Cable Resistance .............................................................................................. 11-13
Figure 12-1 General Three Point Mounting Scheme ............................................................ 12- 3
Figure 12-2 Transmissibility .................................................................................................. 12- 6
Figure 12-3 Distance of Rear Mounts for Zero Bending Moments ....................................... 12- 8
Figure 12-4 Bending Moment for Fixed Mounting System ................................................... 12- 9
Figure 13-1 Mass Elastic Data ............................................................................................. 13- 3
Figure 13-2 Mass Elastic Data Page 1 of 3 .......................................................................... 13- 4
Figure 13-3 Mass Elastic Data Page 2 of 3 .......................................................................... 13- 5
Figure 13-4 Torsional Analysis Request Form ...................................................................... 13- 6
Figure 14-1 Motor Control Module ........................................................................................ 14- 3
Figure 14-2 Common Powertrain Controller ......................................................................... 14- 4
Figure 14-3 Electronic Fuel Injector ...................................................................................... 14- 5
Figure 14-4 Typical DDEC VI Vehicle Interface Harness System ........................................ 14- 7
TSM
Figure 14-5 DD Platform Sensor Location 1 ......................................................................... 14- 9
Figure 14-6 DD Platform Sensor Location 2 ......................................................................... 14-10
Figure 14-7 Sensor Locations for the DOC and DPF ........................................................... 14-11
Figure 14-8 Battery Connections for Proper Welding .......................................................... 14-12
Figure 15-1 Single Cylinder Air Compressor 16 CFM and Twin Cylinder 32 CFM ............... 15- 3
Figure 15-2 Air Compressor Mounted Power Steering Pump .............................................. 15- 4
Figure 16-1 Coolant Freezing and Boiling Temperature vs. Inhibited Propylene Glycol
(IPG) Concentration (Sea Level) ...................................................................... 16- 5
Figure 16-2 General Battery Cranking Power - Percent ....................................................... 16- 7
Figure 16-3 Watts Required to Raise Block Coolant Temperature to +30°F (-1.1°C) in in-line
engines ............................................................................................................ 16-10
Figure 17-1 Rear Geartrain for the DD Platform Engine ...................................................... 17- 3
Figure 17-2 GEARTRAIN GEAR DRIVE RATIOS ................................................................ 17- 4
Figure 17-3 DD Platform DRIVETRAIN ................................................................................ 17- 5
Figure 17-4 DD Platform 14.8L Allowable Front Crankshaft Bending Moment .................... 17- 6
Figure 17-5 Bending Moment on the Front of the Crank ...................................................... 17- 7
Figure 17-6 Poly-V Belt integrated Vibration Damper Pulley Illustrating Lx Values ...... 17- 8
Figure 17-7 Net Belt Tension at the 90° Position .................................................................. 17- 9
Figure 18-1 TriPac Components .......................................................................................... 18- 3
Figure 18-2 Fuel Pick-Up Tool Installation ............................................................................ 18- 5
Figure 18-3 Fuel Pick-Up Tool Installation Alternate Installation .......................................... 18- 5
Figure 18-4 Coolant Hose Installation .................................................................................. 18- 6
Figure 18-5 DD15 with 4-Port Coolant Return Manifold ....................................................... 18- 8
Figure 18-6 DD15 with 2-Port Coolant Return Manifold ....................................................... 18- 8
Figure 18-7 CPC Connectors ............................................................................................... 18-10
Figure 18-8 Coolant Supply Ports ........................................................................................ 18-13
Figure 18-9 Two-Port Coolant Return Manifold .................................................................... 18-14
Figure 18-10 Four-Port Coolant Return Manifold ................................................................... 18-14
Figure 18-11 Four-Port Coolant Return Manifold Installed ..................................................... 18-15
Figure 18-12 Right Side View Of Engine After APU Installation ............................................. 18-15
All information subject to change without notice. xv

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Figure 18-13 Coolant Lines .................................................................................................... 18-16

Figure 18-14 Alternate View ................................................................................................... 18-16
Figure 19-1 The General Relationship of Exhaust Back Pressure and Engine Power ......... 19- 3
Figure 19-2 The General Effects Of Altitude On Engine Power ........................................... 19- 4
TSM
xvi All information subject to change without notice.

LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1 The Correct Type of Fire Extinguisher ............................................................... 2- 7

Table 4-1 Air Cleaner Applications .................................................................................... 4- 5
Table 4-2 Air Inlet Restriction at Different Altitudes ........................................................... 4-15
Table 4-3 Hose Specifications for the Inlet Side of the Turbocharger ............................... 4-16
Table 4-4 Thermocouples .................................................................................................. 4-24
Table 4-5 Pressure Taps ................................................................................................... 4-25
Table 7-1 ATS Component Descriptions .......................................................................... 7- 2
Table 8-1 Heat Exchanger Materials, Construction, and Design Choices ......................... 8-27
Table 8-2 Installed Fan Performance Factors ................................................................... 8-31
Table 8-3 Top Tank Component Guidelines — Standpipe(s), Baffle, Vortex Baffle, Fill Line
and Connections, Vent Line, and Radiator Inlet ............................................... 8-39
Table 8-4 Top Tank Component Guidelines— Fill Neck, Fill Neck Vent Hole, and Coolant
Level Sensor .................................................................................................... 8-40
TSM
Table 8-5 Component Design and Location Guidelines for the Remote Top Tank ............ 8-41
Table 8-6 Thermocouples .................................................................................................. 8-75
Table 8-7 Pressure Taps ................................................................................................... 8-76
Table 11-1 Minimum Battery Capacity for Acceptable Engine Cranking ............................. 11- 4
Table 11-2 Maximum Circuit Resistance ............................................................................. 11-14
Table 16-1 Common Battery Heaters .................................................................................. 16-12
Table 16-2 DDC Cold Start Recommendations - DD Platform Engine ................................ 16-15
Table 17-1 DD Platform Accessory Drives on Crankshaft (Non-Gear Driven) .................... 17- 2
Table 17-2 DD Platform Accessory Drives on Crankshaft (Gear Driven) .......................... 17- 2
Table 17-3 DD Platform Vibration Damper Pulley Lx Values ............................................... 17- 7
Table 18-1 CPC Pins ........................................................................................................... 18-10
All information subject to change without notice. xvii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TSM
xviii All information subject to change without notice.

1 INTRODUCTION
The DD Platform engines are a new line of six cylinder four–stroke diesel engines.
The DD15™ engine has a displacement of 14.8L, horsepower ranging from 455 to 560 BHP,
and torque ranging from 1550 to 1850 lb·ft. The engine is also equipped with a turbocompound
system for improved fuel economy.
The DD13™ shares very similar architecture and layout to the DD15™ engine, but with a
TSM
displacement of 12.8L and no turbocompound system. Horsepower ratings are available from
350hp to 450hp and torque from 1350ft-lb to 1650 lb·ft.
Vital features of the DD Platform engines include an amplified common rail fuel injection system,
dual overhead camshafts, an integrated Jake Brake®, DDEC VI electronic control system, active
aftertreatment, outstanding NVH characteristics, and torque response that delivers 95% of peak
torque at an engine speed of only 1000rpm.
The electronic control system is the Detroit Diesel Electronic Control System (DDEC®) — an
advanced electronic fuel injection and control system. The engine calibration programmed in the
memory of the Motor Control Module (MCM) uniquely defines the operational characteristics of
the engine. The Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) contains all of the vehicle functionality.
Unique DD Platform engine features include:
□ Variable Speed Governor
□ Fuel economy incentive
□ Emissions, smoke, and noise control
□ Torque limiting
□ Progressive Shift
□ Throttle inhibit
□ Engine protection
□ Engine diagnostics
□ Optimal idle
□ Engine brake controls
□ Cruise control
This manual covers engine models:
All information subject to change without notice. 1-1

INTRODUCTION
□ 472900 DD Platform Western Star On-Highway Truck

□ 472901 DD Platform Freightliner On-Highway Truck
□ 472902 DD Platform Sterling On-Highway Truck
□ 471900 DD Platform Western Star On–Highway Truck
□ 471901 DD Platform Freightliner On-Highway Truck
□ 471902 DD Platform Sterling On-Highway Truck
TSM
1-2 All information subject to change without notice.

2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Section Page
2.1 SAFETY MEASURES ............................................................................. 2- 2

2.2 STANDS .................................................................................................. 2- 2
2.3 GLASSES ............................................................................................... 2- 2
TSM
2.4 WELDING ............................................................................................... 2- 2
2.5 WORK PLACE ........................................................................................ 2- 4
2.6 CLOTHING .............................................................................................. 2- 5
2.7 ELECTRIC TOOLS ................................................................................. 2- 5
2.8 AIR .......................................................................................................... 2- 5
2.9 FLUIDS AND PRESSURE ...................................................................... 2- 5
2.10 BATTERIES ............................................................................................ 2- 6
2.11 FIRE ........................................................................................................ 2- 7
2.12 FLUOROELASTOMER ........................................................................... 2- 7

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2.1 SAFETY MEASURES

The following safety measures are essential when installing the DD Platform engine.
PERSONAL INJURY
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known
to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and
other reproductive harm.
□ Always start and operate an engine in a well ventilated
area.
□ If operating an engine in an enclosed area, vent the
exhaust to the outside.
TSM
□ Do not modify or tamper with the exhaust system or
emission control system.
2.2 STANDS
Use safety stands in conjunction with hydraulic jacks or hoists. Do not rely on either the jack or
the hoist to carry the load.
2.3 GLASSES
Select appropriate safety glasses for the job. Safety glasses must be worn when using tools
such as hammers, chisels, pullers and punches.
2.4 WELDING
Use caution when welding.

PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from arc welding, gas welding, or cutting,
wear required safety equipment such as an arc welder’s face
plate or gas welder’s goggles, welding gloves, protective
apron, long sleeve shirt, head protection, and safety shoes.
Always perform welding or cutting operations in a well
ventilated area. The gas in oxygen/acetylene cylinders used
in gas welding and cutting is under high pressure. If a
cylinder should fall due to careless handling, the gage end
could strike an obstruction and fracture, resulting in a gas
leak leading to fire or an explosion. If a cylinder should fall
resulting in the gage end breaking off, the sudden release
of cylinder pressure will turn the cylinder into a dangerous
TSM
projectile. Observe the following precautions when using
oxygen/acetylene gas cylinders:
□ Always wear required safety shoes.
□ Do not handle tanks in a careless manner or with greasy
gloves or slippery hands.
□ Use a chain, bracket, or other restraining device at all
times to prevent gas cylinders from falling.
□ Do not place gas cylinders on their sides, but stand
them upright when in use.
□ Do not drop, drag, roll, or strike a cylinder forcefully.
□ Always close valves completely when finished welding
or cutting.
FIRE
To avoid injury from fire, check for fuel or oil leaks before
welding or carrying an open flame near the engine.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
NOTICE:
When welding, the following must be done to avoid damage to the
electronic controls or the engine:
□ Both the positive (+) and negative (-) battery leads must be
disconnected before welding.
□ Ground cable must be in close proximity to welding location
- engine must never be used as a grounding point.
□ Welding on the engine or engine mounted components is
NEVER recommended.
2.5 WORK PLACE

Organize your work area and keep it clean.
TSM
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from slipping and falling, immediately clean
up any spilled liquids.
Eliminate the possibility of a fall by:

□ Wiping up oil spills
□ Keeping tools and parts off the floor
A fall could result in a serious injury.
After installation of the engine is complete:
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from rotating belts and fans, do not remove
and discard safety guards.
□ Reinstall all safety devices, guards or shields

□ Check to be sure that all tools and equipment used to install the engine are removed from
the engine

2.6 CLOTHING
Wear work clothing that fits and is in good repair. Work shoes must be sturdy and rough-soled.
Bare feet, sandals or sneakers are not acceptable foot wear when installing an engine.
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury when working near or on an operating engine,
remove loose items of clothing and jewelry. Tie back or
contain long hair that could be caught in any moving part
causing injury.
2.7 ELECTRIC TOOLS
TSM
Improper use of electrical equipment can cause severe injury.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK
To avoid injury from electrical shock, follow OEM furnished
operating instructions prior to usage.
2.8 AIR
Use proper shielding to protect everyone in the work area.
EYE INJURY
To avoid injury from flying debris when using compressed air,
wear adequate eye protection (face shield or safety goggles)
and do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) air pressure.
2.9 FLUIDS AND PRESSURE

Be extremely careful when dealing with fluids under pressure. Fluids under pressure can have
enough force to penetrate the skin.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
These fluids can infect a minor cut or opening in the skin. See a doctor at once, if injured by
escaping fluid. Serious infection or reaction can result without immediate medical treatment.
PERSONAL INJURY
To prevent the escape of high pressure fuel that can penetrate
skin, ensure the engine has been shut down for a minimum of
10 minutes before servicing any component within the high
pressure circuit. Residual high fuel pressure may be present
within the circuit.
TSM
HOT COOLANT
remove the cooling system pressure cap while the engine is
at operating temperature. Wear adequate protective clothing
(face shield, rubber gloves, apron, and boots). Remove the
cap slowly to relieve pressure.
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury from penetrating fluids, do not put your hands
in front of fluid under pressure. Fluids under pressure can
penetrate skin and clothing.
2.10 BATTERIES
Electrical storage batteries give off highly flammable hydrogen gas when charging and continue
to do so for some time after receiving a steady charge.
Always disconnect the battery cable before working on the Detroit Diesel Electronic Controls
system.

Battery Explosion and Acid Burn

To avoid injury from battery explosion or contact with battery
acid, work in a well ventilated area, wear protective clothing,
and avoid sparks or flames near the battery. If you come in
contact with battery acid:
□ Flush your skin with water.
□ Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
□ Flush your eyes with water.
□ Get medical attention immediately.
2.11 FIRE
TSM
Keep a charged fire extinguisher within reach. Be sure you have the correct type of extinguisher
for the situation. The correct fire extinguisher types for specific working environments are listed
in the following table.
Fire Extinguisher Work Environment

Type A Wood, Paper, Textile and Rubbish
Type B Flammable Liquids
Type C Electrical Equipment
Table 2-1 The Correct Type of Fire Extinguisher
2.12 FLUOROELASTOMER
Fluoroelastomer (Viton®) parts such as O-rings and seals are perfectly safe to handle under
normal design conditions.
A potential hazard may occur if these components are raised to a temperature above 316°C (600°F)
(in a fire for example). Fluoroelastomer will decompose (indicated by charring or the appearance
of a black, sticky mass) and produce hydrofluoric acid. This acid is extremely corrosive and, if
touched by bare skin, may cause severe burns (the symptoms could be delayed for several hours).

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CHEMICAL BURNS
To avoid injury from chemical burns, wear a face shield and
neoprene or PVC gloves when handling fluoroelastomer
O-rings or seals that have been degraded by excessive heat.
Discard gloves after handling degraded fluoroelastomer
parts.
TSM

3 ENGINE AND ACCESSORY IDENTIFICATION
Section Page
3.1 ENGINE AND ACCESSORY IDENTIFICATION DESCRIPTION ........... 3- 2

3.2 MAJOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS ...................................................... 3- 4
3.3 ENGINE IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................... 3- 5
TSM

ENGINE AND ACCESSORY IDENTIFICATION
3.1 ENGINE AND ACCESSORY IDENTIFICATION

DESCRIPTION
The DD Platform engines are a family of inline, six cylinder, four stroke engines. The DD15™
has a displacement of 2.47 liters per cylinder and total displacement of 14.8 liters. The DD13™
has a displacement of 2.13 liters per cylinder and total displacement of 12.8 liters. All DD
Platform engines use a separate Charge Air Cooling (CAC) system in addition to the conventional
Jacket Water (JW) cooling system.
Figure 3-1
TSM
DD Platform On-Highway Engine
The DD Platform engine dual overhead cam design optimizes the intake and exhaust air passages
in the cylinder head for easier breathing. The cam follower roller in the injector rocker arm is
made of silicon nitride which makes it possible to operate at very high injection pressures while
maintaining long life of the roller.
The intake and exhaust port configuration of the DD Platform is unique. In this design, the
valve orientation has been rotated 90 degrees from the traditional arrangement used in push-rod
engines. Other engines rotate the valves 45 degrees, to promote push-rod actuation. However, the
90 degree design provides several distinct advantages such as very short, unobstructed intake and
exhaust ports for efficient air flow, low pumping losses, and reduced heat transfer.

TSM
Figure 3-2 Exhaust and Intake Valves
The DD Platform engines utilize the same firing order as the Series 60 (1 – 5 – 3 – 6 – 2 – 4).
This is the optimum firing order for an inline six-cylinder diesel engine in order to minimize
vibration and torsional stress.
Figure 3-3 Cylinder Designation and Firing Order, DD Platform

3.2 MAJOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS

Any design variation of the components called out in the following illustrations may be found
on www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have access to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your
Distributor.
TSM
1. Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler
2. EGR Valve / Actuator
3. Axial Power Turbine
4. Hydrocarbon Doser Valve
6.Starter location
7. Air Seal Pressure Regulator Valve
8. Crankcase Breather
9. Turbocharger
5. APT Gearbox
Figure 3-4 Right Side Engine View

TSM
1. Waterpump 8. HC Doser Block Assembly
2. Oil / Coolant Module 9. Low Pressure Fuel Pump
3. Coolant Filter 10. Air Compressor
4. Oil Filter 11. Power Steering Pump
5. Fuel Rail (Behind Cover) 12.Fuel Filter Module
6. Intake Manifold 13. Motor Control Module
7. High Pressure Fuel Pump 14. Thermostat
Figure 3-5 Left Side Engine View
3.3 ENGINE IDENTIFICATION

The permanent engine serial number and model number are stamped on the cylinder block.

Figure 3-6 The Engine Serial Numbers Stamp and Model Number, DD Platform
The first six digits of the engine Serial Number are the Model Number, describing the engine
displacement and the intended market. The 472 indicates a (14.8L) DD15 engine while a 471
TSM
indicates a (12.8L) DD13 engine. There are a variety of market codes indicating engines intended
for use in the NAFTA, European or Asian markets.
Option labels and emission certification labels attached to the valve rocker cover contain the
engine serial and model numbers and list any optional equipment used on the engine
Figure 3-7 Rocker Cover with Option Label
The engine model number with serial number should be given with any order for parts. In
addition, if a type number is shown on the option plate covering the equipment required, this
number should also be included on the parts order.

All groups or parts used on a unit are standard for the engine model unless otherwise listed
on the option plate. For complete information on parts, refer to the DD15™ Parts Catalog
(DDC-SVC-MAN-0042).
DD Platform engines may include additional information labels ordered in the 14B08 group.
TSM

TSM
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

4 AIR INLET SYSTEM
Section Page
4.1 AIR INLET SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 4- 2

4.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ......................................................... 4- 4
4.3 DESIGN GUIDELINES ............................................................................ 4-17
TSM
4.4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 4-23
4.5 TEST ....................................................................................................... 4-25

AIR INLET SYSTEM
4.1 AIR INLET SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

An internal combustion engine requires an adequate supply of air for combustion to develop full
rated power and burn fuel efficiently. This section describes the function, installation, design, and
test requirements for the air inlet system of a Detroit Diesel DD Platform engine.
The intake manifold routes the air charge into the cylinder head ports through two intake valves,
and into the cylinder. At the beginning of the compression stroke, each cylinder is filled with a
mixture of clean, fresh air and recirculated exhaust gas, which provides for efficient combustion
while reducing the formation of NOx. The turbocharger supplies air under pressure to the Charge
Air Cooler (CAC) and then to the intake manifold. The recirculated exhaust gas is extracted from
the exhaust manifold, cooled by a gas to water EGR Cooler, routed through the EGR cold pipe and
venturi, and then mixed with fresh, cooled air from the CAC. The air enters the turbocharger after
passing through the air cleaner or air silencer. Power to drive the turbocharger is extracted from
energy in the engine exhaust gas. The expanding exhaust gases turn a single stage turbocharger
wheel, which drives an impeller, thus pressurizing intake air. This charge air is then cooled by an
air-to-air CAC before flowing into the cylinders for improved combustion efficiency.
TSM
4.1.1 DD PLATFORM ON-HIGHWAY ENGINES
All DD Platform on-highway engines have a single turbocharger which supplies filtered air
through a CAC to the air intake manifold. The CACs are generally located in front of or next
to the engine radiator core.
The inlet manifold options available may be found on www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have
access to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor.

1.Cold Boost Pipe

2. Intake Manifold
Figure 4-1
TSM 3. EGR Cooler
A97. EGR Actuator
Air Intake System Schematic – On-Highway
A CAC is typically mounted ahead of the engine coolant radiator. The pressurized intake charge
is routed from the discharge side of the turbocharger, through the CAC, through the air throttle
and combined with recirculated exhaust gas in the intake manifold which directs the air to
ports in the cylinder head, through two intake valves per cylinder, and into the cylinder. At the
beginning of the compression stroke, each cylinder is filled with a mixture of clean, cooled air and
recirculated exhaust gas. The intake manifold air inlet is attached to the CAC ducting and the air
compressor using flexible hose and clamps.

AIR INLET SYSTEM
2. Grid Heater
3. O-ring
TSM
1. Intake Manifold Gasket 7. Throttle Adapter
8. Gasket
9. Intake Throttle Valve
4. Cold Boost Pipe 10. Gasket
5. Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor 11. EGR Temperature Sensor
6. Gasket 12. Intake Manifold
Figure 4-2 Intake Manifold and Related Parts
4.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

The air inlet system has a direct effect on engine output, fuel consumption, exhaust emissions,
and engine life. The parts and materials must be designed to withstand the working environment
that applies to the system.

4.2.1 DRY PAPER ELEMENT AIR CLEANERS
Dry paper element type cleaners are recommended for use on Detroit Diesel engines. Alternate
types of air filtration systems, such as foam type and oil bath cleaners may be available in the
aftermarket.
Dry paper element air cleaners are classified by function:
□ Light-duty air cleaners
□ Medium-duty air cleaners
□ Heavy-duty air cleaners
□ Extra heavy-duty air cleaners
The type of function relates to the dust holding capacity of the particular cleaner. The choice of
cleaner depends upon the engine type, application, operating environment, and service life. The
cleaner must meet filtration requirements across the engine speed and load range and be readily
accessible for maintenance with adequate space provision for replacement. Air cleaners may have
replaceable elements, or may be completely disposable. The different types of air cleaners and the
TSM
application in which they are used are listed in the following table.
Type of Air Cleaners Application

Marine engines, mobile and stationary engines in factories,
Light-duty
warehouses, etc. and cranes (wheel-mounted)
Stationary engines, air compressors, pumps, and cranes
Medium-duty
(wheel-mounted)
Trucks (nonroad, logging), tractors (wheel, agricultural) also
Heavy-duty tractors (crawler, small), motor graders, scrapers, cranes
(shovels), stationary engines in dusty ambients
Scrapers (large or rear engine), rock drills (self-contained),
cranes and shovels (rough terrain), air compressors ( rock
Extra Heavy-duty
drilling or quarrying), tractors (full-tracked, low speed), stationary
engines in extreme dust
Table 4-1 Air Cleaner Applications
Tests to determine the service life of an air cleaners are usually performed in accordance with
SAE J726-C.
4.2.1.1 Light-Duty Air Cleaner
Typical light-duty air cleaner.

AIR INLET SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 4-3 Light-Duty Air Cleaner, Single Stage Cartridge Type
4.2.1.2 Medium-Duty Use Air Cleaner
A medium-duty air cleaner is typically a two stage cyclonic/paper element cleaner. These cleaners
have a cyclonic first stage that removes about 80-85% of the dust from the air before it passes
through the paper element. Optional safety elements for increased reliability are available and
may be included in these air cleaners.

1. Body Assembly
2. Vacuator Valve
TSM 6. Primary Element
7. Safety Element
3. Cup Assembly 8. Nut Assembly (Wing Nut and Washer Gasket)
4. Clamp Assembly 9. Restriction Indicator Fitting Cap
5. Baffle Assembly 10. O-ring
Figure 4-4 Medium-Duty Air Cleaner
4.2.1.3 Heavy-Duty Use Air Cleaner
A heavy-duty air cleaner is typically a two stage cyclonic/paper element cleaner. These cleaners
incorporate a highly efficient cyclonic pre-cleaner arrangement that removes 94-98% of the dust
from the air before it passes through the paper element. Some types of heavy duty air cleaners
do not include a mechanical precleaner but employ an oversized cleaner element to accomplish
the same dust removal with similar service intervals. Optional safety elements for increased
reliability are available and may be included in these air cleaners.

AIR INLET SYSTEM
1. Dust Cup
2. Cup Clamp
TSM
3. Body or Cup O-ring
8. Safety Element
9. Safety Signal
10. Primary Element
4. Lower Body Assembly 11. Gasket
5. Body Clamp 12. Access Cover

6. O-ring 13. Wing Nut
7. Upper Body Assembly
Figure 4-5 Heavy-Duty Air Cleaner

4.2.1.4 Extra Heavy-Duty Use
Extra heavy-duty air cleaners have large paper cleaners coupled with high efficiency mechanical
precleaners. The dust from the precleaner section may be continually removed by the use of an
exhaust aspirator, positive pressure bleed, or may have dust cups that open because of the weight
of the dust when the engine stops. Optional safety elements for increased reliability are available
and may be included in these air cleaners.
TSM
1. Bleed Tube 5. Housing
2. Positive Pressure Plumbing Kit 6. Outlet Nozzle
3. Positive Pressure Self-cleaning Precleaner 7. Mounting Flange
4. Pamic Element
Figure 4-6 Extra Heavy-Duty Air Cleaner

AIR INLET SYSTEM
4.2.1.5 Foam Type Air Cleaners
Foam type air cleaner elements, available in the aftermarket, may produce gummy or varnish-like
deposits which may affect engine operation.
NOTICE:
Detroit Diesel is aware of attempts to use air cleaner elements
made of foam or fabric batting material soaked with a sticky
substance to improve dirt-holding capability. This substance may
transfer from the cleaner media and coat the inside surfaces of
air ducts and engine air inlet systems, blowers, and air boxes.
The result may be reduced engine performance and a change
in engine operating conditions.
Detroit Diesel does not recommend the use of foam type air cleaners, in any application.
4.2.1.6 Oil-bath Air Cleaners
TSM
Use of an oil-bath air cleaner is not recommended. Oil-bath type air cleaners generally do not
have enough gradability for mobile, nonroad applications.
NOTICE:
Air cleaner performance may be adversely affected by temperature
extremes. Oil pullover from improper usage or extreme vehicle
tilt may cause engine runaway and damage. The oil mist
created by the cleaner may adversely effect turbocharger life and
performance.
Oil-bath air cleaners generally have lower efficiencies and greater restriction to airflow than
dry type air cleaners.
Detroit Diesel recognizes that oil bath air cleaners may be necessary in locations where dry type air
cleaners are not readily available. Therefore, oil-bath type air cleaners are acceptable when used
according to the air cleaner manufacturer's guidelines and Detroit Diesel air system requirements.
Prior approval from Detroit Diesel Application Engineering is required if an oil-bath air cleaner
is needed.
4.2.1.7 Auxiliary Precleaners
Auxiliary precleaners are devices that separate contaminants from the incoming air and expel
them through a discharge port prior to entering the air cleaner inlet. Precleaners remove most
of the airborne dirt from incoming air which extends the service life of the cleaner element.
Precleaners force the incoming air to rotate within the precleaner creating a centrifugal force and
depositing the dirt into a bin or cup for removal while servicing.

TSM
Figure 4-7 Precleaner Centrifugal Action
Precleaners may be used with the DD Platform engines as long as the air inlet restriction
requirements are met. The use of a precleaner may necessitate the use of a larger air cleaner.
4.2.1.8 Inlet Screens
An inlet screen may be used with an air cleaner when larger airborne material is encountered in
an operating environment. An inlet screen will prevent this material from blocking air passage
through the air cleaner elements. The inlet screen should be inspected frequently and cleaned as
necessary.
4.2.1.9 Rain Caps and Inlet Hoods
The entrance to the air cleaner must be designed to ensure that no water or snow can enter the
air cleaner. Rain caps or inlet hoods are used for this purpose.

AIR INLET SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 4-8 Rain Cap and Inlet Hood
4.2.1.10 Water Drains
Water injection is possible with most intake systems, either by unexpected operating conditions
or failures in the intake parts. A water drain should be positioned at the lowest point in the
system. A water collection trap may be necessary to overcome engine vacuum. Drains may also
be needed on the bottom of the air cleaner.
NOTICE:
Excessive water injection may cause severe engine damage or
complete failure.
4.2.1.11 Inlet Silencers
Appreciable reductions in noise levels can sometimes be achieved with the use of inlet silencers.
The installer should consult the supplier for specific recommendations. Care should be taken to
ensure that the intake restriction is not raised above the allowable limit for clean air cleaners.
4.2.1.12 Air Cleaner Selection
Choose an appropriate air cleaner as follows:

1. Determine the maximum engine air flow requirement and the clean and dirty
restriction limitations found on www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have access to
www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor.

2. Determine the general application category.

3. Determine the air cleaner classification.
4. Select the appropriate cleaner from the manufacturer's recommendations.
4.2.2 RESTRICTION INDICATOR
Air inlet restriction is an important parameter of the air inlet system. High inlet restriction may
cause insufficient air for combustion. Factors resulting in a high inlet restriction include:
□ Small intake pipe diameter
□ Excessive number of sharp bends in system
□ Long pipe between the air cleaner and turbocharger compressor inlet
□ High air cleaner resistance
Air inlet restriction that is too high may result in:
□ Reduced power
TSM
□ Poor fuel economy
□ High combustion temperature
□ Over-heating
□ Reduced engine life
An air inlet restriction indicator must be fitted on the air intake system.
The operating setting of the indicator should correspond to the maximum permissible inlet
restriction, 5.0 kPa (20 in. H2O) maximum for systems with dirty cleaners, provided that it is
connected to a tapping point close to the turbocharger inlet.
Altitude affects air inlet restriction The Altitude Performance Curve illustrates the effects of
altitude on the percentage of inlet restriction.

AIR INLET SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 4-9 Altitude vs. Inlet Restriction
An example of the reduction of allowable restriction at different altitudes is listed in the following
table.

Allowable Restriction
Clean System Dirty System
25°C (77°F) 3.0 kPa (12 in. H2O) 5.0 kPa (20 in. H2O) At sea level
2,438 m (8,000 ft.)
25°C (77°F) 2.31 kPa (9.25 in. H2O) 3.85 kPa (15.5 in. H2O)
above sea level
Table 4-2 Air Inlet Restriction at Different Altitudes
The reason for this reduction in allowable restriction is the lower air density at altitude.
Install the restriction indicator as close to the turbocharger compressor inlet as practical, but no
closer than 12.7 cm (5 in.).
Compensate for the added restriction incurred from piping between the cleaner and the
turbocharger inlet when the restriction indicator fits to the air cleaner tapping of a remote-mounted
cleaner.
4.2.3 PIPEWORK
TSM
Give careful attention to the pipework and associated fittings used in the inlet system in order to
minimize restriction and maintain reliable sealing.
Keep piping lengths short to minimize the number of bends and restriction incurred in the system.
Use smooth bend elbows with a bend radius to tube diameter (R/D) ratio of at least 2.0 and
preferably 4.0.
Keep air ducts away from heat sources such as exhaust manifolds, etc. Use appropriate insulation
or shielding to minimize radiated heat from these sources to the inlet system.
4.2.3.1 Pipework Material Specifications
Aluminum or aluminized steel seamless tubing should be used. The tube ends require a 0.09 in.
(2.3 mm) minimum bead to retain hose and clamp connections.
Fiberglass piping between the air cleaner and the turbocharger compressor inlet is also acceptable.
Detroit Diesel recommends that mitered elbows should have multiple sections for a smooth
transition.
4.2.3.2 Diffusers
Make any necessary cross-sectional changes in the piping diameter gradually rather than using
sudden expansions or contractions.

AIR INLET SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 4-10 Acceptable Diffuser Configurations
4.2.4 HOSE CONNECTIONS
Use the following for hose connections:

□ Plain (non reinforced) hose sections to connect items of rigid pipework which are in line
and close together, or have little relative motion.
□ A short section of reinforced hose between the ductwork sections where significant relative
motion or misalignment occurs. High quality “Hump" hose is capable of meeting these
requirements.
□ Spring loaded clamps to provide positive clamping and to prevent piping separation.
Detroit Diesel does not approve the use of plain bore hoses with internal coil spring insertions.
Plain hoses used in the inlet system must be of adequate specification to withstand service
conditions. The basic requirements are listed in the following table.
Service Conditions Basic Requirements

Hose Material Synthetic Rubber
Resistant to fuel oil and lubricating oil on
Oil Resistance
both internal and external surfaces
Maximum Working Temperatures 105°C (220°F)
Up to 1d2.5 kPa (50 in. H2O) depression
Working Pressure
(negative pressure)
Table 4-3 Hose Specifications for the Inlet Side of the Turbocharger

4.3 DESIGN GUIDELINES

The installed inlet system must be designed to supply clean, dry, cool air to the engine with
minimum restriction. The system must also provide reliable sealing, durability, and require
minimal maintenance.
NOTICE:
Never allow the turbocharger to support any weight of the air
intake system.
The main design criteria for the air intake system includes:
□ Maximum air inlet flow
□ Air intake restriction
□ Inlet location
□ Temperature rise from ambient to turbo inlet
TSM
Refer to www.detroitdiesel.com, for limits on each of these criteria for your specific engine.
NOTE:
If you do not have access to www.detroitdiesel.com Contact your Distributor.
4.3.1 MAXIMUM AIR INLET FLOW
The first step in the design of the air inlet system is to determine the maximum air flow requirement
for the engine. This information for the DD Platform engines is listed on www.detroitdiesel.com.
NOTE:
If you do not have access to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor.
4.3.2 AIR INLET SYSTEM RESTRICTION
Recommended pipe sizes may be used for the initial sizing of the air inlet system. Increase the pipe
size or modify the piping configuration if the air intake restriction exceeds the maximum limit.
An air inlet restriction indicator must be installed on the air intake system.
The worse case scenario for air inlet system restriction can be estimated by adding up the sum
of the individual restrictions in the system. These include rain caps, inlet hoods, air cleaners,
and piping.

AIR INLET SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 4-11 Air Inlet System Calculation
4.3.3 INLET LOCATION
Position the air cleaner inlet so that air is drawn from an area clear of water splash with the lowest
possible dust concentration; an area that minimizes:
□ The temperature rise from ambient to turbo inlet
□ The possibility of exhaust fumes and raw crankcase emissions being drawn into the inlet
system
4.3.4 AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE AIR COOLER
Sufficient charge air cooling capability is required for optimum engine performance. Exceeding
the system limits may adversely affect the fuel economy, power, emissions, and durability.
For on-highway engines the CAC is normally mounted ahead of the cooling system radiator.

TSM
Figure 4-12 Typical Radiator-mounted Charge Air Cooling System Right Side
View
Figure 4-13 Typical Radiator-Mounted Charge Air Cooling System Left Side
View
The air-to-air charge cooling (A/ACC) system should be designed for the highest horsepower
engine offered in the application.
The same system can be used for derated versions of the engine, which offers the following
advantages:

AIR INLET SYSTEM
□ Reduce the number of components in the manufacturing and part systems

□ Lower power engines may achieve even greater fuel economy from the additional reduction
in engine intake air temperature
□ Extended engine life
The following guidelines will assist in the design and selection of the various components that
make up the A/ACC system. It is critical that these components offer maximum air temperature
reduction with minimal loss of air flow. The integrity of the components must provide for long
life in its operating environment.
The pipework and hose connection requirements for the A/ACC system are similar to those for
the air inlet system in general. Seamless, aluminum or aluminized steel should be used. The tube
ends require a 0.09 in. (2.3 mm) minimum bead to retain hose and clamp connections.
Air system operating parameters such as heat rejection, engine air flow, air pressure, maximum
pressure drop, minimum temperature loss, and turbocharger compressor discharge temperature
are available on the on www.detroitdiesel.com.
TSM
NOTE:
If you do not have access to www.detroitdiesel.com, contact your distributor.
Charge air cooler considerations include size, cooling air flow restriction, material specifications,
header tanks, location, and fan systems.
4.3.4.1 Restriction and Temperature Requirements
Make special consideration for the air flow restriction which exists between the turbocharger
compressor outlet and intake manifold inlet for engines requiring a charge air cooler. The
maximum allowable pressure drop, including charge air cooler and piping, is 14 kPa (3.0 in. Hg)
at full load and rated speed. Refer to www.detroitdiesel.com for exceptions.
Core selection and location must meet charge air system temperature and pressure drop limits,
and must be compatible for good coolant radiator performance. Charge air coolers have a cooling
air flow restriction typically between 0.19 and 0.37 kPa (0.75 and 1.5 in. H2O).
It is recommended that the charge air cooler system be constructed using 5.0 in. diameter piping
with smooth radius bends.
The maximum temperature differential between ambient air and intake manifold is available
on www.detroitdiesel.com.
NOTE:
If you do not have access to www.detroitdiesel.com, contact your distributor.
4.3.4.2 Cleanliness
All new air charge cooling system components must be thoroughly clean and free of any casting
slag, core sand, welding slag, etc. or any that may break free during operation. These foreign
particles can cause serious engine damage.

4.3.4.3 Leakage
Leaks in the air-to-air cooling system can cause a loss in power, excessive smoke and high
exhaust temperature due to a loss in boost pressure. Large leaks can possibly be found visually,
while small heat exchanger leaks will have to be found using a pressure loss leak test.
PRESSURIZED CHARGE COOLER SYSTEM

To avoid eye or face injury from flying debris, wear a face
shield or goggles.
Check for leaks as follows:

1. Disconnect the charge air cooler.
TSM
2. Plug the inlet and outlet.
3. Measure pressure loss using an adaptor plug on the inlet.
The charge air cooler is considered acceptable if it can hold 172 kPa (25 psi) pressure with less
than a 34.5 kPa (5 psi) loss in 15 seconds after turning off the hand valve.
4.3.4.4 Size
The size of the heat exchanger depends on performance requirements, cooling air flow available,
and usable frontal area. Using the largest possible frontal area usually results in the most efficient
core with the least amount of system pressure drop. Consult your supplier to determine the proper
heat exchanger for your application. Refer to appendix for a list of suppliers.
4.3.4.5 Cooling Air Flow Restriction
air flow restriction typically between 0.19 and 0.37 kPa (0.75 and 1.5 in. H2O).
4.3.4.6 Material
Most charge air coolers are made of aluminum alloys because of their light weight, cost
advantages and good heat transfer characteristics. Other materials may be used with approval
from Detroit Diesel Application Engineering.

AIR INLET SYSTEM
4.3.4.7 Header Tanks
Header tanks should be designed for minimum pressure loss, uniform airflow distribution across
the core, and be strong enough to take pressure associated with turbocycling. Rounded corners and
smooth interior surfaces provide a smooth transition of the air flow resulting in minimum pressure
loss. The inlet and outlet diameters of the header tanks should be the same as the pipework to and
from the engine. A 4 in. (102 mm) minimum diameter is required for the DD Platform engines.
The tube ends require a 0.09 in. (2.3 mm) minimum bead to retain hose and clamp connections.
4.3.4.8 Location
To have the coolest possible air, the cooler is typically mounted (upstream of air flow) or
along side the engine coolant radiator. Other locations are acceptable as long as performance
requirements are met. The cooler should be located as close to the engine as practical to minimize
pipe length and pressure losses.
Leave access space between the cores when stacked in front of one another so debris may be
removed.
TSM
4.3.4.9 Fan Systems
The fan system must provide sufficient air flow to cool both the air-to-air heat exchanger as well
as the engine coolant radiator under all operating conditions.
A controlled fan drive system must be able to maintain a required air and water temperature.
DDEC controlled fan systems are PWM and drive clutch controlled.
A fan drive clutch with controls that sense engine coolant out temperature is the most suitable
for air-to-air installations. Viscous and modulating fan drives which sense down stream radiator
air out temperatures are not recommended.
4.3.4.10 Shutters
Shutters are not required under most operating conditions with a properly designed cooling
system. Improperly installed or maintained devices may lead to reduced engine life, loss of
power, and poor fuel economy.
NOTE:
It is imperative that all warning and shutdown monitoring devices be properly located
and always in good operating condition.
Shutters must always be mounted downstream of the air-to-air heat exchanger and should open
approximately 2.8°C (5°F) before the thermostat start to open temperature. The shutter control
should sense engine water out (before thermostat) temperature and the probe be fully submerged
in coolant flow.

4.3.4.11 Winterfronts
Winterfronts are not required under most operating conditions with a properly designed cooling
system. Some operators reduce the airflow through the radiator during cold weather operation
to increase engine operating temperature. Consider on/off fans and shutters if long term idling
during severe cold weather is necessary.
Improperly used winterfronts may cause excessive temperatures of coolant, oil, and charge air.
This condition can lead to reduced engine life, loss of power, and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts
may also put abnormal stress on the fan and fan drive components.
Never totally close or apply the winterfront directly to the radiator core. At least 25% of the area
in the center of the grill should remain open at all times. All monitoring, warning, and shutdown
devices should be properly located and in good working condition.
4.4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A thorough evaluation of the air inlet system will include:
TSM
□ Complete descriptions and documentation of the system in the Vehicle Sign-Off forms
□ Adequate instrumentation
□ Proper test preparation
□ Accurate tests
□ Data analysis and documentation
□ Diagnostics (troubleshooting) and corrective action (if necessary)
These tests must be run on all new installations, engine repowers, or whenever modifications have
been made to the engine, air inlet system, engine load, duty cycle, or environmental operating
conditions. The Detroit Diesel Vehicle Sign-Off form must be completed.
4.4.1 TESTING LOCATION
This section describes the methods needed to measure the temperatures and pressures of air
inlet systems.
Location of temperature and pressure measurements needed to evaluate the air inlet system with
air-to-air charge cooling is shown.

AIR INLET SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 4-14 Typical Instrumentation Location
4.4.2 INLET SYSTEM RESTRICTION
The maximum permitted inlet restriction for a system with a clean air cleaner is 3 kPa (12 in. H2O).
The maximum permitted inlet restriction for a system with a dirty air cleaner is 5 kPa (20 in. H2O).
4.4.3 AIR-TO-AIR SYSTEM EVALUATION TESTS
The A/ACC system must be tested to verify that engine air intake temperatures and pressure
drop limits can be met as shown on www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have access to
www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor. This evaluation can be done simultaneously
with the engine cooling index test.
4.4.3.1 Maximum Temperature Rise–Ambient to Intake Manifold
The maximum temperature differential between the ambient temperature and the temperature at
the intake manifold needs to be determined.
Symbol Measurement Location Description

T1 Air inlet temperature Within 5 in. of the turbocharger
Compressor discharge
T2 Within 5 in. of the compressor outlet
temperature
T3 Intake manifold temperature Within 5 in. of the inlet connection
Charge air cooler core air inlet 5 points in front of the core, one in the center and
T4 - T8
temperature one at each corner for determining recirculation
Table 4-4 Thermocouples

These temperature restrictions for the DD Platform engines are listed on www.detroitdiesel.com,
if you do not have access to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor.
4.4.3.2 Charge Air Cooler System Restriction
The maximum pressure differential of the charge air cooler system results from the charge air
cooler and all of the piping and connections between the turbocharger compressor outlet and
the intake manifold.

Within 5 in. of the turbocharger, in a straight section
P1 Air inlet restriction
after the last bend
Within 5 in. of the turbocharger, in a straight section
P2 Compressor discharge pressure
before the first bend
Within 5 in. of the inlet connection in a straight
P3 Intake manifold pressure
section after the last bend (or in the manifold itself)
Table 4-5 Pressure Taps
TSM
Connect a precision gage between pressure taps P2 and P3 to determine pressure drop of the
system. Two precision gages may be used as desired.
The maximum pressure drop for the DD Platform engines is shown on www.detroitdiesel.com, if
you do not have access to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor.
4.5 TEST
Thorough preparations prior to testing will ensure accurate results.
□ Confirm all instrumentation and equipment is in good working condition and calibrated.
□ Tests should be run on a finalized package installed in unit or vehicle representative of
the final package to be released.
□ Shutters must be fully opened and fan drive mechanisms in the fully engaged position.
All A/ACC tests should be performed with the engine operating at maximum rated speed and
wide open throttle (full fuel).
4.5.1 MOBILE AIR-TO-AIR
Refer to www.detroitdiesel.com, for the appropriate ram air speed to be used for testing. Other
mobile applications require appropriate ram air. In some mobile applications no ram air should be
applied. Sample data sheets for the air inlet and charge air system tests are given below.
NOTE:

AIR INLET SYSTEM
Figure 4-15
TSM
Air Inlet Data Sheet for Turbocharged and Air-to-Air Charge Cooled
Engine

TSM
Figure 4-16 Air Inlet System Data Sheet for Turbocharged Engines

AIR INLET SYSTEM
TSM

5 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM
Section Page
5.1 EGR SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................... 5- 2

5.2 INSTALLATION AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................. 5- 3
5.3 TESTING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 5- 3
TSM

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM
5.1 EGR SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

An internal combustion engine produces emission by-products (such as CO, CO2, H2O, NOx
and particulate matter) in addition to creating power and heat. Higher combustion temperatures
produce higher levels of NOx. Recent changes in emission regulations require more complex and
balanced combustion processes in order to achieve these limits. The strategy developed by Detroit
Diesel Corporation for the DD Platform engines is the introduction of cooled exhaust gas back
into the intake stream in order to reduce combustion temperatures and thereby, the production
of NOx. This section describes the function, installation, design, and test requirements for the
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system of the Detroit Diesel DD Platform engines.
TSM
1. EGR Valve 7. Intake Throttle
2. Turbocharger 8. EGR Mixer
3. EGR Actuator 9. Cold Boost Pipe
4. EGR Cooler 10. Intake Manifold
5. Venturi 11. Exhaust Manifold
6. EGR Delivery Pipe
Figure 5-1 EGR System

The exhaust gas is routed from the exhaust manifold through a gas to water EGR cooler, through
a venturi, through a modulated mixing valve and into the intake manifold. The mixer valve is
controlled by the engine electronics and are used to control and regulate the flow of EGR. Each
cylinder is filled with a mix of cooled, compressed intake air and recirculated, cooled exhaust
gas. This mix provides for efficient combustion with controlled combustion temperatures and a
greatly reduced level of NOx production. The trade-off from the introduction of exhaust gas to
the intake air is an increase in particulate matter. An exhaust Aftertreatment Device (ATD) is
used to capture the increased particulate matter.
5.2 INSTALLATION AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

The installation of the EGR System is completely controlled by Detroit Diesel Corporation
as part of the manufacturing and production process. There are no unique OEM requirements
relative to the installation of the EGR system.
5.2.1 COOLING SYSTEM
TSM
The vehicle radiator must be sized to accommodate the increased heat rejection load resulting
from EGR engines. The radiator must also be designed to handle the increase in water pump
flow volume.
5.2.2 AUXILIARY COOLERS
The coolant supply for auxiliary coolers (i.e. transmission cooler, hydraulic cooler, auxiliary
power unit, etc.) must be plumbed from the coolant collector on the right hand side of the engine.
There are three M27 supply ports at the rear of the coolant collector and two M27 supply ports on
the coolant outlet elbow located at the front of the coolant collector.

There are no unique OEM requirements relative to the testing and verification of the EGR system.

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM
TSM

6 EXHAUST SYSTEM
Section Page
6.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 6- 2

6.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 6- 8
TSM
6.4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 6- 9

EXHAUST SYSTEM
6.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The purpose of the exhaust system is to direct the flow of exhaust gases from the combustion
chamber through the turbocharger and Axial Power Turbine Aftertreatment Device (ATD) and to
an appropriate discharge location.
The exhaust system consists of:
□ Exhaust valves
□ Exhaust manifold
□ Turbocharger
□ Axial Power Turbine
□ Exhaust piping
□ Aftertreatment Device (ATD)
6.1.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM
TSM
Exhaust gases exit the cylinders through exhaust ports and the exhaust manifold. At the exhaust
manifold, the exhaust gas is split between the EGR circuit and the exhaust circuit. The flow of
EGR circuit gases is covered in the EGR System Section. The remaining exhaust circuit gases
expand through the exhaust turbine and drive the turbocharger compressor impeller. The exhaust
gases are then routed through the axial power turbine. The axial power turbine converts thermal
energy to mechanical energy through a gear box driving the flywheel. Exhaust gas then flows
through an engine mounted S-pipe through the ATD to an appropriate discharge outlet.

1. Washer
2. Connector
TSM 10. Exhaust Pipe
11. Clamp
19. Bolt
20. Washer
28. Clamp
29. Air Line
3. Banjo Bolt 12. Turbo Outlet Elbow 21. Banjo Bolt 30. Bolt
4. Bracket 13. Gasket 22. Clip 31. Air Seal Pressure

Regulator
5. Bolts 14. Bolts 23. Bolt
6. Turbo Speed Sensor 15. Heat Shield 24. Bracket

7. O-ring 16. Axial Power Turbine 25. Bolt
8. Turbocharger 17. Gear Box 26. Clamp

9. Clamp 18. Bolt 27. Interstage Duct
Figure 6-1 Turbocharger and Related Parts

EXHAUST SYSTEM
6.1.2 TURBOCHARGER
The turbocharger consists of a turbine and a compressor which are attached to a shaft. The
exhaust gas flows to the turbine wheel and causes it to turn. This turning motion is transmitted
to the shaft and the compressor impeller. The intake air from the air filter is compressed by the
compressor impeller and flows over a charge air pipe to the charge air cooler. The compressed air
is cooled in the charge air cooler; this permits a more dense charge of air to be delivered to the
engine and the output of the engine is increased. The charge air then passes from the charge air
cooler into the charge air manifold cylinders.
The turbocharger is mounted on the exhaust outlet flange of the engine exhaust manifold.
□ Reduction of the fuel consumption compared to a similarly powered naturally aspirated
engine
TSM
□ Reduction of emissions
6.1.3 AXIAL POWER TURBINE
The axial power turbine increases the efficiency and the economy of the engine by converting
thermal energy, in the exhaust flow from the turbocharger into mechanical energy and delivers the
resulting torque to the crankshaft. The rated speed of the turbine wheel of the axial power turbine
device is about 50,000 rpm. The turbine wheel generates a torque in this range of about 10 N·m
(7 lb·ft) which is increased through various gear ratios of gears up to 260 N·m (192 lb·ft). The
exhaust gas flows to the turbine wheel of the axial power turbine device and drives the wheel.
The rotational movement created is transmitted to the shaft the small output gear and from the
small output gear to the large output gear of the hydrodynamic clutch. The rotational speed is
reduced because of the gear ratio between the output gear and drive gear and the torque increased.
The impeller of the hydrodynamic clutch is connected to the housing of the hydrodynamic clutch
to the drive gear and turns at the same rotational speed. The vanes on the impeller generate an
oil flow in the hydrodynamic clutch which sets the turbine wheel of the hydrodynamic clutch
into rotation and the output gear is driven over a shaft. The generated torque is transferred to the
gear for the crankshaft via the intermediate gear and therefore to the crankshaft. It is therefore
also possible to ensure via the hydrodynamic clutch that rotational speed matching takes place
between the crankshaft and the axial power turbine-drive.
The axial power turbine device is connected to the engine oil circuit. The gears and the bearing
are lubricated and cooled by the engine oil. The hydrodynamic clutch is supplied with engine
oil by the hollow bearing shaft. One special aspect is the seal between the shaft and the exhaust
turbine housing. The seal between these two components takes place by using two metal sealing
rings which are pressed into their seat by compressed air. The pressure for pressing these sealing
rings is reduced over the axial power turbine air seal pressure regulator valve to 0.5 bar which is
actuated by the Motor Control Module (MCM) as soon as the engine starts.


The exhaust system must be designed to minimize the resistance to the flow of exhaust gases
(back pressure). The ATD, in addition to acting as an exhaust catalyst and particulate filter also
provides a level of noise attenuation so that a traditional muffler should no longer be required.
A flexible section of piping is required between the turbocharger turbine outlet and the inlet to
the ATD. This flexible section is necessary to minimize the amount of engine vibration that is
transmitted to the exhaust system and the ATD. Additionally, since Detroit Diesel ATDs actively
regenerate the diesel particulate filter (DPF) using diesel fuel, the flexible section must prevent
any and all exhaust leaks.
The exhaust system upstream of the ATD will be operating at pressures higher than what previous
engines had upstream of the muffler. The exhaust system must be capable of withstanding these
pressures to prevent exhaust leaks. Adequate clearance must be provided for the complete exhaust
system. The exhaust must not be routed too close to engine or vehicle components such that
exhaust heat will The minimum required exhaust pipe Inside Diameter (I.D.) for DD Platform
engines can be found at www.detroitdiesel.com.
TSM
These sizes may be used for the initial sizing of the exhaust system. Increase the pipe size or
modify the piping configuration if the calculated back pressure exceeds the maximum limit.
6.2.1 BACK PRESSURE
The vehicle exhaust system introduces flow restriction or back pressure to the engine exhaust
system. The design of the vehicle exhaust system should minimize this flow restriction.
Vehicle exhaust systems include piping from the engine exhaust outlet to the ATD and exhaust
discharge to the environment. The ATD causes exhaust flow restriction as well, however, vehicle
manufacturers must comply with DD Platform exhaust back pressure specifications published
at www.detroitdiesel.com.
One or more of the following factors usually causes excessive back pressure:
□ Small exhaust pipe diameter
□ Excessive number of sharp bends in the system
□ Long exhaust pipe between the manifold and ATD
□ Reduced power
□ Poor fuel economy
□ High combustion temperature
□ Over-heating
□ Excessive smoke
□ Reduced engine life

EXHAUST SYSTEM
6.2.2 NOISE
The exhaust system is one of the principal noise sources on many types of applications. Exhaust
noise is caused by the intermittent release of high pressure exhaust gas from the engine cylinders,
causing pulsations in the exhaust pipe. These pulsations lead not only to discharge noise at the
outlet, but also to noise radiation from the exhaust pipe and muffler shell surfaces. The ATD
provides a level of noise cancellation such that a traditional muffler should not be required.
Double wall piping helps to reduce radiant noise. It remains the responsibility of the OEM to
comply will all applicable noise standards.
6.2.3 FLEXIBLE FITTINGS
A flexible exhaust fitting or joint should separate the engine and exhaust system. Premature failure
of the turbocharger, manifold, piping, ATD or joints caused by engine vibration may be prevented
by including flexible joints or fittings. A flexible joint allows for thermal expansion and facilitates
alignment of the engine with the exhaust system piping. A traditional style flexible section is not
acceptable due to its inherent tendency to leak. Detroit Diesel recommends a bellows style flexible
TSM
section in order to provide the necessary vibration isolation while providing a relatively leak-free
section. The bellows section must be able to withstand operating pressures up to 31 kPa (4.5 psi).
NOTE:
Never allow the engine manifold or turbocharger to support the weight of the exhaust
system.
6.2.4 EXHAUST CONNECTION POINTS
The axial power turbine outlet utilizes a marmon flange that the vehicle exhaust system must
mount to.

TSM
Figure 6-2 Turbine Outlet Connection Points for DD15™
Figure 6-3 Turbine Outlet Connection Points for DD13™

EXHAUST SYSTEM
6.2.5 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PIPEWORK
The minimum required exhaust pipe diameter for the DD Platform engines can be found at
www.detroitdiesel.com. Detroit Diesel recommends AL409SS with a minimum wall thickness of
1.2 mm (0.047 in.) for all exhaust piping. The exhaust piping support must be secure, but still
allow for thermal expansion and contraction. Mounting points should be on structurally sound
members, such as the vehicle/vessel frame. Thermal insulation is required for all piping between
the turbocharger and the ATD inlet in order to maintain as much exhaust temperature as possible
within the exhaust flow. The temperature of the exhaust gas as it reaches the inlet to the ATD is
critical to both the function of the DOC as well as regeneration of the DPF. Double wall piping is
common in automotive applications. Exposed exhaust system components should not be located
near flammable or otherwise temperature sensitive materials. Insulating the exhaust system will
reduce the heat radiation and noise level caused by the exhaust system.
6.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

The exhaust system for DD Platform powered vehicles must function under a variety of
TSM
environmental conditions. Exposure to rain and snow and subjection to both thermal and
mechanical stresses are inherent to vehicle operation.
6.3.1 TEMPERATURE DROP FROM TURBOCHARGER OUTLET TO

AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE
The temperature of the exhaust gas as it reaches the inlet to the ATD is critical in both the function
of DOC and the regeneration of the DPF (passively and actively). The maximum temperature
drop allowed from the turbo outlet to the ATD inlet is 30°C (54°F) throughout the entire operating
range, including “high idle,” which is defined as the elevated rpm and load where a stationary
regeneration may occur. In order to maintain this temperature drop and retain as much of the
exhaust energy as possible, the exhaust piping between the turbo and the ATD will require either
insulation or double wall tubing.
6.3.2 DISTANCE FROM HYDROCARBON DOSER TO ATD INLET
A minimum of 0.8 meters (31 in.) of piping is required between the HC Doser and the inlet to the
ATD. This length of piping is critical for the evaporation of fuel being injected into the exhaust
stream during active regeneration. In the future, this specification may be modified to include
a maximum length between the HC Doser and the ATD inlet.
6.3.3 OUTLET LOCATION
Select the direction and location of the tailpipe exit to prevent the following:
□ Recirculation of exhaust into the air inlet
□ Recirculation of exhaust through the radiator and charge air cooler
□ Recirculation of exhaust into cab

□ Obstruction of the vehicle operator's line of sight

□ Excessive noise emissions
Active regeneration may result in exhaust outlet temperatures of approximately 650°C (1200°F)
at the ATD outlet. OEM piping beyond the ATD will reduce the exhaust temperature vented to the
atmosphere. When designing exhaust system piping beyond the ATD, consideration should be
given to these temperatures.
6.3.4 DRAINAGE
The exhaust system must be designed to prevent rain water from entering the engine. For vertical
exhaust systems, it is recommended that the exhaust outlet be fitted with a counterbalanced rain
cap. As an alternative, the end of the outlet pipe may be bent rearward 90 degrees, with the
end cut on a diagonal such that the upper half is longer than the lower half. The exhaust pipe
can accumulate a considerable amount of condensed moisture, especially in long piping. A
condensation trap and drain are incorporated into the design of vertical ATD configurations.
Horizontal ATD configurations will incorporate provisions to drain rain water as necessary.
TSM
6.3.5 SYSTEM INSULATION
Exposed exhaust system parts should not be near wood or other flammable material. Active
regeneration may result in exhaust outlet temperatures of approximately 650°C (1200°F).
Insulating the exhaust system will reduce the heat radiation and the noise level caused by the
exhaust system. Certain applications may require insulated exhaust systems. Some engine
models/ratings are available from the factory with optional insulated exhaust manifolds and
turbocharger turbine housings. Consult DDC Application Engineering before using any type of
insulation on the exhaust manifold or turbocharger on other models or ratings. Improper use of
insulation may contribute to reduced engine component life. Any exhaust system components
downstream of the turbocharger turbine discharge may be insulated as desired.
6.3.6 BENDING MOMENT CALCULATIONS
The maximum allowable value for bending moment at the rear of the turbocharger can be found
at www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have access to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your
Distributor. The maximum allowable value for bending moment at both the inlet to the ATD and
the outlet from the ATD can be found at www.detroitdiesel.com. The ATD is significantly more
massive that a traditional muffler. Stiff brackets should be considered to minimize the ATD inlet
and outlet moment forces.

A thorough evaluation of the exhaust system will include:
□ Complete descriptions and documentation of the system in the vehicle sign-off form

EXHAUST SYSTEM
□ Accurate tests
□ Diagnostics (troubleshooting) and corrective action (if necessary)
These tests must be run on all new installations, engine repowers, or whenever modifications
have been made to the engine exhaust system. The appropriate section of the vehicle sign-off
form must be completed.
6.4.1 MEASUREMENT OF EXHAUST BACK PRESSURE
The back pressure limit for 2007 and beyond will be measured differently than in the past. The
OEM has no control over the design and performance of the ATD, which would have a significant
impact on back pressure measured in the traditional manner. In addition, depending on the amount
of engine hours accumulated prior to the back pressure check, a considerable amount of particulate
matter and ash may have accumulated in the ATD further increasing the total back pressure.
TSM
Figure 6-4 Piezometer Ring
As a result, Detroit Diesel will only hold the OEM accountable for the piping controlled by the
OEM. Back pressure will be measured across the piping between the turbo outlet and the ATD
inlet combined with the back pressure measured on the piping downstream of the ATD outlet.
These two values will be combined and restricted to a maximum value of 4.0 kPa (1.2 in. Hg).

Figure 6-5
TSM Static Pressure Tap
The instrumentation should be placed perpendicular to the plane of the bend where measurement
on a bend is unavoidable.
6.4.2 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE DROP FROM

TURBOCHARGER TO ATD INLET
The temperature of the exhaust gas exiting the turbocharger must be maintained as high as
possible in order to maximize the performance of the DOC and to aid in the regeneration process
of the DPF. Two temperature measurements are required to validate this criterion. The first
measurement should be taken in the exhaust pipe as close as is practical to the outlet of the HC
Doser elbow. The second measurement should be taken in the exhaust piping just before the inlet
to the ATD, as close as practical to the ATD inlet flange.

EXHAUST SYSTEM
6.4.3 MEASUREMENT OF EXHAUST LEAKAGE BETWEEN

TURBOCHARGER AND ATD INLET
In order to maximize the effectiveness of the ATD, exhaust leaks upstream of the ATD must be
kept to a minimum. To accurately measure the exhaust leakage, a bench test is required according
to the following procedure:
1. Seal the ends of the exhaust pipe assembly (everything located between the turbocharger
outlet and the ATD inlet) with Marmon flange caps.
2. Install an air fitting on one cap supplied with regulated air and a shutoff valve.
3. Install a flow meter to record the air leakage rate in the exhaust piping assembly.
4. Pressurize the exhaust piping assembly to 31 kPa (4.5 psi).
5. Measure the leakage rate and compare it to the 10 Standard Liters Per Minute (SLPM) per
joint specification.
6. The system leakage rate between the turbocharger and ATD inlet should not exceed 30
slpm.
TSM
7. No visible smoke/fuel is allowed during a high idle regeneration.

7 AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM
Section Page
7.1 AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..................................... 7- 2

7.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION / OPERATION ................................................ 7- 4
7.3 AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE DESIGN FEATURES .............................. 7-10
TSM
7.4 AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE VARIATIONS .......................................... 7-11
7.5 NOISE ATTENUATION ........................................................................... 7-12
7.6 MASS OF THE AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE ....................................... 7-12
7.7 MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................... 7-12

AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM
7.1 AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Detroit Diesel Corporation continues its efforts to reduce exhaust emissions. Two primary exhaust
gas constituents are Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and Particulate Matter (PM). Diesel particulate
emissions are a mixture of both solid and liquid material. NOx emission reduction can be
achieved by lowering combustion temperature. However, this increases particulate emissions.
Therefore, when low NOx levels are achieved, an Aftertreatment Device (ATD) can be used to
simultaneously reduce particulate emissions. Particulate filter technology has been demonstrated
to be very effective in the control of particulate emissions.
The aftertreatment system consists of the following components:
The ATS is comprised of the following components:
Component Description
An engine exhaust device that contains a DOC and
a DPF along with several pressure and temperature
Aftertreatment Device
sensors that work in conjunction to reduce particulate
emissions from the engine.
TSM
Electronically controlled valve that will open or close in
Intake Throttle Valve order to control a proper temperature at the face of the
DOC during regeneration.
Coolant cooled valve used to deliver fuel into the exhaust
Fuel Doser Valve stream to maintain the proper temperature across the
DOC during regeneration.
Assembly that houses the Fuel Cutoff Valve (FCV),
Fuel Compensation Pressure (FCP) Sensor, Electronic
Doser Block Assembly
Dosing Valve (EDV) and the Fuel Line Pressure (FLP)
Sensor.
Controls fuel flow into the Doser Block Assembly, is
Fuel Cutoff Valve
either On or Off.
Pressure sensor used to diagnose abnormal conditions
Fuel Line Pressure Sensor
in fuel pressure after fuel exits the Doser Block Assembly.
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) controlled valve used to
deliver the correct amount of fuel to the FDV in order to
Electronic Dosing Valve
maintain the proper temperature across the DOC during
regeneration.
Monitors fuel pressure into the Doser Block Assembly
Fuel Compensation Pressure Sensor in order to properly deliver the correct amount of fuel
delivered via the Electronic Dosing Valve.
Table 7-1 ATS Component Descriptions

TSM
1. Aftertreatment Device
2. Intake Throttle Valve
3. Fuel Doser Valve
5. Fuel Cutoff Valve
6. Fuel Line Pressure Sensor
7. Electronic Dosing Valve
4. Doser Block Assembly 8. Fuel Compensation Pressure Sensor
Figure 7-1 Components of Aftertreatment System
A schematic of the DD Platform aftertreatment system is shown in the following illustration.

Figure 7-2
7.2
TSM
DD Platform Aftertreatment System Schematic
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION / OPERATION

The Detroit Diesel aftertreatment system is comprised of different sub-systems that work together
to ensure emission compliance on all engines.

2. Intake Throttle
3. Fuel Doser Valve
TSM
1. Aftertreatment Device Assembly 5. Fuel Cutoff Valve
6. Fuel Pressure Sensor
7. Electronic Diesel Dosing Valve
4. HC Doser Block Assembly 8. Fuel Compensation Pressure Sensor
Figure 7-3 Aftertreatment System Components

7.2.1 AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE
The ATD replaces the muffler assembly and is located in the vehicle downstream of the engine.
All of the engine exhaust is passed through this device, where the particulate matter is removed.
The ATD is comprised of a Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) and a Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF). The DPF consists of channels that run the full length, and are blocked off at the alternate
ends to force the exhaust through the porous walls. The channels are coated with a platinum
washcoat material which acts as a catalyst, enhancing the oxidation process. The porous walls
also collect the particulates. When the exhaust temperature reaches approximately 250°C (482°F),
oxidation of particulate matter starts to occur. As the particulate matter oxidizes, passive cleaning
of the filter takes place. This is called “regeneration.” The key to successful regeneration is high
exhaust temperature, above 300°C (572°F) for extended time. Without adequate temperature for
regeneration, the filter will continue to trap particles and eventually plug.
TSM
1. DOC Oxidation Catalyst 6. DPF Outlet Temperature Sensor
2. DOC Inlet Temperature Sensor 7. Diesel Particulate Filter
3. DOC Outlet Temperature Sensor 8. DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor
4. Sensor Junction Box A = Engine Exhaust Outlet
5. DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor B = Exhaust Outlet
Figure 7-4 Aftertreatment Device Components

TSM
Figure 7-5 Operation of the Diesel Particulate Filter
7.2.2 INTAKE THROTTLE
The intake throttle is another sub-system of the ATS that works to thermally manage temperatures
to aid in regeneration of the DPF. This component is electronically controlled by the engine
controller. When the engine controller detects that the filter needs to regenerate that intake throttle
will be commanded to a position that will elevate exhaust temperatures by preventing additional
boost from entering the combustion chambers.

TSM
Figure 7-6 Location of the Intake Throttle
7.2.3 HYDROCARBON (HC) DOSER
The HC doser is another sub-system of the ATS that works to actively regenerate the DPF. The
HC doser is comprised of fuel lines, fuel pressure regulator, HC dosing block assembly, and a
mechanical diesel injection valve.
This component is electronically controlled by the engine controller. When the engine controller
detects that the DPF needs to actively regenerate, because soot level is increasing in the DPF,
the doser will begin to dose diesel fuel into the exhaust stream and actively regenerate the DPF,
oxidizing the soot off of the DPF to review exhaust system requirements.

TSM
Figure 7-7 Hydrocarbon (HC) Doser Location
Figure 7-8 Hydrocarbon (HC) Doser Location

7.3 AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE DESIGN FEATURES

There are several features, that are designed into the ATD to ease installation and removal of the
ATD into chassis at the production level as well as at the service level. Please refer to the specific
ATD drawing to get dimensions of all these features and where they are located on each ATD.
Figure 7-9
7.3.1
TSM
Typical Mounting Views of an Aftertreatment Device
FEET / HOOKS
The feet / hooks are designed to serve as the lifting points for the ATD assembly as well as the
DPF when separated from the ATD assembly. When the DPF is separated from the assembly
the feet / hooks also prevent the weight of the DPF from being supported by the flanges. Failing
to set the DPF on the feet could result in damage to the flanges. They also prevent the ATD
assembly and DPF, when separated, from rolling.
7.3.2 LOCATING DEVICE
The dowel pin is a locating feature that will allow the ATD to be installed rotationally correct. It is
not a mandatory that OEM’s mounting devices (i.e. brackets, straps, etc.) be designed to accept the
dowel however it is suggested. Installing the ATD rotationally incorrect will cause stress on inlets
and outlets of the ATD as well as the exhaust plumbing and brackets supporting it. The dowel is
not designed to support any load. Utilizing this locating device can prevent the need for secondary
operations in a manufacturing environment when aligning exhaust plumbing with the ATD.

7.3.3 SENSOR BOX DISCUSSION
Sensor protection is designed into the ATD as to prevent damaging of the temperature and
pressure sensors. The sensor protection is designed to aid in the prevention of damaging
the sensors when installing the ATD in a manufacturing environment as well as while being
installed during normal operation. Sensor protection should be considered when choosing the
correct variation of ATD as well as location of where it is to be mounted in the application. The
sensor protection should lead the sensors as to prevent debris coming in direct contact with the
sensors. When mounting the ATD in locations near or behind tires, additional shielding should be
considered as to prevent damaging of the sensors.
7.3.4 V-BAND CLAMPS
V-band clamps are designed to simplify the removal and installation of the DPF, a serviceable
component. The DPF collects soot and ash. The soot is burned off either actively or passively.
The ash is stored in the filter and needs regular maintenance to be cleaned out. The “sectioned”
design of the ATD will allow for easy removal of just the serviceable portion of the ATD assembly.
TSM
7.3.5 SENSOR AND HARNESS
Sensor orientation should be considered when choosing the correct variation of ATD. Sensor
orientations can be obtained from the ATD drawings. The ATD needs to be mounted such that
the pressure sensor tubing continuously slopes downward away from the pressure sensors as to
prevent condensate from collecting and puddling in the sensors and tubing. This downward
slope is already designed into the pressure sensor tubing on vertical ATDs. The ATD comes as a
complete assembly with the sensors and DPF harness installed. The OEM is responsible for the
jumper harness between the DPF harness and the engine controller harness. The harness should
be shielded or protected as to prevent debris from coming up and damaging the harness and
sensors. It should also be mounted to prevent water collection, enabling freezing in cold weather,
causing the wires to potentially break or support the weight of ice chunks. Consideration should
also be given to the serviceability of the DPF portion of the ATD.
7.4 AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE VARIATIONS

There are several different ATDs to accommodate the variations of different engine horsepower
ranges and exhaust routings. There are ATDs that are made for mounting vertically and also
horizontally. Please see the drawing portion of the ATD or call your application engineer to
help find the best ATD for your application.

TSM
Figure 7-10 Aftertreatment Device Orientation Variations
7.5 NOISE ATTENUATION

The ATD, in addition to acting as an exhaust catalyst and particulate filter, also provides an
adequate level of noise cancellation so that a traditional muffler is not required.
7.6 MASS OF THE AFTERTREATMENT DEVICE

The mass of the ATD depends on the configuration of the ATD. The heavy-duty ATDs are in the
range of 130 lbs. (59 kg). The medium-duty ATDs are in the range of 90 lbs. (41 kg). Please refer
to the ATD drawing to get the actual mass of the device you are installing.
7.7 MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS

The ATD is significantly more massive than a traditional muffler and therefore traditional brackets
and straps that were used to hold traditional mufflers may not suffice. Please refer to the specific
ATD drawing being installed to get the mounting related data such as mass, mounting zone
dimensions, torque specifications, bending moments on inlets and outlets, etc. for the specific
ATD being installed. It is important to read the Exhaust System portion of the ATD as these
requirements intertwine with ATD installation requirements.

7.7.1 MOUNTING ZONES
There are designated areas, or mounting zones, on the ATD that are reinforced. The mounting
zone areas are the only locations where the ATD can be held. If the ATD is held outside the
mounting zones the outer skin of the ATD could indent the outer skin of the ATD potentially
causing a hole. Please refer to the ATD drawing to get the dimensions of the mounting zones
and torque specifications for the specific ATD being installed.
7.7.2 BENDING MOMENT FOR INLETS AND OUTLETS
Under no circumstances should the inlets and outlets of the ATD support the weight exhaust
plumbing going into and out of the ATD. The exception to this rule is for vertical ATDs only. The
outlet is designed to withstand up to a particular amount of unsupported topstack mass. Please
refer to the ATD drawing to get the inlet and outlet bending moment restrictions for the specific
ATD being installed. Anything expected to exceed these limitations needs to have additional
brackets to support the topstack. To reduce the loads into the inlet and outlet of the ATD, stiff
brackets are to be used to mount the ATD to reduce low frequency wave vibration. Suggested
TSM
frequency? A flexible section of piping is required between the turbocharger turbine outlet and
the inlet to the ATD. A flexible section is also required on the outlet side of the ATD. These flex
sections are necessary in order to minimize the amount of engine and exhaust system vibration
that is transmitted to the exhaust system and the ATD. Premature failure of the turbocharger,
manifold, piping, ATD or joints caused by engine vibration may be prevented by including
flexible joints or fittings. A flexible joint allows for thermal expansion and facilitates alignment
of the engine with the exhaust system piping. Please refer to the Exhaust System portion of the
ATD. Note that a minimum separation distance of 6mm is needed to pull the DPF portion of
the ATD out of the ATD assembly.
Aftertreatment Components group is going to perform the “lower over pass” crash test to see what
happens with the rain trap and what fails. The DPF portion should not be damaged or else this
will be an expensive failure.
7.7.3 DRAINAGE
Vertical ATDs have a rain trap incorporated into the top to aid in the prevention of water from
entering the exhaust system. This is not 100% efficient. Horizontal ATDs have a small drain hole
on the outlet of the ATD to aid in the prevention of water entering the exhaust system. Exhaust
systems must be designed accordingly to prevent water from entering them and getting back to
the engine. Please refer to the exhaust system portion of the ATD. These designs are secondary
measures for water prevention. Should water pass through the exhaust system into the engine,
catastrophic engine failure can occur. Horizontal ATDs need to be oriented such that the drain
hole is in the correct orientation when mounted as to aid in water drainage.
There may be some sort of trap volume that needs to be required.

V = 1.7gal for 4 in.
V = 2.67gal for 5 in.

TSM

8 COOLING SYSTEM, AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE

COOLING
Section Page
8.1 COOLING SYSTEM, AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE COOLING SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 8- 2
TSM
8.2 JACKET WATER COOLING SYSTEM ................................................... 8- 2
8.3 THERMOSTAT ........................................................................................ 8- 4
8.4 WATER PUMP ........................................................................................ 8- 7
8.5 TYPES OF COOLING SYSTEMS ........................................................... 8- 8
8.6 AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE COOLING ........................................................... 8-10
8.7 COOLING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ..................... 8-13
8.8 CHARGE AIR COOLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................... 8-17
8.9 VEHICLE SIGN-OFF ............................................................................... 8-18
8.10 COOLING SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ................................ 8-18
8.11 CHARGE AIR COOLING DESIGN GUIDELINES ................................... 8-25
8.12 HEAT EXCHANGER SELECTION .......................................................... 8-27
8.13 FAN SYSTEM RECOMMENDATIONS AND FAN SELECTION ............. 8-28
8.14 RADIATOR COMPONENT DESIGN ....................................................... 8-36
8.15 COOLING SYSTEM EVALUATION TESTS ............................................ 8-55
8.16 COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
.................................................................................................................. 8-76
8.17 MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 8-83

COOLING SYSTEM, AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE COOLING
8.1 COOLING SYSTEM, AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE COOLING

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This chapter covers the DD Platform engines air-to-air charge cooling system. The cooling system
for the DD Platform engines is comprised of two separate systems; the jacket water cooling
system and the Charge Air Cooling (CAC) system. Although these systems are separate, they
usually share the same space which makes each system's performance dependent upon the other.
A well designed cooling system is a requirement for satisfactory engine performance and
reliability. Thorough knowledge of the application, duty cycle, and environmental conditions is
essential in designing and packaging the total cooling system. A properly designed system should
still be able to perform within specifications after normal system degradation occurs.
The jacket water cooling system consists of a heat-exchanger or radiator, centrifugal type water
pump, oil cooler, EGR cooler, thermostat, coolant collector and cooling fan. The water pump is
used to pressurize and circulate the engine coolant. The engine coolant is drawn from the lower
portion of the radiator and is forced through the oil cooler and into the cylinder block. The heat
generated by the engine is transferred from the cylinders and oil to the coolant. The heat in the
TSM
coolant is then transferred to the air flow generated by the cooling fan when it enters the radiator.
A single full blocking-type thermostat is built in to the thermostat housing on the inlet side of
the water pump. The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant, providing fast engine
warm-up and regulate coolant temperature.
The CAC system consists of the air inlet piping, the turbocharger, the cooling fan and the intake
manifold. Ambient air is drawn in through the air cleaner and piping to the exhaust driven
turbocharger. The turbo compresses the air which increases its temperature. The charge air is then
cooled by the air from the cooling fan as it passes through the CAC to the intake manifold.
8.2 JACKET WATER COOLING SYSTEM

When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the coolant passes from the radiator, through
the thermostat housing into the water pump, through the oil cooler, into the cylinder block, up
through the cylinder head, out to the coolant collector, through the EGR cooler and then back
to the radiator. The coolant then passes through a series of tubes where the coolant temperature
is lowered by the air flow created by the fan.
Upon starting a cold engine or when the coolant is below operating temperature, the closed
thermostat prevents coolant flow from the radiator from entering the water pump. Coolant is
recirculated through the engine to aid engine warm-up. When the thermostat opening temperature
is reached, coolant flow is divided between the radiator outlet and the bypass circuit. When the
thermostat is completely open, all of the coolant flow is from the radiator outlet.
The function of the engine coolant is to absorb the heat developed as a result of the combustion
process in the cylinders and from component parts such as the valves and pistons which are
surrounded by water jackets. In addition, the heat absorbed by the oil is also removed by the
engine coolant in the oil-to-water oil cooler.

A pressurized cooling system permits higher temperature operation than a non-pressurized

system. It is essential that the cooling system is kept clean and leak-free, that the filler cap and
pressure relief mechanisms are properly installed and operate correctly, and that the coolant
level is properly maintained.
The following illustrations show the coolant flow within the cooling system.
Figure 8-1
TSM Engine Jacket Water Cooling System — Thermostats Closed
Figure 8-2 Engine Jacket Water Cooling System — Thermostats Fully Open

8.3 THERMOSTAT
The temperature of the engine coolant is controlled by a single integral full blocking-type
thermostat located in a housing attached to the left side of the oil / coolant module.
3. Water Pump
Figure 8-3 TSM

1. Coolant Return — Expansion Tank
Thermostat and Related Parts

2. Coolant Return — Cab Heater
4. Thermostat Housing
At coolant temperatures below the operating range the thermostat valve remains closed and blocks
the flow of coolant from the radiator to the engine.
During this period, all of the coolant in the system is recirculated through the engine and is
directed back to the suction side of the water pump via a bypass circuit. As the coolant temperature
rises above the start–to–open temperature, the thermostat valve begins to open, restricting the
bypass system, and allowing a portion of the coolant to circulate through the radiator. When the
coolant temperature reaches an approximate fully open temperature, the thermostat valve is fully
open, the bypass system is blocked off, and the coolant is directed through the radiator.

TSM
1. Coolant to EGR Cooler 3. Coolant Inlet from Radiator
2. Coolant Pump 4. Thermostat Housing
Figure 8-4 Cooling System Operation

TSM
1. EGR Cooler 3. Coolant Outlet to Radiator
2. Coolant Collector
Figure 8-5 Cooling System Operation
A properly operating thermostat is essential for efficient operation of the engine.
8.3.1 VENTING
The EGR cooler on the right hand side of the engine has a vent location in the top of the cooler
near the front. This is intended to be used to connect a vent line to the radiator top tank. This vent
line (0.25 in. [6.0 mm] I.D.) should go to the top of the radiator top tank because this point in the
cooling system will be pressurized at all times.

TSM
1. Vent
Figure 8-6 Vent Location
8.4 WATER PUMP

The centrifugal-type water pump circulates the engine coolant through the coolant system.
The pump is mounted on the left side of the engine in the oil / coolant module and is belt driven.

2. Coolant Pump
Figure 8-7
8.5
TSM
1. Coolant Pump Pulley
3.Coolant Pump Gasket
Water Pump Mounting
TYPES OF COOLING SYSTEMS

4. Coolant Filter
5. Thermostat Housing Gasket
6. Thermostat Housing
Radiator cooling systems can be classified into two broad categories: rapid warm-up and
conventional.
8.5.1 RAPID WARM-UP COOLING SYSTEM RECOMMENDED DESIGN
The rapid warm-up cooling system eliminates coolant flow through the radiator core during
closed thermostat operation.
This reduces warm-up time and maintains coolant temperature near the thermostat start to open
value. Having the deaeration tank (internal or remote) separated from the radiator core will
accomplish this. External bleed and fill lines as well as internal standpipe(s) (radiator core air
vent) are required in the deaeration tank. Proper size and location of these components are critical
to having a balanced system. The fill line coolant return flow capabilities must exceed the flow
into the tank under all operating modes. The rapid warm-up cooling system has also been called
positemp, continuous deaeration, or improved deaeration.

Another advantage of this system is its ability to place a positive head on the water pump, thus
reducing the possibility of cavitation.
TSM
Figure 8-8 Rapid Warm-up Cooling System — Remote Tank, Cross Flow and
Down Flow Radiators

8.5.2 AUXILIARY AIR-COOLED COOLER CORES
Heat exchangers in addition to jacket water and charge air cooler radiators are quite often part
of the total cooling system. Heat exchangers such as air-to-oil, air-to-air, oil-to-air, or others
are to be used and mounted either in front of the radiator or behind it. Consider the following
factors if auxiliary coolers are used:
□ Greater restriction of air flow
□ Increased heat load
NOTE:
Provide access to the areas between the cores for cleaning purposes.
8.5.3 COOLANT HEATERS
Cold weather operation often requires the use of coolant heaters. Information on coolant heaters
can be obtained from DDC Application Engineering.
TSM
8.6 AIR-TO-AIR CHARGE COOLING
An air-to-air charge air cooler is mounted ahead of or beside the engine coolant radiator. The
pressurized intake charge is routed from the discharge side of the turbocharger, through the CAC,
and then to the intake manifold. This effectively reduces the temperature of the compressed air
leaving the turbocharger, permitting a denser charge of air to be delivered to the engine. Cooling
is accomplished by outside air directed past the cooling fins and core tubes of the CAC.
Figure 8-9 Typical Charge Air Cooling System Right Side

TSM
Figure 8-10 Typical Charge Air Cooling System Left Side
The intake air charge is routed to the cylinders by an intake manifold which directs the air to
ports in the cylinder head, through two intake valves per cylinder, and into the cylinder. At the
beginning of the compression stroke, each cylinder is filled with clean, fresh air which provides
for efficient combustion.
Figure 8-11 Air-to-Air Charge Air Cooler System

8.6.1 CHARGE AIR COOLER
A CAC is normally mounted ahead of the cooling system radiator. The compressed air leaving
the turbocharger is directed through the charge air cooler before it goes to the air inlet side of the
intake manifold. A typical arrangement with a CAC placed in front of the radiator with a suction
fan. With a blower fan, the CAC would be between the radiator and the engine.
Figure 8-12
TSM
Typical Charge Air Cooler
The CAC is used to reduce the compressed air temperature leaving the turbocharger before it
reaches the intake manifold. This permits a more dense charge of air to be delivered to the engine.
Figure 8-13 Charge Air Cooler Cross-Section

Cooling is accomplished by incoming air flowing past the tubes and fins of the intercooler. The
compressed intake charge flowing inside the CAC core transfers the heat to the tubes and fins
where it is picked up by the incoming outside air. Powder coated, painted, untreated mild steel
is unacceptable for piping.
Aluminum, aluminized steel, stainless steel or fiber reinforced plastic piping is used to transfer the
air from the turbocharger outlet to the CAC, and from there to the intake manifold.
Flexible rubber couplings and hose clamps are used to secure the duct work to the turbocharger,
the CAC inlet and outlet, and the intake manifold.
8.7 COOLING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Engine heat transferred to the coolant must be dissipated at a sufficient rate so engine coolant
temperature does not exceed established safe limits under all operating conditions. The
typical maximum engine coolant temperature is 237°F. Specific requirements may be found
Distributor
TSM
The maximum ambient temperature at which the maximum engine coolant temperature is reached
is referred to as ambient capability.
Operating with antifreeze, at high elevation, or other severe environmental conditions will
require increasing the cooling capability of the system so the maximum allowable engine coolant
temperature is not exceeded.
8.7.1 SYSTEM FILL
The cooling system must have sufficient venting (air bleeding) to permit filling at a minimum
continuous rate of 3 gal/min. (4.5 L/min) and on an interrupted basis using a 2-3 gallon (10 liter)
bucket. The amount of coolant needed to complete the fill must not exceed the satisfactory
drawdown amount upon first indication of a full system. This is also a requirement for interrupted
fill.
8.7.2 SYSTEM DRAIN
Sufficient drains, strategically located, must be provided so the cooling system can be drained to:
□ Prevent freeze problems during cold weather storage
□ Remove all contaminated coolant during system cleaning
□ Minimize refill problems due to trapped air or water pockets
8.7.3 DEAERATION
The cooling system mustbe capable of expelling all entrapped air within 30 minutes while running
the engine near rated speed after an initial fill. The water pump must not become air bound.

NOTICE:
An air bound pump cannot adequately circulate coolant. This can
lead to overheating and severe engine damage.
8.7.4 SYSTEM COOLANT CAPACITY
Total cooling system coolant capacity must be known in order to determine the expansion and
deaeration volumes required in the top tank.
TSM

TSM
Figure 8-14 Percent Increases in Volume for Water and Antifreeze Solution
The total capacity must include the basic engine, radiator, heater circuit, plumbing, etc. A
minimum 6% expansion volume must be provided in the top tank along with a 2% deaeration
volume and sufficient reserve volume to meet drawdown capacity. This volume mustbe provided,
with or without a coolant recovery system.

Basic engine coolant capacity is found on www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have access to
www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor.
8.7.5 DRAWDOWN CAPACITY
Drawdown capacity is the amount of coolant which can be removed from the system before the
coolant pump begins to cavitate. The drawdown capacity for DD Platform engines is 10% of
the total cooling capacity. System design must permit reasonable loss of coolant from the hot
full level before aeration of the coolant begins. Additional coolant capacity may be necessary if
aeration begins before this point. Perform drawdown tests at the maximum tilt angle.
8.7.6 CORE CONSTRUCTION
Tube and plate fin design is preferred because of lower restriction to both air and coolant flow.
Tube and plate fin designs are easier to clean than louvered serpentine types and generally of more
rugged construction making it more suitable to operate in the diesel engine environment.
TSM
8.7.7 WATER PUMP INLET PRESSURE/MAXIMUM STATIC HEAD
When the engine is operating at maximum rated engine speed, fill cap removed, and thermostat
fully opened, the water pump inlet pressure must not be lower than atmospheric pressure (suction)
with a rapid warm-up cooling system
These requirements must be met to minimize water pump cavitation and corresponding loss in
coolant flow. Keep restrictions to the water pump inlet such as radiator cores, heat exchanger,
auxiliary coolers and the associated plumbing to a minimum.
The maximum static head allowed on DD Platform engines is 145 kPa (21 psi). and the pressure
relief valve or cap must be sized so the limit is not exceeded. Consider a non-pressurized vented
cap system for radiators mounted 312 m (5 ft.) and higher above the engine. This ensures that
the limit is not exceeded.
8.7.8 COOLANT FLOW RATE/EXTERNAL PRESSURE DROP
The coolant flow rate through the engine and radiator must be within 90% of the rated flow .found
Distributor. Ensure that the flow is maintained when coolant is shunted away from the engine or
radiator to supply cab heaters, air compressors, auxiliary coolers, wet exhaust systems, etc.
External pressure drop is defined as the sum of all components in the system. For example, a
radiator with a 21 kPa (3 psi) restriction plus a heat exchanger, with a 14 kPa (2 psi) restriction
mounted between the water pump and oil cooler gives a total pressure drop of 34 kPa (5 psi). This
is within the typical DD Platform engine maximum allowable value. See www.detroitdiesel.com
for current data.

8.7.9 MINIMUM COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The overall design should ensure minimum coolant temperature 71°C (160°F) be maintained
under all ambient operating conditions; operating conditions are listed on www.detroitdiesel.com..
A cold running engine can result in poor engine performance, excessive white smoke, and
reduced engine life.
8.7.10 SYSTEM PRESSURIZATION
DD Platform engines typically require a minimum 62 kPa (9 psi) pressure cap. See
www.detroitdiesel.com for specific requirements. The pressure caps raise the boiling point of
the coolant which minimizes coolant or flow rate loss due to localized boiling and water pump
cavitation. Higher rated pressure caps may be required for high altitude and severe ambient
operation. Cooling system components must be able to withstand increased pressure.
8.7.11 COOLANTS
TSM
A proper glycol (ethylene, propylene) or extended life organic acid, water, Supplemental Coolant
Additive (SCA) mixture meeting DDC requirements is required for year-round usage.
The coolant provides freeze and boil protection and reduces corrosion, sludge formation, and
cavitation erosion. Antifreeze concentration should not exceed 67% for ethylene glycol (50%
for propylene glycol). Detroit Diesel requires SCAs be added to all cooling systems at initial fill
and be maintained at the proper concentration. Follow SCA manufacturers' recommendations.
Refer to Coolant Selections for Engine Cooling Systems (DDC-SVC-BRO-0002), available
on www.detroitdiesel.com.
8.8 CHARGE AIR COOLING REQUIREMENTS

Sufficient cooling capability is required for optimum engine performance. Exceeding the system
temperature and pressure design limits defined in this chapter can adversely affect fuel economy,
power, emissions and durability.
8.8.1 COOLING CAPABILITY
The cooling capability of the air-to-air system must be sufficient to reduce the turbocharger
compressor out air temperature to within 25°C (45°F) of ambient temperature on all DD Platform
engines. Air inlet manifold temperature requirements are available on www.detroitdiesel.com.
Typically the maximum intake manifold temperature is 85°C (185°F).
8.8.2 MAXIMUM PRESSURE LOSS
The maximum allowable total static pressure drop across the DD Platform charge air system is
13.5 kPa (4 in. Hg). This includes the restriction of the charge air cooler and all the plumbing
and accessories (e.g. shutdown valve) from the turbocharger compressor to the engine air inlet
manifold.

8.8.3 CLEANLINESS
All new charge air cooling system components must be thoroughly clean and free of any casting
slag, core sand, welding slag, etc. or anything that may break free during operation. These foreign
particles can cause serious engine damage.
8.8.4 LEAKAGE
Leaks in the air-to-air cooling system can cause a loss in power, excessive smoke and high
exhaust temperature due to a loss in boost pressure. Large leaks can possibly be found visually,
while small heat exchanger leaks will have to be found using a pressure loss leak test.
8.9 VEHICLE SIGN-OFF
TSM
A Detroit Diesel Vehicle Sign-Off must be completed for all new installations, engine repowers,
and installation modifications. To obtain a Vehicle Sign-Off form contact Application Engineering.
8.10 COOLING SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Many factors must be considered when designing the overall cooling system. The design process
can be broken down into two phases:
□ Consideration of heat rejection requirements
□ Consideration of specific component design
The following guidelines are presented as a systematic review of cooling system considerations in
order to meet minimum standards.
8.10.1 COOLING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The first cooling system consideration is to establish what coolant and air temperature values
must be met for an application.
8.10.1.1 Engine Operating Temperature
Engine coolant temperature, under normal operating conditions, will range from -5.5°C (10°F)
below to -8.3°C (15°F) above the start to open temperature of the thermostat. The temperature
differential between the engine coolant in and out is typically -5.5°C (10°F) at maximum engine
speed and load. A temperature differential around -7.8°C (14°F) can be anticipated on those
applications where torque converter oil cooler heat load is added to the coolant. The maximum
allowable engine coolant temperature is found on www.detroitdiesel.com.

The engine coolant temperature rise and radiator coolant temperature drop values will be different
whenever the engine and radiator flows are not the same (partial thermostat open operation).
Placing auxiliary coolers between the engine and the radiator will cause the same effect. The
maximum allowable coolant temperature represents the temperature above which engine damage
or shortened engine life can occur.
8.10.1.2 Intake Manifold Temperature
Turbocharger air outlet temperature can vary greatly over the wide range of ambient temperatures
and altitudes possible for various operating conditions. Regardless of ambient conditions, the
DD Platform engines are required to maintain an intake manifold temperature of no more than
7°C (45°F) above ambient with a typical maximum of 66°C (151°F). The ambient temperature
and altitude of a specific application must be considered when designing a cooling system. See
the Information Highway for specific limits.
8.10.2 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
TSM
Each engine rating has its own individual performance characteristics. The two areas of
performance which have the greatest effect on cooling system design are heat rejection and water
pump output. These values can be found on www.detroitdiesel.com.
8.10.2.1 Engine Heat Rejection
Heat is rejected from an engine into four areas; jacket water, charge air, exhaust and radiation.
The jacket water and charge air heat must be dissipated in order to meet coolant and intake
manifold rejection requirements. The exhaust heat and radiated heat must be considered because
both often have an effect on air temperature which affects fan and heat exchanger performance
Limiting ambient temperature may occur at engine speeds other than maximum.
8.10.2.2 Coolant Flow
The pump flow found on www.detroitdiesel.com, is derived from a laboratory engine operating
under SAE J1995 conditions. Actual engine installations often have substantially different
plumbing arrangements and employ different coolants. Refer to section 8.10.4.7 for information
about water pump performance.
NOTE:
8.10.2.3 Heat Transfer Capabilities
Heat transfer capabilities must be adequate for the designated coolant, air temperatures, and flows.
These capabilities should include reserve capacity to allow for cooling system deterioration.

8.10.3 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OPERATING CONDITIONS
Consider both environmental and operating modes of the installation when designing the cooling
system. Reserve capacity and special selection of components are required for operation in the
following extremes:
□ Hot or cold ambient temperatures
□ High altitude
□ Space constraints
□ Noise limits
□ Tilt operation or installations
□ Arid, damp, dusty, oily, windy conditions
□ Long-term idle, full load, peak torque operation
□ Long-term storage or standby operation
TSM
□ Indoor/outdoor operation
□ Serviceability limitations
□ Infrequent maintenance intervals
□ Severe shock or vibration
□ System deterioration
□ Multiple engine installations
The heat rejected to the coolant generally increases when engine performance is reduced due to
external conditions. Engine performance is adversely affected by:
□ High air restrictions
□ High exhaust back pressure
□ High air inlet temperature
□ Altitude
8.10.3.1 Ambient Temperature
The ambient temperature in which an engine will be operated must be considered when designing
the jacket water (JW) and CAC systems. The worst case cooling conditions are often at the
highest expected ambient temperature.
Operating in extremely cold ambient, at light loads, or during extended idling will require
conservation of heat energy. Coolant temperatures must be maintained near the thermostat
opening value. This controls engine oil temperature at a satisfactory level for good engine
performance and reliability. Cab heater performance is adversely affected if coolant temperatures
are not maintained.

8.10.3.2 Altitude
As altitude increases air density decreases, and reduces engine and cooling system performance.
A 1°C per 273 m (2°F per 1000 ft.) decrease in the ambient capability is assigned as a general rule.
The reduced atmospheric pressure will lower the boiling point of the coolant. A higher rated
pressure cap/relief valve may be required to suppress boiling.
8.10.3.3 Space Constraints
Cooling system design is often influenced by space constraints. Heat exchanger height, width,
and depth can be dictated by the application. This, in turn, limits fan diameter and heat exchanger
surface area.
8.10.3.4 Noise Limits
Noise limitations are another environmental concern which can affect the cooling system.
TSM
Operating location and/or government regulations can limit noise generated by a cooling fan.
Fan noise is directly related to fan speed which affects air flow.
8.10.3.5 Tilt Operations or Installations
Cooling systems must perform satisfactorily at maximum tilt operation. This is especially critical
for applications where the engine must operate for extended periods on steep grades.
8.10.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Total heat rejected to the coolant and air must be determined to properly size the radiator ,
CAC, and fan arrangement so sufficient heat can be dissipated. This information is found on
www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have access to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your
Distributor.
8.10.4.1 Additional Heat Loads to Coolant
The following items will add an additional heat load to the engine coolant:
□ Transmission coolers
□ Torque converters
□ Hydraulic oil coolers
□ Air compressors
□ Retarders
□ Brake coolers
□ Water cooled exhaust systems
□ Exhaust gas coolers

The highest single source heat load to the coolant generally occurs during the no fuel braking
mode in applications that use retarders. The amount of heat generated from a retarder is dependent
upon its frequency and duration of application. The heat load source is from the retarder oil
cooler, but engine friction heat also exists. The cooling system must be able to control maximum
engine coolant temperature regardless of the mode of operation.
8.10.4.2 Additional Heat Loads to Air
The following factors or components will raise the temperature of the radiator inlet air or increase
restriction to air flow when selecting a radiator and fan. The following are some of the common
factors:
□ Air-to-air coolers
□ Oil-to-air coolers
□ Hydraulic coolers
□ Transmission coolers
TSM
□ Recirculated radiator discharge air
□ Engine radiated heat (blower fans)
□ Air conditioning condenser
□ Engine compartment configuration
□ Fuel coolers
8.10.4.3 Coolant Type
The type of coolant chosen for a cooling system can have an effect on the system performance.
Water pump output and heat transfer characteristics are different for water than for antifreeze
because the fluids have different densities, viscosities and thermal conductivity. The heat
exchanger manufacturer is the best source for determining what the difference in performance
would be from one type of coolant to the next.
8.10.4.4 Plumbing
Consider the following requirements for all water connections made between the engine and the
radiator, deaeration tank, heaters, filters, etc.:
□ All connections must be as direct as possible, durable, and require minimal maintenance.
□ Pipe and hose connections must not be necked down or be smaller than the engine
inlet(s) and outlet(s). Fitting size must be considered so minimum hose inside diameter
requirements are not exceeded.
□ The number of connections must be kept to a minimum to reduce potential leakage.
□ Bends should be smooth and have a generous radius. Avoid mitered bends and crush-bend
tubing.

□ Beaded pipe ends must be used to prevent the hose from separating from the pipe.
□ Fittings on the lines (especially fill line) must not reduce effective size.
□ Quality constant tension hose clamps must be used to maintain tension and prevent leakage
during both cold and hot operation. Use the correct style of clamp when silicone hoses
are used.
□ Two clamps should be used at each connection, indexed 180° apart.
Figure 8-15
□
TSM Hose Clamp 180° Indexed Position
Connections must be flexible enough to accommodate relative motion between connecting

components.
□ Quality hoses that can withstand the expected temperatures, pressures, coolants, and
inhibitors must be used.
□ Corrugated hoses are not recommended.
□ Hoses must be fuel and oil resistant.
□ Hoses should not span more than a 2 in. (5 cm) unsupported section. Use reinforced hose
for longer spans.
□ All connecting hoses and pipes must provide adequate support to prevent collapse and
rupture. Loose internal springs are not recommended.
□ All lines must have a continuous downward slope without droops to ensure good cooling
system draining and refilling capabilities. Additional drains and vents may be required if
this is not possible.

8.10.4.5 Auxiliary Coolant Flow Path Circuitry
Consider the following when using add on components such as cab heater systems, air
compressors, auxiliary oil coolers, retarders, exhaust gas cooler, etc.:
□ Location of coolant supply and return connection points.
□ Restriction to coolant flow. Select engine connection points that will give adequate flow
under all operating conditions, but do not adversely affect main engine/radiator flow.
□ Location of auxiliary components. Components should be mounted below the top tank or
surge tank coolant level whenever possible. This will allow removal of trapped air and to
help complete filling of the cooling system.
□ Special vents which may be required to ensure excessive air can be purged during system
fill, if components are mounted above the coolant level. The engine mustbe run after the
system has been filled to purge any remaining trapped air. Add makeup coolant as required.
Specific considerations are as follows:
□ Connect auxiliary oil coolers, retarder heat exchangers, and cab and passenger compartment
TSM
heaters in series with the main coolant flow on the pressure side of the pump. Coolers
located on the inlet side of the water pump require modifications to the engine water
bypass circuit to provide coolant flow through the cooler during closed thermostat
operation. Modifications must not hinder air from being purged from the water pump.
Engine coolant warm-up problems may occur when coolers are located in the radiator
bottom tank. Connect the heater supply at the water pump discharge and the return to the
thermostat housing base. See the installation drawings on www.detroitdiesel.com for
specific locations.
□ Give special care to excessively cold ambient operating conditions.
□ Enhance driver/passenger comfort through the use of highly efficient, low restriction heater
cores. Highly efficient, modern engines reject less heat to the coolant. It may be necessary
to increase idle speed to maintain coolant temperatures.
8.10.4.6 Water Cooled Exhaust Systems
Heat rejection to the JW system will be considerably higher than with a dry exhaust system.
Additional vents are required with water cooled components. Consult an authorized distributor or
DDC Application Engineering when water cooled exhaust systems are being considered.
8.10.4.7 Water Pumps
A water pump is used to circulate the coolant throughout the cooling system, including customer
add-on features such as cab heaters, filters, and auxiliary oil coolers. Pumps are sensitive to
inlet restrictions, coolant temperature, coolant type and aerated coolant. Discharge flow can
be seriously reduced and damaging cavitation can occur if the cooling system is not designed
properly.

Water pump inlet restriction must be kept to a minimum to prevent cavitation. This means
radiators, auxiliary oil coolers located between the radiator and the pump inlet (not preferred
location), as well as the associated plumbing must introduce minimal restriction. Lines connected
to the water pump inlet must have at least the same area as the pump inlet. Bends should be kept
to a minimum and they should have a generous radius (no mitered bends). The water pump inlet
pressure (suction) must not exceed allowable limits (see the Information Highway for actual
limits). The lowest pressure in the entire cooling system is found at the water pump inlet. This
pressure can be below atmospheric; thus cavitation (boiling) will occur below 100°C (212°F) at
sea level. Altitude causes higher probability of cavitation in cooling systems.
The pump can easily become air bound if a large volume of air is trapped in the pump during
coolant filling, or if air is fed to the pump when the pump is running. Vehicle heater systems can
be a major source of air. Air can also be introduced into the cooling system from a severely
agitated or improperly designed top tank.
Alternatively, an optional water pump group with an inlet elbow is available. It provides a
traditional inlet position and it includes vent and fill line ports.
TSM
8.11 CHARGE AIR COOLING DESIGN GUIDELINES
The air to air CAC system should be designed for the highest horsepower engine offered in
the application. The same system can be used for derated versions of the engine, which offers
the following advantages:
□ Reduces the number of components in the manufacturing and part systems
□ Lower power engines may achieve even greater fuel economy from the additional reduction
in engine intake air temperature
□ Extends engine life
The following guidelines will assist in the design and selection of the various components that
make up the charge air system. It is critical that these components offer maximum air temperature
reduction with minimal loss of pressure. The integrity of the components must provide for long
life in its operating environment.
Air system operating parameters such as heat rejection, engine air flow, air pressure, maximum
pressure drop, and minimum temperature loss are available on www.detroitdiesel.com.
Charge air cooler considerations include size, cooling air flow restriction, material specifications,
header tanks, location, and fan systems.
8.11.1 SIZE
The size of the heat exchanger depends on performance requirements, cooling air flow available,
and usable frontal area. Using the largest possible frontal area usually results in the most efficient
core with the least amount of system pressure drop. Consult your supplier to determine the
proper heat exchanger for your application.

8.11.2 COOLING AIR FLOW RESTRICTION
air flow restriction typically between 0.19 and .37 kPa (0.75 and 1.5 in. H2O).
8.11.3 MATERIAL
Most charge air coolers are made of aluminum alloys because of their light weight, cost
advantages and good heat transfer characteristics. Other materials may be used with approval
from DDC Applications Engineering.
8.11.4 HEADER TANKS
Header tanks should be designed for minimum pressure loss and uniform airflow distribution
across the core. Rounded corners and smooth interior surfaces provide a smooth transition of the
air flow resulting in minimum pressure loss. The inlet and outlet diameters of the header tanks
TSM
should be the same as the pipework to and from the engine. A 5 in. (127 mm) minimum diameter
is required for the DD Platform engines. The tube ends require a 0.09 in. (2.3 mm) minimum
bead to retain hose and clamp connections.
8.11.5 LOCATION
The cooler is typically mounted directly in front (upstream of air flow) or along side the engine
coolant radiator. Other locations are acceptable as long as performance requirements are met.
The cooler should be located as close to the engine as practical to minimize pipe length and
pressure losses.
Leave access space between the cores when stacked in front of one another so debris may be
removed.
8.11.6 PIPEWORK
Give careful attention to the pipework and associated fittings used in the inlet system, in order to
minimize restriction and maintain reliable sealing.
Pipework length should be as short as possible in order to minimize the restriction incurred in
the system and to keep the number of bends to a minimum. Use smooth bend elbows with an
R/D (bend radius to tube diameter) ratio of at least 2.0 and preferably 4.0. The cross-sectional
area of all pipework to and from the charge air cooler must not be less than that of the intake
manifold inlet.
The recommended tube diameter for DD Platform engines is 5 in. (127 mm) for both the
turbocharger to CAC heat exchanger, and from the CAC heat exchanger to the engine air intake
manifold.

8.12 HEAT EXCHANGER SELECTION

Heat exchanger cores are available in a wide variety of configurations. Heat exchanger materials,
construction and design can be any of the materials and designs listed in the following table.
Materials, Construction, and Design Choices

Heat Exchanger Materials Copper, Brass, Aluminum, Steel
Lead Soldered, No Lead Soldered, Brazed,
Heat Exchanger Construction
Welded, Mechanical Bond
Fin Geometry Plate, Serpentine, Square, Louvered, Non Louvered
Tube Geometry Oval, Round, Internally Finned, Turbulated
Down Flow, Cross Flow, Multiple Pass Series
Coolant Flow
Flow, Multiple Pass Counter Flow
Table 8-1 Heat Exchanger Materials, Construction, and Design Choices
All of these variations can have an effect on heat exchanger size, performance and resistance to
flow on both the fin side and tube side for both radiators and charge air coolers.
TSM
Meet the following design criteria to achieve greatest efficiency for fan cooled applications:
□ Utilize the largest practical frontal area in order to minimize restriction to air flow.
□ Use square cores. The square core allows maximum fan sweep area, thus providing most
effective fan performance.
□ Keep core thickness and fin density (fins per unit length) to a minimum. This keeps air flow
restriction low, helps prevent plugging, and promotes easier core cleaning.
□ Fin density in excess of 10 fins per inch should be reviewed with Detroit Diesel Application
Engineering.
□ Use the largest possible fan diameter to permit operating at slower fan speeds, resulting
in lower noise and horsepower demand.
8.12.1 SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS
Shell and tube heat exchangers are often required for transmission cooling in industrial
applications. These types of heat exchangers are to be placed between the water pump outlet and
the engine oil cooler inlet. Shell and tube heat exchangers are constructed of a bundle of tubes
encased in a tank or shell. Typically, engine coolant enters an end bonnet, travels through the
tubes and exits an end bonnet. Oil typically enters the shell, passes over the tubes, then exits the
shell on the other end. Partition bars are present in the end bonnets if multiple passes are required
on the tube side, while baffles are always present within the shell to force the oil to pass over the
tubes multiple times.

TSM
Figure 8-16 Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers
Consider the following guidelines when selecting a shell and tube heat exchanger:
□ Minimize restriction to the engine cooling system by keeping the number of tube side
passes to a minimum
□ Prevent tube erosion by keeping tube velocities below 7 ft./sec.
□ Shell side flow velocities should be higher than 1 ft./sec.
□ Typically, in industrial applications, tubes are copper and the shell is steel. Choose more
corrosion resistant materials if fluids are more corrosive.
8.13 FAN SYSTEM RECOMMENDATIONS AND FAN

SELECTION
Proper selection and matching of the fan and radiator as well as careful positioning will maximize
system efficiency and will promote adequate cooling at the lowest possible parasitic horsepower
and noise level. Obtain radiator and fan performance curves from the manufacturer to estimate air
system static pressure drop and determine if a satisfactory match is possible.
Installations using the largest fan diameter possible, turning at the lowest speed to deliver the
desired air flow, are the most economical.
NOTE:
Fan blades should not extend beyond the radiator core. Blades that reach beyond the
core are of minimal or no benefit.
Other important considerations include:

□ Cooling air flow required by the radiator core

□ Cooling air system total pressure drop
□ Space available
□ Noise level limit
□ Fan drive limits
□ Fan speed limit
□ Fan weight and support capabilities
□ Fan spacers
Make sure that the manufacturer of the fan knows the tip speed.
8.13.1 BLOWER VS. SUCTION FANS
The application will generally dictate the type of fan to be used (i.e. mobile applications normally
use a suction fan, and stationary units frequently use blower fans). Blower fans are generally
TSM
more efficient in terms of power expended for a given mass flow, since they will always operate
with lower temperature air as compared to a suction fan. Air entering a suction fan is heated as
it passes through the radiator where a blower fan, even when engine mounted, can receive air
closer to ambient temperatures.
Proper fan spacing from the core and good shroud design are required, so air flow is completely
distributed across the core to obtain high efficiency.
A suction fan, when mounted, will generally have the concave side of the blade facing the engine,
whereas a blower fan will have the concave side facing the radiator. A suction fan cannot be made
into a blower fan by simply mounting the fan backwards. Fan rotation must also be correct.

Figure 8-17
8.13.1.1
TSM
Blower vs. Suction Fans
Fan Performance
Fan curve air flow (m3/min. [ft.3/min.]) is a theoretical output value which is seldom achieved.
This value can be approached with a well formed, tight fitting shroud and proper fan positioning
(fan tip clearances of 1/16 in. [1.59 mm] or less). Consult the fan supplier on how to determine
what the realistic fan air flow delivery will be on the installation.
Select a fan/core match with sufficient reserve cooling capacity to allow for some degradation.
This degradation occurs as the unit gets older and there is fouling from airborne debris. These
conditions cause higher air restriction and/or lower heat transfer capability. This is especially true
for applications such as agriculture, earth moving, or mining. Fin density should be as low as
practical to keep air flow high, minimize plugging, and permit easier cleaning.
NOTE:
Fin density in excess of 10 fins per inch should be reviewed with Detroit Diesel
Application Engineering.

Increasing core thickness increases the restriction to air flow. This condition causes fouling
to occur faster.
Consider the following when analyzing fan performance:
□ Speed
□ Static Pressure
□ Horsepower
The following fan law relationships are useful when interpreting basic fan curves:
□ Air flow varies directly with fan speed ft.3/min.2 = (ft.3/min.1) x (r/min.2) / (r/min.1)
□ Static head varies with the square of fan speed PS2 = (PS1) x [(r/min.2) / (r/min.1)]2
□ Horsepower varies with the cube of fan speed hp2 = (hp1) x [(r/min.2) / (r/min.1)]3
Additional factors that affect the installed performance of a fan are listed in the following table.
Installed Fan Factors Affecting Performance
TSM
Fan Position Fan to Core Distance, Fan to Engine Distance
Radiator Core, Engine and Engine Compartment Configuration,
Air Flow Restriction Grills and Bumpers, Air Conditioning Condenser, Air-to-
Oil Cooler, Air-to-Air Cores
Shroud-to-Fan Tip Clearance, Shroud-to-Fan Position, Shroud
Shroud Type (i.e. Ring, Box, Venturi), Shroud-to-Core Seal, Shutters,
Bug Screens, and Winterfronts
Table 8-2 Installed Fan Performance Factors
Typical fan performance graphs have total pressure curves and power absorption curves for a
given speed of rotation. The pressure, measured in water gage, represents the resistance to flow.
The higher the resistance, the lower the flow. The fan horsepower absorption follows a similar,
but not exactly the same, characteristic to the pressure curve. Depending on the installed system
characteristics, the fan operates only at one point of water gage and power.

TSM
Figure 8-18 Typical Fan Performance Curve
Most fans have some region in which the flow separates from the blade and the flow becomes
unstable. This is called a stall region. Operation in the stall region is not recommended because
results are not consistent and the fan is inefficient and noisy.
There are maximum tip speeds in the range of 18,000 to 23,000 feet per minute that the fan
manufacturer based on his design. Check with the fan manufacturer.
The system characteristics are defined by the air flow restrictions that are a result of:
□ Engine enclosure louvers
□ Engine and accessories
□ Fan guard
□ Radiator core
□ Charge air cooler if in tandem with radiator
□ Oil cooler if in tandem with radiator
□ Bug screen
□ Any other internal or external obstructions

NOTICE:
The fan should never operate in the stall area, where a small
change in static pressure results in no change in airflow.
NOTICE:
The air side of the cooling system is critical and a change in the
air flow will generally have a greater impact on cooling than a
similar percentage change in coolant flow.
Consider these additional factors to determine actual fan performance at worst case operating
conditions.
□ Air temperature
□ Atmospheric pressure
TSM
PERSONAL INJURY
Fan curves are generated at standard conditions (77°F [25°C] 0 elevation). If the fan is operating
in different temperature or pressure (altitude) than standard the performance must be adjusted.
8.13.1.2 Fan Position
Fan position relative to the radiator depends on the fan diameter and the radiator frontal area.
Position the fan further away from the core as the fan swept area becomes less than the radiator
frontal area. This allows the air to spread over the full core area. The fan will not spread air over
the entire core area if it is mounted too close to the radiator.
The optimum position of the fan blade on a blower or suction fan with respect to the shroud
opening is dependent on the fan design as well as the many variables associated with an
installation. Different system performance may occur for the same fan positions in different
applications due to air flow restriction and flow obstructions. Consult the fan manufacturer for
assistance in optimizing the fan positioning.
Keep fan tip-to-shroud clearance to a minimum because it influences air flow and noise level
significantly. Minimum clearance is achieved by using a shroud with a round opening. An
adjustable fan shroud is recommended if the fan pulley is adjustable for belt tightening. Consider
allowances for engine/radiator movement when determining tip clearance.
Consider components located behind the fan so air flow is not adversely affected or vibration
introduced to the fan. These conditions will cause premature failures, or increased noise, or
both. Fan height is also important.

The use of fan spacers on DD Platform engines are allowed only when a fan drive configuration
review and/or vibration testing has been completed. Consult with DDC Application Engineering
for assistance.
8.13.1.3 Fan Shrouds
The use of a fan shroud is required for achieving good cooling system performance. A properly
designed shroud will distribute the air across the core more uniformly, increase core air flow, and
prevent air recirculation around the fan. Seal holes and seams in the shroud. An air tight seal
between the shroud and the radiator core will maximize air flow through the core.
There are three basic types of shrouds: the well rounded entrance venturi shroud, the ring shroud,
and the box shroud. The ring and box type shrouds are most common because they are easier to
fabricate.
TSM
Figure 8-19 Fan Shroud Types

8.13.1.4 Fan System Assemblies
Do not exceed the design limits of any component when OEM components such as fans, fan
drives, spacers, etc. are attached to Detroit Diesel supplied components (fan hub and pulley
assemblies). Vibration tests must be performed when the customer wants to use a fan system
not previously approved by DDC.
8.13.1.5 Fan Drives
The DD Platform engines provide a 10–groove poly V fan drive. Refer to Accessory Drive
System section for specifications and belt configuration data.
8.13.1.6 Baffles to Prevent Air Recirculation
Use baffles around the perimeter of the radiator assembly to prevent hot air which has passed
through the radiator core from being recirculated back through the core. The cooling capability of
the system may be seriously hindered if this baffling is not utilized.
TSM
8.13.1.7 Shutters
Shutters are not required under most operating conditions with a properly designed cooling
system. Shutters may improve performance under extreme cold ambient conditions and long term
idling or light loading. Improperly installed or maintained devices may lead to reduced engine
life, loss of power, and poor fuel economy.
Shutters should open approximately 3°C (5°F) before the thermostat start to open temperature.
The shutter control should sense engine water out (before thermostat) temperature and the probe
must be fully submerged in coolant flow.
8.13.1.8 Winterfronts
Winterfronts are not required under most operating conditions with a properly designed cooling
system. Some operators reduce the airflow through the radiator during cold weather operation
to increase engine operating temperature. Consider on/off fans and shutters if long term idling
during severe cold weather is necessary.
Improperly used winterfronts may cause excessive temperatures of coolant, oil, and charge air.
This condition can lead to reduced engine life, loss of power, and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts
may also put abnormal stress on the fan and fan drive components.
Never totally close or apply the winterfront directly to the radiator core. At least 25% of the area
in the center of the grill should remain open at all times. All monitoring, warning, and shutdown
devices should be properly located and in good working condition.

8.14 RADIATOR COMPONENT DESIGN

The design of individual radiator components may have an effect on cooling system performance.
The following sections describe these considerations.
8.14.1 DOWN FLOW AND CROSS FLOW RADIATORS
Down flow radiators are customarily used and required for heavy duty diesel engine applications.
A cross flow radiator may be used if height limitations exist, but deaeration, thermal stratification,
adequate core tube coverage and freeze damage are generally more difficult to control.
Figure 8-20
TSM
Down Flow Radiator and Cross Flow Radiator
8.14.1.1 Horizontal Radiator
Horizontal radiators may be used in situations where space restrictions preclude the use of other
types. It is essential that vent lines go to the fill tank with the cap. Consult DDC Application
Engineering for assistance in applying horizontal radiators.
8.14.1.2 Rapid Warm-up Deaeration Tank — Down Flow Radiator
The rapid warm-up deaeration tank consists of an integral top tank or a remote tank with the same
design features. The top tank design should provide the following characteristics:
□ A non turbulent chamber for separating air (gases) from the coolant
□ Ability to fill at a minimum specified rate

□ Adequate expansion and deaeration volume as well as sufficient coolant volume so the
system will operate satisfactorily with partial loss of coolant
□ Impose a positive head on the water pump
□ Prevent coolant flow through the radiator core during closed thermostat operation
□ Prevent introduction of air into the cooling system during maximum tilt or angle operation
8.14.1.3 Remote Mounted Radiators/Heat Exchanger
Consult an authorized distributor, radiator supplier, or DDC Application Engineering when

remote (i.e. non engine driven fans) mounted radiators/heat exchangers are being considered as
many variables must be considered for each application. The requirements that must be met
for remote mount are:
□ Standard DDC installation and test requirements including restriction to flow and coolant
flow rate
□ Maximum allowable static head pressure is 32 ft. of water column with a pressure cap, 50
TSM
ft. of water column with an open system
□ Installations where flow rate restrictions cannot be met may require using an inline pump
8.14.1.4 Integral Top Tank
The following top tank component guidelines are provided to assist in the design of a new tank, to
critique existing tanks, and to troubleshoot problem cooling systems.

Figure 8-21
TSM
Rapid Warm-up Down Flow Radiator Top Tank
The guidelines for the design of an integral top tank are listed in tables.

Component Guidelines
Locate the standpipe(s) as far away from radiator inlet(s) as practical and center over core.
This is the area of least coolant turbulence, thus best for separating air out of the coolant.
Use 1 or 2 standpipes with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) inside diameter (general rule).
Standpipe(s) Bottom of tube must not protrude below baffle.
Top of tube must extend above hot full coolant level. The flow must be directed away from
the low coolant level sensor, as well as the filler neck and/or pressure relief valve opening.
This minimizes coolant loss.
A clearance of 1 in. (25.4 mm) or more should be maintained between the top of the radiator
core and the bottom of the top tank baffle. This produces a good transition of the coolant flow
and enhances air separation from the coolant.
Baffle
Seal baffle completely so the only flow path between the deaeration tank and the radiator
core is through the standpipe(s). This is essential for proper engine warm-up, preventing top
tank coolant agitation, and providing a positive head on the water pump.
Use a vortex baffle to prevent formation of a coolant vortex. This also permits maximum
usage of top tank coolant volume.
Vortex Baffle
A vertical baffle is preferred. Horizontal vortex baffles at the fill line opening may hinder
the venting of trapped air.
The recommended minimum inside diameter is 1 in. (25.4 mm).
TSM
Fill line connections (fittings) must not reduce the minimum inside diameter requirement.
Locate the fill line as low as possible above the baffle and at the center of the tank. This
minimizes uncovering the fill opening and drawing air into the cooling system during vehicle
Fill Line and operations.
Connections
Make the engine connection as close to the water pump inlet as practical. This will provide
maximum head to the water pump and minimize heat migration to the radiator core, resulting
in quicker engine warm-up. Avoid connecting the fill line to the coolant bypass circuit. A
continuous downward slope (including fittings) must be maintained from the top tank to the
water pump inlet to ensure good filling capabilities.
Locate the vent line at the top of the top tank above the coolant level in the deaeration space.
Vent (deaeration)
The recommended line size is 3/16 in. (4.76 mm) inside diameter
Line – High Position
(above coolant Do not direct deaeration line coolant flow toward the fill neck, pressure relief valve openings,
level) or low coolant level sensor
All vent lines must maintain a continuous downward slope
Locate the radiator inlet as low as possible with at least the lower half of the inlet below the
baffle level to minimize air trapped during fill.
The inside diameter of the inlet should match the inside diameter of the thermostat housing.
Radiator Inlet Design the radiator inlet to uniformly spread coolant under the baffle.
The radiator inlet must be sealed from top tank
No vent holes. Extend the fill neck into the tank to establish the cold coolant full level,
allowing for expansion (6%) and deaeration (2%) volume.
Table 8-3 Top Tank Component Guidelines — Standpipe(s), Baffle, Vortex

Baffle, Fill Line and Connections, Vent Line, and Radiator Inlet

Component Guidelines
Select the fill neck size capable of accepting highest rated pressure cap required for
application
The fill neck cap must provide safe release of system pressure upon removal of the cap
Fill Neck
when a separate pressure relief valve is used.
Locate the fill neck at the top center of the top tank. This will ensure a complete fill if
unit is in a tilted position.
A 1/8 in. (3.18 mm) vent hole located at the top of the fill neck extension is required for
Fill Neck Vent Hole
venting air and preventing coolant loss.
Location must be above the satisfactory drawdown coolant level. This is generally a
height representing 98% of the drawdown quantity.
Low Coolant Level
Coolant flow and/or splash from deaeration line and standpipe(s) must not contact
Sensor
sensor. A shroud around the sensor may be beneficial.
Locating the sensor in the middle of the tank will minimize tilt operation sensitivity.
Table 8-4 Top Tank Component Guidelines— Fill Neck, Fill Neck Vent Hole,
and Coolant Level Sensor
TSM
General guidelines for top tank design, critique, or troubleshooting are:
□ Increasing top tank depth permits maximum usage of coolant volume and reduces tilt
operation problems.
□ Consider hose fitting inside diameters when determining vent and fill line inside diameter
requirements.
□ Low fill line flow velocity (large inside diameter line) will generally improve drawdown
capacity and maintain higher pressure on the water pump.
□ Oversized and/or excessive number of deaeration line(s) and standpipe(s) can result in
poor deaeration and drawdown capabilities and increases coolant flow bypassing the
radiator core.
□ Undersizing deaeration line(s) and standpipe(s) may not provide adequate deaeration and
they can become plugged easier.
□ Make observations of top tank agitation, deaeration and fill line(s), flow direction, and
velocity during both open and closed thermostat operations (throughout engine speed
range), to determine satisfactory system design. The observations are especially helpful
during fill and drawdown evaluation tests.
□ A sight glass in the radiator top tank to determine proper coolant level will eliminate
unnecessary removal of the radiator cap.
8.14.1.5 Remote Tank
The design of the remote tank must provide the same features as the integral top tank design. The
guidelines for the radiator inlet tank are listed in the following table.

TSM
Figure 8-22 Remote Surge Tank Design for Rapid Warm-up Cooling System
Component and
Guidelines
Location
Must be large enough so air can be separated from the coolant.
Radiator Inlet Tank The deaeration line from the radiator inlet tank to the remote/top tank must be
at the highest point of each and generally as far away from the inlet as practical.
Locate tank as high as practical. The bottom of the tank should be above the
rest of the cooling system. This will prevent coolant level equalization problems.
Location Generally, low mounted tanks make filling the system more difficult, especially
near the end of the fill, because of small head differential. Also, equalization of
the coolant level occurs during engine stop or low speed operation.
Table 8-5 Component Design and Location Guidelines for the Remote Top
Tank

TSM
Figure 8-23 Down Flow Radiator Inlet Tank Deaeration Line Boss Position
8.14.1.6 Radiator Bottom Tank
Consider the following guidelines when designing the radiator bottom tank.
□ Locate the coolant opening diagonally opposite the inlet tank opening or as far away as is
practical. This provides uniform distribution of the coolant across the core and prevents
short circuiting.

TSM
Figure 8-24 Coolant Inlet/Outlet Locations
□ Inside diameter of outlet must be greater than, or equal to respective inlet connections.
□ A well rounded coolant outlet exit area is preferred to minimize restriction and aeration.
Figure 8-25 Radiator Outlet Contour
□ Depth of the tank should be no less than the diameter of the outlet pipe to minimize
restriction.

□ Locate a drain plug/cock on the lowest portion of the cooling system to ensure complete
draining and removal of any sediment (remember that the bottom tank may not be the
lowest point).
8.14.1.7 Coolant Pressure Control Caps and Relief Valves
Pressurizing the cooling system:

□ Reduces boiling
□ Prevents coolant loss due to evaporation
□ Maintains water pump performance
Pressurization is obtained by the expansion of the coolant as it is heated and controlled through
the use of an integral pressure/fill cap or a separate relief valve.
NOTICE:
System pressurization will not occur if pressure/fill cap is installed
TSM
when coolant is hot.
Locate the pressure control device high in the deaeration tank above the hot coolant level to
minimize coolant loss and dirt contamination of the relief valve seat.
HOT COOLANT
The pressure valve (in the normally closed position) should maintain top tank pressure to within
+/- 6.9 kPa (+/- 1 psi) of the rating stamped on top of the cap/valve. The valve will lift off the
seat as pressure exceeds the specified rating.

Figure 8-26 Pressure Control Cap — Pressure Valve Open
A vacuum actuated valve is incorporated in the assembly to prevent collapse of hoses and other
TSM
parts as the coolant cools.
Figure 8-27 Pressure Control Cap — Vacuum Valve Open
The filler neck cap must provide for a safe release of the pressure upon cap removal if a separate
pressure relief valve is used.
Inspect the valve/cap, periodically, to ensure components are clean, not damaged, and in good
operating order.

A 82.7 kPa (12 psi) pressure cap is required for most systems and applications. See
www.detroitdiesel.com to verify required minimum pressure cap rating. Consider higher pressure
rated caps for operation at increased altitudes.
TSM
Figure 8-28 Effect of Altitude and Pressure Caps
8.14.1.8 Thermostat
A full blocking thermostat is used to automatically regulate coolant temperature by controlling

the coolant flow to the radiator and engine bypass circuit. A full blocking thermostat design in
the full open position (15° to 17°F [8° to 9°C]) above the start to open temperature) controls the
engine bypass circuit, and provides maximum coolant flow to the radiator.
The start-to-open thermostat temperature varies with the rating and model. The engine coolant
temperature will be controlled at the thermostat start to open value, under normal operating
conditions.

NOTICE:
Never operate the engine without thermostats.
8.14.1.9 Coolant Sensor Devices
Engine coolant temperature monitors (gages, alarms, shutdowns, fan and shutter control switches,
etc.) must be durable, reliable and accurate. Submerge the probe completely in a high flow stream
to sense uniform coolant temperature. Locate the probe in an area without air pockets, or mount it
in a place where it will not be affected by coolant being returned from parallel circuits such as
heater, air compressor, and aftercooler return lines.
The coolant temperature monitor may not respond fast enough to prevent engine damage if a large
quantity of coolant is suddenly lost, or if the water pump becomes air bound. Low Coolant Level
Sensors are mandatory with DD Platform engines.
Temperature Gauges: Every temperature gage should have sufficient markings to allow an
operator to determine actual operating temperature. The temperature range should go beyond
TSM
99°C (210°F) so the operator will know if the maximum coolant temperature is being exceeded.
Maintain accuracy of +/- 3°C (5°F) to prevent inaccurate indication of either hot or cold running
engine conditions.
Temperature Alarms: An auxiliary warning device (audible or visible) should be included if a
digital gage is used. Set temperature alarm units at coolant temperature level that is 3°C (5°F)
above the maximum allowable coolant temperature. Accuracy should be +/- 3°C (5°F). Locate
each alarm sensor before the thermostat. Special considerations, including testing must be done
when a coolant recovery system is used.
Temperature Shutdowns: Set temperature shutdown devices for a coolant temperature level of
104°C (220°F). Accuracy should be +/- 1°C (2°F).
Low Coolant Level Sensor: Locate the sensor for low engine coolant level in the top tank. See
tank design section for additional recommendations.
Shutter Control Switches: Mount shutter switches before the engine thermostat so they can
sense engine coolant temperature. The various temperature control devices (shutters, fan drives
and thermostats) must operate in proper sequence to prevent coolant temperature instability or
overheat conditions.
The recommended temperature settings of the various coolant sensor devices can be seen in
the following illustration.

TSM
Figure 8-29 Nominal Settings For Coolant Temperature Control Devices — 190°
8.14.1.10 Coolant Recovery System
Use the coolant recovery tank system only when adequate expansion, drawdown, and deaeration
volume cannot be designed into the radiator or remote top tanks.

TSM
Figure 8-30 Cooling System Design (Warm-up — Closed Thermostat)

TSM
Figure 8-31 Cooling System Design (Stabilized Temperature — Open
Thermostat)
The total coolant volume increases as the engine coolant temperature rises. The pressure valve in
the pressure control cap will open due to this pressure causing coolant to flow into the coolant
recovery tank.

When the tank is open to the atmosphere, the coolant will be drawn back into the top tank through
the vacuum valve in the pressure control cap when the coolant temperature decreases. The total
coolant volume decreases as the engine coolant temperature falls.
TSM
Figure 8-32 Cooling System Design (Cool-down — Closed Thermostat)

The coolant recovery tank must have sufficient volume to meet the coolant expansion requirements
of the entire cooling system. A minimum of 6% capacity of the total cooling system volume
should exist between the hot and cold levels in the recovery tank.
Mount the coolant recovery tank as close as possible to the pressure control cap.
Locating the tank as high as possible with respect to the control cap may make leaks easier to find
and may prevent air from being drawn into the system.
The air-tight line connections become more crucial when the tank is mounted low. Should a leak
occur under these conditions air could be drawn into the system.
The coolant recovery line between the tank and radiator is typically 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) I.D.
Connect this line as close to the bottom of the tank as possible. A standpipe may be used in the
tank to prevent sediment from being drawn into the cooling system.
Meet the following design criteria to achieve a properly functioning coolant recovery system:
□ Use an air tight pressure cap
□ Install and maintain air tight seals on either ends of the line
TSM
□ Ensure that the coolant level in the tank does not go below the level where the coolant
recovery line connects to the recovery tank
Do not visually check the recovery tank because it may give a false indication of the coolant level
in the entire cooling system. Use a sight glass in the top tank if a visual check is necessary.
Use a pressure control cap which has a design similar to the cap. A minimum of 1 bar (87.2
kPa, 12 psi) pressure cap is required.
HOT COOLANT
Do not use a cap design in which the vacuum valve opens directly to the atmosphere.
Locate the pressurized control cap at the highest point of the top tank. Do not design a filler neck
onto the cap to ensure that air is not trapped at the top of the top tank.

TSM
Figure 8-33 Acceptable Top Tank Design
Figure 8-34 Unacceptable Top Tank Design
Connect the deaeration line as high as possible to the top tank when using a coolant recovery
system.
Air handling may be poorer and the coolant in the top tank may be more agitated when a coolant
recovery system is used.

Perform the necessary tests to determine whether the cooling system design provides adequate
expansion, drawdown, and deaeration volume in the radiator or remote top tanks.
8.14.2 COLD WEATHER OPERATING OPTIMIZATION
Newer fuel efficient engines transfer less heat to the coolant; thus, it is important to maintain
proper coolant temperatures for optimum engine and heater performance, especially during severe
cold ambient operation. The following guidelines are given to maximize the available heat energy.
8.14.2.1 Engine
To maximize the available heat energy of the engine:

□ Increase idle speed
□ Avoid long term idle and/or light load operation (maintain minimum exhaust temperature)
□ Use under hood air intake for engine (cold weather only)
TSM
8.14.2.2 Vehicle
To maximize the available heat energy of the vehicle:

□ Auxiliary oil coolers must not be located in radiator outlet tank
□ Seal operator's compartment interior to eliminate any direct cold outside air source
□ Consider full winterizing package for maximum comfort level
□ Thermal windows
□ Insulate walls, roofs, floors, doors, etc.
□ Reduce exposed interior metal surfaces
□ Auxiliary fuel fired coolant heater
□ Install shutters only as a last effort
8.14.2.3 Cooling System
To maximize the available heat energy of the cooling system:

□ Use optimized Rapid Warm-up System
□ Set coolant antifreeze concentration correctly
8.14.2.4 Heater Circuit
To maximize the available heat energy of the heater circuit:

□ Use low restriction, high efficiency cores
□ Optimize plumbing to give minimum restriction to coolant flow

□ Do not hinder air side restriction air flow for good distribution of heat
□ Use inside recirculated air (if window fogging is not a problem)
□ Use booster water pump if required
□ Do not place fuel heaters in the cab/sleeper heater circuits
□ Core and air ducts should favor defrost operation and driver/passenger comfort
Refer to www.detroitdiesel.com installation data for recommended heater connect points.
8.14.3 COOLANT HEATERS
Information on coolant heaters can be obtained from Detroit Diesel Application Engineering.
8.14.4 MULTI-DUTY CYCLE
Cooling systems must perform satisfactorily under all operating modes. Consideration must
be given when an engine is used for prime power under several duty cycles such as cranes,
TSM
drill/pumping rigs, etc. Cooling system must be sized for the maximum rated load.
8.14.5 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS
Cooling system performance must be reevaluated any time engine, cooling system, vehicle
components, timing, etc., are changed due to potential increased heat load or reduced cooling
system capacity. Conduct a reevaluation of the cooling system if load, duty cycle, or
environmental operating conditions are different than originally approved.
8.15 COOLING SYSTEM EVALUATION TESTS

Cooling tests must be conducted on all new installations and engine re-powers. The same test
must be conducted whenever modifications have been made to the engine or cooling system as
well as changes in load, duty cycle, or environmental operating conditions. This will verify
that the cooling system will perform satisfactorily in the installation by having adequate heat
dissipation capability and coolant flow.
A thorough evaluation will require:
□ Complete description and documentation of the system
□ Proper test preparations
□ Accurate tests
□ Diagnostics (troubleshooting)
□ Corrective action (if necessary)

8.15.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A complete system description must be documented in the Detroit Diesel Vehicle Sign-Off form.
Attach cooling system component prints, installation drawings, photographs, and sketches of
the overall system to the Vehicle Sign-Off.
This information will assist in determining system approval and also serve as a reference point if
future difficulties are encountered.
8.15.2 INSTRUMENTATION
The following instrumentation and materials are required to conduct a complete evaluation of
the cooling system:
□ Thermocouples and associated readout equipment
□ Pressure gages and associated hoses and fittings
□ Thermostat
TSM
□ Stop watch
□ Light (flashlight, trouble light)
□ Water supply hose
□ Diagnostic data reader or Detroit Diesel Diagnostic Link™ software
□ Engine loading method
□ Tape measure
□ Flowmeters and associated hardware (if necessary)
NOTE:
All instrumentation must be calibrated and in good working condition. Size and range
should maintain data accuracy.
8.15.2.1 Thermocouples and Associated Hardware
This section discusses the attributes needed for coolant, air and oil in relation to thermocouples
and associated equipment.
Measure air, engine coolant out, and lube oil gallery temperatures until the coolant and engine
lube oil temperatures are fully stabilized. Other temperature measurements such as engine coolant
in, engine intake air, and exhaust temperatures may be measured to aid in troubleshooting cooling
system deficiencies.
All thermocouples, wires, and readout equipment must be compatible. All junction points should
have wire insulation completely removed, cleaned, and securely joined for good electrical
continuity. Polarity must also be correct.
Use calibrated matched pairs to obtain accurate temperature differential values.

A digital readout is preferred and should have 12V (DC) and 110V (60Hz AC) capability. A
remote multi-channel switch can be wired into the circuit if the readout box does not have
sufficient positions for all the thermocouples.
Location of the thermocouples is critical. The thermocouples must protrude into a high flow path
and not touch surrounding surfaces. Ambient air thermocouples must be shielded from direct
sunlight and not sense any radiated or recirculated heat sources. Radiator thermocouples must also
be shielded from sunlight. The sump thermocouple must be in the oil while the engine is running.
8.15.2.2 Pressure Gauges and Associated Hardware
To measure water pump inlet pressure, use a381 mm Hg to +206.8 kPa (15 in. Hg, +30 psi),
compound gage or 72.6 cm (30 in.) or greater “U” type manometer.
Additional pressure measurements may be required for analysis of the system.
Use a vent at each gage to expel all entrained air and water and ensure no blockage in the circuit.
All hoses must be full of the substance being measured.
TSM
NOTE:
Locating gages at the same height as the measurement point eliminates the need to
correct the readings.
Hose length should be as short as is practical.
8.15.2.3 Thermostat
Both blocked open and operating thermostats are required. A thermostat must be blocked open to
the proper dimension for obtaining correct data. Full blocking thermostats must be opened so
the coolant bypass circuit is completely shut off. Make a visual check. The oil cooler bypass
thermostat must be blocked to the minimum travel distance at full open temperature. Inspect and
replace thermostat seals if necessary.

TSM
Figure 8-35 Thermostat
8.15.2.4 Sight Glass and Transparent Tubing
Observation of coolant aeration, flow direction, and velocity greatly assists in analyzing test
results and determining system acceptability.
Install a sight glass in the engine water out line between thermostat housing and radiator inlet.
NOTE:
To avoid personal injury such as scalding or eye injury, thick wall transparent tubing must
be used. Safety straps must be used with the sight glass and flow meters.
NOTICE:
All connections must be secured carefully and be routed so they
do not kink and will not be damaged during testing.
Replace deaeration and fill lines with transparent tubing. It is also helpful to replace coolant
return lines on heater, air compressor, filter, coolant conditioner, and other components that
use engine coolant.
Sight glass and transparent tubing is useful during fill, drain, capacity check, deaeration, flow
and pressure vs. engine speed maps, and drawdown tests. These visual aids should be removed
for safety reasons prior to air handling, cooling index, and any other tests where the system is
pressurized and high coolant temperatures are expected.

8.15.2.5 Graduated Container
An 3 gal (11 L) bucket, graduated in 1 qt. (.95 L) increments is recommended for most cooling
systems.
The container is needed to determine total cooling system capacity, measure coolant removed
during drawdown test, and coolant expelled during air handling test, and measuring water supply
flow rate for fill test.
8.15.2.6 Pressure Cap
The pressure relief cap/valve must be functional and develop rated pressure.
8.15.2.7 Stop Watch
A stop watch is used in conjunction with a graduated bucket to set flow rate for fill test and to
record time to expel all entrained air after filling the system (deaeration time).
TSM
8.15.2.8 Light
A flashlight or trouble light held against the sight glass or transparent tubing is helpful in
observing coolant aeration. A light is also useful to look for top tank coolant agitation.
8.15.2.9 Water Supply and Hose
A water supply and hose capable of flowing at minimum 3 gal/min. (11.35 L/min) should be
available to conduct continuous and interrupted fill tests. A flow meter that can regulate rate and
measure capacity is ideal.
Normally a stop watch, graduated bucket, and a valve on the hose are needed to regulate water
flow to the required fill rate.
8.15.2.10 Engine Loading Method
The test facility should provide a method for fully loading the engine, in order to conduct cooling
index tests. The loading method will vary with application and test site location.
8.15.2.11 Tape Measure
Size and distance measurements of radiator assembly, fan components, and other related hardware
are required to complete cooling system evaluation.

8.15.2.12 Flowmeters and Associated Hardware
Engine coolant out (radiator in) is the preferred location for measuring radiator flow. Inside
diameter of flowmeters must not cause excessive restriction. Use engine coolant in (radiator out),
only as a last resort because of added inlet restriction to the water pump.
The flowmeter should offer low restriction to the coolant flow, regardless of the type used (turbine,
differential pressure, etc.). Refer to the manufacturers instructions for correct installation,
operation, and limitations of the individual flowmeter.
8.15.3 TEST PREPARATIONS
The following preparations are necessary before conducting the cooling system tests:
1. Confirm all instrumentation and equipment is in good working condition and calibrated.
2. Know how to use and operate all equipment.
3. Understand overall cooling system circuitry and operation, test procedures, and data
TSM
analysis.
4. Obtain all available information on the specific cooling system to be evaluated such as
radiator/top tank assembly print, fan/fan drive, shrouds, circuitry, etc. prior to conducting
tests.
HOT COOLANT
5. Be sure the test unit represents the final complete package to be released.
6. Check coolant concentration and take sample for possible analysis.
7. Drain entire cooling system completely. This may require removing hoses and even
blowing air through coolant passages.
8. Flush cooling system with water to remove all residual antifreeze solution. Flush system
with a reputable cleaner if it is contaminated.
9. Install instrumentation, sight glass, and transparent tubing.
10. Disarm high temperature and low coolant shutdown devices for these tests. Shutdown
and alarm settings should be determined.
11. Modify shutter controls, fan controls, and transmissions, if necessary to perform certain
tests correctly.

12. Know cooling system requirements (specifications) for the application and engine
configuration to be evaluated.
13. Locate test vehicle or equipment on a level surface for all stationary tests (except high
gradeability applications).
8.15.4 TYPES OF TESTS
The following tests and evaluations are normally conducted to determine system acceptability:
□ Fill and Capability Tests
□ Continuous Fill
□ Interrupted Fill
□ Total System Capacity
□ Draining Capability
□ Water Pump Air Test
TSM
□ Deaeration Test
□ Drawdown Test
□ Water Flow and Pressure Test
□ Cooling Index Test
The cooling system must be clean. Run qualification tests on a finalized complete package
installed in unit or vehicle.
Perform fill tests with closed thermostats, no pressure cap, and heater, filter circuits, etc. open.
The following factors can cause poor filling capabilities and possible water pump air binding
problems:
□ Fill line routing (horizontal)
□ Drooped deaeration lines
□ Incorrect deaeration line location on the engine or deaeration tank
□ Horizontal vortex baffle located on the engine or deaeration tank at fill line opening
□ Routing of coolant lines (drooped) not having a continuous slope
□ Coolant trapped in various cooling system components from a previous fill can prevent air
from being purged on the refill
□ Deaeration tank not the highest cooling system component
8.15.4.1 Continuous Fill
Perform the continuous fill test as follows:

1. Fill the system with water at a constant 3 gal/min. (11.35 L/min) rate with cooling system
completely empty and all drains closed, until fill neck overflows. The fill must be timed so
the amount of water can be determined.
2. Start engine (no pressure cap) and idle for approximately two minutes.
3. Increase engine speed slowly to high idle and hold for about one minute.
4. Reduce speed to idle and cycle up and down several times.
5. Make continuous observations throughout the test for aeration, coolant flow direction, and
coolant agitation in the deaeration tank.
[a] Stop engine.
[b] Add coolant as required to achieve cold full level and record amount. Coolant should
be at the bottom of the fill neck extension or to the recommended cold full mark at
the conclusion of the test. A satisfactory fill will not require more make up volume
than the satisfactory drawdown capacity of the system. The amount of water during
the initial fill plus the make up will equal the total system capacity.
TSM
6. Verify that no flow in either direction occurs in the bleed line from the radiator to a remote
mounted deaeration tank system while the thermostat is closed.
[a] Verify that no air is being drawn down the fill line as a result of improper engine
deaeration line size or location in deaeration tank and excessive agitation of the
coolant.
8.15.4.2 Interrupted Fill
Perform the interrupted fill test as follows:

1. After completing the continuous fill test, drain approximately half the coolant from a full
system and start refilling the system following the previous procedure (3 gpm.) until
the fill neck overflows).
2. Start the engine and measure make-up water as described in the continuous fill test.
3. Confirm that make-up water volume does not exceed satisfactory drawdown capacity and
that the water pump did not become air bound.
8.15.4.3 Bucket Fill
Perform the bucket fill test as follows:

1. Pour a measured amount of water into the cooling system fill neck as quickly as possible,
using the 2–3 gallon bucket. Allow coolant level to come to rest.
2. Repeat this procedure until fill neck overflows. The measured amount of water is the
initial fill volume.
3. Start the engine and measure make-up water as described in the continuous fill test.

8.15.4.4 Total System Capacity
Perform the total system capacity test as follows:

1. Completely drain cooling system.
2. Fill to cold full level (bottom of fill neck extension), measuring amount (graduated bucket).
3. Start engine and run near rated speed (no load) for several minutes.
4. Stop engine and add water as required (record amount) until system is to the cold full level.
NOTE:
This amount plus original quantity equals total system capacity.
8.15.4.5 Draining Capability
Perform the draining capability test as follows:

1. Cool down engine until the thermostat has fully closed.
TSM
2. Drain system from supplied draincocks.
3. Measure coolant removed to determine the amount still in the system. Difficulty on the
refill can occur if an excessive amount of coolant remains in the system.
4. Refill system per previous procedure and determine if a satisfactory fill can be obtained.
NOTICE:
Cooling systems that cannot be drained completely may also
experience freeze cracking of components. Additional drain(s)
and a caution notice should be provided by the OEM to ensure
complete draining of the cooling system.
8.15.4.6 Water Pump Binding Test
Determine if the water pump became air bound (pump discharge pressure goes to zero or does not
vary with speed change) after initial fill. If so, stop the engine immediately and determine the
cause. The deficiency should be corrected and test restarted.
8.15.4.7 Deaeration Test
The deaeration test should be run with a blocked open thermostat, no pressure cap, site glass in
the coolant out line, clear Tygon™ deaeration line, and coolant at the hot full level. Perform the
deaeration test as follows:
1. Restart the engine and run near rated speed.
2. Record time to expel all entrained air (larger than pin head size).
3. Satisfactory deaeration should occur within 30 minutes. If system does not appear to
deaerate, check for:

□ Coolant agitation in deaeration tank

□ High water pump inlet suction
□ Dirty cooling system or contaminated coolant
□ Exhaust gas leak into coolant
□ Water pump seal air leak
Determine the expansion and deaeration volume by adding 8% of the total system capacity on top
of the cold full level. If this amount of coolant cannot be added to the deaeration tank, cold full
level is set too high or the fill neck extension vent hole is not at the top of the tube. If more than
8% can be added, cold full level could be set higher so more reserve coolant volume is available.
8.15.4.8 Drawdown Test
The drawdown test should be run with a blocked open thermostat, no pressure cap unless coolant
recovery system is used, a site glass in the coolant out line, and coolant at the hot full level.
TSM
1. Record the following data while running at rated engine speed (no load speed if rated
cannot be held) and after coolant has been completely deaerated.
□ Engine speed
□ Coolant removed
□ Radiator water flow
□ Water pump discharge pressure
□ Water pump inlet pressure (suction)
□ Engine water out temperature
□ Observations for coolant aeration
2. All pressure gages and connecting hoses must be thoroughly bled of air prior to taking
data (engine stopped).
3. Take data with system full and thereafter in 1–quart increments. If system capacity is
above 100 quarts, 2–quart increments are acceptable. Remove water from high pressure
point, preferable water pump discharge.
4. After each incremental draining, check for signs of air in bleed and fill line (transparent)
as well as the radiator (in sight glass). If the bottom of the deaeration tank is not above the
rest of the cooling system, stop the engine at each increment and check for coolant level
equalization. Restart the engine and run again at rated speed. Look for system aeration.
The drawdown rating is determined at the first sign of air. There may not be a loss of flow
or pressure at this point. Continue removing water until a significant amount of aeration
occurs or loss of coolant flow (25%-50%) is recorded.
5. Run at maximum tilt angle for installations that operate at severe tilt angles for long
periods of time. The drawdown test has been successfully passed if the amount of coolant
drained is greater than 10% of system capacity or 4 qt. (3.8 L), whichever is greater.

TSM
Figure 8-36 Sample Static Cooling Test Sheet

8.15.4.9 Water Flow and Pressure Test
The coolant flow rate through the engine and/or radiator (heat exchanger) must be within 90% of
the values published on www.detroitdiesel.com to ensure proper cooling. Care must be taken so
coolant shunted away from the engine or radiator to supply cab heaters, air compressors, auxiliary
coolers, wet exhaust systems, etc., are not excessive.
Perform the water flow and pressure test with blocked open thermostats, no pressure cap, below
180°F engine water out. Conduct the test with the system at full level and deaerated.
1. Thoroughly bleed all pressure gages and connecting hoses of air (engine stopped) before
recording the following data.
□ Engine speed, radiator water flow, water pump discharge pressure, water pump inlet
pressure (suction), and engine water out temperature
□ Observations of bleed and fill lines and deaeration tank (flow, flow direction, aeration)
□ Others — depending on application and complexity of the cooling system
2. Start recording data and observations at idle and then in approximately 300-500 rpm
TSM
increments up to high no load speed. Be sure data is taken at rated full load speed.
3. Observe fill and bleed line for flow direction, and velocity. Note if deaeration tank coolant
is being agitated causing air to be drawn down fill line. Excessive agitation can be due to
bleed line(s) size or location, size and height of the standpipe(s), vent holes in "doghouse"
inlet(s), or top tank baffle design. The bleed line(s) should be located low in the deaeration
tank (just above baffle) if flow is backwards from the top tank to the engine
4. Check water flow and pump inlet pressure at rated engine speed and determine if they
meet the published requirements found on www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have
access to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor.
NOTE:
If non-factory-supplied engine water components are used, such as wet exhaust
manifolds, oil coolers, etc., additional flow measurements may be required to ensure
coolant flow through cylinder block and heads has not been seriously reduced. Consult
DDC Application Engineering for assistance.
8.15.4.10 Cooling Index Test
Perform the cooling index test with a blocked open thermostat and the pressure cap installed.
1. Determine the cooling index requirement (ATW) by subtracting the maximum ambient
temperature, other correction (recirculation & radiation), altitude compensation (corrected
to sea level — operating altitude x 1°C per 305 m [2°F per 1000 ft.]), and coolant
compensation (3°C [6°F] for 50/50 Ethylene Glycol, 4.4°C (8°F) for 50/50 Proplyene
Glycol, 0°C (0°F) for water), from the maximum allowed coolant out temperature.
2. Calculate the cooling index measurement by subtracting the true ambient temperature and
the altitude compensation, from the coolant out temperature.
3. Start the test with the cooling system at the deaeration cold full level.

4. Operate the engine at rated speed and full load. The cooling system must be set for
maximum cooling. All heat sources that will affect engine coolant or radiator air
temperatures must be in operation (fans must be in the full on position, shutters locked
full open, appropriate ram air supplied, cab heaters in off position, air conditioner set for
maximum cooling, etc.).
NOTE:
Other load points (peak torque, 80% converters efficiency, etc.) may be required
depending on the application. This should be determined prior to the test.
5. Various methods of loading the engine to determine cooling index include:

□ Driveline dynamometer
□ Towing dynamometer
□ Chassis dynamometer
□ Steep hill/heavy load
TSM
□ In operation load cycle
□ Stationary unit
NOTE:
Test results may be difficult to interpret if wind conditions exceed 10 miles per hour.
6. Calculate a corrected cooling index.

TSM
Figure 8-37 Sample Cooling Index Test Sheets

TSM
Figure 8-38 Cooling Index Calculation Sheet
The most effective way to increase cooling capability is by increasing air flow and preventing
hot air recirculation.

8.15.5 CHARGE AIR COOLING EVALUATION TEST
The air-to-air charge cooling system must be tested to verify that engine air intake temperatures
and pressure drop limits can be met as shown on www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have access
to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor. This evaluation can be done simultaneously
with the engine cooling index text.
A thorough evaluation will include:
□ Complete description and documentation of the system
□ Accurate tests
□ Diagnostics (trouble shooting)
□ Corrective action (if necessary)
TSM
These tests must be run on all new installations, vehicle re-powers, or whenever modifications
have been made to the engine, cooling or air-to-air systems as well as changes in load, duty
cycle or environmental operating conditions.

TSM
Figure 8-39 Sample CAC Cooling Index Test Sheets
8.15.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A complete system description must be documented in the Vehicle Sign-Off form. System
component prints, installation drawings, photographs, and sketches of the overall system should
be attached to the Vehicle Sign-Off.

This information will assist in determining system approval and also be a reference point if
future difficulties are encountered.
8.15.7 INSTRUMENTATION
This section describes the instruments and methods needed to measure the temperatures and
pressures of air inlet systems with and without air-to-air charge cooling.
8.15.7.1 Temperature Measurement
Use a precision thermocouple and an appropriate read-out device to measure temperatures.

Thermocouples should be located downstream of the pressure taps.
8.15.7.2 Pressure Measurement
Use a precision gage or a water manometer capable of reading 14 kPa (60 in. H2O) for P.
TSM
Use a piezometer ring to measure static pressure in straight pipe sections.
NOTE:
The piezometer ring should be placed within 12.7 cm (5 in.) of the desired measurement
location.
Figure 8-40 Piezometer Ring

Figure 8-41
TSM Static Pressure Tap
The instrumentation should be placed perpendicular to the plane of the bend where measurement
on a bend is unavoidable.

TSM
Figure 8-42 Pressure Tap on a Bend
8.15.8 LOCATION
Location of temperature and pressure measurements needed to evaluate the air inlet system with
air-to-air charge cooling is shown.
Figure 8-43 Typical Instrumentation Location

8.15.9 INLET SYSTEM RESTRICTION
The maximum permitted inlet restriction for a system with a clean air cleaner is 2.5 kPa (10
in. H2O).
The maximum permitted inlet restriction for a system with a dirty air cleaner is 5.5 kPa (22
in. H2O).
Restriction should be measured at maximum speed and load.
8.15.9.1 Maximum Temperature Rise — Ambient to Turbocharger Inlet
the turbocharger inlet (T1) needs to be determined.
The temperature differential for the DD Platform engine is 8°C (15°F).
8.15.9.2 Air-to-Air System Evaluation Tests
TSM
The air-to-air charge cooling system must be tested to verify that engine air intake temperatures
and pressure drop limits can be met as shown on www.detroitdiesel.com, if you do not have access
to www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor. This evaluation can be done simultaneously
with the engine cooling index test.
8.15.9.3 Maximum Temperature Rise — Ambient to Intake Manifold
the intake manifold needs to be determined. The maximum temperature differential is listed on
the Information Highway.
Temperature location is listed in the following table

T1 Air inlet temperature Within 5 in. (12 7 cm) of the turbocharger
Compressor discharge
T2 Within 5 in. (12 7 cm) of the compressor outlet
temperature
T3 Intake manifold temperature Within 5 in. (12 7 cm) of the inlet connection
Charge air cooler core air 5 points in front of the core, one in the center and
T4 - T8
inlet temperature one at each corner for determining recirculation
Table 8-6 Thermocouples
8.15.9.4 Charge Air Cooler System Restriction
The maximum pressure differential of the charge air cooler system restriction results from the
charge air cooler and all of the piping and connections between the turbocharger compressor
outlet and the intake manifold.
Pressure tap locations are listed in the following table.


Within 5 in. (12 7 cm) of the turbocharger, in a
P1 Air inlet restriction
straight section after the last bend
Within 5 in. (12 7 cm) of the turbocharger, in a
P2 Compressor discharge pressure
straight section before the first bend
Within 5 in. (12 7 cm) of the inlet connection in
P3 Intake manifold pressure a straight section after the last bend (or in the
manifold itself)
Table 8-7 Pressure Taps
Connect a precision gage between pressure taps P2 and P3 to determine pressure drop of the
system. Two precision gages may be used as desired.
The maximum pressure drop for DD Platform engines is 10 kPa (39 in. H2O).
8.15.10 TEST
Thorough preparations prior to testing will ensure accurate results.
TSM
□ Confirm all instrumentation and equipment is in good working condition and calibrated.
□ Tests must be run on a finalized package installed in unit or vehicle representative of the
production package to be released.
□ Shutters must be fully opened and fan drive mechanisms in the fully engaged position.
□ Confirm that the engine can develop proper load at rated speed using a Diagnostic Data
Reader (DDR) or Detroit Diesel Diagnostic Link®software.
□ Engine should be at normal operation temperature and run at full load.
All air-to-air charge cooling tests should be performed with engine operating at maximum rated
speed and wide open throttle (full fuel). Highway vehicles use either 15 or 30 m.p.h. ram air
during testing. Review www.detroitdiesel.com for proper ram air flow conditions for each
installation.
Sample data sheets for air inlet system and charge air cooling system tests are shown.
8.15.11 TEST ANALYSIS
At the completion of the test run, determine the cooling capability of the CAC and whether it
meets requirements.
8.16 COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS AND

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
System diagnostics and troubleshooting covers:
□ Engine overheat
□ Cold running engine

□ Poor cab heater performance
8.16.1 ENGINE OVERHEAT
Coolant temperatures should not exceed maximum limit of 114 °C (237 °F) so metal and oil
temperatures can be controlled for optimum engine performance, fuel economy, and life.
Obvious overheat conditions are determined from the coolant temperature gage, warning, or
shutdown devices. Steam vapor or coolant being expelled through the pressure relief overflow
tube is another indication of overheat. Reduced engine performance or engine oil having a burnt
odor are other indicators.
8.16.1.1 Troubleshooting for Engine Overheat
Troubleshoot for engine overheat as follows:

1. Check for inaccurate gage, warning, or shutdown device, insufficient coolant flow, and
inadequate heat transfer capabilities during coolant side investigation.
TSM HOT COOLANT

2. Check that the various temperature monitoring devices are calibrated.

[a] Sensor probes must be located (before thermostat) in a high temperature, well mixed
coolant flow path.
[b] The sensor must be free of scale and other contamination.
3. Check for insufficient coolant flow. The following may be causes of insufficient coolant
flow:
□ Thermostat — Stuck, sluggish, worn, broken
□ Thermostat seal — Worn, missing, improper installation
□ Water pump — Impeller loose or damaged, drive belt loose or missing, worn pulley
□ Aerated coolant — Low coolant level, excessive agitation of deaeration tank coolant,
water pump seal failure, exhaust gas leakage (cracked cylinder head or block,
damaged seals or gaskets, etc.), incorrect bleed line installation
□ Pressurization loss — Defective pressure cap/relief valve or seat, debris trapped
between seats, internal or external leaks anywhere in the system

□ High restriction — Radiator plugging (solder bloom), silicate dropout, dirt, debris, etc.
collapsed hose(s), foreign objects in the system (shop towels, plugs, etc.)
□ Core Coolant Flow Capacity — Core coolant flow capacity is often described as “free
flow." This term is used to indicate gravity flow rate through the core and should equal
or exceed the coolant flow rate given on the performance curve. The design of the
radiator inlet and outlet tanks must also offer low restriction to coolant flow.
□ Coolant loss — Internal and external
4. Check for inadequate heat transfer capabilities. The following are possible causes of
inadequate heat transfer capabilities:
□ Radiator selection — Core selection inadequate for application
□ Incorrect coolant mixture — Over/under concentration of antifreeze or inhibitors,
corrosive water, incorrect antifreeze or inhibitors
□ Contamination — Oil or other material depositing on heat transfer surfaces
5. Check for insufficient air flow. The following are possible causes of insufficient air flow:
TSM
□ High restriction — Plugged core, damaged or bent fins, shutters not opening correctly,
addition of bug screens, winter fronts, noise panels, small air in or air out openings,
etc.
□ Fan/Drives — Lose or worn belts and pulleys, improper drive engagement, fan
installed backwards or damaged, insufficient fan speed (drive ratio), etc.
□ Shroud — Damaged or missing, not completely sealed
□ Fan positioning — Excessive fan tip to shroud clearance, incorrect fan placement in
shroud, insufficient fan to core distance, insufficient fan to engine distance
6. Check for inadequate heat transfer capabilities. The following are possible causes of
inadequate heat transfer capabilities:
□ Incorrect fan/radiator match — Severest operating conditions not correctly identified.
□ Core degradation — Tube/fin separation, oil film, debris, contamination, etc.
□ Air recirculation — Radiator baffles damaged or missing, fan shroud and seal damaged
or missing, wind conditions, etc.
7. Also check the following:
□ Increased heat rejection or engine horsepower upgrade
□ Engine, installation, or cooling system modified
□ Increased engine loading, change in duty cycle
□ Running at more adverse conditions than original system design permits, higher
altitude or temperature

8.16.2 COLD RUNNING ENGINE (OVERCOOLING)
Extended low coolant temperature operation can adversely affect engine performance, fuel
economy, and engine life. Overcooling most frequently occurs at extreme low ambient
temperatures during long idling or low speed and light load operation.
Consider the following for cold running engines:
□ Inaccurate gage, out of calibration, lack of markings to determine actual temperature,
sensor probe in poor location or not fully submerged in a high coolant flow area.
□ Closed thermostat core coolant flow — Top tank baffle not completely sealed, standpipe too
short or missing, improper sizing of dearation line or standpipe(s) so flow to the top tank
exceeds fill line capacity, overfilled cooling system, reverse core flow, thermostat coolant
leakage. See test procedures for determining these deficiencies.
□ Defective thermostat — Stuck open, worn, misaligned, excessive leakage, improper
calibration, incorrect start to open setting.
□ Insufficient engine heat rejection — Excessive low speed and load or idle operation, idle
TSM
setting too low, over concentration of antifreeze and/or inhibitors, cab and fuel heaters,
charge air fan removing heat faster than engine can supply.
□ Fixed fans — Moves air through core when not required.
□ Shutters/Controls — Not fully closed, opening temperature too low.
8.16.3 POOR CAB HEATER PERFORMANCE
Poor cab heater performance results from cold running engines.

Inadequate heat in the operator's environment is symptomatic of poor cab heater performance.
Consider the following to solve poor cab heater performance:
□ Engine coolant temperature below normal.
□ Coolant-side causes
□ Air-side causes
□ Thermostat leakage test
□ Radiator top tank baffle leakage test
□ Top tank imbalance test
1. Check coolant-side cause, low flow, by investigating the following:
□ Supply and return lines not connected to proper locations on the engine
□ Heater system too restrictive — core, plumbing size, bends, shutoff valves, length of
circuitry, etc.
□ Parallel circuitry with multiple cores
□ Boost pump required, defective, not turned on

□ Air in heater circuit and coolant

□ Solder bloom, silicate dropout, dirt, debris, etc.
□ Shutoff valves not fully opened
□ Fuel heater in circuit
2. Check coolant-side cause, reduced heat transfer capabilities, by investigating the
following:
□ Improper concentration or grade of antifreeze and inhibitors
□ Undersized heater core(s)
□ Heater plumbing not insulated
□ Low efficiency cores
□ Contamination of core tube surfaces, deposits, etc.
□ Fuel heaters plumbed in cab heater circuit
3. Check the following air-side causes:
TSM
□ Low efficiency cores
□ Improper air flow
□ Excess outside air through core
□ Core fins separated from tubes
□ Core surface contamination, dirt, debris, oil film, etc.
□ Leaking air ducts
□ Malfunctioning air flow control valves
□ Undersized heater cores
□ Poor distribution system
Cab interior should be completely sealed to eliminate direct cold air source, in order to conserve
available heat energy. Heat loss to outside can be minimized by using thermo windows, reducing
exposed metal surfaces, increasing insulation usage, etc.
8.16.3.1 Thermostat Leakage Test
The following procedure should be used to determine thermostat leakage:

NOTICE:
No coolant should leak past the thermostat when the thermostat
is closed. Overcooling may occur, resulting in poor engine
performance, poor cab heater performance, or both.
Figure 8-44
TSM Thermostat Leakage Areas
1. Remove radiator inlet hose at the radiator to collect coolant in a container.

TSM
Figure 8-45 Thermostat Leakage Check
2. Fill system with coolant. If thermostat leakage occurs at this point go to step 4.
3. Start engine and accelerate to high idle and hold for approximately one minute. If leakage
is more than a trickle, continue to step 5.
4. Remove thermostat and visually inspect thermostat for obvious discrepancies. Go to step 6.
5. Calibrate thermostat to ensure it is not opening prematurely.
6. Replace defective parts.
No coolant should leak past the thermostat when the thermostat is closed. Overcooling may occur,
resulting in poor engine performance, poor cab heater performance, or both.
8.16.3.2 CAC Air Leakage Test
The following procedure should be followed to determine if air leakage from a CAC is excessive:
1. Disconnect the charge air cooler.
2. Plug the inlet and outlet.
3. Measure pressure loss using an adaptor plug on the inlet.

8.17 MAINTENANCE
The design of the installation must take into account the engine's need for periodic maintenance
and allow access to these service points.
A schedule of periodic maintenance will provide for long term efficiency of the cooling system
and extended engine life. Daily visual inspections should be made of the coolant level and the
overall condition of the system components. This should include looking for obvious leaks and
abnormal distress of the following components:
□ Radiator Core and CAC — Contaminated with oil, dirt and debris; fins/tubes damaged
□ Fill Cap/Neck — Dirty or damaged seats; gasket/seal deteriorated
□ Fan — Blades bent, damaged or missing
□ Belts/Pulleys — Loose belts; frayed; worn; missing
□ Fan Shroud — Loose; broken; missing
□ Hoses/Plumbing — Frayed; damaged; ballooning; collapsing; leaking
TSM
□ Coolant — Contaminated, concentration
□ Recirculation Baffles — Missing; not sealing
If any of the above conditions are observed, corrective action should be taken immediately.
Any time a coolant gage, warning, shutdown, or low level device is malfunctioning, it should
be fixed immediately.
A proper glycol (ethylene, propylene, or extended life organic acid), water, Supplemental Coolant
Additive (SCA) mixture meeting DDC requirements is required for year-round usage.
The coolant provides freeze and boil protection and reduces corrosion, sludge formation, and
cavitation erosion. Antifreeze concentration should not exceed 67% for ethylene glycol (50% for
propylene glycol). Detroit Diesel requires SCAs be added to all cooling systems at initial fill and
be maintained at the proper concentration. Follow SCA manufacturers' recommendations.

TSM

9 FUEL SYSTEM
Section Page
9.1 FUEL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................................. 9- 2

9.2 FUEL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT/INSTALLATION GUIDELINES ................ 9- 5
9.3 FUEL SELECTION .................................................................................. 9- 9
TSM

FUEL SYSTEM
9.1 FUEL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The purpose of the fuel system is to ensure that the fuel required for combustion is available under
all operating conditions in sufficient quantity, in the correct sequence, and at the required pressure.
The fuel circuit ensures that the fuel is cleaned before supplying fuel to the fuel injectors.
A fuel system consists of:
□ Fuel Tank
□ Fuel Filter Module with Fuel Prefilter, Water Separator, and Main Filter
□ Water-in-Fuel Sensor
□ Low Pressure Fuel Pump
□ High Pressure Fuel Pump
□ Quantity Control Valve
□ Fuel Rail
TSM
□ Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
□ Pressure Limiting Valve (PLV)
□ Fuel Injectors
□ Fuel Cooler
□ Fuel Doser Valve
□ Hydrocarbon (HC) Doser
□ Fuel Lines
□ Motor Control Module (MCM)
The DD Platform engines employ common rail fuel injection technology. This system works with
a low pressure circuit and an Amplified Pressure Common Rail System (APCRS). The low
pressure circuit delivers fuel to the APCRS. The APCRS delivers fuel to the individual cylinders
through a common rail common to all six fuel injectors.
When the engine is started, the gear driven low pressure fuel pump pulls fuel from the fuel tank
and delivers it to the fuel low pressure circuit. Fuel from the fuel tank is sent through the fuel
filter module. The fuel flows from the fuel filter module to the fuel heat exchanger located on
the Motor Control Module (MCM). The electronic components of the MCM are cooled via the
fuel heat exchanger. The fuel in the fuel filter module first passes into the fuel prefilter where
large particles greater than 100 microns are filtered out. The fuel which has been cleaned by the
fuel prefilter passes out of the fuel filter module to the low pressure fuel pump. From there the
fuel is delivered back into the fuel filter module and to the water separator. The water inside the
fuel is separated out by the water separator and begins to fall into the water accumulator. If the
water level in the water accumulator reaches its maximum level, this will be detected by the
Water-in-Fuel sensor. The MCM transmits an appropriate message for illuminating the indicator
lamp. After leaving the water separator, the fuel flows through the final filter. Both the water
separator and final filter elements filter out fine-grained contaminants greater than 2 microns.

Once all of the contaminants have been filtered out by the final filter, the fuel is delivered out of
the fuel filter module to the quantity control valve of the ACPRS. The quantity control valve is
used to regulate the fuel feed to the high pressure fuel pump and to regulate the fuel rail pressure.
The high pressure fuel pump receives the fuel and pressurizes the fuel up to 900bar. The fuel is
then fed to the fuel rail. Excess fuel from the quantity control valve and high pressure fuel pump
is routed past a 2–stage valve internal to the fuel pump which then routes excess fuel to the fuel
accumulator internal to the fuel filter module. The internal fuel accumulator gathers fuel from all
return lines and passes it through a bypass valve to either the fuel prefilter or back to the fuel tank.
The fuel that is sent to the fuel rail is regulated by the Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor. If the maximum
rail pressure is exceeded (leakage at 1075 bar, open at 1380 bar), the Pressure Limiting Valve
(PLV) opens and passes the excess fuel through the fuel return lines to the fuel accumulator. If the
system level drops below 3 bar due to the opened PLV, part of the excess fuel is routed to the
high pressure fuel pump for lubrication of the pump. From the fuel rail, fuel is then routed to
each individual fuel injector where the fuel is injected under high pressure into the cylinders. The
excess and warmed fuel from the amplified circuits of each individual injector is routed through a
passage within the cylinder head where it eventually makes its way through the fuel cooler, which
serves to lower the temperature of the fuel to below 100C. From there, the fuel travels into the fuel
TSM
filter module where the cooled fuel is mixed with the colder fuel from the low pressure fuel pump.
The Detroit Diesel Electronic Control (DDEC) System controls fuel injection timing and output
by the common rail injectors on the engine. The system also monitors several engine functions
using electrical sensors which send electrical signals to the MCM. The MCM then computes
the incoming data and determines the correct fuel output and timing for optimum power, fuel
economy and emissions.

FUEL SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 9-1 Figure 1-2 Schematic Diagram of the DD Platform Fuel System

9.2 FUEL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT/INSTALLATION

GUIDELINES
The following installation guidelines cover:
□ Fuel Tank
□ Fuel Filters
□ Fuel Lines
9.2.1 FUEL TANK
Fuel tanks must be made of the correct material, be properly designed and located, and be
adequately sized regardless of the fuel tank configuration being used.
9.2.1.1 Material
TSM
Satisfactory fuel tank material is steel, aluminum, or a suitably reinforced plastic. The inside(s)
should be clean and free from all impurities likely to contaminate the fuel.
NOTICE:
Do not use a fuel storage tank or lines or fittings made from
galvanized steel. The fuel will react chemically with the galvanized
coating to form powdery flakes that will quickly clog fuel filters and
cause damage to the fuel pump and injectors
The fuel tank(s) must not be galvanized internally under any circumstances.
The fuel tank(s) or piping may be galvanized or painted on the outside only to prevent rusting.
Zinc in a galvanized coating reacts with sulphur in the fuel to form a white zinc sulfate which
will clog filters as well as damage the fuel pump and injectors.
9.2.1.2 Design
Baffles must be positioned to separate air from fuel and to prevent fuel from sloshing between the
ends of the tank(s). The baffles should extend from the top to the bottom of the tank(s). These
baffles should have passageways which allow the fuel to maintain an even level throughout
the tank(s).
The tank(s) should have a readily accessible drain valve at the bottom for easy removal of
contaminants. There should also be an access hole in the tank to permit cleaning when the tank
has been emptied.
The fill neck(s) should be in a clean, accessible location with sufficient height and room for
an average size fill can or tanker truck hose.
The tanks must have a vent which should be installed at the highest point of the tank. The vent
should be protected so water and dirt cannot enter the system.

FUEL SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 9-2 Properly Designed Fuel Tank
9.2.1.3 Capacity
Carefully choose the capacity of the fuel tank(s) to suit the specific engine installation. The
design of tanks in mobile applications must include the supply pipe so that adequate fuel is
available under all operational gradients. The tank(s) capacity must be at least 5% greater than the
maximum fill level to allow for fuel expansion.
Fuel capacity of the tank(s) should be appropriate for the specific application involved.
9.2.1.4 Position
The position of the fuel tank(s) is an important factor in any application.

The position of the fuel tank(s) should ensure the following whenever possible.
□ The difference in height between the fuel tank(s) and engine supply pump shall be kept
to a minimum.
□ The length of the fuel feed pipe shall be kept to a minimum.
□ Location of the fuel tank(s) shall be away from any excessive heat source.
□ The filling point shall be easy to access and simple to use.
The fuel supply pump should not be more than 5 feet above the lowest fuel level possible in the
fuel tank(s). If it becomes necessary to locate the fuel tank at a position, with respect to the engine
regardless of the size of the fuel lines, to where the maximum fuel restriction of 2.9 PSI (200
mbar) is exceeded, then a high lift fuel pump (not supplied by DDC) may be required.

The fuel tank(s) should not be located higher than the fuel pump. However, when this can not be
avoided, the fuel return line should not extend into the fuel supply to prevent possible siphoning
in the event a leak occurs in the line. The fuel return line must incorporate a check valve. The
fuel inlet must incorporate a shutoff valve of the needle or globe type construction and must
not impose any undue restriction to fuel flow.
Install a shutoff valve for use when changing the fuel pre-filter and the water separator if the fuel
tank(s) is above the fuel filter module. This will prevent the tank(s) from draining.
A check valve in the fuel spill prevents supply side fuel from draining back into the tank(s)
in a tank-below-engine installation.
In applications where multiple tanks are used, a crossover line with valves located near the tanks
low points is recommended to allow equal use of fuel from the tanks. The valves can also be used
to isolate an individual tank in the event that a problem arises with any one tank.
9.2.2 FUEL FILTERS/FUEL FILTER MODULE
A fuel pre-filter, water separator, and a final fuel filter are all required for the DD Platform
TSM
engines. These filters are contained within the fuel filter module located between the fuel tank and
the engine low pressure fuel pump. These filters are needed to provide additional water and debris
filtering capacity and to prevent damage to the fuel system. The fuel pre-filter is a 100 micron
rated filter and is an inside out flow filter. The water separator is a 10 micron filter and is an inside
out flow filter. The final fuel filter element is a 3–5 micron rated filter and is an outside in flow
filter. The use of a separate remote mount primary fuel filter, which would typically be installed
between the fuel tank and the engine fuel filter module, are not permitted for use with the DD
Platform engines. However, please contact Detroit Diesel Application Engineering for current
requirements in the event remote mount primary fuel filters become permissible.
9.2.3 FUEL FILTER CONFIGURATION
Fuel filter requirements for the DD Platform engine may be found in DDC publication Lubricating
Oil, Fuel, and Filters, (DDC–SVC–BRO–0001), available on the DDC Extranet.
Care should be taken not to exceed the maximum fuel pump suction limits (2.9 PSI) when
substituting the fuel pre-filter and the water separator elements.
Remote mounting of the fuel filter module filters is not acceptable for the DD Platform engines.
9.2.4 FUEL LINES
The following guidelines apply to supply and return fuel lines between the fuel filter module
and the tank(s) only.
These guidelines apply regardless of which fuel tank configuration is being used.
Do not modify or tamper with any fuel lines supplied with the engine.

FUEL SYSTEM
9.2.4.1 Design
All lines should be in protected areas. These areas should be free from possible damage and
securely clipped in position to prevent chaffing from vibration. Take the necessary precautions to
ensure that the inlet line connections are tight so air cannot enter the fuel system.
The careful selection of line routing cannot be overemphasized. Avoid excessively long runs.
Minimize the number of connections, sharp bends, or other features that could lead to air trapping,
excessive resistance to flow, or waxing of fuel in cold conditions.
The supply and return lines must extend to the low level of useful tank volume. Extending the
return line to this level prevents siphoning of fuel on the supply side back to the tank.
The fuel supply line must be above the bottom of the tank to ensure that dirt and sediments are not
drawn into the fuel system. Allow 5% clearance volume above the bottom of the tank.
The supply and return lines must be well supported within the tank. Cracks on the supply side can
cause the entrance of air and a subsequent loss of power. The supply and return lines must be
separated by at least 0.3 m (12 in.) inside the tank to prevent the possibility of air or hot fuel from
TSM
the return line being discharged directly into the suction line.
The supply line should be at the center of the tank to compensate for angular operation.
Connections of fuel lines to the engine should be made through flexible hoses which accommodate
the movement of the engine and the chassis. Solid tubing cannot be directly connected to the
engine supply or return connections. A minimum of 1 m (3 ft.) of flexible hose should be used
between the engine and chassis fuel lines.
9.2.4.2 Material
DDC does not approve the use of copper tubing because copper becomes brittle due to cold
working when subjected to vibration.
Flexible hosing must be resistant to fuel oil, lubricating oils, mildew, and abrasion, and must be
reinforced.
The lines must withstand a maximum suction of 67.54 kPa (20 in. Hg) without collapsing, a
pressure of 690 kPa (100 psi) without bursting, and temperatures between -40°C (-40°F) and
149°C (300°F).
9.2.4.3 Size
The fuel supply lines should be AN Dash size 10 (5/8” I.D.) or larger. The return lines must be
AN Dash size 8 (1/2” I.D.) or larger. Fuel line size on an engine will depend on the engine flow
rate, length of line, number of bends, and the number and type of fittings. Larger fuel line sizes
may be required when the fuel tanks are located farther than 10 ft. (3 m) from the engine or
when there are numerous bends in the system.
The determinant of fuel line size is the restriction measured at the inlet of the fuel pump. The
maximum allowable inlet restriction is 2.9 PSI (200 mbar) for all applications.

9.3 FUEL SELECTION

The quality of fuel used is a very important factor in obtaining satisfactory engine performance,
long engine life, and acceptable exhaust emission levels. The use of Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel
(ULSD) fuel, sulfur content less than 15 ppm, is required on all DD Platform engines.
For information on fuel selection, refer to DDC publication Lubricating Oil, Fuel, and
Filters(DDC–SVC–BRO–0001).
FIRE
To avoid injury from fire, contain and eliminate leaks of
flammable fluids as they occur. Failure to eliminate leaks
could result in fire.
TSM

FUEL SYSTEM
TSM

Section Page
10.1 LUBRICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................... 10- 2

10.2 LUBRICATION OIL SELECTION ............................................................ 10- 4
10.3 LUBRICATION FILTER ........................................................................... 10- 4
TSM
10.4 ENGINE COMPONENT OIL SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS ...................... 10- 4
10.5 COMPONENT OPTIONS & INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............ 10- 5
10.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ........................................................ 10- 7

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
10.1 LUBRICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The DD Platform engine features a full-flow filtered, pressurized lubricating oil system. The
system incorporates various valves and restriction orifices to optimize the oil flow. The DD
Platform engine comes standard with a thermatic oil cooler, which improves fuel economy in low
oil temperature situations by providing an oil cooler bypass route. A backflow valve retains oil
upstream of the oil pump upon engine shutdown to speed up engine lubrication during start-up. A
crankcase breather is utilized to vent gases from the crankcase. External piping and plumbing is
kept to a minimum to avoid oil leakage. Oil temperature and pressure are monitored by the Motor
Control Module (MCM) for engine protection and diagnostics.
The lubricating system consists of the following components:
□ Oil pump
□ Pressure regulator valve
□ Pressure relief valve
□ Backflow valve
TSM
□ Oil filter
□ Oil cooler
□ Oil fill tube
□ Oil level dipstick
□ Oil pan & suction tube
□ Crankcase ventilation breather
□ Oil spray nozzles for each piston
□ Oil pressure sensor
□ Oil temperature sensor

1. Engine Brake
2. Turbocharger
3. Axial Power Turbine
TSM 10. Oil Cooler and Housing
11. Oil Filter
12. Oil Refill
4. Crankcase Breather 13. Intake Rocker Arm Spindle Supply

5. Oil Pump 14. Engine Brake Supply
6. Pressure Valve 15. Exhaust Rocker Arm Spindle Supply
7. Backflow Valve 16. Gear Train Oil Supply
8. Suction Pipe 17. Main Bearing Supply
9. Oil Spray Nozzle
Figure 10-1 DD Platform Lubrication System
An internal tooth gear pump is mounted at the rear of the engine block internal to the oil sump
and direct driven by the crankshaft at 1.33 times engine speed. The location of the oil sump
suction tube varies with oil pan choice.

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil leaving the pump is routed through the backflow valve to the oil cooler and into the oil filter,
then into the main oil gallery in the cylinder block. From there, oil is distributed to the crankshaft,
rods and pistons. Oil spray nozzles exist in the block, which provide a continuous spray of oil
to the underside of the pistons. From the main gallery, oil is routed to the crankcase breather,
turbocharger, through each rocker arm shaft, and into the valve train components, rocker arms,
and engine brakes. Drains from the head, turbocharger, and crankcase breather return oil to the
pan. Oil for gear train components at the rear of the engine is fed through drilled holes out of the
main gallery lubricating the gear spindles for each gear drive individually.
There are a variety of options for location of gage and fill, as well as a variety of oil sump
configurations for the DD Platform engine.
10.2 LUBRICATION OIL SELECTION

The DD Platform engine is designed to work with a low ash oil, called API CJ–4. This oil is
uniquely formulated to optimize cleaning intervals of the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF). For
more information on lubricating oil selection, refer to DDC publication Lubricating Oil, Fuel,
and Filters, (DDC-SVC-BRO-0001).
TSM
10.3 LUBRICATION FILTER
The DD Platform engine consists of one full-flow cartridge filter mounted directly to the
oil/coolant module on the left side of the engine. It is not permitted to remote-mount the engine
supplied oil filter.
The micron rating of the oil filters used on the DD Platform engine is given in DDC
publication Lubricating Oil, Fuel, and Filters, (DDC-SVC-BRO-0001), available on the
www.detroitdiesel.com.
Detroit Diesel does not recommend the use of fiberglass-media oil filters such as AC® PF-911L
or equivalent, on the DD Platform engine.
10.3.1 SUPPLEMENTAL FILTRATION SYSTEMS
Bypass oil filters and other after-market supplemental filtration systems are not permitted for
use with the DD Platform engine.
10.4 ENGINE COMPONENT OIL SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

There are also components mounted externally on the engine which are lubricated by the engine
lubrication system. These are the turbocharger, air compressor, crankcase breather, and customer
supplied components such as alternators, fan clutch, etc.

10.4.1 TURBOCHARGER LUBRICATION
An oil supply line from the upper right hand side of the engine block supplies oil to the
turbocharger bearing housing. The oil passes through the bearing housing and exits at the bottom,
where an oil drain tube returns the oil to the lower crankcase of the engine block.
10.4.2 AIR COMPRESSOR LUBRICATION
The air compressor receives its oil supply directly from the crankcase through the flange mounted
side of the air compressor. The oil lubricates the compressor crankshaft and rod bearings,
compressor cylinder walls, and then returns the oil to the sump through the crankcase. A separate
oil feed is supplied to the gear spindle.
10.4.3 CRANKCASE BREATHER LUBRICATION
Oil directly from the lower crankcase of the engine block enters into the turbine wheel of the
crankcase breather. Crankcase gases enter the crankcase breather through the top of the unit and
TSM
pass through a rotating disc stack driven by the oil lubricated turbine wheel. The rotational
speed of the discs separate the oil particles from the crankcase gases. The gases are vented to
the atmosphere. The resulting oil particles as well as the oil used to drive the turbine wheel
are returned to the oil pan.
10.5 COMPONENT OPTIONS &

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The following component options are available with the following installation requirements
being met.
10.5.1 OIL SAMPLING VALVE
On-Highway customers that perform regular oil sampling tests may request a permanent oil
sampling valve for more convenient service. Detroit Diesel has a provision for an oil sampling
valve to be installed on the DD Platform engine at the oil/coolant module connection. This option
may be specified with the engine and is part of the oil/coolant module group.
10.5.2 OIL CHECKS AND FILLS
Detroit Diesel has a variety of pre-calibrated dipstick and tube assemblies for all oil sump
configurations for DD applications. These parts may be specified with the engine or purchased
separately from the Parts Distribution Center. When the same engine configuration is used in
more than one installation, where the installation angles may vary, it is critical that the proper oil
gage is used for each variant.

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Detroit Diesel provides two oil fill options. The standard oil fill location is on the oil/coolant
module. The optional location is on the oil sump. If appropriate check and fill options are not
shown for your particular installation, please contact Detroit Diesel Application Engineering
for new and/or alternative designs.
10.5.3 OIL SUMPS
Various oil sump configurations are available and may be seen on the www.detroitdiesel.com. If
you do not have access to the www.detroitdiesel.com contact your Distributor. For application
guidelines on the use of the various sumps, please contact Detroit Diesel Application Engineering.
10.5.4 ENVIRONMENTALLY SAFE OIL CHANGE (ESOC) FITTINGS
ESOC drain and fill fittings may be specified as part of the engine assembly. These options may
only be used on sumps which include M27 x 2 bulkhead fittings.
When the drain and fill ESOC option is used, a fitting assembly is installed in the front-facing
TSM
side of the oil/coolant module. This fitting assembly extends the oil fill connection downward
towards the oil pan rail. A quick-disconnect fitting and dust cover are provided for the customer
attachment.
The drain fitting used with the ESOC drain and fill option replaces the standard drain plug.
Alternative locations are not recommended, as the fastening of external fittings to the drain
assembly may rotate the tube away from the bottom of the pan.
10.5.5 OIL IMMERSION HEATERS
Oil immersion heaters may be installed in any DD Platform engine oil sump. These heaters should
be installed in a sump port that is constantly submerged in oil. Preferably, the lowest opening in
the side of the pan. Care must be taken in the selection of heaters to ensure they do not interfere
with other components installed in the pan, such as ESOC fittings and the sump pickup. When an
ESOC connection is installed opposite to an oil immersion heater, the element of the heater should
be limited to 140 mm (5.5 in.) in length. Straight heater elements do not present any interference
problems with sump pickups. To ensure maximum performance and avoid interference problems,
heater elements that bend or curl away from the axis of the installation hole are not recommended.
Oil immersion heaters perform best when energized immediately after engine shutdown, while
the oil is still warm. This practice will minimize the possibility of coking the oil on the heater
element. Elements are most susceptible to oil coking when used on a cold engine. The power
density of the heater element should be kept below 4 Watts per square centimeter, to prevent oil
coking in extreme cold conditions.
10.5.6 OIL LEVEL SENSORS
There will be no oil level sensors available for the DD Platform engine.

10.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

The following must be considered for proper operation and maintenance.
10.6.1 FIRST TIME START
DD Platform engines are shipped from the factory with a full oil filter and a minimal amount of
oil in the sump. The engine needs to be filled with oil to its high limit previous to a first time
start. The oil level should be verified after the entire engine installation is complete, to avoid false
readings from incorrect angularity during the initial fill.
10.6.2 OIL LEVEL MEASUREMENTS
Oil level should always be checked with the vehicle or apparatus on level ground, and any
ride-height altering controls set to their rest positions. A minimum wait of ten minutes after engine
shutdown is required to achieve an accurate oil level measurement. A twenty minute wait after
shutdown is recommended to allow the oil to fully drain back to the pan from the overhead space.
TSM
10.6.3 USED OIL ANALYSIS
Refer to the Technician's Guide Used Lubricating Oil Analysis, DDC-SVC-MAN-0047, for a
detailed procedural description and interpretation of analysis results.
10.6.4 OIL DRAIN INTERVALS
For information on oil drain intervals, refer to DDC publication Lubricating Oil, Fuel, and
Filters, (DDC-SVC-BRO-0001), on the www.detroitdiesel.com.

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
TSM

11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Section Page
11.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................. 11- 2

11.2 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES ................................................................ 11- 3
TSM

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

This section describes the function, design, and application of the electrical system for the Detroit
Diesel DD Platform engines.
The purpose of the electrical system is to provide the energy required to start the engine. The
electrical system consists of the following components:
□ Battery charging alternator (Alternator)
□ Voltage regulator (generally integral to the alternator)
□ Storage battery(s)
□ Cranking motor (Starter)
□ Ignition switch
TSM
Figure 11-1 Engine Electrical System

The battery stores electrical energy. The cranking motor converts electrical energy from the
battery into mechanical energy, then transfers the mechanical energy to the engine as a rotational
force. The alternator converts rotational energy from the engine to electrical energy. This
electrical output of the alternator is transferred to the battery where it is stored for later use. The
wiring links the battery to the starter and the alternator to the battery.
The electrical system is activated by means of a master (key) switch. This switch may include a
start position, or a separate start switch may be used. Because the starter solenoid has very high
rush current when energized, a magnetic switch is used to carry this current, thereby isolating
the master (key) switch to avoid damage to its switch contacts.
11.2 INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

The engine electrical system with properly matched parts provides a balanced system which
should meet all operating requirements.
11.2.1 BATTERY
TSM
The battery is a device for storing electrical energy and converting chemical energy into electrical
energy. Five basic types of batteries are currently available:
□ Filler cap batteries
□ Semi-maintenance free batteries
□ Maintenance-free batteries
□ Deep cycle batteries
□ Gel-cell and nickel cadmium batteries
11.2.1.1 Filler Cap Batteries
Filler cap batteries are lead-acid with a high degree of antimony in the grid alloy. These batteries
require frequent servicing especially adding water and cleaning salts and corrosive deposits
from the terminal posts.
11.2.1.2 Semi-Maintenance Free Batteries
Servicing is reduced with semi-maintenance free batteries due to reduced amount of antimony
in the grid alloy. Water must still be added periodically. Salt and corrosive deposits must be
cleaned from the terminal posts.
11.2.1.3 Maintenance-Free Batteries
Maintenance-free batteries use lead-calcium grid construction without antimony. These batteries
never need water. Terminal posts do not tend to accumulate salt and corrosive deposits since there
are no filler caps to leak acid fumes, so cable inspection and cleaning are infrequent.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11.2.1.4 Deep Cycle Batteries
Deep cycle batteries are used for applications like electric drive carts and are not recommended
for engine starting.
11.2.1.5 Gel-Cell And Nickel Cadmium Batteries
Gel-cell and nickel cadmium batteries require charging rates that differ from those used for
lead-acid batteries. The charging rate of DDC supplied alternators is not compatible with gel-cell
and nickel cadmium batteries. If gel-cell batteries are to be used, consult the battery and alternator
suppliers.
11.2.1.6 Battery Capacity
The minimum battery capacity recommended for acceptable engine cranking is listed in the
following table.
TSM
Minimum Battery Ratings
SAE Cold Cranking Amps @
Engine Model System Voltage
-17.8°C (0°F)
Above 0°C (32°F)
DD Platform 12V 1875
Table 11-1 Minimum Battery Capacity for Acceptable Engine Cranking
11.2.1.7 Battery Mounting and Location
Battery mounting boxes, or carriers, support the batteries and protect them from excess vibration,
road splash, saltwater, and other environmental conditions. The battery carrier may be heated or
cooled to keep the battery at optimum operating temperature, 27°C (80°F).
The recommended battery carrier designs are:
□ Top crossbar
□ Top mid-frame
□ Top picture frame
□ Angled J-bolt

Figure 11-2
TSM Battery Retainers
The battery should be located away from any flame or spark source, road splash, and dirt but as
close as possible to the starting motor. The battery should be located in a place with minimum
vibration and easy access for visual inspection and maintenance.
Batteries mounted between frame rails, either inside or above the rails, experience minimum
vibration. Batteries mounted outside, but close and parallel to frame rails, experience greater
vibration. Both of these locations are recommended for all applications. Cantilever battery
mountings are not recommended.
11.2.2 CRANKING MOTOR
The cranking motor is bolted to the flywheel housing.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
NOTICE:
To prevent excessive overrun and damage to the drive and
armature windings, the switch should be opened immediately
when the engine starts. A cranking period should not exceed 30
seconds without stopping to allow the motor to cool for at least
two minutes.
TSM
Figure 11-3 Cranking Motor Mounting
When the engine start circuit is closed, a drive pinion on the armature shaft engages with the teeth
on the engine flywheel ring gear to crank the engine. When the engine starts, it is necessary to
disengage the drive pinion to prevent the armature from overspeeding and damaging the cranking
motor. To accomplish this, the cranking motor is equipped with an overrunning clutch within the
drive pinion. The cranking motor drive pinion and the engine flywheel ring gear must be matched
to provide positive engagement and to avoid clashing of the gear teeth.
The 39 MT or 42 MT cranking motor typically used on the DD Platform engine has a nose
housing that can be rotated to obtain a number of different solenoid positions with respect to
the mounting flange.

Figure 11-4
TSM Acceptable Cranking Index with DD Platform
The cranking motor should be installed so that the solenoid is above horizontal.
Mounting the cranking motor with the solenoid above horizontal allows any accumulated moisture
to drain out of the shift housing through the open nose housing. Moisture and condensation may
remain trapped and accumulate in the area of the solenoid and shift linkage and damage the
solenoid if the solenoid is below horizontal.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 11-5 Cranking Motor Indexing
The starter motor armature is supported by three centered bronze bearings located, one each, in
the nose and intermediate housings, with one in the commutator end cap.

TSM
1. O-ring 10. Shift Mechanism (Totally Enclosed)
2. End Cap (Removal for Inspection) 11. Two-piece Housing
3. Bronze Bearing 12. O-ring

4. Connector Strap 13. Bronze Bearing
5. Gasket 14. Heavy-duty Drive Overrunning Clutch
6. Low Friction Bushing 15. Bronze Bearing
7. Seamless, One-piece Solenoid Case 16. O-ring

8. O-ring 17. Shaft Seal
9. Sealing Boot 18. One-piece Brush
Figure 11-6 Typical Cranking Motor Cross-section
Excessive engine cranking may cause the starter to overheat and may reduce its life.
Cranking time should not exceed 30 seconds, with a two minute cool down interval between
cranking periods.
11.2.3 ALTERNATORS
The battery-charging alternator provides a source of electrical current for maintaining the storage
battery in a charged condition. The alternator also supplies sufficient current to carry any other
electrical load requirements up to the rated capacity of the alternator.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11.2.3.1 Alternator Mounting
The typical mounting assembly includes a mounting bracket that matches the alternator mounting
lugs, an adjusting strap, and associated hardware.
The following guidelines are provided for correct alternator mounting:
NOTICE:
Do not mount the alternator near the exhaust manifold. Mounting
near the exhaust manifold could overheat the alternator and the
regulator.
□ A mounting location close to the engine block minimizes mounting bracket overhang.
□ A mounting location not subject to resonant vibration is best.
□ The alternator mounting assembly should support the alternator rigidly so that the alternator
pulley grooves are in the same plane as the driving pulley grooves on the engine. Provision
TSM
must be made for belt tension adjustment.
□ Drive and driven pulleys must be in parallel and angular alignment to prevent short belt
life or loss of belt.
□ Anchor the adjusting strap and mounting brackets to a rigidly fixed heavy section. Motion
between the mounting bracket and adjusting strap can create an unacceptable vibration.
Incorrect mounting can result in:
□ Improper alignment of pulleys
□ Excessive vibration of mounting assembly components
Improper alignment of pulleys causes excessive belt or pulley wear. Society of Automotive
Engineers' (SAE) recommended practice should be followed with respect to pulley alignment
and tolerances. The pulley groove must be concentric with the bore and the pulley should be
adequately balanced. Fabricated sheet metal pulleys are not recommended for applications with
heavy belt loads. Belt resonance will result in short belt life. Contact the belt manufacturer if
belt resonance is a problem.
Excessive vibration of mounting assembly components can cause failure of the mounting bracket,
the adjusting strap, the alternator mounting lugs, or other alternator components. An effective
bracket must stay firmly attached to the engine.
Under special circumstances, an OEM or distributor may require the mounting location of an
alternator not supplied by DDC. Prior to the manufacturing of the mounting components, the
OEM or distributor must supply details of the design for review. Also a vibration test will be
required. Contact Application Engineering for details.

11.2.4 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
The preferred method of ground return is to use a copper cable from the ground side of the
cranking motor or alternator back to the battery. The cable size should be the same as the supply
cable coming from the battery. When calculating the correct cable size, the distance from the
battery to the cranking motor or alternator as well as the ground return distance must be used
to determine the total cable resistance or system voltage drop.
11.2.5 WIRING
Cables and wiring are an important part of the electrical system which is often overlooked or
neglected.
The cables are the highway on which the electrical energy travels.
Just one faulty or dirty connection can reduce electrical energy transfer just as surely as traffic
on a modern four lane highway that is narrowed down to one lane. As long as traffic is light
there is no problem but during rush hour it is quite different. Cranking the engine on a cold
TSM
morning with a faulty or dirty connection which restricts the flow is the same as rush hour on a
suddenly reduced highway.
11.2.5.1 Guidelines for Electrical Wiring
Guidelines for electrical wiring start with determining the vehicle or chassis type, system voltage,
starting motor type, batteries used, and location. That information is then used to determine
proper routing, cable length and size, insulation, terminals, routing clamps, loom or conduit
requirements and connections.
Use for following guidelines for electrical wiring:
□ Rope stranded copper cable is recommended for #0 or larger cable sizes because of its
added flexibility.
□ A full copper circuit is recommended for all installations because it maintains the lowest
resistance and is the most trouble free.
□ Good cable routing is not too tight or loose, is properly supported, and avoids excessive
heat, abrasion, and vibration.
□ Conduit or loom should be considered to protect cable where extreme heat or abrasion
cannot be avoided.
□ Die-cast lead alloy terminals are recommended for post-type batteries.
□ Sealed terminals are recommended where sealed terminal batteries are available.
□ Ring terminals are not recommended for battery connections but are recommended for
other connections.
□ Clamps should be used to support the battery cable every 24 in. and to relieve strain at
battery and motor terminals, around corners, and other stress points.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
□ External or internal tooth lock washers are not recommended for battery cable electrical
connections.
□ Frame area where ground connection is made should be stripped of paint and tinned to
prevent corrosion.
□ Recommended battery cable connections to the frame have hardened steel flat washers
with a locking nut.
11.2.5.2 Cable Loss Test Procedure
Correct sizing and installation can be checked by measuring voltages. Once you have the
voltages: Battery Voltage minus Motor Voltage equals Cable Loss.
Measure voltages for correct sizing as follows:
1. Tighten nuts holding battery cables to solenoid and starter terminals.
NOTE:
TSM
Solenoid “BAT” terminal is at battery voltage when batteries are connected.
2. Connect the positive carbon pile lead to the starter solenoid “BAT” terminal. Connect the
negative lead to the starter ground terminal.
3. Connect the battery cables within the battery box and tighten to specification.
4. Adjust the load to 500 amps.
5. Quickly measure voltage of a connected battery (measure at a terminal nut or actual post).
6. Turn off load, allow carbon pile to cool.
7. Connect voltmeter to the solenoid “BAT” terminal and starter ground. Connect directly
to terminals, not to load clamp.
8. Adjust load to 500 amps.
9. Measure motor voltage.
10. Turn off load.
11.2.5.3 Measuring Circuit Resistance
To measure cranking circuit resistance, disconnect positive and negative cables at the battery.
Install a galvanometer or precision ohmmeter (0.0001 ohms resolution) and read the resistance.
Resistance should be less than the maximum allowable for this system. If the measurement
exceeds the maximum values, corrective measures such as cleaning the connections, reducing the
number of connections, or increasing wire gage will have to be taken.

Figure 11-7
11.2.5.4
TSM Cable Resistance
Calculating Circuit Resistance
If a galvanometer is not available, circuit resistance may be estimated as follows:

1. Measure the total length of the cable from the battery to the starter and back to the battery.
2. Use the chart to estimate cable resistance.
3. Count the number of connections in circuit.
4. Multiply the number of connections by 0.00001 ohms.
5. Add this number to the cable resistance number found in step 4. Also add 0.0002 ohms for
any contacts in the circuit.
6. If this total resistance exceeds the value listed in the following table, corrective action
must be taken.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Magnetic Switch and Series-Parallel Circuit Circuit Resistance

12 V system 0.048 ohms
Solenoid Switch Circuit
Starting Motor Circuit
12 V high output system 0.00075 ohms
Table 11-2 Maximum Circuit Resistance
TSM

12 MOUNTING SYSTEM
Section Page
12.1 MOUNTING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................... 12- 2

12.2 SOLID MOUNTING SYSTEMS ............................................................... 12- 3
12.3 FLEXIBLE MOUNTING SYSTEMS ......................................................... 12- 4
TSM
12.4 INSTALLATION CHECK LIST ................................................................. 12- 6
12.5 ENGINE SUPPORT ................................................................................ 12- 7

MOUNTING SYSTEM
12.1 MOUNTING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The purpose of the engine mounting system is to isolate engine vibrations from the supporting
structure. This section describes the functions, design, and application for the mounting system
of a DD Platform engine.
The major functional requirements of an engine mounting system are:
□ To control and reduce the engine motion
□ To isolate engine vibrations from the structure
□ To control external forces during shock or transient conditions to prevent physical contact
between the engine and the application
□ To limit the bending moments at the cylinder block-to-flywheel housing within the
maximum values specified for the engine and application
Flexible mounts, solid mounts, or a combination of the two types of mounts represent the different
mounting system configurations. Flexible mountings enable the supporting structure to be
TSM
isolated from engine vibration. Solid mountings are used when the movement of an engine with
flexible mounts is not acceptable. Solid mountings are also used in applications where shock,
torque, and thrust loads exceed the limits of resilient flexible mounts. A combination of solid
and flexible mountings may be used based on the relationship required between the engine and
the machine. The vibration characteristics of the total installation will depend on the combined
weight of the engine, accessories, and interface equipment, the rigidity of the mounting system
and the structure where it sits. Most mount manufacturers have computer analysis programs
which determine the proper mounts for specific applications.
12.1.1 THREE-POINT MOUNTING
Three-point mounting is based on the principle that three points define a plane and therefore
engine block and driven machinery twisting will not occur. Three point mounting is required for
off highway and rough terrain mobile applications, but it can also readily be used in stationary
applications. It is accomplished with one mounting point at the front and two at the rear. The
front mount provides support vertically and transversely but will not restrain torsionally. For
torsional support a bracket is attached to each side of the flywheel housing, with the driven
mechanism flange mounted to the engine.
Care must be taken to ensure that the mounting points are located in a way such that the bending
moment at the rear face of the block is less than 1000 lb·ft.

TSM
Figure 12-1 General Three Point Mounting Scheme
NOTE:
The engine must be analyzed for the bending moment produced at the rear face of the
block. If the bending moment exceeds the limit of 1,356 N·m (1,000 ft·lb), then the rear
mounts must be located to achieve a bending moment within these limits, ideally as
close to zero as possible.
The rear mounts should restrain motion in all six degrees of freedom and provide the necessary
torque reaction forces. Isolation mounts can be used under both front and rear mounting brackets
if applicable.
12.2 SOLID MOUNTING SYSTEMS

Solid mounting is used in applications where severely high shock, torque and/or thrust loads
are introduced. Solid mounts are, therefore, used in instances where flexible mounting is not
acceptable due to the physical conditions which will be encountered for the given application.
In any solid mounting arrangement, consider the following :
□ Make the mounting brackets and mounting base as rigid as possible.
□ Alignment of the engine and the machine being driven must be carefully controlled to
minimize loading on the coupling, flywheel, and flywheel housing. If the assembly is
remote mounted and shaft driven with a coupling, check for face run out to 0.002 in.
(0.051 mm) on each flange apart. With flanges together a 0.127 mm. (0.005 in) gap is
permitted for angular misalignment. Concentricity, also checked with dial indicators,
should be good within 0.127 mm. (0.005 in). (Make adjustments by shimming under
one or more of the solid mounts.

MOUNTING SYSTEM
□ Use isolators for instruments, radiators, etc. attached to the top of the subbase to prevent
damage caused by the vibrations that are transferred through the solid engine mounts.
□ All mounting components must be strong enough to withstand the dynamic loadings
associated with the application.
□ Control the bending moment at the rear of the cylinder block by placement of the rear
mount or cradle.
12.3 FLEXIBLE MOUNTING SYSTEMS

Flexible mountings enable the supporting structure to be isolated from engine vibration.
In any flexible mounting arrangement, consider the following requirements;
□ The selected mounts must be rated to support the static and dynamic loads calculated
for each mount.
□ The mountings should protect the engine from any stresses caused by flexing and distortion
of the machine frame.
TSM
□ All mounting components must be strong enough to withstand the dynamic loadings
associated with the application.
□ The mountings must isolate the application from engine vibration at all engine speeds.
12.3.1 FLEXIBLE MOUNT SELECTION
The easiest method to obtain the correct resilient mounts is to contact one of the many
manufacturers of resilient mounts. They have computer programs that will come up with the
right mounts for the application. However you still have to be prepared to furnish them the
necessary information as follows:
1. Name and description of the application and usage anticipated. This includes:
[a] Mobile
[b] On-Highway
[c] Engine Model
[d] Number of Cylinders
[e] Four-Cycle
[f] RPM of Operation including idle speed
[g] Configuration (In-line for DD Platform)
[h] Firing Order
[i] Crankshaft Arrangement
[j] HP and Torque
2. Total weight of engine plus driven components or their individual weights.
3. Center of Gravity (CG), x, y, and z of each component individually or combined.

4. Moments of inertia Ixx, Iyy, Izz about the CG if known. Otherwise, a dimensional
drawing of the engine is needed to make an estimate.
5. Mounting pad positions x, y, and z relative to RFOB and crankshaft centerline.
6. Desired amount of isolation if known, usually a minimum of 90%, and 96-98% for
generators in buildings.
7. Any expected shock or impact loads described in g's and direction.
8. Closest point x, y, z and clearances to machine members.
9. Any external forces, such as belt and chain drives, their direction and position.
10. Any environmental conditions such as temperature highs and lows, chemical or oil
exposures, etc.
For common, non shock load applications the general procedure for self selection of mounts
has two possible methods:
□ Method A: Select a type of mount that supports the load from the supplier catalog and then
calculate its isolation capability.
TSM
□ Method B: Specify the isolation desired and calculate the mount characteristics required to
obtain this. Then select the mount from the catalog.
For more details and formulas to use in your calculations, refer to Barry Controls bulletin IOEM1,
or Lord Manufacturing bulletin PC2201o. The suitability of the selected mounts should still
be confirmed with the manufacturer. Detroit Diesel assumes no responsibility for the resilient
mounting system performance.
12.3.1.1 Method A
Select a type of mount that supports the load from the supplier catalog.
1. Determine the location of CG of the engine and transmission package.
2. Calculate the reaction forces at each mount using the weight and CG. Some mount
manufacturers include safety factors up to three times the mount load rating, to allow for
forces due to engine torque and rugged terrain, so weight only is normally sufficient to use
for this calculation. However, if the power package will be subject to low gear, high torque
operation, then the force due to torque must be added. Consult the manufacturer to be sure.
3. Refer to the mount tables in the catalog that suits the application and the environmental
conditions. There might be more than one suitable table to refer to.
4. From your table of choice, select a mount that is within the load range. There might
be several mount models to choose from.
5. Using constant for stiffness (K) from the table or accompanying load vs. deflection
charts, and the weight (W) at the mounting point, calculate the natural frequency (Fn.)
of that mount.

MOUNTING SYSTEM
6. Determine what are the prominent disturbing frequencies (Fi) of the input source. It
usually consists of the engine first order or other known disturbing orders, or it could be
the bumpy terrain. If the engine speed varies, use the lowest speed setting as well as the
normal steady running speed. Calculate Fi/Fn. If it is greater than the mount system is
in the isolation range. If it is less than it is in the amplification range and may not be
suitable. If it is close to 1.0, it is close to resonance and should not be used at all.
Figure 12-2
12.3.1.2
TSM
Transmissibility
Method B
Specify the isolation desired and calculate the mount characteristics required then select the
mount from the catalog.
1. Establish a desired isolation requirement (I). 80% isolation efficiency or 0.8 is acceptable.
2. Determine transmissibility (T). T = 1.0 – I. In this case, T = 1.0 – 0.8 = 0.2
3. Determine Fn by the following formula:
4. With this Fn determine spring rate needed (K) from the formula where M
= W/g, W/g = weight at the mount point/gravitational constant.
5. Refer to the catalog for the desired mount that has that spring rate, or close to it. Recheck
its suitability by repeating the steps in Method A.
12.4 INSTALLATION CHECK LIST

To ensure proper installation of the isolators, DDC has found several common problems to check
for upon completion. The most important items are:

1. Based on the engine support calculation, ensure that the load capacity of the isolator is
adequate at each location.
2. When applicable, ensure that the space between the mount and structure is enough to
prevent "shorting" of the isolator.
3. Ensure that there are no sound-shorts: direct contact of the engine with other components
(brackets, pipes, etc.) which are rigidly attached to the frame/applications.
4. For mounting systems other than three-point the load at each mount should be balanced or
adjusted to prevent excessive loads at the mountings and high engine vibration levels.
12.5 ENGINE SUPPORT

To determine the distance of rear mounts to achieve a zero bending moment at the rear of the
cylinder block. The following information must be filled out.
TSM

MOUNTING SYSTEM
TSM
Figure 12-3 Distance of Rear Mounts for Zero Bending Moments
To determine the bending moment at the rear of the cylinder block when engine mount locations
are fixed, the following measurements must be taken.

TSM
Figure 12-4 Bending Moment for Fixed Mounting System

MOUNTING SYSTEM
TSM

13 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS
Section Page
13.1 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS DESCRIPTION ................................................ 13- 2

13.2 MASS ELASTIC DATA ............................................................................ 13- 2
13.3 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS REQUEST FORM ........................................... 13- 6
TSM

TORSIONAL ANALYSIS
13.1 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS DESCRIPTION

A Torsional Vibration Analysis (TVA) is required for all applications. If an installation is identical
(same engine power and torque ratings, crankshaft pulley, damper, flywheel, rotational devices
connected to the engine and same types of connection hardware to drive the rotational devices) to
an application that was previously analyzed, then the previously approved TVA can be applied.
DDC will perform the only acceptable Torsional Vibration Analysis for the engine. Other
organizations also perform TVAs; however, the results obtained from other organizations will
not be accepted for the evaluation of stresses occurring in the crankshaft. Typically, the analysis
completed by the other organizations will sufficiently define mode shapes, system natural
frequencies, and amplitudes or velocities. DDC will not accept these analyses as approval for
the engine for any application. The only acceptable evaluation of the stresses occurring in the
crankshaft is the analysis completed by DDC.
Torsional analysis request (TAR) forms are included in this manual for use in submitting requests
to DDC. In order to minimize the turn around time of the analysis, only forms completed in their
entirety should be submitted. For additional information regarding this topic, please refer to the
TSM
Noise, Vibration, Harshness (NVH) Portal available through the DDC www.detroitdiesel.com or
contact your application engineer.
13.2 MASS ELASTIC DATA

Mass elastic system data consists of inertias, torsional stiffness, and minimum shaft polar section
modules for all rotating components (excluding belt driven components such as fans, pumps,
compressors, etc.). Equivalent mass elastic systems of a DD Platform engine are provided on
the following pages. These figures represent typical mass elastics without crankshaft pulleys,
vibration dampers or flywheels. The specific information regarding optional equipment can be
obtained by contacting: Nicole Bond (+1 313 592 5872), Torsional Vibration Analyst

TSM
Figure 13-1 Mass Elastic Data

TORSIONAL ANALYSIS
TSM
Figure 13-2 Mass Elastic Data Page 1 of 3

TSM
Figure 13-3 Mass Elastic Data Page 2 of 3

TORSIONAL ANALYSIS
13.3 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS REQUEST FORM
TSM
Figure 13-4 Torsional Analysis Request Form
14 ENGINE ELECTRONIC CONTROLS
Section Page
14.1 ENGINE ELECTRONIC CONTROLS DESCRIPTION ............................ 14- 2

14.2 ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION REQUIRE-
MENTS .................................................................................................... 14- 2
TSM
14.3 MOTOR CONTROL MODULE ................................................................ 14- 3
14.4 COMMON POWERTRAIN CONTROLLER ............................................. 14- 3
14.5 ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTOR ............................................................ 14- 4
14.6 WIRING HARNESSES ............................................................................ 14- 5
14.7 SYSTEM SENSORS ............................................................................... 14- 8
14.8 WELDING ............................................................................................... 14-11

ENGINE ELECTRONIC CONTROLS
14.1 ENGINE ELECTRONIC CONTROLS DESCRIPTION

The Detroit Diesel Electronic Control System (DDEC) is an electronic fuel injection and control
system. The system optimizes control of critical engine functions which affect fuel economy,
performance, and emissions. The DDEC system provides the capability to protect the engine from
serious damage resulting from conditions such as high engine temperatures or low oil pressure.
The major subsystems of DDEC include:
□ Motor Control Module (MCM)
□ Common Powertrain Controller (CPC)
□ Electronic Injectors
□ System Sensors
The MCM receives electronic inputs from sensors on the engine and vehicle and uses the
information to control engine operation. The MCM computes fuel timing and fuel quantity based
upon predetermined calibration tables in its memory. The MCM precisely times and meters
TSM
fuel to each injector.
Detroit Diesel Diagnostic Link® (DDDL), a sophisticated software package supporting the set
up, maintenance and repair of engines using DDEC, facilitates access to DDEC's diagnostic
capabilities. Used as a diagnostic tool DDDL can be used to change the engine rating, view an
audit trail of CPC changes, monitor fault codes as they occur, snapshot recording, set the MCM
output functions to particular values to support troubleshooting, and configure and change CPC
parameter values.
DDEC VI provides one industry standard serial data link: SAE Standard J1939. SAE Standard
J1939 provides control data to other vehicle systems such as transmissions and ABS control
devices. High-speed CAN link is also used for transmittals between the CPC and MCM modules.
14.2 ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) supplied hardware is required to install DDEC VI. The
following is the minimum hardware required:
□ 31–pin Vehicle Interface Harness assembly (VIH) — This harness connects the vehicle
functions and DPF harness to the MCM
□ 21–pin Vehicle Interface Harness (VIH) assembly — This harness connects battery power
(12 volts) and ground to the MCM and CPC, includes fuse(s) or circuit breaker(s), and
CAN lines for communication between MCM and CPC.
□ Ignition switch — Switched 12 volt ignition
□ Amber Warning Lamp (AWL) — A panel mounted amber indicator light
□ Red Stop Lamp (RSL) — A panel mounted red indicator light
□ Throttle input device — An electronic foot pedal assembly (EFPA), hand throttle, or
alternative throttle device

□ Coolant Level Sensor (CLS) — A radiator top tank or remote surge tank mounted sensor
□ J1939 — Panel mounted Deutsch diagnostic connector
□ Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) — Panel mounted amber indicator light to indicate
faulty sensors
□ High Exhaust Stationary Temp (HEST) Lamp — Panel mounted indicator light to indicate
high exhaust temps during DPF regeneration
□ DPF Regen Active Lamp — Panel mounted indicator light to indicate DPF regeneration
□ Manual DPF Regen Request Switch — Panel mounted selector switch to request a
regeneration event.
Refer to DDEC VI Application and Installation Manual (DDC-SVC-MAN-0054) for more
information and schematic diagrams.
14.3 MOTOR CONTROL MODULE
TSM
The engine mounted MCM includes control logic to provide overall engine management.
1. 21 Pin 2. 120 Pin
Figure 14-1 Motor Control Module
The MCM continuously performs self diagnostic checks and monitors the other system
components. System diagnostic checks are made at ignition-on and continue throughout all
engine operating modes. The nameplate on the MCM shows the manufacturer's specifications and
is important for assisting operator or maintenance personnel.
14.4 COMMON POWERTRAIN CONTROLLER

The vehicle mounted CPC includes control logic to provide overall vehicle management.

545 67 26
TSM
1. Connector #1 18-PIN Connector DDC P/N: A 018

545 64 26
545 65 26
545 68 26
Figure 14-2 Common Powertrain Controller
The CPC needs to be mounted in an enclosed, protected location of the vehicle. The mounting
bracket is the responsibility of the OEM. Reference the DDEC VI Application and Installation
Manual (DDC-SVC-MAN-0054) for other installation requirements.
14.5 ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTOR

The Electronic Fuel Injectors use a needle solenoid operated valve controlled by an internal
Amplifier Control Module to control injection timing and metering pressure. The source for high
pressure fuel delivery is the high pressure fuel rail common to all six injectors.

Because fuel injection is controlled electronically and is not tied to the injector in a mechanical
sense, fuel metering becomes a function of a variety of selected parameters such as throttle
position, engine speed, oil, water and air temperatures, turbocharger boost levels, and barometric
conditions.
TSM
1. Electrical Connector 8. Check Valve
2. Coil 9. Needle Solenoid Valve
3. Amplifier Control Module 10. Coil
4. Amplifier 11. Spring
5. Return Spring 12. Injector Needle
6. High Pressure Feed Y150 Injector (Cylinder 1)

7. Pressure Converter
Figure 14-3 Electronic Fuel Injector
14.6 WIRING HARNESSES

The following harnesses are needed for DDEC VI applications:

□ Injector Harnesses (DDC supplied)

□ Vehicle Interface Harnesses (OEM supplied)
□ 21–pin Harness
□ 31–pin Pigtail Harness
□ Engine Sensor Harness (DDC supplied)
□ DPF Harness (DDC supplied)
14.6.1 INJECTOR HARNESSES
The harnesses are installed at the factory and are delivered completely connected to the injection
units and the MCM.
14.6.2 VEHICLE INTERFACE HARNESS
The VIH must be provided by the OEM. The VIH plays several critical roles as follows:
TSM
□ Facilitates the communication of other systems and CPC with the engine MCM via CAN
link.
□ Provides feedback from DPF sensors.
□ Transmits MCM and CPC output signals to the appropriate devices.
□ Provides 12V power and ground to the MCM and CPC modules.
The VIH must contain the wires, fuses, relays, switches, connectors, and communication link
necessary to perform the aforementioned roles. The VIH must be completely detachable from the
engine and all devices it connects to with locking weather-proof connectors.
NOTE:
The MCM must be wired directly to the battery. Connection to reverse polarity will
damage the system if not properly fused.
A schematic of a DDEC VI VIH is shown in the following illustration.

TSM
Figure 14-4 Typical DDEC VI Vehicle Interface Harness System

14.6.3 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
Electronic controls for engines, transmissions, braking systems, and retarders share common
measured parameters. SAE has two standard methods to communicate between engine systems,
J1939 communication link and CAN Data Link. J1939 provides for the interchange of interactive
control data between vehicle systems and eliminates the need for redundant sensors. J1939 runs at
250K baud. The CAN Data Link provides for interchange of interactive control data between the
CPC and the MCM.
The OEM supplied 21–pin VIH Harness connects the MCM's J1939 ports to other vehicle
systems such as ABS devices and transmissions. The OEM supplied VIH Harnesses also connects
the CAN ports from the MCM to the CPC.
14.6.4 ENGINE SENSOR HARNESS
This 120–pin harness facilitates the communication of engine sensor input to the MCM. The
Engine Sensor Harness facilitates the reception of input and output signals controlling the fuel
injection process and engine speed.
TSM
14.6.5 DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER HARNESS
There are various Aftertreatment Device (ATD) configurations offered to the OEM. There are
two DPF harness designs depending on whether the OEM has a vertical mount configuration
or a horizontal mount configuration. For horizontal mount ATD units, there exists two pigtail
harnesses factory installed onto each ATD unit. One pigtail harness connects the 4 sensors housed
in the sensor box mounted on the center surface of the DPF section of the ATD unit. This harness
is 9” long leading to a 10-pin connector. On the surface of the Diesel Oxidation Catalyst section
of the ATD unit, there exists a separate temperature sensor. This sensor has a pigtail harness
leading to a 2-pin connector. The OEM is responsible for integrating the 10-pin DPF pigtail
harness and the 2-pin DPF pigtail harness into the VIH 31-pin harness.
For vertical mount ATD units, there is one factory mounted DPF harness leading to a 10-pin
connector. The OEM is responsible for wiring the 10-pin DPF harness into the VIH 31-pin
harness. See the DDEC VI Application and Installation Manual (DDC-SVC-MAN-0054) for
wiring diagrams and pin assignments.
14.7 SYSTEM SENSORS

DDEC system sensors provide information to the MCM regarding various engine and vehicle
performance characteristics. The information is used to regulate engine and vehicle performance,
provide diagnostic information, activate the engine protection system, and monitor after-treatment
conditions. Refer to the DDEC VI Application and Installation Manual(DDC-SVC-MAN-0054)
for a list and functional description of the factory installed system sensors. Refer to Figures
1–5, 1–6, and 1–7 for the engine sensor locations that comprise of the Engine Sensor Harness
(ESH) for the DD Platform engine.

TSM
1. Oil Pressure Sensor 12. Camshaft Position Sensor
2. Oil Temperature Sensor 13. Doser Block Assembly
3. Coolant Temperature Sensor 14. Fuel Line Pressure Sensor

4. Intake Throttle Valve 15. Fuel Cut-Off Valve
5. Inlet Pressure Sensor 16. Electronic Dosing Valve
6. Inlet Temperature Sensor 17. Fuel Compensation Pressure Sensor

7. Delta P Sensor 18. Fuel Pressure Regulator
8. Intake Air Temperature Sensor 19. Crankshaft Position Sensor
9. Rail Pressure Sensor 20. Fuel Temperature Sensor
10. EGR Valve 21. Water-In-Fuel Sensor
11. Quality Control Valve
Figure 14-5 DD Platform Sensor Location 1

TSM
1. Turbocharger Speed Sensor
2. Turbocharger Inlet Temperature Sensor
3. Mixed Coolant Temperature Sensor
4. Fuel Doser Valve
Figure 14-6 DD Platform Sensor Location 2

TSM
DOC - Diesel Oxidation Catalyst
1. DOC Inlet Temperature Sensor
2. DOC Outlet Temperature Sensor
DPF - Diesel Particulate Filter
4. DPF Outlet Temperature Sensor
5. DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor
3. Sensor Junction Box 6. DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor
Figure 14-7 Sensor Locations for the DOC and DPF
14.8 WELDING
Prior to any welding on the vehicle or equipment, the MCM must be disconnected from the
battery and chassis. This may be accomplished by removing connectors from the battery or by
installing switches which must remain closed for 30 seconds after ignition is off for non-volatile
data. Ground cable must be in close proximity to welding location.

NOTICE:
Install dual-pole, single throw switches. Both switches must be
open before welding.
TSM
Figure 14-8 Battery Connections for Proper Welding

15 AUXILIARY AIR SYSTEMS
Section Page
15.1 AIR START .............................................................................................. 15- 2

15.2 AIR COMPRESSOR ............................................................................... 15- 3
TSM

AUXILIARY AIR SYSTEMS
15.1 AIR START

The system must provide an engine cranking speed above 100 rpm for a minimum period of 10
seconds at 44°C (40°F), without recharging the air tank. A 15 second or longer cranking period
is recommended for optimum starting. Engine cranking speed above 250 rpm is not necessary.
Energy spent above 250 rpm would be better used to extend the cranking period.
Starting aids may be required if the engine must be started in an ambient below 44°C (40°F).
15.1.1 SYSTEM RECOMMENDATIONS
The following sections list the system recommendations for air tanks, the air control system,
air starters, and hoses.
15.1.1.1 Air Tanks
The following is a list of system recommendations for air tanks:
TSM
□ Air tanks should meet ASME pressure vessel specifications. Include a safety valve and
pressure gage.
□ An air drain cock should be provided in the lowest part of the air tank to drain condensation.
□ Use of an air dryer is recommended at the compressor outlet to minimize condensation
in the air tank.
□ There should be zero leak down of air tank pressure when the equipment is idle. A check
valve at the air tank inlet is recommended.
□ Connections to the air tank should be such that there is no trapped moisture in the system.
□ Typical minimum air tank size for the DD Platform is 65 gallons.
NOTE:
The minimum air tank size of 65 gallons is not a recommended tank size. Larger tanks
may be required for a given application, starter type, or starting system. Contact the air
starter manufacturer for proper tank size.
15.1.1.2 Air Control System
The system should disengage the starter and shut off the air supply to the starter the instant
the engine starts. This will conserve air pressure for the next start attempt, if required. Use
a 3 to 5 psi fuel pressure switch to trigger starter disengagement. Sensing lube oil pressure is
not recommended due to slow response time.
The system should have a lockout to prevent an attempt to engage the starter into a running
engine. A 3 to 5 psi fuel pressure switch will serve to prevent starter engagement while the
engine is running.

15.1.1.3 Air Starters Requiring Lubricators
Where lubricators are required, proper starter lubrication is a must. Ensure that the lubricator
gets a positive feed of fuel; without proper starter lubrication the engine cranking speed will be
greatly reduced. The starter may need to be prelubed prior to installation. Contact the starter
manufacturer for instructions.
15.2 AIR COMPRESSOR

Detroit Diesel offers two sizes of air compressors on DD Platform engines: the single cylinder
BA–921 rated at 16 cfm, and the twin cylinder BA–922 rated at 32 cfm. Both compressors are
adaptorless style installations
TSM
1. Gear Case 3. Single Cylinder Air Compressor 16 CFM
2. Twin Cylinder Air Compressor 32 CFM 4. Crankcase and Cylinder Block
Figure 15-1 Single Cylinder Air Compressor 16 CFM and Twin Cylinder 32 CFM
These air compressors are driven by the bull gear and are water-cooled. Engine coolant is fed to
the compressor through a flexible hose tapped into the engine block water jacket or a line from the
water pump, which is then connected to the front of the compressor. Coolant returns from the rear
of the compressor through a flexible hose to the engine cylinder head. Lubricating oil is supplied
to the compressor by a line from the cylinder block oil gallery that connects to the air compressor.
Lubricating oil returns to the engine crankcase through the air compressor drive assembly.
Air compressors may require any or all of the following components for operation:
□ Governor

AUXILIARY AIR SYSTEMS
□ Air Dryer
□ Air Filter (installations not using engine air system)
□ Pressure Protection Valve
Contact a Bendix authorized distributor for additional application assistance.
15.2.1 16 CFM AND 32 CFM COMPRESSORS
The 16 cfm and 32 cfm compressors are adaptorless style, flange mounted to the engine gearcase.
The air compressor also provides the mounting location for a power steering pump, which is
bolted to the rear end of the compressor.
Figure 15-2
TSM
Air Compressor Mounted Power Steering Pump
With the addition of exhaust gas recirculation (EGR), these compressors may not be supercharged.
The air supply must be plumbed to the compressor intake from the clean side of the air filter.

16 COLD WEATHER STARTING AND STARTING AID

SYSTEMS
Section Page
16.1 COLD WEATHER STARTING AND STARTING AID SYSTEMS

DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 16- 2
TSM
16.2 PREPARATION ....................................................................................... 16- 3
16.3 COLD WEATHER STARTING ................................................................. 16- 8
16.4 COLD WEATHER OPERATION .............................................................. 16-13

COLD WEATHER STARTING AND STARTING AID SYSTEMS
16.1 COLD WEATHER STARTING AND STARTING AID

SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
Cold weather operation of diesel engines at temperatures below +40°F could require modification
of vehicle equipment and the application of aids to assist engine starting.
To ensure a successful engine start, the engine combustion air temperature, at full compression,
must be higher than auto ignition temperature of fuel being used.
Diesel engine starting depends on combustion chamber temperatures being high enough to ignite
the fuel oil injected into the cylinder. Cold temperatures affect the in-cylinder temperature
because:
□ Cylinder wall temperatures are low due to low coolant and block temperatures.
□ The temperature of the air entering the cylinder is at ambient temperature.
□ Engine cranking speed at low temperatures is reduced because of higher lubricating oil
viscosity and decreased battery efficiency.
TSM
□ Fuel temperature, as reduced by low ambient temperatures, will decrease the cylinder
temperature.
□ The temperature of the compressed air in the cylinder is affected by the engine compression
ratio; as the compression ratio is reduced, the compressed air temperature is also reduced.
This chapter is divided into three sections.
□ Preparation
Necessary changes or modifications in lubricating oil, fuel, coolant, battery, cranking motor and
other areas which affect the starting of the engine in cold weather.
□ Cold Weather Starting
The various cold weather starting systems available, cold weather aids and starting procedures.
The OEM installed starting aids typically used to overcome cold temperatures are the Grid Heater
and the Block heater.
NOTE:
Due to the installation of a grid heater (intake air heater) coming standard on DD Platform
engines, injection of ether as a starting aid is prohibited. Injecting ether upstream of the
grid heater could result in major damage to the engine and result in serious personal
injury.
□ Cold Weather Operation

Precautions and special practices required assuring proper engine operation at cold temperatures.
Aftermarket starting aids may be used. When aftermarket starting aids are used Detroit Diesel
Application Engineering must be consulted. Aftermarket starting aids that may be used are the
Oil heaters, Remote coolant heater, Battery Heater, and the Coolant Heater.

16.2 PREPARATION
The engine must be properly maintained and in optimum operating condition, to assure acceptable
cold weather starting and satisfactory operation, the following areas must be addressed.
□ Lubricating Oil
□ Diesel Fuel
□ Coolant
□ Battery
□ Starter Motor
16.2.1 LUBRICATING OIL
Detroit Diesel engines will deliver optimum year round performance and long service life
with the recommended lubricating oil. To keep current with the acceptable oils, refer to DDC
publication Lubricating Oil, Fuel and Filter Recommendations (DDC-SVC-BRO–0001) available
TSM
at detroitdiesel.com.
Starting and operation of the engine at cold temperatures may require additional considerations in
the selection of the lubricant. As ambient temperatures decrease, the oil viscosity increases or
thickens. If the temperature is low enough, it will turn solid. Attempting to start an engine with
very thick oil places excessive stress on the engine and starter components; starting the engine
with oil too thick to pump and circulate through out the engine may cause engine failure or failure
to start. Generally, lower viscosity grade oils should be used at lower temperatures.
To counteract this effect, either auxiliary heat must be introduced to maintain proper oil viscosity,
or the lubricating oil grade may be changed to lower viscosity for ease of engine starting. Lube
oil heaters for raising oil temperature at cold ambient temperatures are discussed later on in
this chapter.
Unfortunately, low viscosity oils do not provide adequate wear protection at higher engine
temperatures. The use of multigrade oil can provide benefits at low starting temperatures and
at higher operating temperatures. These oils are generally identified using both a low and high
temperature designation with a "W" between. For example 15W40 indicates the meets the low
temperature requirements of a 15 grade oil and the high temperature requirements of a 40 grade oil.
At low ambient temperatures, below -0°C (14°F), SAE 5W-30, 10W-30, 5W-40 or 10W-40
oils may be used, provided they are API CJ-4 (low ash) oils. Please refer to DDC publication
(DDC-SVC-BRO–0001) for more information.

16.2.2 DIESEL FUEL
The diesel fuel used is very important for obtaining satisfactory engine performance, long engine
life, and acceptable exhaust emissions. For EPA 2007 exhaust emission compliant engines, the
use of Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD, 15ppm) is critical. When operating for prolonged periods
of idling or in cold ambient conditions (below 0°C/32°F), the use of 1-D fuel is recommended.
Please note, transit coach engines are emissions certified on both No. 1 and No. 2 fuel; to
maintain emission compliance, use only certified fuel. Please refer to the publication Lubricating
Oil, Fuel and Filter Recommendations (DDC-SVC-BRO–0001) at detroitdiesel.com.
DDC does not recommend the use of supplemental additives in the fuel for improving the fuel for
cold temperature operation.
If fuel heaters are used on electronically controlled engines, fuel temperature to the Motor Control
Module (MCM) inlet cannot exceed 60°C (140°F) .
Incomplete fuel combustion is indicated by appearance of white, gray, or bluish exhaust smoke.
White or gray smoke is a sign of incomplete combustion in the cylinders and may be counteracted
by increasing the fuel Cetane number. Blue smoke is indicative of insufficient fuel vaporization
TSM
and can be corrected by an increase of fuel volatility or by increasing the cylinder combustion
temperature.
16.2.3 COOLANT
An engine coolant solution of water and antifreeze must be used to protect the engine coolant
system when operating in ambient conditions below freezing. Detroit Diesel Power Cool (P/N
23512138) is recommended to be mixed with water for a 50-50 solution. DD Power Cool is an
ethylene glycol coolant, if a propylene glycol coolant is used, it must meet the requirement TMC
RP-330 “Type A”. Please refer to the Detroit Diesel Customer Support Network (DDCSN)
on the internet for more information regarding our coolant recommendations. Refer to DDC
publicationsCoolant Selections (DDC-SVC-BRO-0002) for engine coolant details.
The most commonly used antifreeze solutions is ethylene glycol. A 25% solution protects to
-12°C (+10°F), a 50% solution protects to -36°C (-33°F), and a 63% solution protects to -59°C
(-75°F). However, note that a 100% solution freezes at -22°C (-8°F). (A solution containing more
than 67% ethylene glycol is not recommended.)
There is another inhibitor package used with ethylene glycol consisting of a Nitrite Organic
Acid Technology (NOAT). This does not affect the antifreeze performance; this also applies
for NOAT antifreeze.
The other common type of antifreeze is propylene glycol. See for freezing point of aqueous
propylene glycol solutions.

TSM
Figure 16-1 Coolant Freezing and Boiling Temperature vs. Inhibited Propylene
Glycol (IPG) Concentration (Sea Level)
Other coolant solutions with antifreeze are not recommended. These include methyl
alcohol-based, methoxy propanol-based, phopate based and glycol-based coolants for
heating/ventilation/air conditioning (HVAC).

Automotive coolant solutions with antifreeze are not suitable for Detroit Diesel heavy-duty
engines.
16.2.4 BATTERY
To provide the greatest amount of cranking energy, a high cold cranking ampere battery should be
specified. This requirement will result in the lowest battery internal resistance which will furnish
the maximum battery voltage at high cranking currents. If this is not possible, increase the number
of batteries for more cranking energy or use a higher voltage battery if possible.
Battery internal resistance is inversely proportional to the plate area. In order to reduce internal
resistance, battery plate area must be increased.
Batteries should be maintained at or near the full charged condition. A lead-acid battery should
have a specific gravity of 1.26 at 27°C (80°F).
A lead-acid battery is most efficient when operating at ambient temperatures of approximately
27°C (80°F). When operating at temperatures below -1.1°C (30°F), battery heaters may be
employed so that maximum power can be obtained from the battery.
TSM
As its internal temperature drops, a battery loses power. The state of the battery charge, as
determined by its specific gravity, also plays a significant role in the ability to start an engine in
cold temperatures. A battery with a 50% charge has 45% of its cranking power available at 27°C
(80°F), but the same battery will have only 20% of its cranking power at -1.1°C (0°F).
Battery size recommendations for the engine can be found at detroitdiesel.com. These
recommendations are for the bare engine only and do not reflect increases in battery capacity
required by parasitic loads imposed by the vehicle or other systems attached to the engine.

Figure 16-2
16.2.5
TSM General Battery Cranking Power - Percent
STARTER MOTOR
Electric starter motors are recommended for use with Detroit Diesel engines. Other types of
starter motors exist, but are not generally recommended.
16.2.5.1 Electric Starter Motor
Correct motor size depends on the torque required to crank the engine and parasitic loads. To
obtain dependable starting, the starting motor must be capable of turning the engine and parasitic
loads. Cranking of the engine should not exceed 15 seconds or the starter and/or engine may be
damaged.
Cranking motor speed is directly proportional to the motor terminal voltage. To obtain the highest
motor terminal voltage, it is necessary to limit the cranking circuit resistance to less than .0008
ohms for this 12 volt systems.

The starting circuit design should be analyzed. The starting circuit includes the number and size
of batteries, cables including size, length and connectors, the starter and any device the starter
must rotate during cranking. This includes the engine and parasitic loads such as automatic
transmission, power steering pump, hydraulic pump(s), fan(s) and alternator(s). The Original
Equipment Manufacture must determine the lowest expected ambient temperature the vehicle
or application is expected to start.
All the information should be reviewed with the starter manufacture for further analysis and
recommendations of which starter motor is appropriate.
Generally, as parasitic loads increase and the ambient temperature decrease the cranking load
imposed on the starter motor increases causing a reduction in cranking speed.
For more information on DDC compliant electric starter motors, please refer to “Electrical
Systems” section of this manual.
16.3 COLD WEATHER STARTING

There are many different external hardware, engine components and approaches used to achieve
TSM
cold weather starting. This section contains these in the following topics:
□ Starting Systems
□ Starting Aids
□ Starting Procedures
□ Engine Starting Requirements
16.3.1 STARTING SYSTEMS
The following hardware systems are used to improve cold weather starting by reducing the
negative affects of low ambient temperatures. These systems may affect the engine starting
procedure.
16.3.1.1 Intake Air Heater
An intake air heater, or grid heater, comes standard on DD Platform engines. The grid heater
uses electric current to heat the air entering the intake manifold. The heated air temperature aids
in cold weather starting by increasing the temperature of the combustion fluid to a temperature
suitable for compression ignition.
16.3.1.2 Coolant Tank Type Heaters
Tank type heaters consist of resistance type elements mounted inside of a tank. Coolant enters
at one point of the tank and exits at a second point. Heated coolant rises to the top of the block
and is replaced by unheated coolant. Some tank type heaters contain a valve at the entrance to
the tank. This valve causes a "percolating" action and results in better circulation of coolant
through the engine. The valve also serves as a check valve and prevents coolant flow through
the heater during engine operation.

In order to obtain a rapid warm up of the coolant a separate coolant, a circulating pump should
be included with the tank type coolant heater. It is important that the heater is not energized
while the engine is running.
The tank type heater requires two connections to the engine coolant system. The tank inlet
connection must be taken from a point, which is low in the coolant system on the suction side of
the pump. The exit side of the heater should be connected to a coolant point high in the engine
cylinder block. It is important that the heater be installed inlet to pump suction to prevent a
bypass coolant path during engine operation.
The tank type heater can be installed on any engine and can be designed with kW capacities large
enough to preheat the coolant in any engine. Various thermostat ranges may be chosen so that the
final temperature can be controlled as required.
It should be noted that these temperature rise charts are based on laboratory data. However, the
wattage requirements may vary slightly depending upon the location of the heating element
relative to the cylinder walls, the configuration of the coolant passages, and the flow rate of
coolant through the passages.
The wattage requirements specified are without wind considerations.
TSM
This curve is based on a 12-hour heating time with 80% of the temperature rise occurring in the
first five hours of heating.

TSM
Figure 16-3 Watts Required to Raise Block Coolant Temperature to +30°F
(-1.1°C) in in-line engines

16.3.1.3 Engine Block Heater
An engine block heater can be installed as an option on DD Platform engines. This heater
is installed into the M27x2 port on the oil module, next to the oil filter. For more detailed
information regarding this application, contact your application engineer.
16.3.1.4 Oil Pan Heater
Please refer to the section “Oil Immersion Heaters”.
16.3.1.5 Fuel
Refer to DDC publication Lubricating Oils, Fuel, and Filters (DDC-SVC-BRO–0001) available
at detroitdiesel.com.
16.3.1.6 Fuel Heaters
TSM
If blending or selection of fuels is not practical, then a fuel heater should be considered which
would assure fuel temperatures above the "cloud point". The "cloud point" of a fuel is the point
in which wax crystals begin to form in the fuel and begin to clog the fuel system. Fuel heaters
typically are used to raise the temperature of the fuel as it is sent to the engine. Increasing fuel
temperature above the "cloud point" prevents wax crystal formation and subsequent fuel line and
fuel filter plugging.
A fuel heater may not help start an engine with waxed fuel already in the engine.
Fuel heaters may generate heat by the use of an electric element, or use engine coolant or even
recalculate return fuel from the cylinder head to heat the incoming fuel. A fuel heater must be
thermostatically controlled to limit the heat input into the fuel and a shut off must be provided for
the warmer time of the year. On DD Platform engines, the fuel temperature must not exceed
90°C (194°F) at the inlet to the high pressure fuel pump.
16.3.1.7 Battery Heater Types
It is essential that steps be taken to insure that the maximum battery capacity is available under
severe cold weather conditions. The electric battery warmers available can provide maximum
battery capacity but require an electrical power source for operation. This power source may be
an on-board system or an outside power supply. The following heaters usually use an outside
power supply in standby operations. It is advisable that the heater manufacturer be contacted for
the correct design, construction, and installation of their products. These units are available in
various sizes, wattage, and voltages.

Heater Type Description

This unit can be fabricated from heavy gage sheet metal with rigid foam
Insulated Box Type insulation applied to the outer surfaces, or it may be of double-walled
formed-in-place urethane construction.
This unit employs a metal sheathed tubular element of "U" shaped sandwiched
Plate Type between heavy gage sheet metal plates and equipped with an integral control
thermostat. This unit is mounted directly under the battery.
This unit is comprised of a heavy gage rubber material, incorporating a
serpentine pattern resistance wire element imbedded in the center area of the
Mat Type
material. The unit relies on low watt density radiant energy to heat the battery
and is intended to be mounted directly under the battery.
Commercially available strip heaters can be employed for heating batteries.
These are generally of higher watt densities. Care must be exercised to
Strip Type
ensure that they do not come into direct contact with the battery casing. It is
advisable to mount these units on the inside wall of the battery box.
Flexible construction comprised of a heavy aluminum foil element assembly of
low watt density, complete with fiberglass insulation on one side, enclosed in a
Blanket Type heavy gage acid-resistant plastic sheath. The unit is provided with ties and
is intended to be installed tightly around the sides of the battery or batteries.
TSM
This unit has the advantage of integral insulation.
Other sources of battery heat in addition to electric heaters are forced hot air
Air and Coolant Types or coolant. These either circulate hot air through the battery box or the use of
warm coolant circulated through passages in the battery box.
Table 16-1 Common Battery Heaters
16.3.1.8 Heating Engine Compartment
Another means of heating an engine is to use an external fuel fired air heater, which blows hot
air onto the engine oil pan, air inlet, and batteries. To make this system effective, the engine
compartment should be totally protected from the effects of outside wind, which will reduce the
efficiency of the heater. Care must be taken not to damage any electrical engine component
or wiring.
16.3.2 STARTING PROCEDURES
The engine starting procedure may change with the use any starting aid. Please review the
recommendations with each starting aid.
Changes to starting procedures because of cold weather may include:
□ A specific order of operation to achieve an engine start.
□ On electronically controlled engines this may include:
□ Automatic changes made by MCM to the fuel timing
□ Automatic operation of the Ether Start
□ Automatic setting and adjustment of high idle speed
□ A time delay for air intake heater operation.

□ Changes to the engine idle speed until the engine warms. On electronically controlled
engines, cold idle speed is accomplished automatically by factory preset speeds; options
for user specified higher idle speeds usually exist.
16.3.3 ENGINE STARTING REQUIREMENTS
A diesel engine creates enough heat during compression to initiate combustion when fuel
is introduced. In cold weather, an engine may have to crank for a longer period in order to
generate sufficient heat. Traditionally, starter motor manufactures' recommend cranking no
more than thirty seconds. Cranking an engine beyond 15 seconds, especially in warmer ambient
temperatures, may cause damage to the starter motor and/or engine.
16.4 COLD WEATHER OPERATION

There are a number of precautions and special practices which should be followed to ensure
satisfactory engine operation in cold temperatures.
TSM
16.4.1 ETHER INJECTION
The installation of an ether injection device on a DD Platform engine is strictly prohibited. The
injection of ether ,or any other substance, into the air intake system for improved cold start
capability could result in serious engine damage and/or severe personal injury.
16.4.2 IDLING AND LIGHT LOAD
Idling of the engine should be avoided and light load operation restricted to a minimum. Where
idling represents an unavoidable part of the load cycle, the idling speed should be increased to
approximately 800 to 1000 rpm. If prolonged light load operation cannot be avoided, the engine
should be periodically operated at a higher speed until lube oil and coolant reach the normal
operating temperature.
16.4.3 MAINTENANCE
For optimum performance at low temperatures, there should be no loss of compression due to
worn rings or leaking valves. Consequently the engine condition, rings and valves should be
checked prior to cold weather to ensure proper operation at low temperatures. Fuel tanks should
be kept filled. This practice will aid in reducing tank condensation and will insure the quality of
the fuel. Change fuel filters at recommended intervals and when the grade of fuel is switched.
Please refer to service literature at detroitdiesel.com for details.

16.4.4 WIND PROTECTION
Non-operating engines should be protected from wind, snow, and rain by compartment curtains,
shield or shroud. These may be needed in extreme cold weather conditions when the vehicle is
operating. Wind can quickly dissipate the heat from the engine oil, coolant, fuel and battery
heaters. This effect is known as wind chill factor. It should be noted that wind chill factor cannot
take the temperature of an object to a point lower than the ambient air temperature. The oil pan
should be protected from cold air blasts. A shield or shroud should be provided which will deflect
the air away from the pan thus preventing sludge from forming in the oil pan. The oil pan shroud
should allow an oil temperature no greater than 121°C (250°F) while the engine is operating. The
curtain, shield or shroud must be removed in warm weather conditions.
16.4.5 BATTERY AND CHARGING SYSTEM
The battery should always be maintained in a high state of charge. This can be accomplished
by specifying an alternator capable of supporting electrical accessory loads at idle speeds and
keeping the cable connections tight.
TSM
16.4.6 AIR CLEANER MAINTENANCE
The air cleaner should be inspected for plugging by moisture, snow or ice formation. In some
cases, snow or moisture laden air will plug or wet the air cleaner element. A wet, air cleaner
element may be more susceptible to mechanical damage. Minute droplets of salt spray ingested
into the engine through the air cleaner element can cause damage to internal components. Ice can
also form in cold temperatures in air cleaners with wet elements, leading to possible turbocharger
damage. If evidence of wet or plugged filters is observed, steps must be taken to provide airflow
to the engine which is snow or moisture free. This may require a revision to the vehicle air intake
system. Please refer to the service literature available at detroitdiesel.com for details.
16.4.7 SUPPLEMENTAL HEATING DEVICE
Supplemental heating devices add heat to the engine while the engine is running. The additional
heat allows the engine to maintain the proper operating temperature under extreme cold weather
conditions. The need for such system can be affected by the design of the engine installation
and is typically location dependent.
16.4.8 DDC COLD START RECOMMENDATIONS
DDC cold start recommendations are below.

ITEM Above 14°F Below 14°F
1 - SAE 5W-30, 10W-30, 5W-40,

1 - API CJ-4, low ash oil: 15W-40 10W-40
*must still be API CJ-4*
Lube Oil Classification API CJ-4 Lube oils must meet appropriate API CJ-4 performance levels as described
in DDC publication (DDC-SVC-BRO–0001), Lubricating Oils, Fuel, and
Filters, available on the DDC www.detroitdiesel.com.
Use of synthetic oil permitted within constraints also defined in DDC
publication (DDC-SVC-BRO–0001).
Cloud point must be 10°F below the lowest anticipated operating temperature.
Fuel Oil
Refer to DDC publication DDC-SVC-BRO–0001 for details.
1 — 50/50 DD Power Cool-Water

2 - 60/40 DD Power Cool-Water, if
Coolant 50/50 antifreeze-water
anticipated operating temperature
will be -40°F or below.
Electrical Capacity
DD Platform - 12V - 1875 CCA
TSM
(Battery Capacity CCA @ 0°F)
Applies only when using DDC factory recommended wire sizes and length.
Engine only
Lube oil heaters, coolant heaters,

Usually not required above 32°F but battery warmers, etc. (singly or
Other Starting Aids
may be used if desired below 32°F. in combination) may be required
depending on oil choice.
Table 16-2 DDC Cold Start Recommendations - DD Platform Engine

TSM

17 ACCESSORY DRIVE SYSTEM
Section Page
17.1 ACCESSORY DRIVES ........................................................................... 17- 2

17.2 GEARTRAIN ........................................................................................... 17- 2
17.3 DRIVETRAIN .......................................................................................... 17- 4
TSM
17.4 BENDING MOMENT ............................................................................... 17- 5

ACCESSORY DRIVE SYSTEM
17.1 ACCESSORY DRIVES

There are no accessory drives Rear Engine Power Take-Off (REPTO) located on the flywheel
housing for the DD Platform engine at this time.
The Accessory Drives Front Engine Power Take-off (FEPTO) located on the front cover housing
are listed in Table 1–1 and Table 1–2 below.
Drive
Rotation (as
Accessory/Location Type
Drive Ratio viewed from Comments
Front Cover Housing (SAE
front of engine)
Flange)
8 groove
Poly-V Z53700903
Vibration Damper Pulley
-- CW w/10 Z53700904
off Front Crankshaft
groove Z53700908
Poly-V
Table 17-1 DD Platform Accessory Drives on Crankshaft (Non-Gear Driven)
TSM
Rotation
(as
Accessory / Shaft Drive
Drive viewed Capacity in
Location Front Coupling type (SAE Comments
Ratio from lb·ft @ rpm
Cover Housing (SAE) Flanges)
front of
engine)
Spicer 4 groove 224 lb·ft (77hp)
PTO Front Crankshaft — CW
1350 pulley @ 1800rpm
* An adaptor is necessary for adaptation of the PTO Front Crankshaft Accessory Drive to adapt to DD
Platform Vibration Damper Pulley
† Maximum combined PTO of accessory drive plus front drive not to exceed 25 hp continuous, 30 hp
intermittent @ rated engine speed
Table 17-2 DD Platform Accessory Drives on Crankshaft (Gear Driven)
17.2 GEARTRAIN
The geartrain for a DD Platform engine is located at the rear of the engine. The geartrain consists
of intake and exhaust camshaft gears, idler gears 1-5, crankshaft gear, oil pump gear, fuel pump
gear, air compressor gear, and turbocompound gear.

1. Idler Gear No. 1

2. Idler Gear No. 2
TSM
3. Idler Gear No. 3 (Adjustable)
4. Idler Gear No. 4 (Optional on DD13 with REPTO)
9. Crankshaft Gear
10. Oil Pump Gear
12. Camshaft Gear Intake
6. Air Compressor Gear* B. Level B
7. Fuel Pump Gear** C. Level C

8. Axial Power Turbine Gear (N/A for DD13)* x. To Front of Engine
NOTE: * Power Steering Pump mounted to rear of Air Compressor for 1–cylinder
Air Compressor applications. PSP driven by Air Compressor driveshaft.
** Power Steering Pump mounted to front of Fuel Pump for 2–cylinder Air Compressor applications
Figure 17-1 Rear Geartrain for the DD Platform Engine
17.2.1 GEARTRAIN GEAR DRIVE RATIOS
Gear drive ratios for the gear drives on a DD Platform engine.

TSM
Figure 17-2 GEARTRAIN GEAR DRIVE RATIOS
17.3 DRIVETRAIN
The standard drivetrain for a DD Platform engine contains the water pump, vibration damper
pulley, and a tensioner driven by a drive belt. The vibration damper pulley consists of 2 Poly-V
crankshaft pulleys integrated into one combined pulley. The inner plane of the pulley is an
8–groove pulley, which drives the waterpump, alternator, and freon compressor. The outer plane
of the vibration damper pulley is a 10–groove pulley, which drives the fan drive system. The drive
ratio of the water pump is 2.22:1 for the DD Platform engine and 2.05:1 for the DD Platform
engine. See Figure 1–3 for a schematic of the DD Platform drivetrain.

TSM
1. Waterpump Pulley 6. Tensioner
2. Idler Pulley 7. Tensioner
3. Crank 8. Tensioner
4. Generator 9. Cooling Fan
5. Freon Compressor 10. Idler
Figure 17-3 DD Platform DRIVETRAIN
17.4 BENDING MOMENT

The bending moment (M) on the front of the crank equals force (F) times distance (L) from the
front face of the block. The force is usually caused by belt tension on the crankshaft pulleys .
The maximum allowable bending moment depends upon the angled direction that the force
around the crank (as referenced from the front face of the engine) is to be applied. For multiple
hub loads, take the vectorial sum of the maximum allowable bending moments at each angled
direction of force to determine the total maximum allowable bending moment.
The front crankshaft maximum allowable polar bending moment diagram is in ft·lb and referenced
from the front face of the block.

TSM
Figure 17-4 DD Platform 14.8L Allowable Front Crankshaft Bending Moment
To calculate the maximum allowable force (F) at a given belt load direction:
1. Determine the direction the individual force is to be applied from a belt drive analysis or
from a belt layout diagram.
2. Find the corresponding maximum allowable bending moment.
3. Divide by the corresponding distance (L) to derive the maximum allowable force (F).
L is the distance from the front face of the block to the centerline of the belt driving the load and is
mathematically defined as L1 + .99 in., where .99 in. is a constant value and represents the distance
between the front face of the block to the rear face of the vibration damper pulley. L1 is then the
distance from the rear face of the vibration damper pulley to the centerline of the belt or pulley.

TSM
Figure 17-5 Bending Moment on the Front of the Crank
If multiple belts are used to drive multiple loads, use the distance to the centerlines of each belt
when determining each force applied. Refer to Table below for a description of the Lx values for
the DD Platform poly-v vibration damper pulley configuration and for a schematic representation
of the Lx values.
Poly-V Vibration 8–groove L1 10–groove L2

Damper Pulley Group mm (in) mm (in)
Z53700903,
21.46 (.84) 76.06 (2.99)
Z53700904, Z53700908
Table 17-3 DD Platform Vibration Damper Pulley Lx Values

TSM
Figure 17-6 Poly-V Belt integrated Vibration Damper Pulley Illustrating Lx
Values
If using a v-belt pulley, use the centerline of the pulley for L1 only if the belt is centered along
the pulley. If the belt is NOT positioned in line with the centerline of the pulley, then you must
measure the distance from the rear face of the vibration damper pulley to the centerline of the belt
location and use this distance in your calculations.
EXAMPLE: 8–groove section of the DD Platform Vibration Damper Pulley = Z53700903. Belt
Force Direction = 90°. Find the Maximum Allowable Belt Force as follows:
1. Determine M for a DD Platform engine at 90°. In our example, a fan drive belt pulling at
90°, M would have a value of 3629 lb·ft.

TSM
Figure 17-7 Net Belt Tension at the 90° Position
2. Determine L by using the formula L = L1 + .99 in. In our example, we use the table to find
L1 for the vibration damper pulley group Z53700903 (8–groove section). This value is
.84 in. Therefore, L = .99 in. + .84 in. = 1.83 in. (.15 ft.)
3. Find F using the formula F = M /L. In the example, F= 3629 lb·ft/.15 ft. = 24193 lbs (F) .
4. Therefore the net total static belt tension (each leg of the belt x 2) should be no more than
lbs at the 90° position of the 8–groove section of the vibration damper pulley.
If there are fan belts and other accessories, then the combined net force should be calculated at its
resultant angle. Contact Detroit Diesel Application Engineering for assistance.

TSM

18 AUXILIARY POWER UNITS (APU)
Section Page
18.1 AUXILIARY POWER UNITS (APU) ........................................................ 18- 2

18.2 APU DESCRIPTION ............................................................................... 18- 2
TSM
18.4 APU ENGINE START-UP PROCEDURE ............................................... 18-11
18.5 EXAMPLE INSTALLATION PHOTOS ..................................................... 18-13

AUXILIARY POWER UNITS (APU)
18.1 AUXILIARY POWER UNITS (APU)

Auxiliary Power Units (APU) are optional systems, either factory installed or after-market, that
are driven by an independent power source and provide electricity (either 12-volt, 120-volt or
both) and HVAC functions for on-highway trucks to eliminate excessive engine idling during long
duration or over-night stops. Some states have regulations limiting idle time to no more than five
minutes, at which point the main vehicle engine must automatically shut down. For an overnight
stay in a sleeper cab, HVAC functions or electrical power are often required for driver comfort.
NOTE:
The installation described herein is specific to the ThermoKing TriPac APU installed with
a Detroit Diesel DD15 engine. These guidelines should be applicable to other brand or
model APU’s. Please confirm the installation requirements for different model APUs
with Detroit Diesel Application Engineering.
18.2 APU DESCRIPTION
TSM
An APU is typically comprised of a small diesel engine, an in-cab control panel, a thermostat, an
alternator, an air conditioning circuit, a heater circuit, and in some cases, a generator to provide
120-volt power. The APU is engaged when the main vehicle engine is shut off to provide heating
and cooling, charge the batteries and provide 12-volt or 120-volt power for small appliances,
laptop computers, etc. The APU can be set up to start automatically when the engine is stopped
or can be switched on manually. Some APUs may also have a battery monitor function which
will engage the APU while the main vehicle engine is running to charge the batteries in the
event of an alternator failure.

TSM
1. A/C Condenser 8. Truck's Heater Core
2. Receiver Dryer 9. Truck's Engine
3. A/C Evaporator 10. Fuel Pick-Up Tubes
4. Heater 11. Truck's Fuel Tank
5. Heater Exhaust 12. TriPac APU

6. Heater Intake 13. Truck's Sleeper
7. Heater Fuel Pump
Figure 18-1 TriPac Components

The installation requirements for APUs vary from brand to brand. Some are completely
independent systems and require no interface with the main vehicle engine systems. Other
APUs require the coolant circuit for the APU to be shared with the main vehicle engine cooling
circuit. The installation of an APU should only be performed by the vehicle manufacturer or
an authorized after-market APU dealer or distributor. The installation of an APU should not
compromise or inhibit the required function of any engine systems described in this manual.
Component or system failures that result from not following these guidelines could result in
engine or vehicle warranty coverage being denied.

18.3.1 APU FUEL SYSTEM
Most APUs share the fuel supply with the primary vehicle fuel tank. Separate fuel supply and
return lines must be installed for the APU’s diesel engine directly to the primary vehicle fuel tank.
Connection to engine supply and return fuel lines is not permitted. Material specifications and
line sizes will be indicated by the manufacturer of the APU being installed. It is important to
also consider the location of the APU relative to the vehicle fuel tank to avoid siphoning or other
unwanted scenarios. If any modifications are performed on the fuel tank, make sure the fuel tank
is cleaned of debris prior to engine operation.
FIRE
To avoid injury from fire, contain and eliminate leaks of
flammable fluids as they occur. Failure to eliminate leaks
TSM
could result in fire.

TSM
1. Adapter Plate 4. Threaded Ferrule
2. Pick-Up Tube Assembly 5. Back-Up Washer
3. Nut 6. Warning Label
Figure 18-2 Fuel Pick-Up Tool Installation
1. Drilling Template 4. Threaded Ferrule

2. Pick-Up Tube Assembly 5. Back-Up Washer
3. Nut 6. Warning Label
Figure 18-3 Fuel Pick-Up Tool Installation Alternate Installation

18.3.2 APU COOLANT SYSTEM
If the APU shares coolant with the main vehicle engine, it is important that the APU installation
does not create problems for the main engine cooling system. The installation method preferred
by Detroit Diesel uses coolant lines connected directly to the main vehicle engine to supply
coolant to the APU. Detroit Diesel does not allow the APU coolant circuit to be connected to the
bunk heater circuit due to insufficient coolant flow. Material specifications and line sizes will
be indicated by the manufacturer of the APU being installed.
Figure 18-4
TSM
Coolant Hose Installation
NOTICE:
An air bound pump cannot adequately circulate coolant. This can
lead to overheating and severe engine damage.
PERSONAL INJURY

HOT COOLANT
NOTICE:
Cooling systems that cannot be drained completely may also
experience freeze cracking of components. Additional drain(s)
and a caution notice should be provided by the OEM to ensure
complete draining of the cooling system.
TSM
Three (3) coolant supply ports are located at the rear of the coolant collector as shown below.
These ports are M22 x 1.5 ISO threads. A coolant return manifold is available through Daimler
Trucks North America in either a 2-port or 4-port configuration. The 4-port configuration is
standard on Freightliner sleeper cab units. For trucks built with a 2-port manifold, an additional
port is required for the APU coolant return. Two options exist: 1) replace the 2-port manifold
with a 4-port manifold; 2) install a tee fitting or “Y” fitting at the rear port. The coolant return
ports are ½” FPT threads. A shut-off valve should be installed on the APU coolant supply and
APU coolant return lines. These shut-off valves should be located as close to the engine ports as
practical. Care should be taken with the routing of coolant supply and return lines for the APU
not to locate the lines too close to exhaust system components. The APU coolant return should be
routed to either of the two rear-most ports on the 4-port manifold.

TSM
Figure 18-5 DD15 with 4-Port Coolant Return Manifold
Coolant supply and return lines should be routed away from the turbocharger turbine housing and
any exhaust components. Both lines should be routed forward of the turbocharger compressor
discharge elbow and below the turbo inlet, down toward the frame rail. The lines should be
securely fastened to the engine so as not to unnecessarily stress the fittings which may result in
coolant leaks. Avoid sharp bends and angles whenever possible. A minimum spacing of 13mm
is required between coolant lines and the frame rails. See photographic examples of coolant
line routings in the last section of this chapter.
Figure 18-6 DD15 with 2-Port Coolant Return Manifold

DD15 engine shown with 2-port coolant return manifold. For installations having a 2-port
manifold, the rear coolant line (bunk heater return) should be used to return coolant from the
APU. If a tee fitting is used, it should be installed into the rear port of the manifold. The bunk
heater return is connected to the outboard port on the tee, and the APU coolant return is plumbed
to the rear facing port on the tee. A “Y” connector could also be used to connect to APU return to
the bunk heater return line.
Refer to Detroit Diesel Coolant Selections Bulletin, 7SE298, for proper selection of engine
coolant and additives.
If an APU is selected that shares engine coolant with the main vehicle engine and could also
run simultaneously, an installation review would be required from Detroit Diesel Application
Engineering prior to installation.
18.3.3 APU EXHAUST SYSTEM
The APU exhaust system must remain separate from the main vehicle engine exhaust system.
Under no circumstances should the APU exhaust be connected to the main vehicle exhaust piping.
TSM
Care should be taken to route the APU exhaust away from the cab and all air intake locations.
18.3.4 APU ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
If the APU requires input from the main vehicle engine electronics to indicate when the main
vehicle engine is running, the ignition signal from the main vehicle engine is located in the CPC
on pin #3 of connector #2.

Figure 18-7
TSM
CPC Connectors
The part numbers for CPC pins are listed below.
Part DDC Part Number

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single) 013 545 76 26
CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single) 013 545 78 26
Table 18-1 CPC Pins
The vehicle ignition is a 12-volt signal. No other electrical signals should be required from the
main vehicle engine electronics. If the APU requires vehicle battery power, please refer to the
main Electrical System section of the DD15 Application & Installation Manual.

NOTICE:
Do not mount the alternator and / or generator near exhaust
components that radiate substantial heat. Mounting near
substantial heat sources could overheat the alternator, generator
and / or regulator.
18.4 APU ENGINE START-UP PROCEDURE

It is important to verify the installation has been performed correctly and to prepare the various
APU sub-systems for proper operation. The A/C circuit, the lubrication system, the cooling
system, and the fuel system all must be in proper working condition before the APU is started for
the first time to avoid unnecessary component damage.
TSM
DO NOT operate the APU engine before a partial refrigerant
charge has been added or damage to the A/C compressor
will result.
NOTICE:
BEFORE operating the APU engine check the oil level. Add the
proper amount and type of oil, if needed.
18.4.1 BLEEDING THE COOLANT SYSTEM
Bleed as follows:
1. Verify the APU OUTLET hand valve is CLOSED. If this valve is left open, coolant will
be sitting on top of the TriPac thermostat and not allow the TriPac engine to bleed air.
2. Open the APU INLET hand valve.
3. Place a clean container under the bleed line to catch coolant that is drained.
4. Entrapped air must be purged from the main vehicle engine after filling the cooling
system. To do this, allow the engine to warm up with the pressure cap removed. With
the transmission in neutral, increase engine speed to 1,000 rpm and add coolant to the
surge tank as required.
5. Open the bleed petcock on the APU engine to allow air to bleed out.
6. When a steady stream of coolant flows from the bleed line, close the petcock.
7. Open the APU OUTLET hand valve.
8. Replace drained coolant from the TriPac back into the tractor’s radiator.
9. Bleed TriPac fuel system. Refer to section "Bleeding The Fuel Lines".

Verify the APU engine has proper amount of oil and the A/C
system has a partial refrigerant charge before starting the
engine.
10. Start the TriPac engine.

11. The remaining air in the system will be forced to the tractor radiator and the TriPac APU
should now be bled of all air.
18.4.2 BLEEDING THE FUEL LINES
Bleed as follows:
1. Locate the On/OFF switch inside the APU and turn the switch “ON”.
TSM
2. Open the fuel return line banjo fitting on the APU engine.
3. At the HMI (in-cab APU control panel):
[a] Press MAIN POWER Key “ON”.
[b] Press APU SYSTEM Key “ON”.
[c] Press MODE Key to “AC”.
[d] Press FAN Key to set fan speed.
[e] Press UP or DOWN Keys to set the thermostat to 50°F (10°C).
[f] Multiple start attempts will be required to start the engine.
NOTE:
The fuel pump only runs when the engine is turning over. If the engine cranks for 30
seconds and fails to start, a start fault shutdown will be generated. This alarm code will
have to be cleared before attempting another start sequence.
4. Close the fuel return line banjo fitting when a steady flow of fuel is observed.
5. Allow engine to start.
18.4.3 VERIFYING ENGINE OPERATION
Once the APU engine is running:

□ Verify with a strobe light tachometer the engine rpm is 1800 RPM loaded (A/C clutch
engaged). Adjust as required.
□ Check cooling system for leaks
□ Check for fuel leaks

□ Check for oil leaks

□ Check for exhaust leaks
□ Verify with a digital meter that the charging voltage at the battery cables is at least 13.6 Vdc.
18.5 EXAMPLE INSTALLATION PHOTOS
Figure 18-8
TSM Coolant Supply Ports
Coolant supply ports located on coolant collector, upper right side of engine, near back of rocker
cover. Coolant supply for APU has not yet been installed on third, rear-most ISO port. Cab heater
and bunk heater supply lines are installed on the two forward ISO supply ports of the coolant
collector.

TSM
Figure 18-9 Two-Port Coolant Return Manifold
Top of engine showing two-port coolant return manifold (mounted) with replacement four-port
manifold waiting to be installed.
Figure 18-10 Four-Port Coolant Return Manifold

TSM
Figure 18-11 Four-Port Coolant Return Manifold Installed
Four-port coolant return manifold installed with cab heater return, bunk heater return, fuel tank
heater return, and APU coolant return lines installed.
Figure 18-12 Right Side View Of Engine After APU Installation
Right side view of engine after APU installation completed. Two yellow handled shut-off valves
in upper left are installed on APU supply and fuel tank heater supply lines. Lower shut-off
valves are installed on APU and fuel tank heater return lines. Note line routing, away from
exhaust components, forward of turbo compressor housing, inboard of CAC inlet tubing, and
down into frame rail.

TSM
Figure 18-13 Coolant Lines
Coolant lines clipped to bracket on freon compressor bracket.
Figure 18-14 Alternate View
Alternate view of coolant line clipping at freon compressor.

19 EFFECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Section Page
19.1 EFFECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS DESCRIPTION ......... 19- 2

19.2 AIR INLET TEMPERATURE ................................................................... 19- 2
19.3 EXHAUST BACK PRESSURE ................................................................ 19- 2
TSM
19.4 FUEL TEMPERATURE ........................................................................... 19- 3
19.5 ALTITUDE ............................................................................................... 19- 3

EFFECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
19.1 EFFECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

DESCRIPTION
Power developed by any internal combustion engine depends on the amount of fuel burned with
the available oxygen in the cylinder. The amount of oxygen in a cubic foot of air is reduced if
water vapor is present, or if the air is expanded due to increased temperature or reduced pressure.
This section includes de-ratings for:
□ Air Inlet Temperature
□ Exhaust
□ Altitude
□ Fuel Temperature
DD Platform engine power is not affected by air inlet restriction, fuel inlet restrictions, fuel
temperature, and barometric pressure within the range of normal operational conditions.
19.2 AIR INLET TEMPERATURE
TSM
High inlet air temperature to the engine can cause loss of power and heat problems with the
cooling system, the lubricating oil and hydraulic oil systems. This may be either due to high
ambient temperatures, or because the engine is being used inside an engine compartment which
needs more air flow. As ambient air temperatures increase to the physical limit, a reduction in
horsepower is expected. High inlet air temperature can also increase the turbocharger compressor
outlet temperature and the compressor skin temperature, which should be taken into account
when packaging engine peripherals.
19.3 EXHAUST BACK PRESSURE

In general, as exhaust back pressure increases there is a loss of horsepower. With the after
treatment devices necessary to meet emissions standards, exhaust back pressure can build as
high as 25 kPa.

TSM
Figure 19-1 The General Relationship of Exhaust Back Pressure and Engine
Power
19.4 FUEL TEMPERATURE

The DD Platform engine provides fueling compensation to maintain rated engine power for fuel
temperatures up to 90°C (194°F). Above this temperature the engine will de-rate by 10%.
19.5 ALTITUDE
Power loss at altitudes of less than 150 m (500 ft.) above sea level is insignificant. The degree of
power loss at higher altitudes is determined by the altitude and the fuel injection specification
needed.
The Altitude Performance Curve depicts the effects of altitude on engine power.

EFFECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
TSM
Figure 19-2 The General Effects Of Altitude On Engine Power

APPENDIX A: ABBREVIATIONS / ACRONYMS
A/ACC Air-to-Air Charge Cooling

AC Alternating Current
A/F Air Fuel Ratio
ALCC Advance Liquid Charge Cooling
Amb. Ambient
API American Petroleum Institute
Approx. Approximately
ATB Air to Boil
ATD Aftertreatment Device
ATW Air to Water
AWHP Available Wheel Horsepower
AWL Amber Warning Lamp
C Centigrade
TSM
CAC Charge Air Cooler
CAN Controller Area Network
CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
Cool. Cooling/Coolant
Corr. Corrected
CPC Common Powertrain Controller (DDEC VI Two-box system)
Cyl. Cylinder
DC Direct Current
DDC Detroit Diesel Corporation
DDEC Detroit Diesel Electronic Control
DFP Dosing Fuel Pressure
DOC Diesel Oxidation Catalyst
DPF Diesel Particulate Filter
DVB Decompression Valve Brake
EDV Electronic Dosing Valve
EH Engine Harness
EMA Engine Manufacturers' Association
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
EPQ End Product Questionnaire
EUP Electronic Unit Pump
F Fahrenheit
FCV Fuel Cutoff Valve
FMI Failure Mode Indicator
FPS Fuel Pressure Sensor
ga Gage
Gal/min. Gallons per Minute
HC Hydrocarbon
All information subject to change without notice. A-1

A/ACC Air-to-Air Charge Cooling

Hd. Head
Hg Mercury
HP Horsepower
I.D. Inner Diameter
ILCC Integrated Liquid Charge Cooling
ITT Integral Top Tank
JWAC Jacket Water After Cooled
lb. Pound
m Meters
MCM Motor Control Module
MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
mile/hr. Miles per Hour
MIV Mechanical Injection Valve (DDEC VI Two-box system)
MSCR MCM Software Change Request
MTU MTU-Friedrichshafen
TSM
NA Naturally Aspirated Engine
OBD On-board Diagnostics
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
PM Particulate Matter
Ps Static Pressure
Rad. Radiator
R/min. Revolutions per Minute
RSL Red Stop Lamp
SCA Supplemental Coolant Additive
SCCC Separate Circuit Charge Cooling
SRS Synchronous Reference Sensor
T Turbocharged Engine
TA Turbocharged Aftercooled Engine
TBN Total Base Number
TI Turbocharged Intercooled Engine
TRS Timing Reference Sensor
TT Tailor Torqued Engine
VIH Vehicle Interface Harness
WOT Wide Open Throttle
A-2 All information subject to change without notice.

TSM
All information subject to change without notice. A-3

TSM THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
A-4 All information subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX B: VENDORS
Compatible engine accessories may be obtained from several vendors. This section provides
vendors' name, address, and phone number.
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Heat exchangers are available from:
AKG Thermal Systems, Inc. Modine Manufacturing Co.
P.O. Box 189 1500 Dekoven Ave.
7315 Oakwood St. Ext. Racine, WI 53403
Mebane N.C. 27302–0189 Phone: (262) 636-1200
Phone: (919) 563-4286 Fax: (262) 636-1424
Fax: (919) 563-4917 Contact: Ralph Zick
Contact: Heinrich Kuehne Web: www.modine.com
Web: www.akgts.com
TSM
Honeywell General ThermoDynamics
3201 Lomita Boulevard 4700 Ironwood Drive
Torrance, CA 90505 Franklin, WI 53403
Phone: (310) 257-2472 Phone: (414) 761-4500
Fax: (310) 517-1173 Fax: (414) 761-4510
Contact: William Smith Contact: Robert Brandmeier
Contact Email: William.J.Smith@Honey-
Web: www.thermasys.com
well.com
Web: www.honeywell.com
Young Touchstone A Wabtec Co.
API Airtech Dave A. Larsen
91 North Street 2825 Four Mile Road
Arcace, New York 14009-0068 Racine, WI 53404
Phone: (716) 496-7553 Phone: (262) 639-1010
Contact: Fred Roy Fax: (262) 639-1013
Web: www.apiheattransfer.com Contact: Jeff Siclavan
Web: www.wabtec.com
L & M Radiator Inc.
1414 East 37th Street Transpro, Inc.
Hibbing, MN 55746 100 Gando Drive
Phone: (218) 263-8993 New Haven, CT 06513
Fax: (218) 263-8234 Phone: (203) 562-5121
Contact: Ralph Barker Fax: (203) 789-8760
Web: www.mesabi.com Contact: Edgar Hetrich
Web: www.transpro.com
All information subject to change without notice. B-1

APPENDIX B: VENDORS
AIR STARTERS FAN CLUTCHES

Air starters are available from: Fan clutches are available from:
Ingersoll-Rand Company Horton, Inc.
Engine Starting Systems
P.O. Box 8000 2565 Walnut Street
Southern Pines, NC 28387 Roseville, MN 55113
Phone: (888) START AIR Phone: (651) 361–6400
Toll free: (800) 621–1320
POW-R-QUIK Fax: (651) 361–6801
5518 Mitchelldale E-mail: info@hortoninc.com
Houston, TX 77092 www.hortoninc.com
(713) 683–9546
TSM
TDI Turbostart AIR COMPRESSOR
Tech Development Inc.
6800 Poe Avenue Air compressors are available from:
P.O. Box 14557 Bendix Commercial Vehicle Systems
Dayton, Ohio 45414–4557 901 Cleveland Street
(513) 898–9600 Elyrua, Ohio 44035
Phone 1–800–AIRBRAKE
Phone: (440) 329–9000
Fax; (440) 329–9557
E-mail: Support@Bendix.com
www.bendix.com
B-2 All information subject to change without notice.

GLOSSARY
Aeration Entrainment (progressive or otherwise) of air or
combustion gases in the engine coolant.
Air Bind A condition where a pocket of air has been trapped in

the water pump causing it to lose its prime and ability
to pump coolant.
Air Cleaner A device that prevents airborne particles from entering

air-breathing machinery. The device can be porous paper,
wire mesh filter or oil-bath cleaner.
Afterboil Boiling of the coolant after engine shutdown due to

residual heat in the engine.
Afterboil Volume Quantity of coolant discharged from the pressure relief
TSM
overflow tube following engine shutdown.
Aftertreatment Device (ATD) A unit, such as a diesel particulate filter or catalytic

converter, which removes pollutants from the engine
exhaust gasses after the gasses leave the catalyst
combustion chamber.
Air Handling The cooling system's ability to purge air when injected at
a given rate determined by the engine manufacturer and
meeting specified criteria.
Air Recirculation A condition either occurring around the tips of the fan
blades or where discharge air from a radiator core is
returned to the front of the core. Either condition hinders
cooling capability.
Air to Boil Temperature(ATB) The ambient temperature at which engine coolant out
temperature reaches 212°F.
Air to Water Temperature(ATW) The differential between engine coolant out and ambient
temperatures.
Ambient Temperature The environmental air temperature in which the unit

operates.
Ash The unburnable solid remains of a fire or oxidation in

diesel soot combustion. This is primarily composed of
Calcium, Zinc, Sulfur, and Phosphorus (usually white to
light gray in color).
All information subject to change without notice. G-1

GLOSSARY
Automatic (Active) Regeneration A controlled action by the engine system to elevate

the exhaust temperature to the point where soot can be
directly oxidized with O2.
Bleed Line(s) Line(s) strategically placed on the cooling system to vent

air/gases from the system both during fill and engine
running mode. They are also know as deaeration or vents
lines.
Blocked Open Thermostat Mechanically blocked open to required position. Used

for cooling tests only.
Blower Fan A fan that pushes the air through the radiator core.
Bottom Tank Temperature Refers to the down stream radiator tank temperature
which is usually the lowest temperature.
TSM
Catalyst Any substance which alters the rate of a chemical
reaction, but is not altered or affected by reaction.
Cavitation A localized event where a vapor pressure/temperature

phenomenon of the cooling liquid allows partial
vaporization of the coolant. These cavities of vapor
are carried downstream to a region of higher pressure,
causing them to collapse. Cavitation reduces coolant flow
and increases pump wear.
Cetane Number A relative measure of the time delay between the

beginning of fuel injection and the start of combustion.
Common Powertrain Controller The CPC will be cab mounted. Provides a direct
(CPC) connection to cab switches, lamps and data links. The
CPC connects to the engine controller via a CAN.
Monitors and diagnoses all in cab I/O sensors, switches,
actuators. Handles vehicle functions such as cruse
control, vehicle speed limiting, engine speed control
(PTO), progressive shift, and torque limiting.
Controller Area Network (CAN) The CAN is a multicast shared serial bus standard for
connecting the Motor Control Units (MCM).
Coolant A liquid medium used to transport heat from one area

to another.
Cooling Index See Air to Water (ATW) or Air to Boil (ATB) definition.
G-2 All information subject to change without notice.

Cooling Potential The temperature difference between air entering the

radiator core and the average temperature of the coolant
in the radiator core.
Cooling Capability The ambient in which a cooling system can perform

without exceeding maximum engine coolant out
temperature approved by the engine manufacturer.
Coolant Flow Rate The rate of coolant flow through the cooling system
and/or radiator.
Coolant Recovery Bottle An add on coolant reserve tank that is used when
radiator top tank and/or remote deaeration tank can not
be sized large enough to meet cooling system drawdown
requirements. Also known as an overflow bottle.
Cooling System A group of inter-related components used in the transfer
TSM
of heat.
Cooling System Air Restriction The pressure drop across the radiator core and other up
and down stream components that offer resistance to the
air flow.
Cooling System Capacity (Volume) The amount of coolant to completely fill the cooling
system to its designated cold full level.
DDEC VI The sixth generation of Detroit Diesel Electronic

Controls, are an advanced technology electronic fuel
injection and engine operation control system. Along
with the engine related sensors and the engine-resident
control unit Motor Control Module (MCM) which
controls the functionality of the engine. The DDEC VI
system also has a cab-mounted control unit for vehicle
engine management, the Common Powertrain Controller
(CPC). The connection to the vehicle is made via a CAN
interface which digitally transmits the nominal values of
torque, engine speed specifications, and the actual values
of engine speed, oil pressure etc.
Deaeration The cooling systems ability to purge entrained gases from

the coolant.
Deaeration Capability The running time required to expel all the entrained gases
from the cooling system after an initial fill.
Deaeration Tank A tank used to separate air/gases from the circulating

coolant and return unaerated coolant to the system. Also

GLOSSARY
used for filling, expansion of the coolant, reserve capacity,

etc. Sometimes called a surge tank or top tank.
Deaeration Volume The volume of space designed into the deaeration tank
and located above the expansion volume for collecting
the entrained gases as it is expelled into the tank.
Derate Reducing engine torque from normal levels.
Diesel Oxiation Catalyst A catalyst that will oxidize CO to CO2, HC to CO2 and
H2O and NO to NO2.
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) A diesel particulate filter (DPF) is a device installed on a
diesel engine system which traps particulate matter (PM)
from the exhaust gas flow. The filter forces the exhaust
gasses through porous cell walls of a core comprised of
ceramic material.
TSM
Drawdown The quantity of coolant which can be removed from a full
cooling system before aeration occurs.
Engine Coolant Out Temperature Usually the hottest coolant and measured at the thermostat
housing. Also called radiator inlet or top tank temperature.
Expansion Volume The volume of space designed into the deaeration tank to
permit the coolant to expand as it is heated without being
lost to the environment.
Fan Air Flow The rate of air flow that a fan can deliver at a given speed
and static pressure.
Fill Line Used to rout coolant from the deaeration tank to the inlet
of the water pump. It is also called a shunt or make up
line.
Fill Rate The coolant flow rate at which an empty cooling system
can be completely filled without overflowing.
Heat Dissipation The amount of heat energy (Btu) that a heat transfer
component can dissipate to the environment at specified
conditions.
Motor Control Module (MCM) The MCM is designed to support the high voltage,
multi-pulse, duel solenoid fuel systems. The MCM
monitors all engine sensors, determines injection fuelling
(position and duration), performs low speed and high
speed governing, controls after-treatment systems,

controls the starter, engine brakes, fan and diagnostics

including emissions related diagnostics.
Overcooling A condition where the coolant temperature will not

approach the start to open temperature value of the
thermostat under normal engine operation.
Overheating A condition where the coolant temperature exceeds

allowable limits.
Oxidation A chemical reaction which changes an element from

a lower to higher oxidation state, usually created by a
combination with oxygen atoms.
Particulate Matter (PM) Particles that are formed when diesel engines have
an incomplete fuel combustion. These particles are
composed of sulfate particles, elemental carbon and
TSM
Soluble Organic Fractions (SOF) which includes heavy
hydrocarbons.
Passive Regeneration Oxidation of soot with NO2.
Radiator Shutters A device placed either in front of or behind the radiator

to block air flow when not required.
Ram Air Flow Air flow through the radiator core due to the motion of
the vehicle or wind.
Ramp Down Similar to a derate, often in conjunction with an

impending engine shut down.
Reserve Volume A volume designed into the deaeration tank to provide a

surplus of coolant to offset losses that might occur.
Soot A dark powdery deposit of unburned fuel residues, usually

composed mainly of amorphous carbon, that accumulates
in exhaust systems and other surfaces exposed to smoke
especially from the combustion of carbon-rich organic
fuels in the lack of sufficient oxygen.
Stabilization A condition where under a controlled operating

environment the coolant, oil, air and exhaust temperatures
will not change regardless of the length of time the unit
is run.

GLOSSARY
Standpipe(s) Deaeration tube(s) located in the integral radiator

deaeration tank to vent the radiator core of gases. Also
been called "J" tubes.
Substrate Core material used in diesel particulate filters that is made

of ceramic, silicon carbide, or sintered metal.
Suction Fan A fan that pulls air through the core.
Surge Tank See "Deaeration Tank".
Total Base Number Measures an oil's alkalinity and ability to neutralize acid
using a laboratory test (ASTM D 2896 or D 4739). TBN
is important to deposit control in four-stroke, four cycle
diesel engines and to neutralize the effects of high sulfur
fuel in all diesel engines.
TSM
Temperature Stability or Drift The ability of the cooling system to maintain coolant
temperature at light loads and/or engine speed or
long vehicle drift (coasting). An important system
characteristic for good heater operation during cold
ambients.
Top Tank See "Deaeration Tank"
Top Tank Temperature See "Engine Coolant Out Temperature".
Water Pump Inlet Restriction The pressure (suction) at the inlet to the water pump
(pressure cap removed) which represent up-stream
restriction.

NUMBER: 08 DD15-13 S.M. REF.: 11.1 ENGINE: EPA07 DD15 DATE: November 2008
SUBJECT: VALVE LASH ADJUSTMENTS
PUBLICATION: DDC-SVC-MAN-0002
Valve lash adjustments procedure was updated.

Accurate adjustment of clearance between intake and exhaust valves is important if maximum
TSM
performance and economy are to be obtained.
The valve lash on the DD15 engine must be measured and if necessary, adjusted at the initial period
listed in Table 1.
NOTE:
Everytime the valve lash is adjusted the engine brake lash will also need to be set. Refer to section
11.1.2 "Setting the Engine Brake Lash.".
NOTE:
Adjust the valve lash before setting the engine brake lash.
NOTICE:
Failure to measure valve clearances at the required initial period
and make necessary adjustments may result in gradual degrading
of engine performance and reduced fuel combustion efficiency.
Initial Valve Lash and Measurement/Adjustment Period

Adjust at 100,000 km (60,000 mi), at 300,000 km (180,000 mi), and then every 300,000 km (180,000 mi)
Table 1 Measurement/Adjustment Period

Adjust the valves as follows:
2. Disconnect the starting power for the engine.
3. Remove the rocker cover.
4. Bar the engine over until cylinder number one is at top dead center (TDC) compression stroke.
5. Lash intake valves one, two and four to 0.4 mm (0.016 in.). See Figure 1.
6. Lash exhaust valves one, three and five to 0.6 mm (0.024 in.). See Figure 1.
7. Bar the engine over 360° until cylinder number six is at TDC compression stroke.
Figure 1
TSM
1. Feeler Gauge Location between Rocker Arm and Valve
Feeler Gauge
2. Feeler Gauge
8. Lash intake valves three, five, and six to 0.4 mm (0.016 in.). See Figure 1.
9. Lash exhaust valves two, four and six to 0.6 mm (0.024 in.). See Figure 1.
11. Remove any tools used for this procedure.
12. Set engine brake.
13. Install the rocker cover.
14. Reconnect the battery power to the engine.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE INFORMATION
Additional service information is available in the Detroit Diesel DD15 Workshop Manual,
(DDC-SVC-MAN-0002). The next revision to this manual will include the revised information.
TSM
Detroit Diesel®, DDC®, DD15; and the spinning arrows design are registered trademarks of Detroit Diesel Corporation.
© Copyright 2008 Detroit Diesel Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
18SP684Rev. – EPA07 and EPA10 DD Platform, EGR
Delta Pressure Sensor Update
KIT DESCRIPTION
Two service kits have been released containing all components needed to replace the EGR Delta
Pressure Sensor used on all EPA07 and EPA10 DD13 and DD15/16 engines.
The new parts became effective November 2, 2011, with DD15 engine S/N: 472903S0103639 and
DD13 engine S/N: 471903S0103500.
TSM
KIT CONTENTS
The service kits in Table 1 below contain all necessary parts to replace the EGR Delta Pressure
Sensor on EPA07 and EPA10 DD engines.
NOTE: The venturi pipe for the DD13 and the DD15/16 engines is NOT interchangeable.
Part No. Description DD13 Kit (P/N: DD15/16 Kit (P/N:

A0091537728) A0091537828)
A4701530028 EGR Delta Pressure 1 1
Sensor
A4711404508 DD13 Venturi Pipe 1 NA
A4721402908 DD15/16 Venturi Pipe NA 1
N910105006016 Bolts 2 2
A4721420880 Gasket 1 1
A0435454428 Connector 1 1
A4729970353 Hose 1 1
A4729970245 Seal 1 1
018SP684Rev. Installation Instructions 1 1
Table 1 EPA07/EPA10 DD Platform, EGR Delta Pressure Sensor Installation Kits
18SP684Rev. Page 1 of 6
See Figure 1 for the new style EGR Delta Pressure Sensor kit components.
4
3
TSM
2
1. EGR Delta Pressure Sensor

2. EGR Venturi Pipe
3. Bolt
4. EGR Delta Pressure Sensor Electrical Connector
Figure 1 New EGR Delta Pressure Sensor Components
REPAIR PROCEDURE
PERSONAL INJURY
To avoid injury, never remove any engine component while the engine is running.
Use the following procedure to replace the EGR Delta Pressure Sensor. Reference Figure 2 for
component location.
1. EGR Crossover Pipe

2. EGR Venturi Pipe
3. Mixer Pipe
4. Bolt
5. Seal
6. Intake Manifold
TSM
7. Grid Heater
8. Cold Boost Pipe
9. Charge Air Pressure Sender Unit
10. EGR Throttle Valve
11. Venturi-to-Mixer Pipe Hose
12. Clamps
Figure 2 EGR Delta Pressure Sensor Components
REMOVAL PROCEDURE
1. Shut off engine and apply the parking brake, chock the wheels, open hood, disconnect
vehicle battery power, and perform any other applicable safety steps.
PERSONAL INJURY
Avoid injury from hot surfaces, wear protective gloves, or allow engine to cool before
removing any component.
NOTE: Prior to performing the removal steps, ensure that the mixer pipe is not hot.
NOTE: The hose is a one-time use item.
2. Loosen two hose clamps from hose on mixer pipe and venturi pipe. Slide the clamps over
the mixer pipe as they will be reused.
3. Remove three bolts securing mixer pipe to cold boost pipe. Remove the remaining bolt
above the intake throttle valve holding the mixer pipe. Save bolts for reuse.
4. Remove mixer pipe and seal from cold boost pipe. Save mixer pipe for reuse.
5. Remove and discard hose and seal.
6. Release harness connector on EGR Delta Pressure Sensor by pushing the orange tab up to
unlock the connector; depress the thumb tab and remove the harness connector.
7. Remove the two bolts from the venturi pipe to the EGR crossover pipe and remove the
venturi pipe. Save bolts for reuse. Discard venturi pipe and gasket. See Figure 3.
Figure 3
TSM
Venturi Pipe
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1. Install a new gasket (P/N: A4721420880) onto the EGR crossover pipe.
2. Install new venturi pipe (DD13 P/N: A4711404508 or DD15/16 P/N: A4721402908) onto the
EGR crossover pipe with two bolts. Torque to 30 N·m (22 lb·ft).
NOTICE:
Before the hose is installed on the mixer pipe, ensure there are no sharp
edges that may cut the hose liner.
NOTE: If hose clamps have been removed from mixer pipe, they must be reinstalled prior to hose
installation.
3. Install a new hose (P/N: A4729970353) on the mixer pipe.
4. Install a new seal (P/N: A4729970245) on mixer pipe and install onto the intake mixer
housing with three bolts.
5. Insert the EGR cooler water manifold side of mixer pipe hose into the venturi and secure
with two clamps. Torque clamps to 3.0 to 3.5 N·m (26 to 26.5 lb·in.).
6. Install the remaining bolt above the intake throttle valve. Torque the four bolts to 30 N·m (22
lb·ft).
7. Install new EGR Delta Pressure Sensor (P/N: A4701530028) to the venturi pipe with two
new bolts (P/N: N910105006016). Torque to 10 N·m (7 lb·ft).
NOTICE:
Do not cut the delta pressure sensor connector off the harness; the terminals will be
reused with the new connector.
8. Remove the terminals from the EGR Delta Pressure Sensor connector on the Engine
Sensor Harness and install them in the new connector (P/N: A0435454428). The former
connector has a different key pattern and cannot be used with the new sensor. The
terminals will be installed into the same cavities as they were removed from. Reference
Figures 4 and 5.
1. Red/Gray (+)
2. Blue/Gray (Signal Ground)
3. Green/Gray (Signal)
Figure 4 TSM
Engine Sensor Harness Connector
9. The new connector is black in color. The former connector is gray in color.
Reference Figure 5.
New Connector Former Connector
Figure 5 Connector Comparison
10. Plug the new connector into the EGR Delta Pressure Sensor.
11. Properly tie strap the connector pigtail so it does not contact the venturi pipe. See Figure 6.
Figure 6
TSMConnector Pigtail Routing
12. Use DDDL/DDRS to perform the EGR Delta P Sensor Recalibration Service Routine under
the Actions » EGR menu.
13. Start the engine and confirm repairs.
13400 Outer Drive, West, Detroit, Michigan 48239

Telephone: 313-592-5000
www.detroitdiesel.com
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Detroit Diesel Corporation is registered to ISO 9001:2001.
Copyright © 2012 Detroit Diesel Corporation. All rights reserved. Detroit Diesel Corporation is a Daimler company.
18SP684Rev. 1201 As technical advances continue, specifications will change. Printed in U.S.A.

Detroit DD13 DD15 DD16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Detroit DD13 DD15 DD16

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Detroit DD13 DD15 DD16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DDC-SVC-MAN-0081

<<<<Open Bookmarks to view list of manuals

To do a word search hold down (Shift+Ctrl+F)

All information subject to change without notice.

6.5 DD13 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION COOLER WATER MANIFOLD

All information subject to change without notice.

13 DD15 AXIAL POWER TURBINE GEAR BOX

All information subject to change without notice.

17.5 REMOVAL OF CRANKSHAFT REAR OIL SEAL ..................................... 17-14

All information subject to change without notice.

25.2 INSTALLATION OF THE OIL FILLER NECK ........................................... 25-4

All information subject to change without notice.

34.9 INSTALLATION OF RING GEAR ............................................................. 34-14

All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice.

1.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ROCKER COVER AND RELATED

All information subject to change without notice.

1.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF ROCKER COVER AND RELATED

Figure 1-1 Rocker Cover

All information subject to change without notice.

1.2 REMOVAL OF THE ROCKER COVER

All information subject to change without notice.

4. Remove rocker cover gasket from the rocker cover.

All information subject to change without notice.

1.3 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF THE ROCKER COVER

2. Blow dry with compressed air.

All information subject to change without notice.

1.4 INSTALLATION OF THE ROCKER COVER

3. Install rocker cover onto camshaft housing.

All information subject to change without notice.

TSM ENGINE EXHAUST

6. Start the engine and check for leaks.

All information subject to change without notice.

2.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER

All information subject to change without notice.

2.1 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER

Figure 2-1 Camshaft Housing and Related Parts

All information subject to change without notice.

2.1.1 Engine Braking

All information subject to change without notice.

1. Exhaust Rocker Arm

6. Exhaust Rocker Arm Shaft

Figure 2-2 EPA07 Engine Brake

12. Engine Brake Solenoid Valve, Rear

For EPA10 engines:

All information subject to change without notice.

Figure 2-3 EPA10 Engine Brake

All information subject to change without notice.

2.2 REMOVAL OF CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER SHAFT/ENGINE BRAKE

All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice.